CM 3520 Copier SVC Manuals

www.imagistics.
com
cm3520
Color Copier Service Manuals
Blank page
cm3520 Copier
Field Service Manual
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, Imagistics International Inc. strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Imagistics-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, Imagistics does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate. The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended. Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly. Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and " CAUTION" is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with the utmost of care. DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when servicing the product. :Prohibition when servicing the product. :Direction when servicing the product.
General precaution General prohibition General instruction
Electric hazard High temperature
Do not touch with wet hand Unplug
Do not disassemble Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY IMAGISTICS:
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Using any cables or power cord not specified by Imagistics.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Imagistics. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object. Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts).
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.). Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. Making any modification to the product unless instructed otherwise by Imagistics. Using parts not specified by Imagistics.
S-2
[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

This product was tested extensively before being shipped to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and service personnel from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, service personnel must perform regular safety checks. 1. Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

Check that main voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Make sure the power cord is plugged into the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire. Check if the power cord is damaged. Check if the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath are damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each end) specified by Imagistics. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
S-3

When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this product, be sure to observe the following precautions: a. Make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet on the rear panel of the product. Secure the cord with a fixture properly. b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Imagistics. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. Check that the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists. When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists.
S-4
WARNING: Wiring
When an extension cord is required, use the one specified. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using an extension cord that is too long may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result.
WARNING: Ground connection

Check if the product is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer electric shock while operating the product. Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet. 2. Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: When not using product for a long time

When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
S-5
CAUTION: Ventilation
The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple products at the same time
CAUTION: Fixing
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to a injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists. The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burned.
S-6
WARNING: Work Performed with the product Powered

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury. Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages. The user or CE may be injured. Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the product. They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire. Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire. Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
S-7

Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authorities. Improper replacement can cause an explosion. After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam). Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-8
WARNING: HANDLING OF CONSUMABLES

Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician. Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.
CAUTION: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists. Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists. Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
S-9
[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the local Imagistics district office must be notified so that immediate emergency measures can be taken to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and Imagistics must be notified. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Imagistics.
2. 3.
[4] CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer. When performing service, each product on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
2.
[5] FUSE
CAUTION Double pole / neutral fusing ATTENTION Double ple / fusible sur le neutre.
[6] LED Radiation Safety

This product is a copier which operates by means of a LED (light emitting diodes) exposure system. There is no possibility of danger from the LED optical radiation, because the LED optical radiation level dose not exceed the accessible radiation limit of class 1 under all conditions of operation, maintenance, service and failure.
S-10
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
High voltage High temperature
High voltage
High temperature
4036fsS001c0
S-11
Do not throw into a fire
4036fsS002c0
High voltage
High voltage
4036fsS003c0
S-12
cm3520 Field Service Manual
CONTENTS I
1. 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7
General
System Configuration ........................................................................................... 1-1 Product Specifications.......................................................................................... 1-3 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-3 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-3 Types of Paper ................................................................................................... 1-4 Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 1-4 Machine Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-4 Operating Environment...................................................................................... 1-4 II Maintenance V Appendix IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting Built-In Controllers ............................................................................................. 1-5 I General
II
1. 1.1 1.2
Maintenance
Periodical Check .................................................................................................. 2-1 Service Schedule............................................................................................... 2-1 Maintenance Items ............................................................................................ 2-1 Parts to Be Replaced by Users (CRU) ......................................................... 2-1 Maintenance Call (per 60,000-print) ............................................................. 2-2 Periodical Parts Replacement 1 (per 150,000-print) .................................... 2-2 Periodical Parts Replacement 2 (per 200,000-print) .................................... 2-2 Periodical Parts Replacement 3 (per 300,000-print) .................................... 2-3
1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.3 1.4 1.5
Maintenance Parts............................................................................................. 2-4 Concept of Parts Life ......................................................................................... 2-6 Maintenance Procedure (Periodical Check Parts) ............................................. 2-8 Paper Take-up Roller .................................................................................... 2-8 Separation Roller .......................................................................................... 2-8 Separation Roller 2....................................................................................... 2-9 Paper Take-up Roller .................................................................................. 2-11 Pick-up Roller ............................................................................................. 2-14 Transport Roller .......................................................................................... 2-15 Cleaning of Synchronizing Roller ............................................................... 2-16 Paper Dust Remover .................................................................................. 2-16 Cleaning of Transport Roller ....................................................................... 2-17
1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.5.8 1.5.9
1.5.10 Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide............................. 2-17 1.5.11 Cleaning of Scanner Rail............................................................................ 2-17 1.5.12 Cleaning of the Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd).......................................................... 2-18 1.5.13 Cleaning of the Lens................................................................................... 2-18 i
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.5.14 Cleaning of the Original Glass ................................................................... 2-19 1.5.15 Cleaning of the CCD Sensor ...................................................................... 2-19 1.5.16 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle .............................................................. 2-20 1.5.17 Cleaning of the Area Around the Waste Toner Collecting Port................... 2-21 1.5.18 Replacing Ozone Filter............................................................................... 2-21 I General 1.5.19 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode ................................................................ 2-21 1.5.20 Cleaning LPH Assy .................................................................................... 2-22 1.5.21 Replacement of the Deodorant Filter ......................................................... 2-22 1.5.22 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit............................................ 2-23 1.5.23 Image Transfer Belt Unit ............................................................................. 2-24 1.5.24 Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M, Y, Bk) ................................................... 2-26 II Maintenance 1.5.25 Replacing the Fusing Unit .......................................................................... 2-29 2. 2.1 2.2 Service Tool ....................................................................................................... 2-30 CE Tool List ..................................................................................................... 2-30 Copy Materials ................................................................................................ 2-31 Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU).................................................................... 2-31 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C)............................................................. 2-31 Waste Toner Bottle ..................................................................................... 2-31 Maintenance Kit.......................................................................................... 2-31
2.2.1 2.2.2
III Adjustment/Setting
2.2.3 2.2.4 3. 3.1
Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................. 2-32 Preparations for Firmware Rewriting ............................................................... 2-32 Service Environment .................................................................................. 2-32 Application to Be Used ............................................................................... 2-32 Installing the Cygwin .................................................................................. 2-32 Writing into the Compact Flash .................................................................. 2-33 Updating Method ........................................................................................ 2-35 Action When Data Transfer Fails ................................................................ 2-36 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4
IV Troubleshooting
3.2
Firmware Rewriting ......................................................................................... 2-35
3.2.1 3.2.2 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3
Other .................................................................................................................. 2-37 Disassembly/Adjustment Prohibited Items ...................................................... 2-37 Disassembly/Assembly List (Other Parts) ....................................................... 2-38 Disassembly/Assembly Procedure .................................................................. 2-40 IR Right Cover/Front Right Cover/Bypass Right & Left Cover.................... 2-40 Exit Tray/IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Front Cover........................... 2-41 Front Door/Panel Cover/Paper Setting Dial Cover...................................... 2-42 Lower Rear Cover/Tray 2 Rear Cover/Rear Cover/ Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Wiring Cover........................... 2-42 IR Upper Front Cover/IR Upper Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover ........... 2-43
4.3.1 V Appendix 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5
ii
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9 Original Glass/IR Front Cover..................................................................... 2-44 Control Panel .............................................................................................. 2-44 Tray 1 .......................................................................................................... 2-45 Tray 2 .......................................................................................................... 2-46
4.3.10 Scanner Motor Drive Board ........................................................................ 2-46 I General V Appendix IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance 4.3.11 CCD Unit .................................................................................................... 2-47 4.3.12 Image Processing Board ............................................................................ 2-48 4.3.13 Control Board ............................................................................................. 2-49 4.3.14 MFP Control Board..................................................................................... 2-50 4.3.15 High Voltage Unit/1 ..................................................................................... 2-52 4.3.16 High Voltage Unit/2 ..................................................................................... 2-53 4.3.17 Tray 1 Paper Size Board ............................................................................. 2-54 4.3.18 DC Power Supply ....................................................................................... 2-54 4.3.19 LED Drive Board......................................................................................... 2-56 4.3.20 Paper Type Board ....................................................................................... 2-57 4.3.21 Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board ............................................................ 2-57 4.3.22 Tray 2 Board ............................................................................................... 2-58 4.3.23 Tray 2 Paper Size Board ............................................................................. 2-58 4.3.24 Inverter Board............................................................................................. 2-59 4.3.25 Multi Bypass Unit........................................................................................ 2-59 4.3.26 Toner Hopper Unit ...................................................................................... 2-60 4.3.27 LPH Unit ..................................................................................................... 2-62 4.3.28 Scanner Motor ............................................................................................ 2-64 4.3.29 Scanner Assy ............................................................................................. 2-66 4.3.30 Scanner Drive Cables................................................................................. 2-67 4.3.31 Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables......................................................... 2-69 4.3.32 PWB Box .................................................................................................... 2-74 4.3.33 Main Motor.................................................................................................. 2-75 4.3.34 Fusing Drive Motor ..................................................................................... 2-75 4.3.35 Toner Supply Motor C/Bk............................................................................ 2-76 4.3.36 Toner Supply Motor Y/M ............................................................................. 2-76 4.3.37 Color PC Drum Motor ................................................................................. 2-77 4.3.38 Color Developing Motor .............................................................................. 2-79 4.3.39 Bk PC Motor ............................................................................................... 2-79 4.3.40 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor ........................................... 2-80 4.3.41 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor.......................................... 2-80 4.3.42 Intermediate Transport Motor ..................................................................... 2-81
iii
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.43 Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor.................................... 2-83 4.3.44 Cleaning Brush Motor ................................................................................ 2-86 4.3.45 AIDC/Registration Sensor/1,2 .................................................................... 2-87 4.3.46 LPH ............................................................................................................ 2-88 4.3.47 ATDC Sensor Y/M/C................................................................................... 2-92 I General 4.4 4.5 Mount the Optional Original Size Detecting Sensors ...................................... 2-93 Option Counter ................................................................................................ 2-94 Installation of the Mechanical Counter ....................................................... 2-94 Installation Method for the Key Counter ..................................................... 2-95
4.5.1 4.5.2
III
II Maintenance 1. 2. 3. 3.1 3.2 III Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
How to Use the Adjustment Section .................................................................... 3-1 Adjustment Item List ............................................................................................ 3-2 Utility Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-4 Utility Mode Function Tree ................................................................................. 3-4 Administrator Mode Function Tree ............................................................... 3-5 Procedure..................................................................................................... 3-7 Exiting........................................................................................................... 3-7 Changing the Setting Value in Utility Mode Functions.................................. 3-7 Reset Mode .................................................................................................. 3-8 Mode Store................................................................................................... 3-8 Utility Mode Function Setting Procedure ........................................................... 3-7 3.1.1 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4 3.5 3.6
Settings in the Store .......................................................................................... 3-8
Counter List ....................................................................................................... 3-8 Controller Detail................................................................................................. 3-8 Users Choice: 1 ................................................................................................ 3-9 1/2 ................................................................................................................ 3-9 2/2 ................................................................................................................ 3-9 1/3 .............................................................................................................. 3-10 2/3 .............................................................................................................. 3-11 3/3 .............................................................................................................. 3-12
IV Troubleshooting
3.6.1 3.6.2 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.8 3.9
Users Choice: 2 .............................................................................................. 3-10
Copy Program Recall ...................................................................................... 3-13 Printer Setting.................................................................................................. 3-13 Default Setting............................................................................................ 3-13 Report Types .............................................................................................. 3-15
V Appendix
3.9.1 3.9.2
3.10 Unit Life Indication ........................................................................................... 3-15 3.11 Settings in the Admin. Mode ........................................................................... 3-16 3.11.1 Admin. Set.................................................................................................. 3-16 iv
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3.12 Settings in Volume Track (E. K. C.) .................................................................. 3-20 3.12.1 Volume Track Mode (E. K. C.)..................................................................... 3-20 3.12.2 Volume Track Setting (E. K. C.) .................................................................. 3-20 3.12.3 Volume Track Data (E. K. C.) ...................................................................... 3-20 3.13 Settings in Printer Setting ................................................................................ 3-21 3.13.2 PCL Setting ................................................................................................ 3-22 3.14 Settings in Scan Setting................................................................................... 3-22 3.14.1 Device Name .............................................................................................. 3-22 3.14.2 Color/Grayscale Compression.................................................................... 3-22 3.14.3 Pri. Comp. Method for Monochrome........................................................... 3-22 3.15.1 Common Setting......................................................................................... 3-23 3.15.2 E-mail/Internet ............................................................................................ 3-24 3.15.3 FTP Server ................................................................................................. 3-26 3.15.4 Twain .......................................................................................................... 3-26 3.15.5 LDAP .......................................................................................................... 3-27 3.16.1 Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density ................................................. 3-28 3.16.2 Color Shift Correction (Bk).......................................................................... 3-29 3.16.3 Color Shift Correction (C, M, Y) .................................................................. 3-30 3.16.4 Black Image Density Correction ................................................................. 3-31 3.16.5 Stabilizer ..................................................................................................... 3-31 3.16.6 PRT Area (Top Margin)............................................................................... 3-32 3.16.7 PRT Area (Left Margin)............................................................................... 3-33 3.16.8 PRT Area (Dup. Left Margin) ...................................................................... 3-34 3.16.9 Center Staple Position ................................................................................ 3-35 3.17 Gradation Adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-36 3.18 Server Setting (KRDS) / Server Setting (RD) .................................................. 3-37 3.18.1 POP3 Server .............................................................................................. 3-37 3.18.2 Receive....................................................................................................... 3-37 3.18.3 Send ........................................................................................................... 3-38 3.18.4 Status ......................................................................................................... 3-38 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 TECH. REP. MODE ............................................................................................ 3-39 Tech. Rep. Mode Function Setting Procedure ................................................. 3-39 Touch Panel Adj. .............................................................................................. 3-40 Tech. Rep. Mode Function Tree ....................................................................... 3-41 Machine Adjust ................................................................................................ 3-43 v V Appendix IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting 3.16 Settings in Expert User Mode.......................................................................... 3-28 II Maintenance 3.15 Settings in Network Setting ............................................................................. 3-23 I General 3.13.1 Common Setting......................................................................................... 3-21
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 I General 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 Fuser Nip.................................................................................................... 3-43 Fuser Temp. ............................................................................................... 3-43 Fuser Speed............................................................................................... 3-44 Org. Detect Sensor..................................................................................... 3-44 PRT Area.................................................................................................... 3-45 IR Area ....................................................................................................... 3-49 Loop Adjust ................................................................................................ 3-52 Color Shift Correction ................................................................................. 3-53 LPH Rank ................................................................................................... 3-55
4.4.10 LPH Chip Adjust ......................................................................................... 3-56 4.4.11 Center Binding Position (9997 only) ........................................................... 3-57 II Maintenance 4.4.12 Memory / HardDisk Adjust ......................................................................... 3-58 4.4.13 Bypass Guide Adjust .................................................................................. 3-60 4.5 4.6 ROM Version ................................................................................................... 3-60 Image Adjust ................................................................................................... 3-60 PRT Max Density ....................................................................................... 3-60 PRT Highlight ............................................................................................. 3-61 Background Voltage Margin ....................................................................... 3-61 ATDC Level Setting .................................................................................... 3-62 AE Adjust.................................................................................................... 3-62 2nd Transfer Adjust..................................................................................... 3-63 Stabilizer..................................................................................................... 3-63 ATDC Toner Supply .................................................................................... 3-64 Feeding Double Sided THIN PAPER.......................................................... 3-64
4.6.1 4.6.2
4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9
4.6.10 Thick Paper Image Density ........................................................................ 3-64 IV Troubleshooting 4.6.11 Monochrome Image Density ...................................................................... 3-65 4.6.12 Bias Voltage Choice ................................................................................... 3-65 4.7 4.8 Settings in KRDS / RD Mode .......................................................................... 3-66 System Input ................................................................................................... 3-68 Marketing Area ........................................................................................... 3-68 Org. Detect Option Sensor ......................................................................... 3-68 Serial # Input .............................................................................................. 3-68 Tel. # Input.................................................................................................. 3-68 FLS Paper .................................................................................................. 3-69 Book Erase (Center)................................................................................... 3-69 Peripheral Setting ....................................................................................... 3-69 Server set (KRDS) / Server set (RD).......................................................... 3-70 Unit Change ............................................................................................... 3-72 vi
4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4
V Appendix
4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 4.8.9
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.8.10 Reprint ........................................................................................................ 3-72 4.8.11 Hard Disk.................................................................................................... 3-73 4.8.12 Display PM Parts Lifetime........................................................................... 3-73 4.8.13 LCT Paper Size .......................................................................................... 3-73 4.8.14 Chinese Paper Size .................................................................................... 3-73 I General V Appendix IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance 4.8.15 US Zoom Setting ........................................................................................ 3-73 4.9 Admin. Password Initialize ............................................................................... 3-74 4.10 Settings in Counter .......................................................................................... 3-74 4.10.1 Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-74 4.10.2 Life .............................................................................................................. 3-74 4.10.3 Jam ............................................................................................................. 3-75 4.10.4 Trouble ........................................................................................................ 3-75 4.10.5 Warning ...................................................................................................... 3-75 4.10.6 Maintenance ............................................................................................... 3-75 4.11 List Output ....................................................................................................... 3-76 4.11.1 Image Processing...................................................................................... 3-76 4.11.2 Counter....................................................................................................... 3-76 4.12 Settings in State Confirm................................................................................. 3-77 4.12.1 I/O Check.................................................................................................... 3-77 4.12.2 Table # ........................................................................................................ 3-87 4.12.3 Level History1 ............................................................................................. 3-87 4.12.4 Level History2 ............................................................................................. 3-87 4.12.5 Temp. & Humidity........................................................................................ 3-88 4.12.6 CCD Check................................................................................................. 3-88 4.12.7 Paper Passage ........................................................................................... 3-88 4.12.8 Option Check .............................................................................................. 3-88 4.12.9 Color Shift................................................................................................... 3-89 4.12.10 IU Lot No..................................................................................................... 3-89 4.12.11 LPH Status ................................................................................................. 3-89 4.13 Settings in Test Print ........................................................................................ 3-90 4.13.1 Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-90 4.13.2 Gradation Pattern ....................................................................................... 3-90 4.13.3 Halftone Pattern.......................................................................................... 3-91 4.13.4 Lattice Pattern ............................................................................................ 3-91 4.13.5 Solid Pattern ............................................................................................... 3-92 4.13.6 Color Sample.............................................................................................. 3-92 4.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern .................................................................................. 3-93 4.13.8 LPH Pattern ................................................................................................ 3-93 vii
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.14 ADF Check ...................................................................................................... 3-94 4.14.1 Original Stop Position ................................................................................. 3-94 4.14.2 Registration Loop ....................................................................................... 3-94 4.14.3 Auto Adjust Stop Position ........................................................................... 3-94 4.14.4 Paper Passage ........................................................................................... 3-94 I General 4.14.5 I/O Check .................................................................................................. 3-94
4.14.6 Tray Width Adjust........................................................................................ 3-94 4.14.7 Sensor Auto Adjust..................................................................................... 3-95 4.15 Gradation Adjust.............................................................................................. 3-95 5. 5.1 Security .............................................................................................................. 3-96 Security Mode Function Setting Procedure..................................................... 3-96 Procedure................................................................................................... 3-96 Exiting......................................................................................................... 3-96 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 5.3
II Maintenance
Security Mode Function Tree........................................................................... 3-96 Settings in the Security Mode.......................................................................... 3-97 Counter Setting .......................................................................................... 3-97 Admin. Choice ............................................................................................ 3-98 Coverage Rate Reset ................................................................................. 3-99 Remote Diagnosis System Choice............................................................. 3-99 Lock Job Authentication Mode ................................................................... 3-99 IU Life Stop Setting .................................................................................... 3-99 Service Code Change ................................................................................ 3-99
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3
5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 7. 7.1 7.2
Mechanical Adjustment.................................................................................... 3-100 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing Belt............................................... 3-100 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit ....................................... 3-101 Scanner Position Adjustment ........................................................................ 3-101 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit.................................................... 3-102 Board Switch.................................................................................................... 3-104 PWB Location................................................................................................ 3-104 PWB-S1 (Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board) .............................................. 3-104 Initialize Procedure................................................................................... 3-105 Memory Clear Procedure ......................................................................... 3-105 If the Machine Exhibits an Erratic Display or Operation. .......................... 3-105 Data/Conditions Cleared by Reset Switches/Pins.................................... 3-105
IV Troubleshooting
7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3
V Appendix
7.2.4 8. 8.1 8.2
Date/Time Input Mode ..................................................................................... 3-106 Date/Time Input Mode Screen ...................................................................... 3-106 Date/Time Input Mode Setting Procedure ..................................................... 3-106
viii
IV Troubleshooting
1. 1.1 1.2 Jam Display .......................................................................................................... 4-1 Misfeed Display.................................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure........................................................... 4-1 System Mounted with 9991 and 9992 .......................................................... 4-2 System Mounted with 9991 and 9994 .......................................................... 4-3 Initial Check Items ........................................................................................ 4-4 1st Drawer Take-Up, Fusing Misfeed ............................................................ 4-5 2nd Drawer Take-Up, Vertical Transport, Manual Bypass Take-Up .............. 4-6 II Maintenance V Appendix IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting LCT Take-Up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (9992).................................... 4-8 Tray3 Take-Up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (9993/9994) ......................... 4-9 Tray4 Take-Up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (9994) ................................ 4-10 Duplex Transport Misfeed (9991)................................................................ 4-11 Fusing/Exit Misfeed .................................................................................... 4-12 Sensor Layout.................................................................................................... 4-2 I General 1.1.1 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Solution.............................................................................................................. 4-4
Malfunction Code ............................................................................................... 4-13 Restarting ........................................................................................................ 4-13 Alert Code........................................................................................................ 4-13 Alert List ..................................................................................................... 4-14 S-1 : CCD Clamp/Gain Adjustment Failure ................................................ 4-15 P-5: AIDC Sensor (Front) Failure................................................................ 4-15 P-28 AIDC Sensor (Back) Failure ............................................................... 4-15 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit Failure................................................................... 4-16 P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit Failure ............................................................. 4-16 P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit Failure ................................................................. 4-16 P-9: Black Imaging Unit Failure .................................................................. 4-16 P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern Failure ......................................................... 4-16 P-22: Color Shift Adjust Failure .................................................................. 4-16 Solution............................................................................................................ 4-15
2.2.1 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9
2.3.10 P-26 : 1st Image Transfer ATVC (Black) Failure ......................................... 4-17 2.3.11 P-27 : 2nd Image Transfer ATVC Failure .................................................... 4-17 2.3.12 P-29 : 1st Image Transfer ATVC (Color) Failure ......................................... 4-17 2.3.13 P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor Malfunction.................................................. 4-17 2.3.14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor Malfunction.................................................. 4-17 2.4 2.5 Trouble Code ................................................................................................... 4-18 Trouble Code List........................................................................................ 4-18 How to Reset ................................................................................................... 4-26 ix 2.4.1
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6 Solution ........................................................................................................... 4-27 C0000: Main Motor's Failure to Turn .......................................................... 4-27 C0001: Main Motor Turning at Abnormal Timing........................................ 4-27 C0016: Bk PC Motor Failure to Turn .......................................................... 4-28 C0017: Bk PC Motor Turning at Abnormal Timing ..................................... 4-28 C0018: Color PC Motor Failure to Turn ...................................................... 4-28 C0019: Color PC Motor Turning at Abnormal Timing................................. 4-29 C001A: Color Developing Motor Failure to Turn ......................................... 4-29 C001B: Color Developing Motor Turning at Abnormal Timing.................... 4-29 C0040: Suction Fan Motors Failure to Turn ............................................... 4-30
2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 I General 2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.6.9
2.6.10 C0046: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1s Failure to Turn ............................... 4-30 II Maintenance 2.6.11 C0048: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2 /3s Failure to Turn ........................... 4-31 2.6.12 C004C: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motors Failure to Turn............................... 4-31 2.6.13 C004D: Toner Suction Fan Motors Failure to Turn..................................... 4-32 2.6.14 C004E: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motors Failure to Turn........................ 4-32 2.6.15 C004F: Cooling Fan Motor 2s Failure to Turn............................................ 4-32 2.6.16 C0060: Fusing Drive Motors Failure to Turn .............................................. 4-33 III Adjustment/Setting 2.6.17 C0061: Fusing Drive Motor Turning at Abnormal Timing ........................... 4-33 2.6.18 C0094: 2nd Image Transfer Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure ................. 4-33 2.6.19 C0096: Image Transfer Belt Pressure/Retraction Failure ........................... 4-34 2.6.20 C0098: Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure...................... 4-34 2.6.21 C0200: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona Malfunction.................................. 4-35 2.6.22 C0202: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona Malfunction ............................ 4-35 2.6.23 C0204: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona Malfunction ................................ 4-35 2.6.24 C0206: Black PC Drum Charge Corona Malfunction ................................. 4-35 IV Troubleshooting 2.6.25 C0208: PC Drum Charge Corona Malfunction ........................................... 4-35 2.6.26 C0400: Exposure Lamp's Failure to Turn ON............................................. 4-35 2.6.27 C0410: Exposure Lamp Turning ON at Abnormal Timing .......................... 4-35 2.6.28 C0500: Heating Roller Warm-Up Failure.................................................... 4-36 2.6.29 C0501: Fusing Pressure Roller Warm-Up Failure ...................................... 4-36 2.6.30 C0510: Heating Roller Abnormally Low Temperature ................................ 4-36 2.6.31 C0511: Fusing Pressure Roller Abnormally Low Temperature .................. 4-36 V Appendix 2.6.32 C0520: Heating Roller Abnormally High Temperature ............................... 4-36 2.6.33 C0521: Fusing Pressure Roller Abnormally High Temperature.................. 4-36 2.6.34 C0650: Scanner Home Sensor Malfunction ............................................... 4-36 2.6.35 C0660: Scanner Overrun Failure................................................................ 4-36 2.6.36 C0900: 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure................................................... 4-37
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.37 C0960: Manual Bypass Paper Lifting Failure.............................................. 4-37 2.6.38 C0F30: Abnormally Low Toner Density Detected Cyan ATDC Sensor....... 4-38 2.6.39 C0F32: Abnormally Low Toner Density Detected Magenta ATDC Sensor . 4-38 2.6.40 C0F34: Abnormally Low Toner Density Detected Yellow ATDC Sensor ..... 4-38 2.6.41 C0F31: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Cyan ATDC Sensor ...... 4-39 I General V Appendix IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance 2.6.42 C0F33: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Magenta ATDC Sensor 4-39 2.6.43 C0F35: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Yellow ATDC Sensor .... 4-39 2.6.44 C0F36: Abnormally Low Toner Density Detected Black ATDC Sensor ...... 4-39 2.6.45 C0F37: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Black ATDC Sensor ..... 4-40 2.6.46 C0F3A: Cyan ATDC Sensor Adjustment Failure......................................... 4-40 2.6.47 C0F3B: Magenta ATDC Sensor Adjustment Failure................................... 4-40 2.6.48 C0F3C: Yellow ATDC Sensor Adjustment Failure....................................... 4-40 2.6.49 C0F3D: Black ATDC Sensor Adjustment Failure ........................................ 4-41 2.6.50 C1200: Standard Controller Configuration Failure...................................... 4-41 2.6.51 C1203: Memory Mounting Failure .............................................................. 4-42 2.6.52 C1204: Memory Mounting Failure .............................................................. 4-42 2.6.53 C1220: Image Input Time Out .................................................................... 4-42 2.6.54 C1229: Image Output Time Out ................................................................. 4-42 2.6.55 C1240: JBIG0 Error .................................................................................... 4-43 2.6.56 C1241: JBIG1 Error .................................................................................... 4-43 2.6.57 C1242: JBIG2 Error .................................................................................... 4-43 2.6.58 C1243: JBIG3 Error .................................................................................... 4-43 2.6.59 C1250: Compressor 0 Command Buffer Stop Failure ................................ 4-43 2.6.60 C1251: Compressor 1 Command Buffer Stop Failure ................................ 4-43 2.6.61 C1252: Compressor 2 Command Buffer Stop Failure ................................ 4-43 2.6.62 C1253: Compressor 3 Command Buffer Stop Failure ................................ 4-43 2.6.63 C1261: Compression Hardware Timeout ................................................... 4-43 2.6.64 C1265: Extraction Hardware Timeout......................................................... 4-43 2.6.65 C1279: PCI-SDRAM DMA Operation Failure ............................................. 4-43 2.6.66 C1290: Compression/Extraction Timeout Detection................................... 4-43 2.6.67 C12B1: Image Processing ASIC Failure 1.................................................. 4-43 2.6.68 C12B2: Image Processing ASIC Failure 2.................................................. 4-43 2.6.69 C12B3: Image Processing ASIC Failure 3.................................................. 4-43 2.6.70 C12B4: Image Processing ASIC Failure 4.................................................. 4-43 2.6.71 C12C0: Hard Disk Recognition Error.......................................................... 4-44 2.6.72 C12C1: Hard Disk Error 1........................................................................... 4-44 2.6.73 C12C2: Hard Disk Error 2........................................................................... 4-44
xi
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.74 C12C3: Hard Disk Error 3 .......................................................................... 4-44 2.6.75 C12C4: Hard Disk Error 4 .......................................................................... 4-44 2.6.76 C12C5: Hard Disk Error 5 .......................................................................... 4-44 2.6.77 C12C6: Hard Disk Error 6 .......................................................................... 4-44 2.6.78 C12C7: Hard Disk Error 7 .......................................................................... 4-44 I General 2.6.79 C12C8: Hard Disk Error 8 .......................................................................... 4-44 2.6.80 C12C9: Hard Disk Error 9 .......................................................................... 4-44 2.6.81 C12CA: Hard Disk Error A.......................................................................... 4-44 2.6.82 C12CB: Hard Disk Data Transfer Error....................................................... 4-44 2.6.83 C12CC: Hard Disk Unformat ...................................................................... 4-44 2.6.84 C12CF: Hard Disk Specifications Error ...................................................... 4-45 II Maintenance 2.6.85 C13C8: New Transfer Cleaner Unit Resetting Failure ................................ 4-45 2.6.86 C13CA: New Fusing Unit Resetting Failure ............................................... 4-45 2.6.87 C13D1: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM Access Error................................... 4-45 2.6.88 C13D2: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM Access Error............................. 4-45 2.6.89 C13D3: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM Access Error................................. 4-45 2.6.90 C13D4: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM Access Error .................................. 4-45 III Adjustment/Setting 2.6.91 C13D5: Cyan LPH Correction Data Download Failure ............................... 4-46 2.6.92 C13D6: Magenta LPH Correction Data Download Failure ......................... 4-46 2.6.93 C13D7: Yellow LPH Correction Data Download Failure ............................. 4-46 2.6.94 C13D8: Black LPH Correction Data Download Failure .............................. 4-46 2.6.95 C3310: CCD Clamp/Gain Adjustment Failure ............................................ 4-46 2.6.96 C3331: MSC Undefined Malfunction Occurring ......................................... 4-47 2.6.97 C3332: Scanner Section Undefined Malfunction........................................ 4-47 2.6.98 C3333: Engine Section Undefined Malfunction.......................................... 4-47 IV Troubleshooting 2.6.99 C3E00: NVRAM Initialization Failure.......................................................... 4-48 2.6.100 C3E01: NVRAM Initialization Failure.......................................................... 4-48 2.6.101 C3E02: NVRAM Initialization Failure.......................................................... 4-48 2.6.102 C3F00: Vendor Connection Failure ............................................................ 4-48 2.6.103 C3FFC: ROM Contents Error Upon Startup (LPH) .................................... 4-48 2.6.104 C3FFD: ROM Contents Error Upon Startup (Scanner) .............................. 4-48 2.6.105 C3FFE: ROM Contents Error Upon Startup (PRT) .................................... 4-48 V Appendix 2.6.106 C3FFF: ROM Contents Error Upon Startup (MSC).................................... 4-48 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Power Supply Trouble ........................................................................................ 4-49 Machine is Not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check) ................................ 4-49 Control Panel Indicators Do Not Light. ............................................................ 4-49 Fusing Heaters Do Not Operate ...................................................................... 4-50 Power is Not Supplied to Options .................................................................... 4-50 xii
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 4. 4.1 ADF ............................................................................................................ 4-50 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet ..................................................................... 4-50 Finisher....................................................................................................... 4-51 Duplex......................................................................................................... 4-51
Image Quality Problem....................................................................................... 4-52 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 Table # ........................................................................................................ 4-52 Level History 1 ............................................................................................ 4-53 Level History 2 ............................................................................................ 4-53 Initial Check Items ...................................................................................... 4-54 IR System: White Lines in FD, White Bands in FD, Colored Lines in FD, and Colored Bands in FD ........................................................................... 4-56 IR System: White Lines in CD, White Bands in CD, Colored Lines in CD, and Colored Bands in CD........................................................................... 4-57 IR System: Color Spots .............................................................................. 4-58 IR System: Fog ........................................................................................... 4-59 IR System: Blurred Image, Blotchy Image.................................................. 4-60 IR System: Incorrect Color Image Registration, Sync Shift (Lines in CD) .. 4-61 IR System: Moire ........................................................................................ 4-62 IR System: Skewed Image ......................................................................... 4-63 IR System: Distorted Image ....................................................................... 4-64 III Adjustment/Setting V Appendix IV Troubleshooting II Maintenance I General How to Read Element Date ............................................................................. 4-52
4.2 4.3
How to Identify Problematic Part ..................................................................... 4-54 Solution............................................................................................................ 4-56
4.2.1 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9
4.3.10 IR System: Low Image Density, Rough Image ........................................... 4-65 4.3.11 IR System: Defective ACS .......................................................................... 4-66 4.3.12 IR System: Blank Copy, Black Copy ........................................................... 4-67 4.3.13 IR System: Abnormal Image....................................................................... 4-68 4.3.14 Printer Monocolor: White Lines in FD, White Bands in FD, Colored Lines Colored Bands in FD, White Lines in CD, White Bands in CD, Colored Lines in CD, Colored Bands in CD................ 4-69 4.3.15 Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density in FD .................................................. 4-70 4.3.16 Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density in CD.................................................. 4-71 4.3.17 Printer Monocolor: Low Image Density....................................................... 4-72 4.3.18 Printer Monocolor: Gradation Reproduction Failure ................................... 4-74 4.3.19 Printer Monocolor: Foggy Background ....................................................... 4-76 4.3.20 Printer Monocolor: Void Areas, White Spots .............................................. 4-78 4.3.21 Printer Monocolor: Colored Spots .............................................................. 4-79 4.3.22 Printer Monocolor: Blurred Image .............................................................. 4-80 4.3.23 Printer Monocolor: Blank Copy, Black Copy ............................................... 4-81 xiii
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.24 Printer Monocolor: 0.5-mm-Pitch Uneven Image ....................................... 4-82 4.3.25 Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-Pitch Uneven Image .......................................... 4-83 4.3.26 Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-Pitch Uneven Image ........................................ 4-84 4.3.27 Printer 4-Color: White Lines in FD, White Bands in FD, Colored Lines in FD, and Colored Bands in FD ......................................... 4-85 I General 4.3.28 Printer 4-Color: White Lines in CD, White Bands in CD, Colored Lines in CD, and Colored Bands in CD......................................... 4-86 4.3.29 Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density in FD ....................................................... 4-87 4.3.30 Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density in CD....................................................... 4-88 4.3.31 Printer 4-Color: Low Image Density ........................................................... 4-89 4.3.32 Printer 4-Color: Poor Color Reproduction .................................................. 4-91 4.3.33 Printer 4-Color: Incorrect Color Image Registration ................................... 4-93 II Maintenance 4.3.34 Printer 4-Color: Void Areas, White Spots ................................................... 4-94 4.3.35 Printer 4-Color: Colored Spots ................................................................... 4-95 4.3.36 Printer 4-Color: Poor Fusing Performance, Offset...................................... 4-96 4.3.37 Printer 4-Color: Brush Effect, Blurred Image.............................................. 4-97 4.3.38 Printer 4-Color: Back Marking .................................................................... 4-98 4.3.39 Printer 4-Color: 204-mm-Pitch Uneven Image ........................................... 4-99 III Adjustment/Setting 4.3.40 Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-Pitch Uneven Image ........................................... 4-100
V
1. 1.1
Appendix
Parts Layout Drawing ........................................................................................... 5-1 Main Unit ........................................................................................................... 5-1 IR Section..................................................................................................... 5-1 Engine Section ............................................................................................. 5-2 Tray 1............................................................................................................ 5-7 Tray 2............................................................................................................ 5-8 1.1.1 1.1.2
IV Troubleshooting
1.1.3 1.1.4 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
9990 RADF (Option).......................................................................................... 5-9 9993/9994 Paper Feed (Option) ...................................................................... 5-10 9992 LCC (Option) .......................................................................................... 5-11 9997 Finisher (Option)..................................................................................... 5-12 CM3500010 Job Tray for 9997 (Option) .......................................................... 5-14 9996 Finisher (Option)..................................................................................... 5-15 Main Unit .................................................................................................... 5-15 Horizontal Transport Unit............................................................................ 5-16
V Appendix
1.7.1 1.7.2 1.8 1.9 2. 3.
CM3100010 Punch Unit for 9996 (Option) ...................................................... 5-17 9991 Duplex (Option) ...................................................................................... 5-18 Connector Layout Drawing................................................................................. 5-19 Timing Chart ...................................................................................................... 5-23 xiv
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3.1 3.2 Main Unit.......................................................................................................... 5-23 9990 RADF ...................................................................................................... 5-24 1-Sided Mode ............................................................................................. 5-24 Mixed Original Detection Mode .................................................................. 5-28
3.2.1 3.2.2
xv
V Appendix
IV Troubleshooting
II Maintenance
I General
V Appendix
IV Troubleshooting
II Maintenance
I General
xvi cm3520 Field Service Manual
System Configuration
I General
1. System Configuration
1/2 System Front View
[11] [12] [13]
[10]
[9]
[1] [8]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
4036fs1001j0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Machine Automatic Duplex Unit (9991) Paper Feed Cabinet (9994) Paper Feed Cabinet (9993)* Desk (9995) Large Capacity Cassette (9992) Stapling Finisher (9997)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
Job Separator (CM3500010) Saddle Stitch Finisher (9996) Punch Kit for 9996 (CM3100010) Reverse Automatic Document Feeder (9990) Original Cover* Working Table*
* Not offered
1-1
I General
System Configuration 2/2 System Rear View
[10]
[11]
[9]
I General
[2] [8] [7] [5] [1]
[3] [6]
9992 9993 9994
9995
[4]
4036fs1002e0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Machine Vendor Kit* (South Central America, North America, Europe Only) Data Terminal* (South Central America, North America Only) Dehumidifier Heater* Video Interface Kit (CM3500050) Image Controller (9998)
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
Local Interface Kit* Mechanical Counter* Key Counter Kit* Hard Disk Drive (CM3500040) Expanded Memory Unit (CM3500030)
* Not offered
1-2
Product Specifications
2.
2.1
Type
Type
Desktop-type printer integrated with scanner Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper Tand type indirect electrostatic recording system OPC (organic photo conductor) Equivalent to 600 dpi Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction 1800 dpi in sub scanning direction Stationary (mirror scan) Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD (one-shot reading system) Rear left edge Multiple Bypass: 150 sheets Tray1: 250 sheets Tray2: 500 sheets Four-LED exposure HMT developing system DC comb electrode Scorotron system with electrode cleaning function (manual) Intermediate transfer belt system
Copying System Printing Process PC Drum Type Scanning Density Print Density Platen Original Scanning Registration Paper Feeding System (Standard) Three-way system Exposure System Developing System Charging System Image Transfer System
Paper Separating System Selecting either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding + low-pressure paper separator claws Fusing System Belt fusing
2.2
Functions
Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects A3 or 11 17 1 to 999 99 sec. or less (at ambient temperature of 23 C and rated source voltage) Leading edge: 5 mm, Trailing edge: 3 mm, Rear edge: 3 mm, Front edge: 3 mm (Tray1, A4, full size) Monochrome print 6.8 sec. or less Color print 12.8 sec. or less
Types of Original Max. Original Size Multiple Copies Warming-up Time Image Loss First Copy Time
Copying Speed for Multicopy Cycle (A4, 8-1/2 11) Fixed Zoom Ratios
Monochrome print 1-sided: 35 copies/min; 2-sided: 31 copies/min Color print Full size Reduction Enlargement 1-sided: 22 copies/min; 2-sided: 22 copies/min 1.000 Metric Area: 0.500, 0.707, 0.816, 0.866 Inch Area: 0.500, 0.647, 0.733, 0.785 Metric Area: 1.154, 1.224, 1.414, 2.000 Inch Area: 1.214, 1.294, 1.547, 2.000 in 0.001 increments
Variable Zoom Ratios
0.250 to 4.000
1-3
I General
Exposure Lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
2.3
Types of Paper
Paper Source Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Translucent paper Tray1 Tray2 (20 sheets or less) (10 sheets or less) (20 sheets or less) 311 457 mm 90 140 mm Multiple Bypass
I General
OHP transparencies (crosswise feeding only) Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2) Thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2) Copy paper type Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2) *1 Postcards Envelopes
(20 sheets or less)
Labels Copy paper dimensions Max (width length) Min (width length) 311 457 mm 90 140 mm
297 432 mm 140 182 mm
*1: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used. Optional Paper Feed Cabinet: Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2 is reliably fed. Automatic Duplex Unit: Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 is reliably fed.
2.4
Maintenance
800,000 prints or 5 years, whichever is earlier
Machine Durability
2.5
Machine Specifications
Voltage: Frequency: AC110 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 0.3 Hz Less than 1.4 kW (120 V, 12 A) / 1.55 kW (220-240 V, 6.7 A) 903 (W) 730 (D) 770 (H) mm 1014 (W) 1151 (D) mm Approx. 104 kg (without IU)
Power Requirements
Max Power Consumption Dimensions Space Requirements Mass
2.6
Operating Environment
10 to 30 C (with a fluctuation of 10 C/h) 15 to 85 % (with a fluctuation of 20 %/h)
Temperature Humidity
1-4
2.7
Built-in Controllers
PCL5c printer driver TWAIN driver Windows 98/Me, Windows NT/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Printer Driver Scan Driver OS Compatibility Interface
NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-5
I General
I General
Blank page
1-6
Periodical Check
II Maintenance
1.
1.1
Periodical Check
Service Schedule
Per cycle print number Upon each call (60,000) 10,000-print Number 6 12 15 18 20 24 30 36 40 42 45 48 54 60 66 72 75 of times 12 5 3 2 2
Guarantee period (5-year or 800,000 prints)
Main body
150,000 200,000 300,000
300,000
9997 9996 9990
300,000 200,000 *1
2 3
*1: Replace with reference to the ADF Feed on the Counter Life.
1.2
1.2.1
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Maintenance Items
Parts to be replaced by users (CRU)
Class Parts to be replaced Imaging Unit C/M/Y Imaging Unit Bk Comb electrode Processing sections Toner cartridge: TC (TC Y/TC M/TC C) Toner cartridge: TC (TC K) Deodorant filter Image Transfer section LPH section Waste Toner Bottle LPH Assy Cycle 50K 80K When TC is replaced 10K 10K 10K 30K When IU is replaced *1 *1 Clean Replace Descriptions
*1: The TC K and Deodorant filter are the Kit parts.
2-1
II Maintenance
9993 9994 9992
Periodical Check 1.2.2

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transport section
Maintenance call (per 60,000-print)

Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Synchronizing Roller Paper Dust Remover Transport Roller 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide Number of Lubrica- DescripCheck Clean Replace personnel tion tions
Overall
Image TransAround waste toner port fer section LPH section LPH Assy Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Transport Belt, Roller and Roll DUP Roller
II Maintenance
9 10 11 9990 12 13 9991
1.2.3
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 150,000-print)

Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Number of Lubrica- DescripCheck Clean Replace personnel tion tions 1 1 1
Overall
Transport section Processing section
Paper Dust Remover 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit Ozone Filter
1.2.4
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9990

Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Lubrica- DescripNumber of Check Clean Replace tion tions personnel 1 1 1 1 *1 *1 *1
Overall
Tray 1 Bypass
Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller
2-2
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.2.5

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tray 2
Periodical Check

Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Number of LubriCheck Clean Replace Descriptions personnel cation
Overall
Image Trans- Image Transfer Belt fer section Unit Fusing section Fusing Unit Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Paper Feed Roller, Roll Transport route, Guide Sensor
11 9997 12 9996 13
2-3
II Maintenance
9993 9994 10 9992
Periodical Check
1.3
Maintenance parts
To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed. Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter. Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8.5 11, Standard mode and Preheat OFF. A. Main body
No. 1 2 3 4 Class Tray 1 Bypass Maintenance parts Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Pick-up Roller Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Transport Roller Synchronizing Roller Paper Dust Remover Clean In trouble In trouble In trouble In trouble In trouble In trouble Upon each call Upon each call Upon each call Upon each call When T/C is replaced Upon each call In trouble In trouble In trouble In trouble In trouble Upon each call or when IU is replaced Replace 200 K 200 K 300 K 300 K 300 K 150 K 150 K 300 K 50 K 80 K 150 K 10 K 300 K 30 K Descriptions Ref.Page in this manual
II Maintenance
5 6 8 9
2-8 2-8 2-14 2-11 2-8 2-15 2-16 2-16
2nd Image Transfer 10 Transport Roller Unit section 11 Transport Roller 12 13 14 15 16 EP section 17 18 19 Image transfer 21 section 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 LPH section Optical unit Fusing section 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide Fusing Unit Imaging Unit C/M/Y Imaging Unit Bk Ozone Filter Comb Electrode Toner Cartridge (YMCK) Image Transfer Belt Unit Waste Toner Bottle Around Waster Toner Port Scanner Rail Mirrors (1st, 2nd, 3rd) Lens Original Glass CCD Sensor LPH Assy
2-23 2-17 2-17 2-29 2-31 2-31 2-21 2-21

Deodorant filter *1 2-31
2-24 2-20 2-21

2-17 2-18 2-18 2-19 2-19
2-22
*1: Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the black toner cartridge at the same time when 10K is reached.
2-4
cm3520 Field Service Manual B. Option

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9993 9994 10 9992 11 12 13 14 15 9991 9997 9996 9 9990 Class Maintenance parts Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Transport Belt Registration Roller Turnover Roller Exit Roller/Roll Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Vertical Transport Roller Paper Feed Roller, Roll Transport Route, Guide Sensor Paper Feed Roller, Roll Clean 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k In trouble In trouble In trouble In trouble 300 K 300 K 300 K In trouble 300 K 300 K 300 K Replace 200 K 200 K 200 K
Periodical Check
Descriptions
Ref.Page in this manual
Replace those three parts at the same time. *1
2-5
II Maintenance
Replace those two parts at the same time.
See each Option Service Manual.
Periodical Check
1.4
Concept of parts life

Description A waste toner full condition is detected when about 8,000 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected. The number of copies made is counted. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm.) When printing prohibited is encountered, the machine prohibits the initiation of any new print cycle. The number of copies made is counted. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm.) The number of copies made is counted. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm.) The number of copies made is counted. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm.) The number of copies made is counted. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm.) The number of copies made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the belt has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of copies made and the value, whichever reaches the life specifications value, is detected. When printing prohibited is encountered, the machine prohibits the initiation of any new print cycle. The number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned is compared with the number of hours through which the Developing Roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned and the value, whichever reaches the life specifications value, is detected. Life value (Specification value) Max. number of printed pages
Waste Toner Bottle
30,000 *
Fusing unit
300,000
382,000 *
II Maintenance
Paper Dust Remover
150,000
152,000
Ozone Filter
150,000
152,000
2nd Transfer Roller Unit
150,000
152,000
Transfer Belt Unit
300,000
382,000 *
Imaging Unit C/M/Y
5,725 min
5,955 min *
Imaging Unit Bk
5,916 min
6,064 min *
*: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the maximum number of printed pages is reached.
2-6
Periodical Check
A. Conditions for Life Specifications Values The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions (see the Table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.
Item Job Type Paper Size Color Ratio CV/M Original Density No. of Operating Days per Month Description Monochrome: Making 4 copies per job Color: Making 2 copies per job A4 Black to Color=5:1 Black: 8,000 / Color: 1,600 B/W = 5 % for each color, 6 % for Monochrome 20 days (Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)
Purpose
In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for any of the following parts, make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is reached, and replace those parts at the same time. Fusing unit, Image Transfer Belt Unit, Imaging Unit /C, Imaging Unit /M, Imaging Unit /Y, Imaging Unit /Bk
Target parts
2-7
II Maintenance
B. Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event occurs in another part
Periodical Check
1.5
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 1.5.1 Paper Take-up Roller A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Slide out the Tray 1. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-Up Roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
4036fs2010c0
II Maintenance
[2]
[1]
[3]
4036fs2011c0
B. Replacing Procedure 1. Slide out the Tray 1. 2. Lock the Paper Lifting Plate [1] into position. 3. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the Paper Take-Up Roller Assy [3]. 4. Slide the Paper Take-Up Roller Assy [3] to the rear and take its shaft off the front bushing. 5. Snap off the C-clip [4], one collar [5] and remove the Paper Take-Up Roller [6]. 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 7. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Counter Life and clear the count of 1st or 2nd.
[4] [5] [6]
4036fs2012c1
NOTE Replace the Paper Take-up Roller and Separation Roller at the same time. 1.5.2 Separation Roller A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Slide out the Tray 1. 2. Remove two screws [1] and the Paper Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy [2].
[1] [2]
4036fs2013c1
2-8
Periodical Check 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt.
[3]
4036fs2014c1
[1] [2]
[3]
4036fs2015c1
B. Replacing Procedure 1. Slide out the Tray 1. 2. Remove two screws [1] and the Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy [2] and two reinforcement plates [3]. NOTES Receive by hand the reinforcement plate that will come off position when the screws are removed. When reinstalling the reinforcement plate, make sure that it is doweled into position. 3. Take off the rubber stopper [4], shaft [5], spring [6], and guide plate [7] to remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [8].
[5] [8] [6]
[7]
[4]
4036fs2016c1
[10] [9]
4. Snap off the E-ring [9] and the Paper Separation Roller Assy [10]. 5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 6. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Counter Life and clear the count of 1st.
4036fs2017c0
1.5.3
Separation Roller 2 A. 1. 2. 3. Cleaning Procedure Slide out the Tray 2. 2-59 Remove the Multi Bypass unit. Remove the Screw [1], and the Reinforcement plate [2].
[1] [2]
4036fs2018c0
2-9
II Maintenance
Periodical Check
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4. Open the Vertical transport door. 5. Remove two Claws [3] and the Vertical transport door [4].
[3]
[4]
4036fs2019c0
[6]
6. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Jam processing cover [6].
II Maintenance
[5] [8]
4036fs2020c1
7. Remove two Screws [7] and the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy [8].
[7]
4036fs2021c1
[9]
8. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller [9].
4036fs2592c0
2-10
Periodical Check B. Replacing Procedure 1. Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy. See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2-9 Cleaning of Separation Roller. 2. Remove two C-rings [1] and the Shaft [2], and remove the Separation Roller fixing plate Assy [3]. NOTE Use care not to miss the Spring. 3. Remove the C-ring [4] and Guide [5], and remove the Separation Roller Assy 2 [6]. II Maintenance A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy. See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2-9 Cleaning of Separation Roller. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-up Roller [1]. B. Replacing Procedure 1. Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy. See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2-9 Cleaning of Separation Roller. 2. Remove the Screw [1] and Wiring cover [2]. 2-11
[4]
[3] [1] [1] [2]

4036fs2593c0
[6] [5]
4036fs2594c0
1.5.4
Paper Take-up Roller
[1]
4036fs2022c1
[1] [2]
4036fs2023c0
Periodical Check
[5]
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3. Remove two Screws [3] and Connector [4], and remove the Paper Takeup Roller Assy [5].
[4]
[3] [6]
4036fs2024c1
II Maintenance
4. Remove two Screws [6] and the Installation flame [7] of the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy.
[7] [9]
4036fs2025c1
5. Remove two Screws [8] and Paper Take-up Roller cover [9].
[8]
4036fs2026c1
[11]
6. Remove the C-ring [10] and Bushing [11].
[10]
4036fs2027c0
2-12
Periodical Check 7. Remove the C-ring [13] and Gear [14] while sliding out the Shaft Assy [12] in the direction indicated in left figure.
[12]
[14]
4036fs2028c2
8. Remove the C-ring [15] and Bushing [16], and remove the Shaft Assy [17].
[16] [15]
[17] [18] [20] [18]
4036fs2029c2
9. Remove two E-rings [18] and Bushing [19], and remove the Pick-up Roller fixing plate Assy [20].
[19]
4036fs2595c0
[21]
10. Remove the C-ring [21] and Paper Take-up Roller [22].
[22]
4036fs2596c0
2-13
II Maintenance
[13]
Periodical Check 1.5.5 Pick-up Roller
[1]
4036fs2030c1
A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy. See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2-9 Cleaning of Separation Roller 2. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1].
B. 1. 2. II Maintenance
[1] [2]
4036fs2023c0
Replacing Procedure Remove the Jam processing cover. 2-9 Remove the Screw [1] and Wiring cover [2].
[5]
3. Remove two Screws [3] and Connector [4], and remove the Paper Takeup Roller Assy [5].
[4]
[3] [6]
4036fs2031c1
4. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy [7] together with Frame.
[7]
4036fs2032c1
2-14

[9]
Periodical Check 5. Remove two Screws [8] and Paper Take-up Roller cover [9].
[8] [10]
4036fs2026c1
[11] [11]
4036fs2597c1
[13]
7. Snap off the C-ring [13], and remove the Pick-up Roller [14].
[14]
4036fs2598c0
1.5.6
Transport Roller A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Open the Vertical transport door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Transport Roller [1].
[1]
4036fs2033c1
2-15
II Maintenance
[12]
6. Remove two C-rings [10] and two Bushings [11], and remove the Pickup Roller Assy [12].
Periodical Check 1.5.7 Cleaning of Synchronizing Roller
[1]
1. Open the Right Door. 2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover. See 2-16 for Replacing the Paper Dust Remover. 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Synchronizing Rollers [1] clean of dirt.
4036fs2502c0
1.5.8
Paper Dust Remover

[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Pushing the hook [1] with a blue label inward, remove the Paper Dust Remover [2].
4036fs2501c0
3. Using a brush, whisk dust off the Paper Dust Remover [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
4036fs2501c0
B. Replacing Procedure 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Pushing the hook [1] with a blue label inward, remove the Paper Dust Remover [2]. 3. Remove the Ozone Filter. 2-21 4. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Counter Life and clear the count of Paper Powder Filter/Ozone Filter.
2-16
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.5.9 Cleaning of Transport Roller

[1]
Periodical Check
1. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt.
4036fs2519c0
1.5.10
Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide

[1]
4036fs2518c0
1.5.11
[2]
Cleaning of Scanner Rail 1. Remove three screws [1] and the IR Upper Right Cover [2].
[1]
4036fs2504c0
[3]
2. Remove two screws [3] and two Original Glass fixing brackets [4] (at the front and rear). 3. Remove the Original Glass [5].
[5]
[4]
4036fs2505c0
2-17
II Maintenance
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the Right Door. Open the Left Door. Remove the Waste Toner Bottle. 2-31 Remove two screws and slide the Transfer Belt Unit out halfway. 2-24 5. Wipe the 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide [1] clean of dirt using a soft cloth. NOTE When cleaning, use care not to be hurt by the leading edge of the guide that is sharp.
Periodical Check
[4]
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Scanner Rails [4] clean of dirt. NOTE Apply lubricant after cleaning.
4036fs2506c0
1.5.12
[2]
Cleaning of the Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)

[1]
II Maintenance
1. Remove the Original Glass. 2-44 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Mirror 1 [1] and Mirror 2/3 [2].
4036fs2507c0
1.5.13
Cleaning of the Lens

[2]
1. Remove the Original Glass. 2-44 2. Remove two Screws [1] and Lens cover [2].
[1]
4036fs2613c0
[3]
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Lens [3] clean of dirt.
4036fs2041c1
2-18

[1]
Periodical Check
Cleaning of the Original Glass 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Original Glass [1] clean of dirt.
4036fs2508c0
1.5.15
[1]
Cleaning of the CCD Sensor 1. Remove the Original Glass. 2-44 2. Remove seven Screws [1] and CCD Unit protective cover [2].
[1]
4036fs2614c1
[3]
3. Remove two hooks [3] and the lens cover [4].
[4]
4036fs2043c1
[5]
4. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the CCD Sensor [5] clean of dirt.
4036fs2044c1
2-19
II Maintenance
[2]
Periodical Check 1.5.16 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
NOTES If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the Main Unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle. When removing the Finishing Option, support the Horizontal Transport Unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping. 1. Turn OFF the main switch. 2. Open the Left Door. 3. Grasp the handle, and remove the waste toner bottle [1]. NOTES Raise the waste toner bottle gently before removing it. If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt the waste toner bottle when removing it. Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it. 4. Remove the Cover [2] of Waste Toner Bottle, and set it on the Collecting port.
[1]
II Maintenance
4036fs2045c1
[2]
4036fs2615c1
5. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port. 6. Remove the waste toner bottle from its box, and remove the packing material. 7. Grasp the handle, and set the waste toner bottle in place. 8. Close the Left Door.
4036fs2509c0
2-20
Periodical Check
Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port 1. Open the Rear Left Cover. 2. Remove the Waste Toner Bottle [1].
[1]
4036fs2045c1
3. Wipe the areas around the Waste Toner Collecting Port clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alcohol. II Maintenance 1. Holding onto the hook, remove the Ozone Filter [1]. 2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover. 2-16 3. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Counter Life and clear the count of Paper Powder Filter/Ozone Filter.
4036fs2510c0
4036fs2509c0
1.5.18
Replacing Ozone Filter

[1]
1.5.19
Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever [1] In and Out several times. NOTE Move the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever slowly forward and backward until it stops.
4036fs2511c0
[1]
2-21
Periodical Check 1.5.20 Cleaning LPH Assy
NOTE After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit, be sure to place it in the plastic bag (black) or wrap it in a light shielding cloth, and store it in a dark place. Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time, as it may become damaged. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Slide out the IU (C/M/Y/Bk). 2-26 Remove the LED Cleaning Jig [1] and LED Cleaning Jig Pad [2].
[2]
II Maintenance
[1] [4]
4036fs2512c1
4. Affix a LED Cleaning Jig Pad [4] to the LED Cleaning Jig [3].
[3]
4036fs2513c0
[5] [6]
5. Clean the LED [5] of the LPH Assy by moving the LED Cleaning Jig [6] three reciprocating motions. NOTE Use only the specified jig (LED Cleaning Jig) for cleaning.
4036fs2514c0
1.5.21
Replacement of the Deodorant Filter

[1]
1. Holding onto the hook, take out the Deodorant Filter [1].
4036fs2515c0
2-22
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.5.22 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit
Periodical Check
NOTES If a Finishing Option is installed, remove it from the main unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle. When removing the Finishing Option, support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping.
[2]
A. 1. 2. 3.
[1]
Removal Procedure Turn OFF the main switch. Open the Right Door. Unlock the blue lock levers [1] (at two places). 4. Holding onto the blue lock levers [1] (at two places), remove the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit [2]. II Maintenance
[1]
4036fs2516c0
[2]
[1]
[1]
4036fs2517c0
B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Holding onto the blue lock levers [1] (at two places), mount the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit [2]. 2. Lock the blue lock levers [1](at two places). 3. Close the Right Door. NOTE Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear. 4. Turn ON the Power Switch. 5. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Counter Life and clear the count of Transfer Roller Unit.
2-23
Periodical Check 1.5.23 Image Transfer Belt Unit
4036fs2154c0
A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. 2-24 2. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the Transfer belt. NOTES If it is difficult to clean with dried soft cloth, dampen a soft cloth with a solvent. Do not wipe out with water. When solvent is used to dampen a cloth, do not use the ones other than shown below: isopropyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, PPC Cleaner, Sol mix AP-7 After cleaned with the solvent, make copies more than 28-piece of A3 white paper to eliminate the image noise.
II Maintenance
B. Replacing Procedure NOTES If a Finishing Option is installed, remove it from the main unit before trying to replace the Transfer Belt Assembly. When removing the Finishing Option, support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping. 1. Turn OFF the main switch. 2. Slide out the IU (C/M/Y/Bk). NOTE After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit, be sure to place it in the plastic bag (black) or wrap it in a light shielding cloth, and store it in a dark place. Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time, as it may become damaged.
[1]
3. Open the Right Door. 4. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Image Transfer Belt Unit [2].
[2]
4036fs2155c0
2-24
Periodical Check 5. Open the Left Door. 6. Grasp the handle, and remove the waste toner bottle [3]. NOTES Raise the waste toner bottle gently before removing it. If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt the waste toner bottle when removing it. Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it. 7. Pull out the Image Transfer Belt Unit [4].
[4]
[3]
4036fs2616c0
4036fs2156c1
C. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Insert the Transfer Belt Unit [1]. NOTE Insert the Transfer Belt Unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part.
[1]
4036fs2153c1
[2]
2. Install the Image Transfer Belt Unit with two Screws [2].
4036fs2617c0
2-25
II Maintenance
Periodical Check
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3. Hold the handle and install the Waste Toner Bottle [3] in position. 4. Close the Left Door. 5. Close the Right Door. NOTE Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear. 6. Turn ON the Power Switch. 7. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Gradation Adjust and carry out Gradation Adjust.
[3]
4036fs2616c0
1.5.24 II Maintenance
Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M, Y, Bk) A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Removal Procedure Turn OFF the Power Switch. Unplug the power cord. Open the Front Door. Release the lock lever [1] of the Imaging Unit.
[1]
4036fs2578c0
5. Pull out the IU [2], and remove it from main body. 6. Clean the LPH Assy. 2-22
[2]
4036fs2579c0
2-26
Periodical Check B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Remove the Imaging Unit from its plastic bag. 2. Tilt the Imaging Unit [1] to the left and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice. Then, tilt it to the right and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice. NOTES Since the Imaging Unit is highly susceptible to light, keep it shielded from light up to the time it is installed. Carefully unseal the plastic bag (black). If the Imaging Unit is packed in the plastic bag (black) again, seal the package using tape or another means.
[1]
4036fs2580c0
NOTE When installing the Imaging Unit, ensure that the color of the mounting guide of the Imaging Unit is the same as the color of the label at the mounting position on the main unit. 3. Keeping the Imaging Unit [2] in a level position, insert the Imaging Unit [2] into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped. NOTES Do not allow the Imaging Unit to become tilted while installing them into the Main Unit, as damage to the PC Drum or the LED assembly can result. Insert the Imaging Unit until a click is heard.
[2]
4036fs2581c0
2-27
II Maintenance
Periodical Check
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4. Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet [3] while pressing the IU. NOTE Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet half way, and pull it down slantwise.
[3]
4036fs2582c0
[4]
5. Close the Imaging Unit Locking Lever [4] while pressing the IU. NOTE Place the IU Lock Lever into the locked position until a click is heard. 6. Close the Front Door. 7. Plug in the power cord. 8. Turn ON the Power Switch. 9. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Gradation Adjust and carry out Gradation Adjust.
II Maintenance
4036fs2583c1
2-28
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.5.25 Replacing the Fusing Unit
Periodical Check
NOTE Before replacing the Fusing Unit, ensure that it has had time to cool down. 1. Turn OFF the main switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then wait for about 20 minutes. 2. Open the Right Door. 3. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Connector protective cover [2].
4036fs2046c0
[2] [1]
4. Remove the Connector [3]. II Maintenance

4036fs2047c0
[3]
[4] [4]
5. Remove the Exit Tray. 2-41 6. Remove wire saddle and remove two Connectors [4] of Fusing unit.
4036fs2048c1
[6]
7. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Fusing unit [6].
[5]
4036fs2049c0
2-29
Service tool
2.
2.1
Service tool
CE Tool list
Tool name Shape Personnel Remarks
Scanner Drive Cable Holding Jig
4036fs2001c0
LED Cleaning Jig
II Maintenance
4036fs2002c0
LED Cleaning Jig Pad
4036fs2003c0
LPH Assy Mounting Jigs
4036fs2004c0
Color chart
4036fs2577c0
2-30
Service tool
2.2
2.2.1
Copy materials
Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU)
Parts name IU Black IU Yellow IU Magenta IU Cyan Replacing period 80,000 copies 50,000 copies 50,000 copies 50,000 copies
For the predetermined conditions, see 2-7. 2.2.2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C)
Parts name T/C Black T/C Yellow T/C Magenta T/C Cyan Replacing period *1
Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the T/C Black at the same time. II Maintenance
10,000 copies 10,000 copies 10,000 copies 10,000 copies
*1: Maximum consuming value of BW ratio 5% for each color. 2.2.3 Waste Toner Bottle
Parts name Waste Toner Bottle Replacing period 30,000 copies
For the predetermined conditions, see 2-7. 2.2.4 Maintenance Kit
There is no setting for the Maintenance Kit.
2-31
Firmware upgrade
3.
3.1
3.1.1
Firmware upgrade
Preparations for Firmware rewriting
Service environment
OS: Windows2000 Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash Compact flash (with 64MB or more) 3.1.2 Application to be used
Cygwin (Free software) 3.1.3 Installing the Cygwin
II Maintenance
The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC. 1. Execute the Self-uncompressing-file Cygwin_set.exe to develop it into the optional directory. 2. Execute the setup.exe inside the developed folder to start installing. NOTES Except for the selection of Install from Local Directory, carry out installation according to the instructions from Installer during installing. Do not change the Default c: \cygwin for the address to be installed. 3. After installing, open the Property of My Computer, and click the Environmental Variable of Advanced tab. 4. Click the New in System Variable Setting.
4036fs2620e0
2-32
Firmware upgrade
5. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable.

Variable name CYGWIN HOME Variable value ntsec /home/username
4036fs2621e0
3.1.4
Writing into the Compact flash
1. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. (C:\TSS2 in the below figure)
4036fs2622e0
NOTE The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe. 2. Double-click the Firmware data, and specify the directory to be uncompressed, and then uncompress it. NOTE When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed, delete it before uncompressing.
2-33
II Maintenance
Firmware upgrade
3. Mount the Compact flash on the PC, and check the Drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-Drive in the following figure)
4036fs2623e0
II Maintenance
4. Click Start Program Accessories Command prompt to open the Command prompt. 5. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory. 6. Specify the Drive of Compact flash, which was recognized through the procedure 3, and execute the mkcf.bat. (Input the C: \TSS2\card_work>mkcf F (Drive number) in the figure below, and push the Enter.)
4036fs2624e0
7. Once the mkcf.bat is executed, data writing into the Compact flash is started. 8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched, VERIFY OK appears.
4036fs2625e0
9. Remove the Compact flash from PC. NOTE When removing the Compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. 2-34
Firmware upgrade
3.2
Firmware rewriting
The F/W is updated using the Compact flash. 3.2.1 Updating method
NOTE NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON. 1. With the Power Switch in the OFF position, unplug the power cord from the power outlet. 2. Remove one screw [1] and the metal Blanking Plate [2]. II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
4036fs2602c0
3. Insert the Compact Flash card into the slot.

[3]
4036fs2603c0
4. Plug the power cord into the power outlet and turn ON the Power Switch. 5. Six different types of F/W appear on the Touch Panel. 6. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated.
4036fs2604c0
7. Press the Start key. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.) 8. Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly (Downloading Completed). Check also the Check Sum value (Check Sum XXXX) shown on the Touch Panel. (The Start key blinks green.) 9. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet. NOTE Do not turn OFF the Power Switch. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot. Turn OFF the Power Switch. Plug the power cord and turn ON the Power Switch. Call the Tech. Rep. mode to the screen. Select ROM Version. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.
2-35
Firmware upgrade 3.2.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails
If NG appears on the Touch Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps. 1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again. 2. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the memory card for a new one and try another rewriting sequence. 3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused NG and carry out data rewriting procedure.
MSC IR PRT LPH APP MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Control Board (PWB-MC) LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
II Maintenance
Font
2-36
Other
4.
4.1
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Paint-locked Screws NOTE Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field. B. Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment. Accordingly, check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
2-37
II Maintenance
Other
4.2
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts)

Section Original Glass IR Upper Right Cover Control Panel IR Front Cover IR Upper Front Cover IR Left Cover IR Upper Left Cover IR Upper Rear Cover IR Right Cover Rear Left Cover Panel Cover Front Door Exterior parts Front Left Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Rear Right Cover Exit Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Paper Setting Dial cover Lower Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Right Cover Multi Bypass Right Cover Multi Bypass Left Cover Scanner Motor Drive Board CCD Unit Image Processing Board Control Board MFP Control Board High Voltage Unit/1 High Voltage Unit/2 Board and etc Tray1 Paper Size Board DC Power Supply LED Drive Board Paper Type Board Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board Tray2 Board Tray2 Paper Size Board Inverter Board Part name Ref.Page
2-44 2-43 2-44 2-44 2-43 2-41 2-43 2-43 2-40 2-41 2-42 2-42 2-41 2-40 2-42 2-42 2-41 2-45 2-46 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-41 2-40 2-40 2-46 2-47 2-48 2-49 2-50 2-52 2-53 2-54 2-54 2-56 2-57 2-57 2-58 2-58 2-59 2-38
II Maintenance
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 Others IR Unit Section Multi Bypass Unit Hopper Unit LPH Unit Scanner Motor Scanner Assy Scanner Wire PWB Box Main Motor Fusing Drive Motor Toner Supply Motor C/Bk Toner Supply Motor Y/M Color PC Drum Motor Color Developing Motor Bk PC Motor 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor Intermediate Transport Motor Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor Cleaning Brush Motor AIDC/Registration Sensor/1,2 LPH Assy ATDC Sensor Y/M/C Part name
Other
Ref.Page
2-59 2-60 2-62 2-64 2-66 2-67 2-74 2-75 2-75 2-76 2-76 2-79 2-79 2-80 2-80 2-81 2-83 2-86 2-87 2-88 2-92 II Maintenance 2-77
2-39
Other
4.3
4.3.1
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
IR Right Cover/Front Right Cover/Bypass Right & Left Cover
[1]
[2]
[4] [3] [6]
II Maintenance
[5] [5]
[8]
[7]
4036fs2050c1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove four Screws [1], and remove the IR Right Cover [2]. Remove the Panel Cover. 2-42 Remove the Screw [3], and remove the Front Right Cover [4]. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Bypass Right Cover [6]. Remove the Screw [7], and remove the Bypass Left Cover [8].
2-40
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.2 Exit Tray/IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Front Cover
Other
[4]
[5] [4] [3]
[9]
[1]
[6]
[10]
[8]
[2]
[7]
4036fs2167c1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Open the Front Door [1]. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Exit Tray [3]. Remove four Screws [4], and remove the IR Left Cover [5]. Remove two Screws [6]. Open the Left Door [7], and remove the Rear Left Cover [8]. Remove the Screw [9], and remove the Left Front Cover [10].
2-41
II Maintenance
Other 4.3.3
cm3520 Field Service Manual Front Door/Panel Cover/Paper Setting Dial Cover
[3] [2] [1]
[4]
[5]
II Maintenance
[6]
4036fs2168c1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Open the Front Door [1]. Remove the Screw [2], and remove the Panel Cover [3]. Pick up the Front Door [1] and remove it. Pull out the 1st Paper take-up Tray [4]. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Paper Setting Dial Cover [6]. Lower Rear Cover/Tray 2 Rear Cover/Rear Cover/Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Wiring Cover
4.3.4
[7]
[8] [6]
[1]
[2] [1]
[3] [5] [3] [4] [1]

4036fs2169c1
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove seven Screws [1], and remove the Lower Rear Cover [2]. Remove four Screws [3], and remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover [4]. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [6]. Remove the Screw [7], and remove the Wiring Cover [8].
2-42
Other
[10]
[12]
[9]
[11]
[13] [11]
[9]
4036fs2157c1
5. Remove five Screws [9], and remove the Rear Cover [10]. 6. Remove four Screws [11]. 7. Open the Right Door [12], and remove the Rear Right Cover [13]. 4.3.5 IR Upper Front Cover/IR Upper Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover
[4] [5] [6] [8] [3] [1] [2]
[1]
[7]
[6]
4036fs2158c1
1. Remove two Shoulder Screws [1] and a Screw [2], and remove the IR Upper Front Cover [3]. 2. Remove three Screws [4], and remove the IR Upper Right Cover [5]. 3. Remove four Shoulder Screws [6] and three Screws [7], and remove the IR Upper Rear Cover [8].
2-43
II Maintenance
Other 4.3.6 Original Glass/IR Front Cover

[5] [4] [2]
[3]
[2]
[4]
II Maintenance
[1]
4036fs2159c2
1. Remove the IR Upper Right Cover. 2-43 2. Remove each Screw [1], and remove the Original Glass fixing bracket (near side/ inmost side) [2]. 3. Remove the Original Glass [3]. 4. Remove the IR Right Cover and IR Upper Front Cover. 2-40, 2-43 5. Remove the IR Left Cover. 2-41 6. Remove five Screws [4], and remove the IR Front Cover [5]. 4.3.7 Control Panel 1. Remove four caps [1] at both ends of Control Panel.
[1]
[1]
4036fs2160c0
2-44
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2. Remove four Screws [2].
Other
[2]
[2]
4036fs2161c0
3. Remove the Flat Cable [3]. 4. Remove the Control Panel [4].
[3] [4]
4036fs2162c0
4.3.8
Tray 1
[1]
1. Slide out the Tray 1 [1].
4036fs163c0
2. Slide out the Tray 1 [3] while pressing the Slide Locks [2] at both ends.
[2] [3]
4036fs164c0
2-45
II Maintenance
Other 4.3.9 Tray 2

[1]
1. Slide out the Tray 2 [1].
4036fs165c0
[3]
2. Remove one Screw [2], and remove the Stopper [3]. 3. Slide out the Tray 2 while pressing the Slide Locks [4].
II Maintenance
[2]
[4]
4036fs166c1
4.3.10
[1]
Scanner Motor Drive Board

[3]
1. Remove the IR Upper Rear Cover. 2-43 2. Remove three Connectors [1] and four Board Supports [2]. 3. Remove the Scanner Motor Drive Board [3].
[2]
4036fs2142c1
2-46
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.11 CCD Unit

[2]
Other
A. 1. 2.
Removal Procedure Remove the Original Glass. 2-44 Remove seven Screws [1], and remove the CCD Unit Cover [2].
[1]
4036fs2613c0
[3]
[5] [4]
[3]
4036fs2510c1
B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Align the CCD Unit with the center of the graduations as illustrated on the left and then tighten the four screws.
4036fs2052c1
2. Reinstall the Original Glass. 3. Turn ON the Power Switch. 4. Carry out the adjustment procedure for CD-Mag. If the specifications are not met, loosen the CCD Unit mounting screws and move the CCD Unit in the FD direction as necessary. 3-45 NOTE Hold the CCD Unit by hand when moving it. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it, as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens results. 2-47
II Maintenance
3. Remove four Screws [3] and Flat Cable [4], and remove the CCD Unit [5].
Other
4.3.12
Image Processing Board

[2]
1. Remove the Rear Cover and IR Right Cover. 2-42 2. Remove four Screws [1], and remove the IR Frame Protective Cover [2].
[1]
4036fs2178c0
II Maintenance
[4]
[3]
3. Remove seven Screws [3], and remove the Board Cover [4].
[3]
[3]
4036fs2181c0
4. Remove the Connector [5].
[5]
4036fs2055c0
5. Remove all the Connectors and Flat Cables on the Image Processing Board.
4036fs2183c0
2-48
Other 6. Remove six Screws [6] and two Bolts [7], and remove the Image Processing Board [8].
[7]
[8]
[6]
4036fs2057c1
4.3.13
Control Board
1. Remove the Lower Rear Cover. 2-42 2. Remove all the Connectors on the Control Board.
4036fs2058c1
[2]
3. Remove eight Screws [1], and remove the Control Board [2].
[1]
[1]
4036fs2060c1
2-49
II Maintenance
Other
Cautions in replacing the Control Board: When Control Board (PWB-MC) is replaced, relocate the EEPROM (IC45). Mount the EEPROM (IC45) of old Control Board onto the new Control Board.
II Maintenance
4036fs2591c0
NOTE When the EEPROM (IC45) is mounted, precisely fit the directions of each A.
4036fs2590c0
4.3.14
MFP Control Board

[1]
[2] [1]
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover, Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover. 2-42 2. Remove 12 Screws [1], and remove the Protective Shield [2].
[1]
[1]
4036fs2061c1
2-50
Other 3. Remove two Connectors [3] and 13 Screws [4].
[4]
[4]
[3] [4] [5] [4] [9]
[3]
4036fs2062c1
[5]
[6]
[8] [5]
[7]
4036fs2063c2
Cautions in replacing the MFP Control Board: When MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is replaced, relocate the RAM IC (IC418). Mount the RAM IC (IC418) of old Control Board onto the new Control Board.
4036fs2600c0
2-51
II Maintenance
4. Remove five Screws [5]. 5. Remove two Screws [6] and two Bolts [7], and remove the Interface Cover [8]. 6. Remove the MFP Control Board Assy [9].
Other
A
cm3520 Field Service Manual NOTE When RAM IC (IC418) is mounted, precisely fit the directions of each A.
4036fs2599c0
4.3.15
High Voltage Unit/1

[2] [3]
II Maintenance
[1]
1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove four Screws [1] and eight Connectors [2], and remove two Harness Rails [3].
[1]
4036fs2065c1
3. Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit/1 [4].

[4]
4036fs2066c1
[5]
4. Remove 9 Screws [5], and remove the High Voltage Unit/1 [6].
[6]
[5]
4036fs2067c2
2-52
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.16 High Voltage Unit/2
Other
1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit/2 [1].
[1]
4036fs2068c1
[2]
3. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the High Voltage Unit/2 Assy [3].
[3]
4036fs2069c1
[4]
4. Remove six Screws [4], and remove the High Voltage Unit/2 [5].
[5]
[4]
4036fs2070c1
2-53
II Maintenance
Other 4.3.17 Tray 1 Paper Size Board

[2]
1. 2. 3.
[4]
[3]
[1]
Slide out the Tray 1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 Remove the Connector [1] on the High Voltage Unit/2. 4. Remove two Screws [2] and Connector [3], and remove the Tray1 Paper Size Board Assy [4].
4036fs2071c1
II Maintenance
5. Remove the Lever [5]. 6. Remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board [6].
[6] [5]
4036fs2072c1
4.3.18
DC Power Supply 1. Remove the Exit Tray. 2-41 2. Remove six Screws [1], and remove the Board Cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
4036fs2073c0
2-54
Other 3. Unplug all connectors from the DC Power Supply.
4036fs2074c1
[3]
[3]
[4]
4. Remove seven Screws [3], and remove the DC Power Supply Assy [4].
[3] [3] [5]
4036fs2075c1
5. Remove four Screws [5], and remove the Protective Cover [6].
[6]
4036fs2076c1
2-55
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 6. Remove 12 Screws [7], and remove the DC power Supply [8].
[7] [8] [7]
4036fs2077c1
LED Drive Board

[3] [2]
1. Remove the LPH Unit. 2-62 2. Remove two screws [1], unplug the connector [2] each, and remove each guide Assy.
[1]
4036fs2545c0
[4] [4]
3. Remove the flat cables [4] (eight).
4036fs2546c1
[5]
[5]
4. Remove eight screws [5], unplug two connectors [6], and remove the LED Drive Board [7].
[7] [6] [5]

4036fs2143c1
2-56
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.20 Paper Type Board 1. Remove the Paper Setting Dial Cover. 2-42 2. Remove the Dial [1].
Other
[1]
4036fs2144c0
[3] [5]
3. Remove the Screw [2], Connector [3], and Holder [4], and remove the Paper Type Board [5]. II Maintenance 1. Remove the Panel Cover. 2-42 2. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Front Right Cover [2]. 3. Remove the Connector [3], two Board Supports [4], and remove the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board. 2-57
[4]
[2]
4036fs2145c1
4.3.21
Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board
[2]
[1]
4036fs2082c0
[3]
[4]
4036fs2146c0
Other 4.3.22 Tray 2 Board
1. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. 2-42 2. Remove all the Connectors on the Tray 2 Board.
4036fs2147c1
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
3. Remove four Screws [1], and remove the Tray 2 Board [2].
4036fs2148c0
4.3.23
Tray 2 Paper Size Board 1. 2. 3. Slide out the Tray 2. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. 2-42 Remove three Screws [1], and remove the Tray 2 Board Fixing Bracket [2].
[1]
[2]
4036fs2149c1
[3]
4. Remove two Claws [3] and Connector [4], and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board Assy [5].
[4] [5]
4036fs2150c0
2-58

[6]
Other 5. Remove the Lever [6], and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board [7].
[7]
4036fs2151c0
4.3.24
Inverter Board 1. Remove the Scanner Assy. 2-66 2. Remove four Screws [1], Flat Cable [2] and Connector [3], and remove the Inverter Board [4].
[2] [4]
[1]
[1]
[3]
4036fs2152c0
4.3.25
Multi Bypass Unit

[2]
1. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [2].
[1]
4036fs2078c1
2. Remove three Connectors [3].

[3]
4036fs2079c1
2-59
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3. Remove the Screw [4], and remove the Bypass Left Cover [5].
[5] [6]
[4]
4036fs2080c1
[6]
4. Remove four Screws [6], and remove the Multi Bypass Unit [7].
II Maintenance
[7]
4036fs2081c1
4.3.26
Toner Hopper Unit
1. Open the Front Door. 2. Remove the Toner Cartridge (C, M, Y, Bk). 3. Remove the IU (C, M, Y, Bk). NOTE After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit, wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. DO NOT leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged. 4. Remove the Left Front Cover and Panel Cover. 2-41 5. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Front Right Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4036fs2082c0
2-60
Other 6. Remove two screws [3] and the Front Door Switch cover [4].
[4]
[3]
4036fs2083c0
[5]
7. Remove two Terminals [5]. NOTE For installation of Hopper Unit, connect the Terminals in the sequence of blue and then white from upper. II Maintenance
4036fs2084c0
8. Disconnect five connectors [6].

[6]
[6]
4036fs2085c1
[7]
9. Remove five screws [7] and the Toner Hopper Unit [8].
[8]
[7]
4036fs2086c2
2-61
Other 4.3.27 LPH Unit
1. Open the Front Door. 2. Slide out the IU (C, M, Y, Bk). NOTE After the IU has been pulled out, place the IU lock lever back into the locked position. When installing the Imaging Unit into the main unit, make sure that the Toner supply shutter is opened if the Imaging Unit Lower Cover is not used. 3. 4. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. 2-24 Remove the Rear Right Cover, Rear Left Cover, Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover. 2-40
[1]
5. Remove 12 Screws [1], and remove the Protective Shield [2].
II Maintenance
[2] [1]
[1]
[1]
4036fs2061c2
[4] [3] [3]
6. Remove four Screws [3], and remove the Harness Protective Cover [4].
4036fs2096c0
7. Remove four Connectors [5] on the Control Board.
[5]
4036fs2087c1
2-62
Other 8. Remove the Screw [6] and Connector [7].
[7]
[6]
4036fs2618c0

[8]
4036fs2089c2
[9]
4036fs2521c1
10. Turning the IU (C, M, Y, Bk) drive hub [9], push it into the locked position (at four places). NOTES During the locking procedure, use care not to touch the LED surface. Should the LED surface be touched, clean it with the LED Cleaning Jig. 11. Remove four screws [10] and slide out the LPH Unit [11]. NOTE When the LPH Unit is to be replaced, remove the ATDC Sensor from the old LPH Unit and remount it on the new one. This step is not, however, necessary if the IU is replaced at the same time. For replacement of ATDC Sensor, see 2-92.
[11]
[10]
[10]
4036fs2522c1
2-63
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual NOTES After replacing the LPH Unit, be sure to turn four Drive Hubs [12] to release locking. Proceeding with job while still being locked may accidently release the locking condition, thus damaging the Drive hub. For installation of the LPH Unit, lock four Drive hubs again before installation. When the LPH Unit has been reinstalled, be sure to run Stabilizer available from Image Adjust of the Tech. Rep. mode.
[12]
4036fs2601c1
II Maintenance
4.3.28 A. 1. 2.
Scanner Motor
Removal Procedure Remove the Rear Cover and IR Upper Rear Cover. 2-42 Remove 16 screws [1] and the reinforcement frame [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
4036fs2090c1
[3]
3. Remove the tension spring [3] for the Scanner Motor timing belt.
4036fs2091c0
2-64

[5] [4]
Other 4. Remove three screws [4] and the Scanner Motor Assy [5].
[4] [4]
4036fs2523c0
[6]
4036fs2524c0
[1]
[3]
[2]
4036fs2525c0
B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Temporarily secure the Scanner Motor Assy [2] using three screws [1]. 2. Hook the spring [3]. 3. With the Scanner drive gear set screw located on the right-hand side as shown on the left, slide the Scanner Motor Assy to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring. Perform this step three times. 4. Securely tighten the three screws to fix the Scanner Motor Assy [2] into position.
2-65
II Maintenance
[7]
5. Remove two screws [6] and the Scanner Motor [7].
Other 4.3.29 Scanner Assy
1. Remove the Original Glass. 2-44 2. Move the Scanner Assy [1] to the location shown and remove one mounting screw each at the front and rear end.
[1]
II Maintenance
4036fs2092c2
NOTE Do not remove the Scanner Positioning Screws [2].
[2]
4036fs2526c0
[3]
3. Take out the Scanner Assy [3] by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown.
4036fs2527c0
[7]
4. Remove the screw [4] and the holder [5]. 5. Remove the flat cable [6]. 6. Remove the Scanner Assy [7].
[4]
[5]
[6]
4036fs2093c2
2-66
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.30 Scanner Drive Cables 1. 2. 3.
Other
A. Removal Procedure Remove the Rear Cover. 2-42 Remove the Control Panel. 2-44 Remove four Presser Bars [1] of Flat Cable.
[1] [1]
4036fs2094c0
[2]
[3]
4036fs2095c1
[3] [3]
6. 7. 8.
Remove the Original Glass. 2-44 Remove the Scanner Assy. 2-66 Unhook the springs [3] of the Scanner Drive Cables on the hook side, one each at the front and in the rear.
4036fs2547c0
[4]
[5]
9. Remove the Scanner Motor Assy. 2-64 10. Remove the screw [4] and then slide the front pulley [5] toward the front.
4036fs2548c0
[6]
11. Remove the Screw [6], and slide the Wire Pulley [7] (Rear side) in the direction of front side.
[7]
4036fs2549c0
2-67
II Maintenance
4. Remove the IR Front Cover. 2-44 5. Remove four screws [2] and the control panel base [3].
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 12. Remove the screw [8] and the Scanner drive gear [9].
[8] [9]
4036fs2550c0
13. Snap off the C-clip [10] and remove the bushing [11] (front).
[11] [10]
II Maintenance
4036fs2551c0
[12]
[13]
14. Slide the shaft [12] toward the rear and lift it. Then, remove the front and rear pulleys [13]. 15. Remove the Scanner Drive Cables.
4036fs2552c0
2-68
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.31 Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables
Other
<Overall figure>
4036fs2553c0
A. Reinstallation Procedure
[1] [2]
<Front> 1. Position the round bead [1] of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [2] as shown. NOTE Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley.
4036fs2554c0
2. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clockwise, from the rear toward the front side. NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
4036fs2555c0
2-69
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counterclockwise, from the front toward the rear side. NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
4036fs2556c0
[3]
4. Slip the Cable Holding Jig [3] onto the pulley to secure the cable in position.
II Maintenance
4036fs2557c0
[4] [5]
<Rear> 5. Position the round bead [4] of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [5] as shown. NOTE Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley.
4036fs2558c0
6. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clockwise, from the front toward the rear side. NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
4036fs2559c0
7. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counterclockwise, from the rear toward the front side. NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
4036fs2560c0
2-70
Other 8. Slip the Cable Holding Jig [6] onto the pulley to secure the cable in position.
[6]
4036fs2561c0
[9]
[7]
9. Install the front and rear pulleys [7] and bushings [8] onto the shaft [9] and fit the C-clip [10].
[8] [10]
4036fs2562c0
[13] [12]
10. Mount the Scanner drive gear [11] on the shaft [12] and secure it using the screw [13]. NOTE Allow a clearance of about 0.1 mm between the Scanner drive gear and bushing.
0.1 mm
[11]
4036fs2563c0
[14]
[15]
[15] [14]
11. Secure the front and rear pulleys [14] using the screw [15] each. NOTE Apply the Screw lock on the Screw.
4036fs2564c0
2-71
II Maintenance
Other
[17]
cm3520 Field Service Manual NOTE Mount the Screw [16] in the direction that is opposite against the direction for which Scanner Drive Gear [17] and Screw [18] are screwed together as shown in the left figure.
4036fs2584c0
[18]
[16]
12. Mount the Scanner Motor Assy. 2-64

[19] [20]
II Maintenance
[21] [22] [23]
<Front> 13. Wind the bead end of the cable [19] around pulley C [20] and pulley B [21], then hook the bead [22] onto the Adjustable Anchor [23].
4036fs2565c0
14. Wind the hook end of the cable [24] around pulley A [25] and pulley B [26].
[26] [24] [25]

4036fs2566c0
A B C
15. Fit the hook end of the cable [27] to the spring [28] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame. 16. Measure the Spring length, and check if its length is within the range of 63.0 mm 1 mm. <When out of the given range> In case of 64.1 mm or more: Retry to put the spring on the catch B. In case of 61.9 mm or less: Retry to put the spring on the catch C.
[28] [27]
4036fs2567c0
2-72
Other <Rear> 17. Wind the bead end of the cable [29] around pulley F [30] and pulley E [31], then hook the bead [32] onto the Adjustable Anchor [33].
[29] [31] [32] [30] [33]

4036fs2568c0
[36] [35]
18. Wind the hook end of the cable [34] around pulley D [35] and pulley E [36].
[34]
4036fs2569c0
A B C
19. Fit the hook end of the cable [37] to the spring [38] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame. 20. Measure the Spring length, and check if its length is within the range of 63.0 mm 1 mm. <When out of the given range> In case of 64.1 mm or more: Retry to put the spring on the catch B. In case of 61.9 mm or less: Retry to put the spring on the catch C.
[37]
[38]
4036fs2570c0
21. Remove the Cable Holding Jigs from the front and rear pulleys. 22. Adjust the position of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. 3-101 NOTE Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed, be sure to carry out the FD-Mag adjustment procedure. 3-45
2-73
II Maintenance
Other 4.3.32 PWB Box

[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover, Rear Left Cover, Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover. 2-41 2. Remove 12 Screws [1], and remove the Protective Shield [2].
[1]
4036fs2061c1
II Maintenance
[4] [3] [3]
3. Remove four Screws [3], and remove the Harness Protective Cover [4].
4036fs2096c0
[7] [6] [5]

4036fs2097c0
4. Remove the Screw [5], and remove the Wire Saddle [6]. 5. Remove the Connector [7] on the MFP Control Board.
[8]
[9]
6. Remove the Screw [8], and remove the Earth cable [9]. 7. Remove all the Connectors on the Control Board. See the procedure 2 of 2-49 Removing of Control Board.
4036fs2098c0
2-74
Other 8. Remove 11 Screws [10] and two Connectors [11], and remove the PWB Box [12].
[10]
[10]
[10]
[10]
[12]
4036fs2099c2
4.3.33
[2]
Main Motor
[3] [1]
1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove the Connector [1] and three Screws [2], and remove the Main Motor [3].
4036fs2100c0
4.3.34
Fusing Drive Motor 1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Fan Assy Protective Cover [2].
[2] [1]
4036fs2101c1
2-75
II Maintenance
[11]
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3. Remove two Shoulder screws [3] and two Connectors [4], and remove the Fan Assy [5].
[3] [5]
[4]
[4]
4036fs2102c2
4. Remove four Screws [6] and Connector [7], and remove the Fusing Drive Motor [8].
[6] [6] [8]
II Maintenance
[7]
4036fs2103c1
4.3.35
Toner Supply Motor C/Bk 1. Remove the Panel Cover. 2-42 2. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Front Right Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4036fs2082c0
[3]
[5] [4]
3. Remove two Screws [3] and Connector [4], and remove the Toner Supply Motor C/Bk [5].
4036fs2104c0
4.3.36
Toner Supply Motor Y/M 1. Remove the Toner Hopper. 2-60 2. Remove the screw [1] and the gear [2].
[1]
[2]
4036fs2529c1
2-76
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3. Remove the Connector [3].

[3]
Other
4036fs2105c0
[5]
4. Remove two screws [4]. Then, turn the Toner Replenishing Motor Y/M [5] counterclockwise and take it off the machine.
4036fs2530c1
4.3.37
Color PC Drum Motor

[1] [3]
[2]
4036fs2107c1
1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove eight Connectors [1] on the High Voltage Unit/1. 3. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Harness Holder [3].
[4] [4] [6] [5]

4036fs2106c2
4. Remove four Screws (Red-painted) [4] and Connector [5], and remove the Color PC Drum Motor [6].
2-77
II Maintenance
[4]
Other
Cautions when mounting the Color PC Drum Motor: Before mounting the Color PC Drum Motor, be sure to check the assembled position of PC Gear. If its position is improper, make positioning adjustment. A. Checking method
[1] [3] [4]
II Maintenance
[2]
4036fs2170c1
1. Slowly turn the PC Gear/1 [1], and fit the hole A [3] and B [4] with the Gear holes as shown on the above figure. 2. Visually check if the hole A [3] and B [4] are fit with each Gear hole at the same time. B. Adjusting method
[1] [4]
1. Turn the PC Gear/1 [1], and fit the hole A [2] with the PC Gear/1 [1] hole while visually checking. 2. Fix the PC Gear/1 [1], and then fit the hole B [3] with the PC Gear/2 [4] hole while visually checking.
[2]
[3]
4036fs2173c1
3. Mount the Color PC Drum Motor [5] while two hole positions are well set.
[5]
4036fs2171c1
2-78
Other NOTE When the Upper Frame Assy is removed, adjustment should be performed at hole A [1], hole B [2] and hole C [3] while the Color Developing Motor is being removed.
[1]
[3]
[2]
4036fs2612c0
4.3.38
Color Developing Motor

[1] [3]
[2]
4036fs2107c1
1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove eight Connectors [1] on the High Voltage Unit/1. 3. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Harness Holder [3].
[4] [6] [5]

4036fs2108c1
4. Remove four Screws [4] and Connector [5], and remove the Color Developing Motor [6].
[4]
4.3.39
Bk PC Motor 1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove four Screws [1] and Connector [2], and remove the Bk PC Motor [3].
[1]
[1] [3]
[2]
4036fs2109c0
2-79
II Maintenance
Other 4.3.40 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor 1. 2. 3.
[2]
[3]
[1]
Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 Remove the High Voltage Unit/1. 2-52 Remove two Screws [1] and Connector [2], and remove the Dust Suction Fan Assy [3].
4036fs2110c1
[4]
4. Remove two Screws [4], and remove the High Voltage Unit/1 Fixing plate [5].
II Maintenance
[5]
4036fs2111c1
[7] [6] [8]

4036fs2112c1
5. Remove two Screws [6] and Connector [7], and remove the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor [8].
4.3.41
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor

[1]
1. Open the Right Door. 2. Unlock the tab and remove the Transport Unit Assy [1].
4036fs2528c0
2-80
Other 3. Remove four screws [2], unplug the connector [3], and remove the gear Assy [4] and motor Assy [5].
[2]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
4036fs2531c0
[7]
[6]
4036fs2532c0
4.3.42
Intermediate Transport Motor

[1]
1. Open the Right Door. 2. Remove the Lock claw to make free conditions of Transport section Assy [1].
4036fs2528c0
[3]
[5]
3. Remove six Connectors [3] and Earth [4], and remove the Transport section Assy [5].
[4]
[3]
4036fs2113c1
2-81
II Maintenance
4. Remove two screws [6] and the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor [7].
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4. Remove three Screws [6], and remove the Holder [7].
[6]
[7]
4036fs2114c0
[8]
5. Remove the C-ring [8], and remove the Gear 1 [9].
II Maintenance
[9]
4036fs2115c0
[10]
[11]
4036fs2116c0
[13]
[12]
4036fs2117c0
8. Remove two Screws [14], and remove the Mounting plate [15].
[14] [15]
4036fs2118c0
2-82
Other 9. Remove the Screw [16], and remove the Sensor Assy [17].
[17]
[16]
4036fs2119c1
[18]
4036fs2120c0
4.3.43
Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor

[2]
[1]
1. Remove the PWB Box. 2-74 2. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Fan Assy Protective Cover [2].
[3] [5]
3. Remove two Shoulder screws [3] and two Connectors [4], and remove the Fan Assy [5].
[4]
[4]
4036fs2102c2
[6]
4. 5. 6.
[6]
[7]
4036fs2121c1
Open the Right Door. Remove the Fusing Unit. 2-29 Remove the Wiring Cover. See the procedure 2 of 2-11 Replacing of Paper Take-up Roller. 7. Remove eight Screws [6], and remove the Rear Handle Assy [7]. 2-83
II Maintenance
[19]
10. Remove two Screws [18], and remove the Intermediate Transport Motor [19]. NOTES Remove the Intermediate Transport Motor while its Harness is well fit with the groove. CAUTION: Do not damage or pinch the harness.
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 8. Remove two Screws [8], and remove the Harness Guide [9].
[8]
[9]
4036fs2122c1
9. Remove four Screws [10].

[10]
II Maintenance
[10]
4036fs2124c1
10. Remove six Connectors [11].

[11]
[11]
[11]
4036fs2123c1
2-84
cm3520 Field Service Manual 11. Remove the Gear [12].
Other
[12]
4036fs2125c1
[14]
12. Remove the E-ring [13], and remove the Gear [14]. NOTE Use care not to miss the Shaft.
4036fs2126c1
[15]
[16]
4036fs2127c1
13. Remove the Screw [15], and remove the Wire Rail [16]. NOTE Close the Right Door when removing to prevent damage of the wire harness.
[17]
14. Remove the Fusing Drive Gear Assy [17]. NOTE CAUTION: Proper routing of wire harness should be done to prevent damage.
4036fs2128c1
15. Remove four Screws [18].
[18]
4036fs2129c1
2-85
II Maintenance
[13]
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 16. Remove the E-ring [19] and Shaft [20], and remove the Gear [21].
[19] [21] [20]
4036fs2130c1
17. Remove two E-rings [22], and remove the Cover [23].
[23]
II Maintenance
[22]
4036fs2131c1
[25]
[24]
18. Remove the E-ring [24], and remove the Gear [25].
4036fs2132c1
[27]
19. Remove the two Screws [26], and remove the Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor [27].
[26]
4036fs2133c1
4.3.44
Cleaning Brush Motor 1. Remove the High Voltage Unit/1 mounting plate. See the procedures 1 to 4 of 2-80 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor. 2. Remove the Connector [1].
[1]
4036fs2134c0
2-86
Other 3. Remove two Screws [2], and remove the Harness Holder [3].
[3]
[2]
4036fs2135c0
[5]
4. Remove four Screws [4], and remove the Cleaning Brush Motor [5].
[4]
[4]
4036fs2136c1
4.3.45
AIDC/Registration Sensor/1,2 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Panel Cover. 2-42 Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Front Right Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4036fs2082c0
[3] [4]
4. Remove the screw [3] and the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board Assy [4].
4036fs2137c0

[5]
4036fs2138c0
2-87
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 6. Open the Right Door. 7. Remove four screws [6] and the Synchronizing Roller entrance guide [7].
[7] [6] [6]
4036fs2139c0
[10] [9] [8]
8. Remove three Screws [8] and Connector [9], and remove the AIDC/ Registration Sensor/1 [10].
II Maintenance
4036fs2140c0
9. Remove two Screws [11] and Connector [12], and remove the AIDC/ Registration Sensor/2 [13].
[12] [13]
[11]
4036fs2141c0
4.3.46
LPH A. 1. 2. Removal Procedure Remove the LPH Unit. 2-62 Holding the LPH Assy [1] with hands, unlock [2] it. NOTES Do not touch the LED by hand. Clean the LED, if touched by hand, using the LED cleaning jig. Be careful about the spring that can spring off when the LPH Assy is unlocked. If the LPH Assy comes off position when the Lock is unlocked, the LPH Assy must be installed using the LPH Assy mounting jig.
4036fs2627c0
[1]
[2]
2-88

[3]
Other 3. Remove the three LPH mounting screws [3].
4036fs2628c0
[4] [6]
[5]
[7]
4036fs2629c0
B. Reinstallation Procedure NOTE The LPH comes in two types, one for black and the other for color (common to Y, M, and C). At replacement, make sure of the type of the LPH, whether it is for black or color. <Check method> Determine the type of LPH using the marking on the side face of the LPH. The markings are: LPH for black: BLACK LPH for color: COLOR
4036fs2636c0
2-89
II Maintenance
4. Peel off the seal [4], unlock [5] the LPH Assy, and remove the flat cable [6]. 5. Remove the LPH [7]. 6. Perform the same procedure for each of different colors of LPH.
Other
[3] [2]
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1. Insert the flat cable [2] into the LPH [1] and lock the LPH [1]. 2. Affix the seal [3] that comes with the LPH Assy to the location shown on the left. NOTE Failure to affix the seal could cause the flat cable to come off the LPH Assy.
[1]
II Maintenance
4036fs2630c0
3. Remove two screws [4] and the Guide [5].

[5] [4]
4036fs2631c0
[6] [8] [7]
4. Remove two Screws [6] and Connector [7], and remove the guide Assy [8].
4036fs2533c1
2-90

<LPH C/Bk>
Other 5. Align the markings [9] on the flat cable with the positions shown in the photo. 6. Install the Guide. NOTE Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent.
[9]
[9]
<LPH Y/M>
4036fs2634c0
[11]
7. Secure the LPH [10] using three screws [11].
[10]
4036fs2632c0
[12] [12]
8. Push the slack portion in the flat cable [12] into the inside of the machine.
4036fs2635c0
[13]
[14] [13]
[15]
4036fs2543c0
9. Install the two screws [13] to secure the guide Assy [14]. 10. Connect the connector [15]. NOTE Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent. Make sure that the flat cable is aligned with the groove in the Guide Assy.
2-91
II Maintenance
[9]
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 11. Press the LPH Assy [16] down into the locked position. NOTES Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust LPH Rank and change the value of LPH Rank to 1. When the LPH Unit has been reinstalled, be sure to run Stabilizer available from Image Adjust of the Tech. Rep. mode.
4036fs2633c0
[16]
ATDC Sensor Y/M/C

[1] [3]
[2]
4036fs2544c0
1. Remove the LPH Unit. 2-62 2. Remove two screws [1], unplug the connector [2], and remove the ATDC Sensor. NOTE When the LPH Unit has been reinstalled, be sure to run Stabilizer available from Image Adjust of the Tech. Rep. mode.
2-92
Other
4.4
Mount the optional original size detecting sensors
NOTE When an Original Size Detecting Sensor has been added, select SET in Org. Detect Option Sensor of System Input available from the Tech. Rep. Mode and run Org. Detect Sensor of Machine Adjust. 1. Remove the PWB Cover. See the procedures 1 to 4 of 2-48 Image Processing Board. 2. Connect the connector of the Original Size Detecting Sensor to be added to the Image Processing Board. 3. Replacing the PWB Cover. 4. Mount the Original Size Detecting Sensor (option).
CD2 Optional for the Europe, U.S.A., Taiwan G FD1 Optional for the U.S.A.
FD3 Optional for the Europe, U.S.A., Taiwan E

4036fs2619e0
<How the Harness should be Placed>

FD2 FD1 FD3
CD1 CD2
4036fs2172c1
2-93
II Maintenance
Other
4.5
4.5.1
Option counter
Installation of The Mechanical Counter 1. 2. 3.
[1]
4036fs2571c0
[2]
Open the Front Door. Remove the Panel Cover. 2-42 Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Front Right Cover [2].
[4]
[3]
4. Cut out the knockout [4] in the Front Right Cover [3].
II Maintenance
4036fs2572c0
5. Remove two screws [5] and the Right Front Cover [6].
[6]
[5]
4036fs2573c0
[9]
6. Install the Mounting plate [7] on the Mechanical Counter [9] with the Screw [8].
[7]
[8]
4036fs2574c0
2-94
Other 7. Secure the mechanical counter [11] with the screw [10].
[11] [10]
4036fs2575c0
[12] [13]
8. Mount the Connector [12] of Mechanical Counter on the Relay Connector [13] at main body side.
4036fs2576c0
4.5.2
Installation method for the Key Counter 1. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Cover [2]. 2. Remove the Lower Rear Cover. 2-42
[2]
[1]
4036fs2585c1
[4]
3. Pass the Key Counter Harness [3] through the hole. 4. Mount the Connector [4].
[3]
4036fs2182c0
[7] [6]
5. Secure the counter cable [5] and cable holder [6] with one screw [7]. 6. Reinstall the Rear Cover.
[5]
4036fs2586c0
2-95
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Field Service Manual 7. Using four screws [9], secure the Counter Mounting Bracket [8]. NOTE Secure the Counter Mounting Bracket passing the connector into the bracket.
[9]
4036fs2587c0
[8]
[11]
8. Connect the Key Counter Socket connector [10]. 9. Using two screws [12], secure the counter socket [11].
II Maintenance
[12]
[10]
4036fs2588c0
[13] [14]
10. Using two screws [14], secure the Key Counter Cover [13].
4036fs2589c0
[15]
11. Fix the harness [16] with the cable clamp [15] as shown in the left figure. 12. Select Security Mode Admin. Choice Key Counter and set Set.
[16]
4036fs2626c0
2-96
How to use the adjustment section
1. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Throughout this section, the default settings are indicated by boldface. A. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve a customers problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. III Adjustment/Setting
3-1
Adjustment item list
2.

Replace Paper Separator Roll Assy Replace Image Transfer Roller Unit (2) Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit Change Paper (1st Drawer) Kind Replace Paper Take-Up Roller
Replacement Part/Service Job
Change Marketing Area
Install Paper Feed Unit
Replace CCD Unit
Install Duplex Unit
Replace IR Unit (6) (5) (1)
Adjustment/Setting Items NO Top Margin PRT Area Left Margin Dup. Margin Zoom for FD LPH Chip Adjust LPH Rank (Changes to 1) Machine Adjust Top Margin IR Area Left Margin CD-Mag FD-Mag Org. Detect Sensor Adjust Touch Panel Adjust Memory/ Hard Disk Adjust ROM Version Reentry of Setting Values System Input Org. Detect Option Sensor Serial # Input Hard Dis Administrator # Input Counter Life Counter Clear Hard Disk R/W Check 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
(1)
(3) (4) (2) (3)
Tech. Rep. Mode
Hard Disk Format 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Gradation Adjust Re-entry of Utility settings Re-entry of Security settings
Parallel adjustment of Scanner/Mirrors Carriage 25 Positioning Exposure Unit Scanner Motor timing belt adjustment F/W upgrading Installation of Original Size Sensor Remounting of ROM (Control Board) Remounting of RAM (MFP Control Board) 26 27 28 29 30 31
3-2
Replace IU
This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. Priority order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the circle.
Replace Image Processing Board Replace Original Size Detecting Sensor Replace Scanner Home Sensor
Replace Paper Dust Remover
Replace Original Width Scale
Replace MFP Control Board
Wind Scanner Drive Cables
Add Key Counter D-103
Replace Scanner Motor
Replace Original Glass
Execute Memory Clear
Replace Control Board
Replace Scanner Assy
Execute Add. Option
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
(3) (3) (4) (4)
(4) (2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (1) (2) (5) (3) (3) (3) (8) (3) (2) (5) (2) (2) (3) (1) (1) (2) (3) (1) (1) (2) (2) (1) (1) (1) (1) (7) (4) (6) (1)
Execute F/W update
Replace LPH Assy
Replace LPH Unit
Add Hard Disk
3-3
Utility Mode
3.
3.1
Utility Mode
Utility Mode function tree
The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. Utility
: Displayed according to a given condition, such as
option installation. Store Reset Mode Mode Store Copy Mode Scan Mode
Counter List Controller Detail 1/2 Users Choice: 1 2/2 Key Click Sound Power Save Sleep Account Change Auto Reset Language Select 2in1, 4in1, Booklet Copy Zoom ACS Judgement Level Adjustment Intelligent Sorting Criss Cross Paper Type Select Auto-select paper for small originals 4in1 Copy Order Centering Priority Output tray Priority Device
1/3
Users Choice: 2
2/3
3/3 Copy program Recall
Basic Font Printer Setting Default setting Report Types Configuration Test Page PCL FontList PS FontList
Default Tray Paper Size Output Orientation Lines per page Typeface Symbol Set Font Size
Unit Life Indication Admin. Mode Toner Coverage
3-4
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3.1.1 Administrator Mode function tree
Utility Mode
Administrator Mode 1/2 The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Admin. Mode
option installation. Top Erase Disable Sleep Mode A3 Wide Paper Size *1 Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time Skip Volume Track (E. K. C.) Error Unauthorized Access Lock Access Lock Release User Authentication LDAP Search Box Function Date & Time Setting Reprint HDD Lock Administrator Code Change PSL Administrator Code Change Panel Reset Timer Add Prefix/Suffix Prefix/Suffix Registration Volume Track Mode (E. K. C.) Volume Track Setting (E. K. C.) Volume Track Data (E. K. C.) III Adjustment/Setting
Administrator Code
1/4
2/4
Admin. Set.
3/4
4/4
Volume Track (E. K. C.)
Call Service Cent.
Printer Setting
Common Setting PCL Setting
PDL Setting I/O Timeout Parallel Interface Screen Pattern Setting Overwrite A4 Letter
Scan setting
Device Name Color/Grayscale Compression Pri. Comp. Method for Monochrome
Next Page
*1 : Inch Area :Over Size paper selection
3-5
Utility Mode Administrator Mode 2/2 Admin. Mode
option installation. TCP/IP DNS NetWare Receive Send Print Common Setting E-mail/Internet FTP Server Twain LDAP Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 Server 5 Operation Lock Time for TWAIN Network setting Authentication Other Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density Color Shift Correction (C) Color Shift Correction (M) Color Shift Correction (Y) Color Shift Correction (Bk) Black Image Density Correction Stabilizer PRT Area (Top Margin) PRT Area (Left Margin) PRT Area (Dup. Left Margin) Center Staple Position
Administrator Code
Network Setting
Expert User Mode
Gradation Adjustment POP3 Server POP3 Login Name POP3 Password POP3 Port Number E-Mail Address Mail Check Connection Timeout SMTP server SMTP Port Number Timeout of SMTP Server
Server Setting (KRDS)

Change the functions to
POP3 Server Receive Send Status
those of Server Setting (RD) according to the Remote Diagnosis System selected for use.
3-6
Utility Mode
3.2
3.2.1
Utility Mode function setting procedure

Procedure
1. Press the Utility key. 2. The Utility mode screen will appear.
4036fs3033e0
3.2.2
Exiting
Touch the Fin. Time key. 3.2.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions III Adjustment/Setting
Use the Up/Down key to enter or change the setting value. Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press the Clear key before making an entry.)
3-7
Utility Mode
3.3
3.3.1
Settings in the store

Reset Mode
To register the copy mode functions or scanner mode functions The copier is initialized at the following timings: The Power Switch is turned ON. Panel is reset. An Interrupt mode is canceled. Auto panel reset The access # entry screen for Volume Track is changed Application is changed
Functions
Use
To match the copying functions set up upon resetting to users need.
Setting/Procedure Current Mode The copy mode or scanner mode functions set arbitrarily on the panel are registered. Factory Default The factory-set copy mode or scanner mode functions are registered.
3.3.2
Functions Use
Mode Store
To register the copy mode functions being currently set as a job program or check or delete a job program that has previously been registered. To save the copying settings the user wants To make copies using previously stored settings by calling up a job program previously stored
Setting/Procedure Up to ten different job programs can be registered. Copy Program Recall as a Utility function is used to call up a program.
3.4
Counter List
To check the count of each counter or print a list of counters. To check the total number of copies made and the number of printed pages produced in color and B/W, thereby identifying machine usage
Functions Use
Setting/Procedure To print the list, load Tray1 with A4 lengthwise or Letter lengthwise paper. The machine rejects the print cycle if Tray1 is loaded with paper of any other size.
3.5
Controller Detail
To set the external controller This function is not available if there is no external controller connected to the machine. To change the setting of the external controller
Functions
Use
Setting/Procedure For details, see the manual for the external controller (option).
3-8
Utility Mode
3.6
3.6.1
Users Choice: 1
1/2
A. Key Click Sound

Functions Use To select whether to enable or disable the click sound that sounds each time a key on the control panel is pressed. To disable the key click sound
Setting/Procedure The default setting is ON. ON OFF
3.6.2
2/2
A. Power Save
Functions To set the time it takes the machine to enter the Power Save mode after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated. Power Save: Turns OFF the LED, LCD, etc. to reduce power consumption To change the time it takes the machine to enter the Power Save mode
Use
Setting/Procedure Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the time (10 to 240 min.). The default setting is 15 min. 15 min (10 to 240)
Functions
To select whether to transfer to Power Save when a job is set in Held/Locked Job queue Held Job: Job to be printed only when Held is canceled Locked Job: Job to be printed only when a valid password is entered Use to cancel Power Save for a held or locked job
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Permit. Permit Prohibit
B. Sleep
Functions To set the time it takes the machine to enter the Sleep mode after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated All power lines but the control 5-V one are shut down. The option of No becomes available only when Yes is selected for Disable Sleep Mode of Admin. Set under Admin. Mode. To change the time it takes the machine to enter the Sleep mode
Use
Setting/Procedure Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the time (15 to 240 min.). The default setting is 15 min. 30 min (10 to 240)
3-9
Transferring to Power Save when job is in Held/Locked Jobs queue
Utility Mode
Transferring to Power Save when job is in Held/Locked Jobs queue

Functions Use To select whether to transfer to Sleep when a job is set in Held/Locked Job queue Use to cancel Sleep for a held or locked job
C. Account Change Auto Reset

Functions To select whether to reset the copying mode functions to the default ones when the Key Counter is unplugged, a magnetic card is pulled out, or the access # is entered for Volume Track. To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Yes. Yes No
3.7
3.7.1
Users Choice: 2
1/3
A. Language Select III Adjustment/Setting

Functions Use To select the language of the LCD display messages. The counter outputs will be produced in the language selected. To change the language displayed on the control panel to the desired one
Setting/Procedure The language options depend on the marketing area selected in Marketing Area available from System Input under Tech. Rep. Mode.
B. 2in1, 4in1, Booklet Copy Zoom

Functions Use To select, when 2in1, 4in1, or Booklet is selected, whether or not to automatically call up the zoom ratio optimum for the mode. To allow the user to set the zoom ratio him/herself when 2in1, 4in1, or Booklet is selected
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Preset (call up). Preset No Preset
C. ACS Judgement Level Adjustment

Functions Use To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a blackand-white original in the Auto Color (ACS) mode. To change the criterion level, with which an image containing partly colored areas is taken as a black-and-white original
Setting/Procedure Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3. Near Black 1 2 3 4 5 Near Full Color
3-10
cm3520 Field Service Manual D. Intelligent Sorting

Functions
Utility Mode
To select whether to enable or disable the function that automatically switches between Sort and Non-Sort according to the number of originals and the number of copy sets to be made. To select not to use the automatic sorting function when a document of two or more pages is loaded in the ADF
Use
E. Criss Cross
Functions To select whether to enable or disable the crisscross sorting function that stacks sorted copy sets in a crisscross manner, i.e., one set stacked lengthwise on top of another set stacked crosswise. Crisscross sorting is disabled when a Finisher is mounted on the machine. To disable crisscross sorting for paper of the same size
Use
3.7.2
2/3
A. Paper Type Select

Functions To set the paper type for Tray2 through Tray4. Special paper: Type of paper that the user does not want to be automatically selected (paper with company logo) To prevent a special type of paper, including that for use for single-sided only, from being inadvertently used when such a type of paper is loaded in the trays
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Standard (plain paper). Standard, High Quality Paper, Single Sided Only, Specialty
B. Auto-select paper for small originals

Functions To select whether or not to enable copying when an original, whose size falls outside the detectable range, is loaded in the Auto Paper mode and to select the paper source to be used. To use a document that is not good for original size detection (e.g. business cards) If ON is selected, a copy cycle can be initiated even with no originals loaded.
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is OFF (disable copying). OFF ON
The default setting for the paper source is Tray1.
3-11
Utility Mode C. 4in1 Copy Order

Functions Use
To select the layout of copy images in the 4in1 mode. To change the layout of copy images in the 4in1 mode
Setting/Procedure The default setting is as follows:
default setting
1 3
2 4
1 2
3 4
D. Centering
Functions Use To select whether to center the image with respect to the paper. To select not to allow the image to center in the paper when the paper is larger than the original Use when the size of the original is smaller than that of the paper selected for use.
3.7.3 III Adjustment/Setting
3/3
A. Priority Output tray

Functions Set the priority output tray for each of the copier print, PC print, and the Internet Fax print. When the 9997 is mounted. Use To change the output tray according to the application Setting/Procedure The default settings are as follows (as set with the corresponding number shown on the display). Copy : 2 (Elevator Tray) Print (PC print) : 2 (Elevator Tray) Internet : 2 (Elevator Tray) When the job tray (CM3500010) is mounted : Internet default settings is 3
B. Priority Device
Functions Use To set the print timing for the PC print jobs received. To have one page each printed for a PC print job
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Printer. Copier : After the reception of all data Printer : After the reception of data for each page
3-12
Utility Mode
3.8
Copy program Recall

To call up a program registered through Job Memory Input. To call up a job program that the user has previously programmed and registered
Functions Use
Setting/Procedure Select the program number. If the machine is not equipped with capabilities (e.g., stapling) that were provided when the program was registered, calling up that particular program is disabled.
3.9
3.9.1
Printer Setting
Default setting
A. Basic (1) Default Tray

Functions Use To set the default Tray used by the printer To change the default value of Tray for the printer
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Auto Paper Select. Displayed options are only the paper sources connected to the machine.
Functions Use
To set the default paper size used by the printer To change the default value of paper size for the printer
Setting/Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting. Metric Area : A4 Inch Area : Letter
(3) Output
Functions Use To set the default values of printing method and number of copy sets for the printer To change the default values of printing method and number of copy sets for the printer
Setting/Procedure Printing Method The default setting is Simplex. Simplex Duplex
Binding Method Displayed when Duplex is selected The default setting is left-edge binding. (left-edge binding) No. of Sets The default setting is 1. 1 (1 to 999) (top-edge binding)
3-13
(2) Paper Size
Utility Mode (4) Orientation

Functions Use
To set the default orientation of the image used for the printer To change the default value of the orientation of the image used for the printer
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Portrait. Portrait Landscape
A
(5) Lines per page
Functions Use
To set the number of lines per page for printing of text using the printer To change the number of lines printed per page by the printer
Setting/Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting. Metric Area : 64 lines Inch Area :60 lines (5 to 128 lines)
B. Font (1) Typeface

Functions To set the default font type used in the printer To change the default value of the font used in the printer
Use
Setting/Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting. Displayed are only those fonts installed.
(2) Symbol Set

Functions Use To set the default symbol set of the font used in the printer To change the default value of the symbol set of the font used in the printer
Setting/Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting. Some symbol sets cannot be selected depending on the font face selected for use.
(3) Font Size

Functions Use To set the default font size used in the printer To change the default value of the font size used in the printer
Setting/Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting. Scalable Font 12 point Bitmap Font 10 pitch (0.44 to 99.00 pitch) (4.00 to 999.75 point)
3-14

Functions Use
Utility Mode
Report Types
To set the output of the various types of reports as they relate to the printer To select the types of reports to be output as they relate to the printer
Setting/Procedure These are the types of reports that can be output: Configuration: Report covering the configuration of the system including options Demo Page: Format report for demonstration PCL Font List: List of fonts of PCL emulation (to be output only when they are installed) PS Font List: List of fonts of PostScript emulation (to be output only when they are installed)
3.10 Unit Life Indication

Functions Use To check each unit for life. To check each unit for conditions before it reaches the end of its service life
Setting/Procedure The life indicator of each unit is displayed. Pressing the Print key produces a printout of a list of counter counts. To print the list, load Tray1 with A4 or Letter lengthwise or Letter lengthwise paper.
3-15
Utility Mode
3.11 Settings in the Admin. Mode

Entering the 8-digit administrator number set in the Admin. Mode will allow you to enter the Admin. Mode (default value: 00000000).
3.11.1
Admin. Set.
A. 1/4 (1) Top Erase

Functions Use To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper. To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 5 mm. 5 mm 7 mm
(2) Disable Sleep Mode

Functions Use To display the option of No for the Sleep setting screen available from User's Choice 1. To display the option of No for the Sleep setting
Setting/Procedure The default setting is No. Yes No
(3) A3 Wide Paper Size (Over Size Paper selection) III Adjustment/Setting
Functions Use Select paper size of A3 Wide. (Over Size Paper) To change the full bleed paper size
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 305 457 mm or 12 18. Metric areas: 311 457 mm 305 457 mm Inch areas : 12-1/4 18 12 18
(4) Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time

Functions To set the period of time, at the end of which locked jobs are automatically deleted Locked job: Job to be printed only when a valid password is entered To change the period of time, at the end of which locked jobs are automatically deleted
Use
Setting/Procedure Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the time. The default setting is No. No (1 to 99 hour)
(5) Skip Volume Track (E. K. C.) Error

Functions This function is used to specify whether or not other jobs can skip a job that was stopped because the maximum number of copies has been reached for the account. Used to specify whether or not other jobs can skip a job that was stopped
Use
3-16
cm3520 Field Service Manual B. 2/4 (1) Unauthorized Access Lock

Functions
Utility Mode
To select whether to enable or disable the unauthorized access lock function If a wrong authentication number (Administrator Code or access #) is entered three times cumulatively (three consecutive times for the access # for Volume Track and print lock unlocking) with this function enabled, the machine determines that it is an illegal access, nullifying the entry. Perform the following steps to cancel the nullified state of entry of the authentication number. Nullified state of the Administrator Code: Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. Nullified state of the number other than the Administrator Code: Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch or select Access Lock Release as set by the administrator. To enable the unauthorized access lock function when an illegal access is attempted
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Disable. Enable Disable
(2) Access Lock Release

Functions Use To cancel the Unauthorized Access Lock state To cancel the unauthorized access lock state when Unauthorized Access Lock has been activated
(3) User Authentication

Functions To select whether or not to use user authentication when the Scanner mode or Box mode is being used If user authentication is to be used, the type of authentication is selected: Active Directory or NTLM To use user authentication when the Scanner mode or Box mode is being used
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is No. No Active Directory NTLM
If authentication was set to be performed with Active Directory or NTLM, input the domain name.
(4) LDAP Search

Functions To select whether or not to use the LDAP Search function LDAP Search: Performs search with the LDAP server based on the keyword entered To prohibit the LDAP Search in the Scanner mode or Box mode.
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Prohibit. Permit Prohibit
3-17
Setting/Procedure Lock Job: Cancel the access lock for locked jobs. Volume Track (E. K. C.): Cancel the access lock for Volume Track. HDD: Cancel the access lock for HDD.
Utility Mode (5) Box Function

Functions Use
To select whether or not to use the Box function Box function: Stores image data in the hard disk box for later use To prohibit the use of the Box function
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Prohibit. Permit Prohibit
C. 3/4 (1) Date & Time Setting

Functions Use To set the time-of-day, date, and time zone and start the clock. To change the settings for time-of-day and date Use as part of setup procedures.
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 00:00, January 1, 2000. For the time zone, set the time difference from the Greenwich Mean Time. The time zone can be set between -1200 and +1200 (in 30 minute intervals).
(2) Reprint
Functions Use To select whether to permit recalling and copying of image data which has previously been subjected to a copy cycle. To prohibit Reprint
(3) HDD Lock

Functions To select whether or not to use the HDD Lock function and, if selected to use, set the password The contents of the hard disk mounted in the machine are locked using the password. If HDD Lock has previously been set, this function is used to change the password or unlock HDD Lock. To use the HDD Lock function
Use
By selecting the HDD Lock function when the hard disk is already locked, the password can be changed or the lock setting for the hard disk can be removed.
(4) Administrator Code Change

Functions Use To change the Administrator Code To change the Administrator Code required for entering the Admin. Mode
Setting/Procedure Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the new Administrator Code. 8 digits (0 to 9)
3-18
cm3520 Field Service Manual (5) PSL Administrator Code Change

Functions Use
Utility Mode
To change the PSL Administrator Code This function becomes available depending on the option installation. To change the PSL Administrator Code required for entering the Admin. Mode
Setting/Procedure Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the new Administrator Code. 4 digits (0 to 9)
D. 4/4 (1) Panel Reset Timer

Functions To set the time it takes the Auto Panel Reset function to be activated after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated. The default settings are established when Auto Panel Reset is activated. To select not to enable Auto Panel Reset or change the time it takes the Auto Panel Reset function to be activated
Use
Setting/Procedure Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the Auto Panel Reset time. (1 to 9 min.) The default setting is 1 min. 1 min (1 to 9) No
(2) Add Prefix/Suffix

Functions Use This function is used to specify whether or not a prefix/suffix is added when recalling or entering an address in Scan mode or Box mode.
(3) Prefix/Suffix Registration

Functions To register or change Prefix or Suffix Up to eight different types of Prefix or Suffix can be registered. Prefix: Characters added to the header portion of the document (header) Suffix: Characters added to the footer portion of the document (footer) To register or change the text displayed as Prefix or Suffix
Use
Setting/Procedure Up to 20 characters can be used for Prefix. Up to 64 characters can be used for Suffix.
3-19
To add Prefix/Suffix to the address in the Scan or Box mode
Utility Mode
3.12 Settings in Volume Track (E. K. C.)

3.12.1
Functions Use
Volume Track Mode (E. K. C.)

To select whether to enable or disable the Volume Track function. To use the Volume Track function
If the option is changed from Yes to No, the Volume Track data is initialized.
Scanning from PC
Functions Use To select whether to enable or disable Scanning from PC for Volume Track Scanning from PC: To scan from the TWAIN driver of a PC on the network To disable Scanning from PC during Volume Track
3.12.2
Functions
Volume Track Setting (E. K. C.)

To set the Volume Track operations for each account To change the settings of each account
Use
Setting/Procedure Volume Number Select the account (001 to 998), for which the settings are to be changed. Access# Set the access # (00000001 to 99999998) for authentication for entering each account. Allowances Set the output of each of color, black, and scan. Upper Limit Copy + Print Set the upper limit of printed pages to be produced in total or individually (color and black).
3.12.3
Functions
Volume Track Data (E. K. C.)

To browse, clear, or otherwise operate the counter data of each account. Counters are the total, copy, and printer counter. The counter counts are classified into the paper size, print type, etc. The counters for the accounts can be cleared or initialize the Volume Track Data (E.K.C.) counters for all accounts,
Use
To check, clear, or print the counter values of each account
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 0. 0 (0 to 999999)
To print the list, load Tray1 with A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
3-20
Utility Mode
3.13 Settings in Printer Setting

3.13.1 Common Setting A. PDL Setting
Functions Use To set the default page description language (PDL) for the printer controller Only the PDLs mounted in the machine can be selected. To change the PDL
Setting/Procedure Options displayed represent the PDLs mounted in the machine. Typical options: Auto Set PCL PostScript GDI
B. I/O Timeout
Functions Use To set the I/O timeout period for communications To extend the timeout period if timeout occurs frequently depending on the network conditions
Setting/Procedure Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the Auto Panel Reset time. (10 to 300 sec.) The default setting is 15 sec. 15 sec (10 to 300)
C. Parallel Interface
Functions Use To set the two-way communication system for the parallel interface To change the communications method of the parallel interface
Setting/Procedure The default setting is ECP. Compatible Nibble ECP
D. Screen Pattern Setting

Functions Use To set the screen pattern for PC print To change the screen pattern to be output in PC print
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Gradation. Gradation Resolution
3-21
Utility Mode 3.13.2 PCL Setting
A. Overwrite A4 Letter
Functions Use To permit output of A4 instead of Letter, or vice versa To produce an output of the same size from a document containing pages of both A4 and Letter
3.14 Settings in Scan setting

3.14.1
Functions Use
Device Name
To register the device name to be added to the transmission file name To add the device name to the transmission file name
Setting/Procedure The default setting is No. Up to 36 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
3.14.2
Functions
Color/Grayscale Compression
To set the compression level (image quality) for scanning of the image in JPEG file format To change the compression level
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Standard. High Quality Standard Economy
3.14.3
Functions Use
Pri. Comp. Method for Monochrome

To set the compression method used for scanning in the monochrome mode of the image of the color mode for each file type To change the compression method
Setting/Procedure PDF The default setting is MH. MH MMR
TIFF The default setting is MH. MH MMR
3-22
Utility Mode
3.15 Settings in Network Setting

3.15.1 Common Setting A. TCP/IP (1) IP Address
Functions Use To set the IP address of the device used in the network To enter the IP address of the device
Setting/Procedure IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]
(2) Subnet Mask

Functions Use To set the subnet mask of the device used in the network To enter the subnet mask of the device
(3) Gateway Address

Functions Use To set the gateway address of the device used in the network To enter the gateway address of the device
[0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]
(4) DHCP
Functions Use To set DHCP for the network To use DHCP
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Disable Disable Enable
B. DNS (1) DNS Server

Functions Use To set the DNS server To enter the DNS server
Setting/Procedure Three addresses of IP address 1, IP address 2, and IP address 3 can be registered. IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]
3-23
Setting/Procedure IP Address Version 4 format
Utility Mode C. NetWare (1) Frame Type

Functions Use
To set the frame type of Ethernet when the NetWare is used To change the frame type
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Auto Detect Auto Detect II 802.3 802.2 SNAP
3.15.2
E-mail/Internet
A. Receive (1) POP3 Server

Functions Use To set the address of the POP3 Server used in reception of email To set the address of the POP3 Server
(2) POP3 Login Name

Functions Use To set the logon name used to log on to the POP3 server to receive email To set the logon name for the POP3 server
(3) POP3 Password

Functions Use To set the password used to log on to the POP3 server to receive email To set the logon password for the POP3 server
(4) Mail Check

Functions Use To select whether to enable or disable automatic incoming mail check with the POP server To select to disable automatic incoming mail check
(5) Initialize
Functions Use To select whether or not to initialize the setting data for reception and transmission To initialize the setting data for reception and transmission
Pressing the Start key with Yes selected will let machine start the initialization procedure.
3-24
cm3520 Field Service Manual B. Send (1) SMTP Server

Functions Use To set the address of the SMTP Server used in reception of email To set the address of the SMTP Server
Utility Mode
(2) Timeout of SMTP Server

Functions Use To set the timeout period for connection to the SMTP server used for email transmission To change the timeout period for connection to the SMTP server
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 30 sec. 30 sec. (30 to 300)
(3) Mail Separation

Functions To select whether to enable or disable mail separation when the size of the email to be transmitted exceeds the upper limit value Upper limit value: Default value 500 kB (variable range: 100 to 3,000 kB) The maximum email size can be set or changed from the setting tool (PSL) on the PC. To send data of a large size
Use
C. Print (1) Text Print

Functions Use To select whether or not to print the email message in addition to the attached file during reception of Email/Internet Fax To print also the email message during printing of Email/Internet Fax received
(2) Internet Fax Print Size

Functions Use To set the zoom ratio for printing of received Internet Fax To change the zoom ratio for printing of received Internet Fax
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Minimal. Minimal Full Size A4/Letter
3-25
Utility Mode 3.15.3 FTP Server
A. Server 1 (1) IP Address

Functions Use To set the address of the FTP Server used in Scan to Server To set the address of the FTP Server
(2) Login Name

Functions Use To set the logon name used to log on to the FTP Server to Scan to Server To set the logon name for the FTP Server
Setting/Procedure Up to 32 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
(3) PIN #
Functions Use To set the password used to log on to the FTP Server to Scan to Server To set the logon password for the FTP Server
(4) Directory III Adjustment/Setting

Functions Use To set the directory of the file server for transfer of files through Scan to Server To set the directory of the file server
B. Server 2 Same settings as those of Server 1 C. Server 3 Same settings as those of Server 1 D. Server 4 Same settings as those of Server 1 E. Server 5 Same settings as those of Server 1 3.15.4 Twain
A. Operation Lock Time for TWAIN

Functions To set the period of time before the machine lock, which has been invoked to capture image to PC through TWAIN scan, is forcedly unlocked when no instructions are given by PC To change the period of time, during which the machine has been connected from the image capturing application from the PC and scan-locked, and is then unlocked from this state
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 60 sec. 60 sec. (30 to 300)
3-26
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3.15.5 LDAP
Utility Mode
A. Network setting (1) LDAP Server Address

Functions Use To set the IP Address or DNS name of the LDAP Server To set the IP Address or DNS name of the LDAP Server
Setting/Procedure IP Address IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255]. [0 to 255] DNS name Up to 255 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
(2) SSL/TLS
Functions To select whether or not to use SSL/TLS in communications with the LDAP server SSL/TLS: Protocol that ensures proper data exchange with the server; encryption, etc. To use SSL/TLS
Use
(3) Port Number

Functions Use To set the port number to be used in communications with the LDAP server To set the port number
The default value for using SSL/TLS is 636.
(4) Search Base

Functions Use To enter the search start position for LDAP search To change the search start position for LDAP search
Setting/Procedure Up to 255 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be set for the search.
B. Authentication (1) Authentication System

Functions Use To set the authentication system for LDAP server To change the authentication system for LDAP server
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Anonymous. Anonymous Simple Digest MD5/CRAM-MD5 GSS-SPNEGO
To set the Domain name of the GSS-SPNEGO. (Up to 128 characters)
3-27
Utility Mode (2) Login Name

Functions Use To set the logon name for the LDAP Server
Use to set the logon name for the LDAP Server
(3) Password
Functions Use To set the logon password for the LDAP Server Use to set the logon password for the LDAP Server
C. Other (1) Max. Number of Searches

Functions Use To set the maximum number of searches for LDAP search To change the maximum number of searches for LDAP search
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 100 Num Case. 100 Num Case (5 to 120 Num Case)
(2) Connection Timeout

Functions To set the timeout period for connection to the LDAP server To change the timeout period for connection to the LDAP server
Use
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 60 sec. 60 sec. (5 to 300 sec.)
3.16 Settings in Expert User Mode

3.16.1
Functions Use
Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density

To adjust the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies
Adjustment Range The fine-adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps, two darker levels and two lighter levels around the standard central level. Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Light color: Touch the Darker key. Dark color: Touch the Lighter key. 1. Touch Expert User Mode Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density. 2. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density.
3-28

Functions
Utility Mode
Color Shift Correction (Bk)

To correct black color shift, if it occurs Make Color Shift Corrections (cyan, magenta, and yellow) after this adjustment has been made. To correct black color shift, if it occurs 0 (-10 to +10 dot)
Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure
If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting value. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting value. Touch Expert User Mode Color Shift Correction (Bk). Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper. Press the Start key. Fold the printed test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation (the image on the inside). 5. Check deviation between black lines A and B. 6. Change the setting value using the Up/Down key as necessary. 7. Produce another test pattern and check for deviation. 1. 2. 3. 4. Check Procedure Check point A, B
B
4036fs3001c0
Direction of C
Direction of D
A B
4036fs3002c0
4036fs3003c0
3-29
If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting value. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting value.
Utility Mode 3.16.3

Functions
Color Shift Correction (C, M, Y)

To adjust color shift if there is any color shift as found through comparison of the copy with the original Before making this adjustment, be sure to perform Color Shift Correction (Bk). To correct any color shift 0 (-6 to +6 dot)
If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting. 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch Expert User Mode Color Shift Correction (cyan). Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper. Press the Start key. Check deviation of the cyan line relative to the black lines at positions X and Y on the printed test pattern. 5. Change the setting value using the Up/Down key as necessary. Changing the setting value moves only the selected color (cyan). 6. Produce another test pattern and check for deviation. 7. When the color shift of cyan has been adjusted, make the adjustment for magenta and yellow. Check Procedure Check point X,Y
4036fs3004c0
Adjustment for X direction: Check point X
If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting. Direction of D
Direction of C
4036fs3005c0
4036fs3006c0
Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y
Direction of C
4036fs3007c0
4036fs3008c0
3-30

Functions Use
Utility Mode
Black Image Density Correction

To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy
Adjustment Range Lighter (2 steps), Std, Darker (2 steps) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the black is light, touch the Darker key. If the black is dark, touch the Lighter key. 1. Touch Expert User Mode Black Image Density Correction. 2. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density.
3.16.5
Stabilizer
A. Stabilize
Functions Use The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. When PRT Max Density, PRT Highlight, and Background Voltage Margin of Tech. Rep. mode are changed. 1. Touch Expert User Mode Stabilizer. 2. Touch Stabilize. 3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. 4. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green.
Adjustment Procedure
B. Reset and Stabilize

Functions The image stabilization control historical data is cleared and an image stabilization sequence is carried out. Cleared data: PRT Max Density, PRT Highlight, Background Voltage Margin and Gradation Adjustment. Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer has been executed. 1. Touch Expert User Mode Stabilizer. 2. Touch Reset and Stabilize. 3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. 4. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green.
Use
3-31
Utility Mode 3.16.6

Functions Use
PRT Area (Top Margin)

To vary the print start position in the FD direction for each of different paper types in Tray1. The LPH Unit has been replaced. The paper type has been changed. The image on the copy deviates in the FD direction. A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. A misfeed occurs at the 2nd image transfer section. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Specifications: 5.0 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
Adjustment Specification
4036fs3009c0
Adjustment Instructions
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select according to the paper used on the Paper Type Setting Dial. Touch Expert User Mode PRT Area (Top Margin). Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/Down key. 6. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 7. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 8. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 9. If width A falls within the specified range, touch Enter. 10.Following the same procedure, adjust for thick paper, OHP, and envelopes.
3-32

Functions Use
Utility Mode
PRT Area (Left Margin)

To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source. The LPH Unit has been replaced. A paper feed unit has been added. The image on the copy deviates in the CD direction. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Specifications: 3.0 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
4036fs3010c0
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Touch Expert User Mode PRT Area (Left Margin). Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/Down key. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. If width A falls within the specified range, touch Enter. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Bypass.)
3-33
Utility Mode 3.16.8

Functions Use Adjustment Specification
PRT Area (Dup. Left Margin)

To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source in the 2Sided mode. The Automatic Duplex Unit has been set up. The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the CD direction. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern. Backside Specifications: 3.0 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
4036fs3010c0
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Touch Expert User Mode PRT Area (Dup. Left Margin). Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/Down key. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. If width A falls within the specified range, touch Enter. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Bypass.)
3-34

Utility Mode
Center Staple Position

To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for the Finisher. Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Booklet function. Center staple position: The adjustment range is -7.0 mm to +7.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). Fold position: The adjustment range is -7.0 mm to +7.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). If deviated to the left, increase the setting value. If deviated to the right, decrease the setting value. 1. Use the Booklet function to make one sample booklet. 2. Touch Expert User Mode Center Staple Position. 3. Check the sample copy and make the necessary adjustment as detailed in the following. Adjusting the center staple position: 4. If the staple positions deviate, use these steps to make the adjustment. If the staple positions deviate to the left side, increase the setting value. If the staple positions deviate to the right side, decrease the setting value.
Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure
Deviated to left
Deviated to right
4036fs3011c0
4036fs3012c0
Adjusting the folding position: 5. If the folding position deviates, use these steps to make the adjustment. If the folding position deviates to the left side, increase the setting value. If the folding position deviates to the right side, decrease the setting value.
Deviated to left
Deviated to right
4036fs3013c0
4036fs3014c0
6. Quit the Utility mode. 7. Using the Booklet function, make another sample booklet for confirmation. 8. Check the sample copy and repeat the adjustment procedures until there are no deviations in the staple or folding position.
3-35
Utility Mode
3.17 Gradation Adjustment

Functions Use To make an automatic adjustment for an optimum gradation value based on the test pattern produced and the reading taken by the Scanner Color reproduction performance becomes poor. The IU has been replaced. The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced. The Adj. Values of Max. and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjustment screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. Conv. Value shows the difference from the ideal image density. The closer the Conv. Value to 0, the more ideal the image. Max : 0 100 Highlight : 0 60 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch Gradation Adjustment. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.) Touch OK and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice (a total of three times). Touch Gradation Adjustment to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values of each color (C, M, Y and Bk) for Max and Highlight. 8. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value. Max: 0 100 and Highlight: 0 60: It completes the adjustment procedure. If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 2 to 6. If a fault is detected, 0 is displayed for all values. In this case, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjustment once again. If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform PRT Max Density or PRT Highlight. If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjustment do not bring the values into the specified range, check the image. If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.
Adjustment Specification Adjustment Procedure
3-36
Utility Mode
3.18 Server Setting (KRDS) / Server Setting (RD)

Either Server Setting (KRDS) or Server Setting (RD) is selected according to the set Remote Diagnosis System. Detailed settings are the same between the two. 3.18.1 POP3 Server
A. POP3 Server
Functions Use To set the POP3 server address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the address of the POP3 Server
B. POP3 Login Name

Functions Use To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the logon name for the POP3 server
C. POP3 Password
Functions Use To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the logon password for the POP3 server
D. POP3 Port Number

Functions Use To set the POP3 port number used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the port number for the POP3 server
3.18.2
Receive
A. E-Mail Address
Functions Use To set the email address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To set the email address
3-37
Utility Mode B. Mail Check

Functions Use
To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To select not to use Mail Check To change the time interval for Mail Check
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 15 min. 15 min. (1 to 120 min., No)
C. Connection Timeout
Functions Use To set the timeout period for connection during reception To change the timeout period for connection during reception
3.18.3
Send
A. SMTP server
Functions Use To set the SMTP server address for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To set the address of the SMTP Server
B. SMTP Port Number

Functions Use To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server
C. Timeout of SMTP Server

Functions Use To set the timeout period for transmission To change the timeout period for connection during transmission
3.18.4
Functions Use
Status
To carry out a transmission/reception test using the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To carry out a transmission/reception test using the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller
Setting/Procedure Press the Start key to start transmission. The progress and results of the test are displayed on the screen.
3-38
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.
4.1
Tech. Rep. Mode

Tech. Rep. Mode function setting procedure
NOTE Ensure appropriate security for Tech. Rep. mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs. Procedure Press the Utility key. Touch Counter List. Press the following keys in this order. Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1 4. Enter the 8-digit service code and touch Enter. (The default value is 00000000.) NOTES The service code entered is displayed as . If a wrong service code is entered, touch Enter to go back to the Basic screen. When access is attempted a fourth time after a wrong service code has been entered three times, the Enter will not be displayed. In this case, the Power Switch must be turned OFF and ON. When the access to the Tech. Rep. mode is successfully made with the correct service code entered, the machine clears the count of illegal access to the Tech. Rep. mode. 5. The Tech. Rep. Mode menu will appear. A. 1. 2. 3.
4036fs3034e0
NOTES Be sure to change the service code from its default value. For the procedure to change the service code, see the Security Mode. B. Exiting Touch the Fin. Time key. C. Changing the Setting Value in Tech. Rep. Mode Functions Use the ID key to change the + sign to - sign, or vice versa. Use the Up/Down key to enter or change the setting value. Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press the Clear key before making an entry.)
3-39
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.2
Touch Panel Adj.

To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. Use during the setup procedure. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Press the keys: Stop 0 Stop 3 3. Using the tip of a pen or similar object, touch the four crosses (+) on the screen in sequence. These crosses may be touched in any order; but be sure to touch the center of each cross. Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen.
Functions Use Adjustment Procedure
4036fs3015e0
4. The cross touched changes into a grid marker that consists of a square with a cross superimposed.
4036fs3016e0
5. Touch [END].
3-40
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.3
Tech. Rep. Mode function tree
The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Tech. Rep. Mode
Top Margin Left Margin Dup. Left Margin Zoom for FD Fuser Nip Fuser Temp. Fuser Speed Org. Detect Sensor PRT Area IR Area Loop Adjust Color Shift Correction LPH Rank LPH Chip Adjust Center Binding Position Memory/HardDisk Adjust Bypass Guide Adjust Top Image Left Image CD-Mag FD-Mag Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black LPH Rank Color Center-staple position Fold-Position III Adjustment/Setting Memory Check Compress/Extension Check Memory Bus Check Work Memory In/Out Check Hard Disk R/W Check Hard Disk Format PRT Max Density PRT Highlight Background Voltage Margin ATDC Level Setting AE Adjust 2nd Transfer Adjust Stabilizer ATDC Toner Supply Feeding double sided THIN PAPER Thick Paper Image Density Monochrome Image Density Bias Voltage Choice
Change the settings according to the Remote Diagnosis
Machine Adjust
ROM Version
Image Adjust
KRDS or RD Mode
System selected for use.
Admin. Password Initialize Next Page
3-41
Tech. Rep. Mode Tech. Rep. Mode
System Input
Admin. Password Initialize
Marketing Area Org. Detect Option Sensor Serial # Input Tel. # Input FLS Paper Book Erase (Center) Peripheral Setting Unit Change Reprint Hard Disk Display PM parts lifetime LCT Paper Size Chinese Paper Size US Zoom Setting Life Jam Trouble Warning Maintenance
Without Controller Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Others
Counter
List Output I/O Check Table # Level History1 Level History2 Temp. & Humidity CCD Check Paper Passage Option Check Color Shift IU Lot No. LPH Status Gradation Pattern Halftone Pattern Lattice Pattern Solid pattern Color sample 8 Color Solid Pattern LPH Pattern Original Stop Position Registration Loop Auto Adjust Stop Position Paper Passage I/O Check Tray Width Adjust Sensor Auto Adjust III Adjustment/Setting
State Confirm
Test Print
ADF Check
Gradation Adjust 3-42
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.4
4.4.1
Machine Adjust
Fuser Nip
To check the Fusing Roller nip width. When a fusing failure occurs. When a blurred image or brush effect occurs. A A: 9 0.5 mm.
Functions Use Check Range
4036fs3032c0
1. 2. 3. 4.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Fuser Nip Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the fusing roller nip width.
4.4.2
Functions
Fuser Temp.
To adjust individually the temperature of the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure Roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions. * Though all temperatures shown on the screen are 0 C, they represent the following specific temperatures. Heating Roller Plain paper OHP Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 Envelope 190 C 190 C 185 C 185 C 185 C 185 C Pressure Roller 130 C 170 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C
When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmental conditions change. Heating Roller : -20 C to +5 C (step: 5 C) Pressure Roller : -20 C to +5 C (step: 5 C) ... OHP : -5 C to +5 C (step: 5 C) .. others If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting. If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting. If offset is poor, decrease the setting. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Fuser Temp. Select the paper type and Fusing Roller type. Enter the new setting from the Up/Down key Pad. The temperature does not change immediately when the setting is changed. Wait a while before performing the subsequent steps. As a general rule, do not adjust the fusing temperature on the pressure application side. 6. Touch END to validate the adjustment value. 7. Check the copy image for any image problem. 8. Make the adjustment for each type of paper.
3-43
Tech. Rep. Mode 4.4.3

Functions Use Variable Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure
Fuser Speed
To adjust the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed. Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental conditions or degraded durability. -2 % to +2 % (in 0.1 % increments) If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image. If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Fuser Speed. 3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred. Transport speed 165 mm/s 100 mm/s 60 mm/s Paper Setting Plain paper: monochrome Plain paper: color Thick paper, OHP, Envelope, Postcard, Labels: monochrome, color
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. 5. Touch END to validate the adjustment value. 6. Check the copy image for any image problem. Make the adjustment for each paper type.
4.4.4
Functions Use
Org. Detect Sensor

To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the Original Size Sensor. When the sensor is replaced with a new one. When an optional sensor has been added. When an erroneous original size detection is made. When the marketing area setting is changed.
If the adjustment has been successfully made, it completes the adjustment procedure. If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful, check the optional Original Size Sensors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness. 1. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 17 paper on the Original Glass and lower the Original Cover. 2. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 3. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Org. Detect Sensor. 4. Press the Start key.
3-44
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.4.5 PRT Area
Tech. Rep. Mode
A. Top Margin
Functions Use To vary the print start position in the FD direction for each of different paper types in Tray1. The LPH Unit has been replaced. The paper type has been changed. The image on the copy deviates in the FD direction. A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Width A Specifications: 5.0 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
4036fs3009c0
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select according to the paper used on the Paper Type Setting Dial. Touch Machine Adjust PRT Area Top Margin. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/Down key. 6. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 7. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 8. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 9. If width A falls within the specified range, touch END 10.Following the same procedure, adjust for thick paper, OHP, and envelopes.
3-45
Tech. Rep. Mode B. Left Margin

Functions Use
To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source. The LPH Unit has been replaced. A paper feed unit has been added. The image on the copy deviates in the CD direction. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Specifications: 3.0 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
4036fs3010c0
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Touch Machine Adjust PRT Area Left Margin. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/Down key. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. If width A falls within the specified range, touch END Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Bypass.)
3-46
cm3520 Field Service Manual C. Dup. Left Margin

Tech. Rep. Mode
To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source in the 2Sided mode. The Automatic Duplex Unit has been set up. The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the CD direction. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern. Backside Specifications: 3.0 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
4036fs3010c0
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch Machine Adjust PRT Area Dup. Left Margin. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/Down key. 6. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 7. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy. 8. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 9. If width A falls within the specified range, touch END 10.Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray.)
3-47
Tech. Rep. Mode D. Zoom for FD

Functions Use
To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. The CD-Mag. adjustment becomes necessary. The image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk). When the image on the copy is stretched in the FD direction. Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges. Width A : equivalent to one grid Width B : equivalent to 48 grids B Specifications A : 7.9 to 8.3 B : 389.1 to 392.1 Setting Range A, B : -10 to +10
Adjustment Specification A
4036fs3017c0
If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. Load Tray1 with A3 or 11 17 plain paper. Select plain paper on the Paper Type Setting Dial. Select Tray1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Test Print Lattice Pattern. Select Black, SINGLE, FEET, CD Width:2, FD Width:2, Density:255, and Normal. 7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 8. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern. 9. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust PRT Area Zoom for FD. 10.If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/ Down keys. 11.Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 12.Check width A and width B on the test pattern. 13.If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a check again. 14.If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch END. 15.Following the same procedure, adjust for Thick 1, Thick 2, Thick 3, OHP, and Envelope. (Check width A only for OHP and Envelope.) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3-48
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.4.6 IR Area
Tech. Rep. Mode
Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section. If the Color Chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. A: Left Image B: Top Image C: CD-Mag D: FD-Mag
C B
A Original Reference
4036fs3018c0
A. Left Image
Functions Use To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the CD direction. When the CCD Unit is replaced. When the Original Glass is replaced. The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced.
Specifications A : 10 1.0 mm
4036fs3019c0
Setting Range -10.0 to +10.0 (in 0.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the right side of the correct 0-mm position perpendicularly to the feeding direction (less than -1 mm), decrease the setting. If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the left side of the correct 0-mm position perpendicularly to the feeding direction (exceeding 1 mm), increase the setting. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust IR Area. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check point A on the image of the copy. 6. If the image falls outside the specified range, touch Left Image. 7. Change the setting using the Up/Down key. 8. Press the Start key to make a copy. 9. Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 10.Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
3-49
Adjust so that width A on the sample copy made falls within the specified range. An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Left Margin of PRT Area.
Tech. Rep. Mode B. Top Image

Functions
To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sensor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the CD direction. When the Original Glass is replaced. When the Original Width Scale is replaced. Adjust so that width B on the sample copy made falls within the specified range. An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Top Margin of PRT Area. Specifications B : 7 0.5 mm (10 0.5 mm if a scale is used) Setting Range -5.0 to +5.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)
Use Adjustment Specification
4036fs3020c0
If width B on the copy is less than 6.5 mm, decrease the setting value. If width B on the copy is more than 7.5 mm, decrease the setting value. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust IR Area. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check point B on the image of the copy. 6. If width B on the copy falls outside the specified range, touch Top Image. 7. Change the setting using the Up/Down key. 8. Press the Start key to make another copy. 9. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 10.Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
3-50
cm3520 Field Service Manual C. CD-Mag

Tech. Rep. Mode
To adjust the zoom ratio in the CD direction for the Scanner Section The CCD Unit has been replaced. Adjust so that width C on the sample copy made falls within the specified range. An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Zoom for FD of PRT Area. C Specifications C : 200 1.0 mm CD-Mag Setting Range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
4036fs3021c0
If the specified width on the copy is less than 199 mm, increase the setting. If the specified width on the copy exceeds 201 mm, decrease the setting. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust IR Area. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check point C on the image of the copy. 6. If the image falls outside the specified range, touch CD-Mag. 7. Change the setting using the Up/Down key. 8. Press the Start key to make another copy. 9. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 10.Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
3-51
Tech. Rep. Mode D. FD-Mag

Functions Use
To adjust the zoom ratio in the FD direction for the Scanner Section The Scanner Assy has been replaced. The Scanner Motor has been replaced. The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced. Adjust so that width D on the sample copy made falls within the specified range. An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Zoom for FD of PRT Area. D
4036fs3022c0
Specifications D : 300 1.5 mm FD-Mag Setting Range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
If the specified width on the copy is less than 298.5 mm, increase the setting. If the specified width on the copy exceeds 301.5 mm, decrease the setting. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust IR Area. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check point D on the image of the copy. 6. If the image falls outside the specified range, touch FD-Mag. 7. Change the setting using the Up/Down key. 8. Press the Start key to make another copy. 9. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 10.Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
4.4.7
Functions
Loop Adjust
To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each system speed of Tray1 to Tray4, Bypass, and Duplex. To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the Synchronizing Rollers. Use Paper Passage for paper passage check. When a paper skew occurs. When a paper misfeed occurs. Different setting ranges are set for different transport speeds. 165 mm/s : -6 to +6 100 mm/s : -10 to +10 60 mm/s : -15 to +15 1. 2. 3. 4. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Loop Adjust Select the transport speed. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad.
Use
Adjustment Range Adjustment Procedure
3-52
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.4.8 A. Black

Functions
Tech. Rep. Mode
Color Shift Correction
To correct black color shift, if it occurs Make Color Shift Corrections (cyan, magenta, and yellow) after this adjustment has been made. To correct black color shift, if it occurs The LPH Assy (Bk) has been replaced. 0 (-10 to +10 dot)
If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting value. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting value. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Machine Adjust Color Shift Correction. Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper. Press the Start key. Fold the printed test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation (the image on the inside). Check deviation between black lines A and B. Select black. Change the setting value using the Up/Down key as necessary. Produce another test pattern and check for deviation.
Check Procedure Check point A, B
B
4036fs3001c0
If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting value. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting value.
Direction of C
Direction of D
A B
4036fs3002c0
4036fs3003c0
3-53
Tech. Rep. Mode B. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow

Functions
To adjust color shift if there is any color shift as found through comparison of the copy with the original Before making this adjustment, be sure to perform Color Shift Correction (Bk). To correct any color shift 0 (-6 to +6 dot)
If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Machine Adjust Color Shift Correction. Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper. Press the Start key. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. 6. Select the color to be adjusted. 7. Using the Up/Down key, change the setting value as necessary. (At this time, only the line of the selected color moves.) 8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation. Check Procedure Check point X, Y
4036fs3004c0
Adjustment for X direction: Check point X
Direction of C
4036fs3005c0
4036fs3006c0
Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y
Direction of C
4036fs3007c0
4036fs3008c0
3-54

Functions Use
Tech. Rep. Mode
LPH Rank
To correct uneven LPH image by producing an output of the LPH Pattern of Test Print When an uneven image occurs and is not eliminated even after other troubleshooting procedures have been carried out. When the LPH Unit has been replaced When the LPH Assy has been replaced 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. (1 to 5) 0 is not used.
Adjustment Range Adjustment Procedure
Load Tray1 with A3 plain paper. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch Machine Adjust LPH Rank. Return the Rank settings for all four colors back to 1. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. LPH Pattern Green (yellow) Black Cyan Magenta
6. Identify the spot, at which uneven image occurs. 7. Select the color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) that develops uneven image. Select Yellow if green on the test pattern develops uneven image. 8. Using the 10-Key Pad, enter a value of the Rank value shown on the screen plus one. If Rank is 1, enter 2. If 0 is set for Rank, set 1. Do not use 0. 9. Let the machine produce another test pattern and check for uneven image. 10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 until the uneven image is gone.
3-55
4036fs3048c0

Functions Use
LPH Chip Adjust

To correct chips of locations where FD white lines or black lines occur in the LPH Pattern produced using Test Print. White line or color line or black line occurs in the FD direction. The LPH Assy has been replaced. The LPH Unit has been replaced. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Test Print LPH Pattern. Select SINGLE, HYPER, Gradation, and Border Line:ON. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the test pattern for the location, at which white lines or color or black lines in FD occur. 6. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust LPH Chip Adjust. 7. Fold the test pattern in half. (with the pattern face on the outside)
4036fs3023c0
8. The chip boundary line on the crease (the center) of the test pattern corresponds to 20 on the panel. Starting here count out to each side of the paper to identify each location
1
20
39
4036fs3024c0
4036fs3025j0
9. Find the number on the panel, to which the location of white lines or black lines in FD checked in step 5 corresponds. 10.Select the color (C, M, Y, or Bk) in which white lines or black lines in FD occur. If the lines occur only in green on the test pattern, select Y. 11.Touch the corresponding number on the panel. (It is then highlighted and the setting value is displayed beside the highlighted number.) 12.Change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad. When a new LPH Unit has been installed, corrections can be made for up to eight locations. Corrections for up to five locations can be made through factory adjustments. If white lines or black lines in FD occur, corrections can therefore be made in the field for three to eight locations. 13.Select HYPER and color. 14.Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern and check for lines.
3-56

Tech. Rep. Mode
Center Binding Position (9997 only)

To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for the Finisher. Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Booklet function. Center staple position: The adjustment range is -7.0 mm to +7.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). Fold position: The adjustment range is -7.0 mm to +7.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). If deviated to the left, increase the setting value. If deviated to the right, decrease the setting value. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use the Booklet function to make one sample booklet. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Machine Adjust Center Binding Position. Check the sample copy and make the necessary adjustment as detailed in the following.
Adjusting the center staple position: 5. If the staple positions deviate, use these steps to make the adjustment. If the staple positions deviate to the left side, increase the setting value. If the staple positions deviate to the right side, decrease the setting value. Deviated to left Deviated to right
4036fs3011c0
4036fs3012c0
Adjusting the folding position: 6. If the folding position deviates, use these steps to make the adjustment. If the folding position deviates to the left side, increase the setting value. If the folding position deviates to the right side, decrease the setting value. Deviated to left Deviated to right
4036fs3013c0
4036fs3014c0
7. Quit the Tech. Rep. Mode. 8. Using the Booklet function, make another sample booklet for confirmation. 9. Check the sample copy and repeat the adjustment procedures until there are no deviations in the staple or folding position.
3-57
Tech. Rep. Mode 4.4.12 Memory / Hard Disk Adjust
A. Memory Check
Functions To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write/read check. Rough Check A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area. Detail Check A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at the addresses and buses in all areas. The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. Use Adjustment Procedure If the copy image is faulty. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Memory / HardDisk Adjust Memory Check. 3. Select the desired type of check, either Rough Check or Detail Check. 4. Press the Start key to start the check procedure. 5. When the check procedure is completed, the results are shown on the screen. If the check results are NG, check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one. Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. (Only Rough Check)
B. Compress / Extension Check

Functions Use Adjustment Procedure To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly. If the copy image is faulty. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Memory / HardDisk Adjust Compress / Extension Check. 3. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompression check sequence. 4. The check result will be displayed, Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence.
C. Memory Bus Check

Functions Use Adjustment Procedure To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from IR to memory, and from memory to printer. If the copy image is faulty. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Memory / HardDisk Adjust Memory Bus Check. 3. Select either IR Memory, Memory PRT, or both. 4. Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automatically. 5. The check result will be displayed, OK or NG.
3-58
cm3520 Field Service Manual D. Work Memory In/Out Check

Tech. Rep. Mode
To check to see if input and output of image data of work memory are correctly performed. If the print image is faulty. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Memory / HardDisk Adjust Work Memory In/Out Check 3. Select either Input Check, Output Check, or both. 4. Pressing the Start key will start the work memory input/output operation check sequence and be terminated automatically. 5. The check result will be displayed, OK or NG. Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence.
E. Hard Disk R/W Check

Functions Use Adjustment Procedure To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly, and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed. When the hard disk is mounted. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Memory / HardDisk Adjust Hard Disk R/W Check 3. Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be terminated automatically. 4. The check result will be displayed, OK or NG Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence.
F. Hard Disk Format

Functions To format the hard disk The function proceeds in the order of Physical Format to Logical Format. If the hard disk is yet to be formatted, the malfunction code C-12CC will appear. Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure. When the hard disk is mounted. When the hard disk is to be initialized. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Memory / HardDisk Adjust Hard Disk Format Physical Format (Only when initial is set up) 1. Touch Physical Format. 2. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence. 3. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. 4. Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. Logical Format 1. Touch Logical Format. 2. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence. 3. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. 4. Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it.
Use Adjustment Procedure
3-59

Bypass Guide Adjust

To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Bypass Guide Use when the Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Bypass Guide has been changed. Use when a false paper size is displayed when the Bypass is used. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Machine Adjust Bypass Guide Adjust 3. Touch Max. Width. 4. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 301 mm. 5. Press the Start key and check that the results are OK. 6. Touch Min. Width. 7. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 89 mm. 8. Press the Start key and check that the results are OK. Make the adjustment again if the results are NG.
4.5
ROM Version
To check the ROM version. Use when the firmware is upgraded. When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: ROM Version 3. Touch 1 to check the following ROM version numbers. MSC/PANEL, MSC Subset, PIC, IR, Mecha, LPH, ADF IC7, Sorter/Finisher IC3 4. Touch 2 to check the following ROM version numbers. Controller, DSS, DPS, Demo Page, NM, MIO, MIOM, Font
4.6
4.6.1
Image Adjust
PRT Max Density
To adjust gradation, color, and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of of each color after Gradation Adjust. An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run. 0 (-10 to +10)
Functions
To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking, increase the setting value. To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking, decrease the setting value. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust PRT Max Density. Select the color to be adjusted. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. Touch END to return to the Image Adjust menu screen. Touch Stabilizer. Touch Stabilizer Mode. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value. Check the copy image for any image problem.
If the setting value has been changed, be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value.
3-60

Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure
Tech. Rep. Mode
PRT Highlight
To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of of each color after Gradation Adjust. An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run. 0 (-10 to +10)
To make the Highlight portion darker, increase the setting value. To make the Highlight portion lighter, decrease the setting value. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust PRT Highlight. Select the color to be adjusted. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. Touch END to return to the Image Adjust menu screen. Touch Stabilizer. Touch Stabilizer Mode. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value. Check the copy image for any image problem.
4.6.3
Functions Use
Background Voltage Margin III Adjustment/Setting

To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of of each color after Gradation Adjust. Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem 0 (-5 to +5)
Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure
To make the background level foggier, increase the setting value. To make the background level less foggy, decrease the setting value. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust Background Voltage Margin. Select the color to be adjusted. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. Touch END to return to the Image Adjust menu screen. Touch Stabilizer. Touch Stabilizer Mode. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value. Check the copy image for any image problem.
3-61

Functions
ATDC Level Setting

To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change. Use when T/C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site 0 (-3 to +3)
The central value of 0 corresponds to 7 % of T/C (in 1.0 % increments). To increase T/C, increase the setting value. To decrease T/C, decrease the setting value. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust ATDC Level Setting. Select the color to be adjusted. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. Touch END to validate the adjustment value. Check the copy image for any image problem.
4.6.5
Functions
AE Adjust
To adjust subtle shades of the highlight portion according to the user's need by varying the background level in a direction of less foggy or foggier setting in the Auto Exposure mode. When a fog occurs, or no image is produced, in the background in the Auto Exposure mode. 2 (0 to 4)
Use
To make the background level foggier, change the setting value to 3 or 4. To make the background level less foggy, change the setting value to 0 or 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust AE Adjust. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. Touch END to validate the adjustment value. Check the copy image for any image problem.
3-62

Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions
Tech. Rep. Mode
2nd Transfer Adjust

To fine-adjust the second transfer output (ATVC) for the first side and the second side, respectively. When an image transfer failure occurs at the trailing edge (of plain paper). 0 (-5 to +5)
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), decrease the setting value. To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), increase the setting value. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust 2nd Transfer Adjust. 3. Select the side of the image (First side or Second side) on which the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. 4. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. 5. Touch END to validate the adjustment value. 6. Check the copy image for any image problem.
4.6.7
Stabilizer
A. Stabilizer Mode
Functions Use The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. When PRT Max Density, PRT Highlight, and Background Voltage Margin of Tech. Rep. mode are changed. 1. 2. 3. 4. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust Stabilizer Touch Stabilizer Mode. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. 5. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green.
B. Reset and Stabilizer Mode

Functions Use To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized. Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer Mode has been executed. 1. 2. 3. 4. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust Stabilizer Touch Reset and Stabilizer Mode. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. 5. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green.
3-63

Functions
ATDC Toner Supply

To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of copies have been made of originals having a high image density. When there is a drop in T/C. 1. 2. 3. 4. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust ATDC Toner Supply Select the color, for which supply of toner is to be replenished. Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and; if the density is lower than a reference value, a toner replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run. 5. These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density reaches the reference value. If the toner density is found to be higher than the reference value, only a developer agitation sequence is carried out.
Use Adjustment Procedure
4.6.9
Functions
Feeding Double Sided THIN PAPER

Turn this function ON when thin paper (64 g/m2) is used in an ambience of high temperature and high humidity in the 2-sided mode. It decreases the transfer output value so as to prevent a paper misfeed from occurring. Use when a paper misfeed occurs when thin paper is used. The default setting is OFF. ON OFF
Use
Setting/ Procedure
4.6.10
Functions Use
Thick Paper Image Density

To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies. To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies The fine-adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps, two darker levels and two lighter levels around the standard central level. Light color: Touch the Darker key. Dark color: Touch the Lighter key. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust Thick Paper Image Density 3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density.
3-64

Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure
Tech. Rep. Mode
Monochrome Image Density

To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Lighter (2 steps), Std, Darker (2 steps) If the black is light, touch the Darker key. If the black is dark, touch the Lighter key. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: Image Adjust Monochrome Image density. 3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density.
4.6.12
Functions
Bias Voltage Choice

To change the setting of the developing bias voltage When this function is turned ON, it decreases the developing bias voltage, thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring. Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pressure, such as in high altitudes. The default setting is OFF. ON OFF
Use Setting/ Procedure
3-65
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.7
Settings in KRDS / RD Mode
The remote diagnosis system displayed varies according to the setting made with Security Mode Remote Diagnosis System Choice. Make the settings necessary when a Data Terminal is mounted. For details, see Service Manual for Data Terminal. A. e-mail / Modem
Functions Select the type of system used in the Remote Diagnosis System. KRDS : e-mail RD Mode :e-mail, Modem Use when the system is newly installed or the existing one is changed.
Use
Setting/Procedure Select e-mail or Modem. e-mail Modem
B. ID Code
Functions Use To register the Tech. Rep. ID code. To register or change the Tech. Rep. ID code
Setting/Procedure Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-Key Pad (0000001 to 9999999). Registration Touch ID Code and enter the Tech. Rep. ID. Press the ID key to register the ID. The Detail Setting key will appear when the ID has been registered.
C. DT Setting
Functions Use To make the DT setting and perform the initial transmission. Use to change the details of setting. Use to register the machine with the Center.
Setting/Procedure 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch KRDS or RD Mode. 3. Touch Detail Setting to access DT Setting. DT Setting Set Password, DT-ID, and TEL No. When e-mail is selected for the ID Setting, TEL No. is the e-mail address. Initial Transmission Press the Initial Transmission key to execute the initial transmission to the Center and the machine equipped with the Data Terminal is registered with the Center (only if Modem is selected for System Selection).
3-66
cm3520 Field Service Manual D. Date/Time Input

Functions Use To set the date and time-of-day. Use to set or change the date and time-of-day.
Tech. Rep. Mode
Setting/Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. Touch KRDS or RD Mode. Touch Detail Setting to access Date/Time Input. Enter the date (month, day, and year) and time-of-day from the 10-Key Pad. Touch SET to start the clock.
E. Common DT (Only RD Mode)

Functions Use To set tone or pulse and automatic reception. Use to change the details of setting.
Setting/Procedure Dial Mode The default setting is Tone. Tone Pulse
Auto Receive The default setting is Disable. Enable Disable
F. RAM Clear
Functions Use To clear the following data for the Center. ID Code, DT Setting, Date/Time Input, and Common DT. Use to clear various types of data of the Center.
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Disable. Enable Disable
3-67
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.8
4.8.1
System Input
Marketing Area
To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area. Upon setup
Functions Use
Setting/Procedure Select the applicable marketing area and touch END to set the marketing area. JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 These are the languages that can be selected on the Utility screen according to different marketing area settings: Japan US: Europe Others1, Others2 Others3, Others4 English, Japanese English, French, Spanish, Japanese German, English, French, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, Finnish, Czech, Hungarian, Japanese
4.8.2
Functions
Org. Detect Option Sensor

To let the machine recognize an optional Original Size Sensor when one is mounted. When an optional sensor is mounted.
Use
Setting/Procedure After the optional Original Size Sensor has been mounted, select Set. The default setting is Unset. Set Unset
After the sensor has been mounted, perform Org. Detect Sensor of Machine Adjust.
4.8.3
Functions Use
Serial # Input
To register the serial numbers of the machine and options. The numbers will be printed on the list output. Upon setup
Setting/Procedure Type the serial numbers. 9 digits (0 to 9) Printer, IR, ADF, LCT, Sorter/FN, Duplex, Vender Memo: 20 digits ; use key to enter -., Enter the 10-Key Pad.
4.8.4
Functions Use
Tel. # Input
To enter the telephone number of the service contact that will appear on the Touch Panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine. Upon setup
Setting/Procedure Enter the telephone number (19 digits) from the 10-Key Pad. Use Interrupt key to enter -.
3-68

Functions Use
Tech. Rep. Mode
FLS Paper
To set the size for FLS paper. Upon setup.
Setting/Procedure Select the size from among the following four. F: 330.2 mm C: 203.2 mm F: 330 mm C: 210 mm F: 330.2 mm C: 215.9 mm F: 330 mm C: 220 mm
4.8.6
Functions Use
Book Erase (Center)

To change the center erase width in Book copying. As required by the user.
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 15 mm. 15 mm (2 to 30 mm)
4.8.7
Functions
Peripheral Setting
To set the type of the controller. Peripheral Mode appears when Controller 2 or Others is selected. Server Set (RD) or Server Set (KRDS) appears when Controller 3 is selected.
Setting/Procedure Peripheral Setting Select the controller to be used. Without Controller : No external controllers are used. Controller 1 : An external controller is used. Controller 2 : An external controller is used. Controller 3 : The standard controller is used. Others : A controller other than above is used. See the Setup Instructions for the Controller. Peripheral Mode Select the operating mode of the Scanner. Mode 1: Fiery. Mode 2: Not use Mode 3: Not use KRDS / RD Mode Use for the Remote Diagnosis System setting when the standard controller is used. Settings are changed for KRDS or RD according to the Remote Diagnosis System selected in the Security mode.
3-69
Use
When setting up the controller
Tech. Rep. Mode 4.8.8 Server set (KRDS) / Server set (RD)
A. Server for RX These are the settings for the RX server used in the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. (1) POP3 server
Functions Use To set the POP3 server address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the address of the POP3 Server
(2) POP3 login name

Functions Use To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the logon name for the POP3 server
(3) POP3 password III Adjustment/Setting

Functions Use To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the logon password for the POP3 server
(4) POP3 port number

Functions Use To set the POP3 port number used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. To set the port number for the POP3 server
B. Receive These are the settings for the Receive used in the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. (1) E-Mail Address
Functions Use To set the email address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To set the email address
3-70
cm3520 Field Service Manual (2) Mail check

Functions Use
Tech. Rep. Mode
To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To select not to use Mail Check To change the time interval for Mail Check
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 15 min. 15 min. (1 to 120 min., No)
(3) Connection timeout

Functions Use To set the timeout period for connection during reception To change the timeout period for connection during reception
C. Send These are the settings for the Send used in the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller. (1) SMTP server
Functions Use To set the SMTP server address for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To set the address of the SMTP Server
(2) SMTP port number

Functions Use To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server
(3) Timeout of SMTP Server

Functions Use To set the timeout period for transmission To change the timeout period for connection during transmission
3-71
Tech. Rep. Mode
D. Communication Log Print This is the setting made for the communication log used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller.
Functions Use To print a log of past ten communications activities Use for checking the communication log.
Setting/Procedure Press the Start key to let the machine start printing the log.
E. TX / RX Test This is the setting made for the transmission and reception tests used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller.
Functions Use To send test email to your local machine for determining correct transmission and reception Use for the verification test during setup.
Setting/Procedure Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test. The test results are displayed on the screen.
F. Data Initialize This is the setting made for initialize data used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller.
Functions To initialize the settings Use for deleting details of the current settings.
Use
Setting/Procedure Select Yes and Touch END to start the initialization sequence.
4.8.9
Functions
Unit Change
To select who is to replace a unit. When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit. When User is selected : Copying is inhibited. When Service is selected : Life warning. Upon setup
Use
Setting/Procedure The following are the default settings: US, Others4, Japan Toner Cartridge : User Service Imaging Unit : User Service Waste Toner Bottle : User Service Punch Scraps Box : User Service Europe, Others1/2/3 User Service User Service User Service User Service
4.8.10
Functions Use
Reprint
To select whether to display the option of Reprint for Admin. Mode of Utility. Use to hide the option of Reprint for Admin. Mode of Utility.
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Enable. Enable Disable
3-72

Functions Use
Tech. Rep. Mode
Hard Disk
To configure the copier as necessary when a hard disk is mounted. Use when the hard disk is mounted.
Setting/Procedure The default setting is Unset. Set Unset
When the setting has been changed, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch.
4.8.12
Functions
Display PM parts lifetime

To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime PM parts lifetime display: An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached, prompting the user to replace the part. Applicable units: Transfer Belt Unit, Fusing Unit, Paper Powder Filter/Ozone Filter, Transfer Roller Unit, IU (C, M, Y, Bk) Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime.
Use
4.8.13
Functions Use
LCT Paper Size

To set the paper size for the LCT Use to change the paper size for the LCT.
Setting/Procedure The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area. A4 : Europe, Others1/2/3, Japan Letter : US, Others4
4.8.14
Functions Use
Chinese Paper Size

To set the paper size for Chinese paper Use to change the paper size for the Chinese paper.
Setting/Procedure The following sizes are the default setting. 8K: 390 270 mm 16K 270 195 mm : US, Europe, Others1/2/4, Japan 8K: 390 267 mm 16K 267 195 mm : Others3
4.8.15
US Zoom Setting
This option becomes available only when US is selected for Marketing Area.
Functions Use To change the fixed zoom ratios Use to change the fixed zoom ratios.
Setting/Procedure The default setting is 0.733. 0.733 0.772
3-73
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.9
Admin. Password Initialize

To initialize the administrator code and PSL administrator code. Use to delete the current settings. Select Yes and touch END to initialize the settings.
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure
4.10 Settings in Counter

The Counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the Tech. Rep. to check or set as necessary. 4.10.1 Procedure
1. Touch Counter to show the Counter menu. 2. Select the specific counter to be displayed. 3. To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once, touch Counter Reset, select the specific counters to be cleared, and touch END. Two or more counters can be selected. 4.10.2
Functions
Life
To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used. To clear the count of each counter. When each of the maintenance parts is replaced. To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation. It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the Fusing Unit, Transfer Belt Unit, and IU, which are provided with a new unit detection function. 1 2
Fusing Unit: Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through Transfer Roller Unit: Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through Transfer Belt Unit: Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through Paper Powder Filter/Ozone Filter: Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through 1st.: Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray1 2nd.: Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray2 3rd.: Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray3 4th.: Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray4 Manual Bypass : Number of sheets of paper fed from the Bypass Cyan IU: Period of time over which the Cyan Developing Unit has been used. Magenta IU: Period of time over which the Magenta Developing Unit has been used. Yellow IU: Period of time over which the Yellow Developing Unit has been used. Black IU: Period of time over which the Black Developing Unit has been used. LCT Parts: Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT ADF Feed: Number of sheets of paper fed through the take-up section of the ADF ADF Rev.: Number of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of the ADF Sorter/Finisher: Number of sheets of paper fed out of the Sorter/Finisher Staple: Number of stapling sequences performed Punch: Number of hole-punch sequences performed Paper Fold: Number of folding sequences performed
3-74

Functions
Tech. Rep. Mode
Jam
To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the machine. To clear the count of each counter. To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
4.10.4
Functions
Trouble
To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the machine To clear the count of each counter. To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
4.10.5
Warning
To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type To clear the count of each counter. To check the number of warning conditions that have been detected To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation. When a warning condition occurs, an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the Basic screen. Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen.
4.10.6
Maintenance
To set a count value for maintenance of any given part. When any given part is replaced. Maint.-Set Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-Key Pad. Maint.-Count Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the machine. Pressing the Clear key will clear the count. If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
3-75
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.11 List Output

4.11.1
Image Processing
To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, Total Counter values, and others. At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source. Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list. Data printed is in English (alphanumeric characters). The time-of-day and date will also be printed.
4.11.2
Counter
To produce an output of a list of counts of various counters. At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source. Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list. Data printed is in English (alphanumeric characters). The time-of-day and date will also be printed.
3-76
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.12 Settings in State Confirm

4.12.1
I/O Check
To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary. Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs. The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time basis. It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a cover is open.
A. Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check Example When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take-up section of the machine, the Tray2 Paper Take-Up Sensor is considered to be responsible for it. 1. Remove the sheet of paper misfed. 2. From the I/O Check List that follows, check the panel display of the Tray2 Paper TakeUp Sensor. For the Tray2 Paper Take-Up Sensor, you check the data of Take-Up of 2nd Drawer. 3. Call the Tech. Rep. mode to the screen. 4. Select State Confirm I/O Check and then select the screen that contains TakeUp under 2nd Drawer. For Take-Up under 2nd Drawer, select 1 on the left-hand side of the screen. 5. Check that the data for Take-Up under 2nd Drawer is 0 (sensor blocked). 6. Move the actuator to unblock the 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor. 7. Check that the data for Take-Up under 2nd Drawer changes from 0 to 1 on the screen. 8. If the input data is 0, change the sensor. B. I/O Check Screens These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each individual machine.
3-77
Tech. Rep. Mode
4036fs3026e0
4036fs3027e0
4036fs3028e0
4036fs3029e0
4036fs3030e0
3-78
cm3520 Field Service Manual C. I/O Check List (1) Sensors 1 (Main body, 9993, 9994)
Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name
Tech. Rep. Mode
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present
PC14 PC2 PC13 PC1 PC103 PC106 PC104 PC108 PC107 PC105 PC112-PF PC115-PF PC113-PF PC117-PF PC116-PF PC114-PF PC121-PF PC124-PF PC122-PF PC126-PF PC125-PF PC123-PF
1st Set Drawer Paper Empty Paper Near Empty Double Feed 2nd Set Drawer Paper Empty Paper Near Empty Vertical Transport S Take-Up Upper Limit Sensor 3rd Set Drawer Paper Empty Paper Near Empty Vertical Transport S Take-Up Upper Limit Sensor 4th Set Drawer Paper Empty Paper Near Empty Vertical Transport S Take-Up Upper Limit Sensor
Tray1 Set Sensor Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor Tray1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray1 Double Feed Sensor Tray2 Set Sensor Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor Tray2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray2 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray2 Lift-Up Sensor Tray3 Set Sensor Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor Tray4 Set Sensor Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor
In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position
Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position
3-79
Paper not present
Tech. Rep. Mode


Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not at raised position Paper present Paper not present Paper not present Not OHP Loop not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked
PC111 PC112 PC113 PC114 PC115 PC110 PC28 PC30 PC27 PC4 PC10 PC35
Manual Multi FD Size1 Multi FD Size2 Multi FD Size3 Multi FD Size4 Lift-Up Position Sensor Paper Empty Paper Timing Roller Passage Exit OHP Detect Sensor Fuser Loop PC Color PC Drive Drive Main Sensor Detect Color PC Drive Sub Sensor Black PC Drive Main Sensor Black PC Drive Sub Sensor
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 Bypass Lift-Up Sensor Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Synchronizing Roller Sensor Exit Sensor OHP Sensor Fusing Paper Loop Sensor Color PC Drum Main Sensor Color PC Drum Sub Sensor Bk PC Drum Main Sensor Bk PC Drum Sub Sensor
ON ON ON ON At raised position Paper not present Paper present Paper present OHP Loop present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked
PC11 PC36
3-80
cm3520 Field Service Manual D. Sensors 2 (Main body, 9991, 9992)

Tech. Rep. Mode
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Not at raised position
PC4-LCT PC13-LCT PC12-LCT PC11-LCT PC1-LCT PC2-LCT PWBELCT PC3-LCT PC9-LCT PC7-LCT UN1-LCT PC14-LCT PC6-LCT PC8-LCT PC10-LCT PI2-DU PI1-DU PC1-DU PC1-HO PC6-HO
LCT
Lift-Up Upper Sensor Lift-Up Lower Sensor Shift Tray Home Sensor
Tray Upper Limit Sensor Tray Lower Position Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor
At raised position
At lower limit Not at lower limit At home At stop position Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Malfunction ON At home In position Blocked Blocked Close Paper present Paper present Paper not present Paper present Out of home Not at stop position Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Operational OFF Out of home Out of position Unblocked Unblocked Open Paper not present Paper not present Paper present Paper not present
Shift Tray Stop S Shifter Return Position Sensor Take-Up Vertical Transport S Paper Empty Paper Feed Sensor LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Empty Board
Main Tray Empty Upper Paper Empty Sensor Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Lower Over Run Lower Limit Sensor Manual Button Down Division Board Position S Cassette Open Paper Descent Key Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Tray Set Sensor
Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor S Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Duplex Set Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor
Paper passage1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper passage2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 HoriHorizontal zontal Transport Trans. Paper Detect Unit Reverse Sensor Paper Sensor Turnover Empty Sensor
3-81
Tech. Rep. Mode


Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Toner present Toner present Toner present Toner present In position In position In position In position Retracted
PC17 PC16 PC15 PC18 PC19 PC26 PC25 PC20 PC29
Dev.
Cyan Toner Empty Magenta Toner Empty Yellow Toner Empty Black Toner Empty Cyan Toner Set Magenta Toner Set
Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/C Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/M Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Bk Toner Set Sensor/C Toner Set Sensor/M
Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Out of position Out of position Out of position Out of position Not Retracted Not Retracted Blocked In position In position Not Retracted
Yellow Toner Set Toner Set Sensor/Y Black Toner Set 2nd Transfer Unit Trans- Separation fer Trans- Transfer Unit fer Belt Separation Toner Waste Toner Collect Toner Box Set Fusing Set Unit Fuser Roller Separation Toner Set Sensor/Bk 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Sensor 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor Waste Toner Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Fusing Unit In-Position Detection Signal Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor
PC12
Retracted Unblocked Out of position Out of position Retracted
PC31 PC32 PC33
3-82
cm3520 Field Service Manual E. Sensors 3 (9997 Finisher, CM3500010 Job Tray)
Tech. Rep. Mode
Symbol PC1-FN
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name 1st Tray Exit Sensor Job Tray Exit Sensor Storage Sensor Upper Entrance Sensor Lower Entrance Sensor 1st Tray Full Sensor Job Tray Full Sensor Elevator Tray Full Sensor Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor Elevator Tray Paper Sensor CD Aligning Home Position Sensor
Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked OFF Unblocked Blocked
Single Exit (Non-sort1) Staple PC19-FN Finisher Exit (Non-sort3) PC3-FN PC4-FN PC2-FN PC6-FN PC20-FN PC7-FN PC5-FN PWB-D FN PC8-FN PC9-FN PC14-FN PC12-FN PC13-FN S2-FN S3-FN PC10-FN PC11-FN Exit (Finisher) Transport Upper Transport Lower Full (Non-sort1) Full (Non-sort3) Full (Elev. Tray) Empty (Finisher) Surface (Elev.) Empty (Elev.) Home (CD-Align)
Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Blocked Paper present Blocked Paper present Paper present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked ON Blocked Unblocked
Home (Stap. Unit) Staple Home Position Sensor Home (Store roller) Home (Exit roller) Home (Stapler 1) Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Stapler Home 1
Empty St.1 Needle Staple Empty 1 Self Priming S1 Elevate Tray Raised/Lowered Home (Shift) Shift Speed Staple Self-priming 1 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch Shift Home Position Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor
3-83
Tech. Rep. Mode F. Sensors 4 (9996 Finisher, CM3100010 Punch Unit)
Symbol PI1-FN PI2-FN PI3-FN PI4-FN PI5-FN PI6-FN PI7-FN PI10-FN PI13-FN PI11-FN PI12-FN
Panel Display Center Entrance Staple Fin- Paddle Home isher Bundle Roller Home
Part/Signal Name Entrance Sensor Paddle Home Position Sensor Swing Guide Home Position Sensor
Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 Paper present HP HP HP HP Paper present HP Paper present Paper present HP HP Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present 0 Paper not present
Align Home (Front) Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Align Home (Back) Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Alignment Tray Exit Belt Home Crease Position Crease Tray Crease Home Crease Roller Home Crease Clock Paper Paper Surface Finisher Tray Sensor Exit Belt Home Position Sensor Folding Position Sensor Saddle Tray Sensor Folding Home Position Sensor Folding Roller Home Position Sensor Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor Exit Tray Sensor Exit Tray Home Position Sensor
PI14-FN PI8-FN PI9-FN
Paper present Paper surface detected Upper limit Lower limit
Paper not present
PI15-FN PI16-FN PI17-FN PI18-FN PI19-FN PI20-FN
Raised Position Lowered Position Clock Middle Slide Home Stapler Home Needle Stapler Connect.
Shift Upper Limit Sensor Shift Lower Limit Sensor Shift Motor Clock Sensor Slide Home Position Sensor Staple Drive Home Position Sensor Staple Detecting Sensor
Paper full HP HP Staples loaded No staple loaded Stapler connection detected Open READY Open Open
MS3-FN MS4-FN PI21-FN PI22-FN PI23-FN
Stapler Safety SW Staple Safety Switch (Rear) Staple Safety Switch (Front) Self Prime Front Door Upper Door Self-Priming Sensor Front Door Open Sensor Upper Cover Open Sensor
3-84
Tech. Rep. Mode

Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Open Paper horiz. side Open
Symbol
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name Front Door Open Sensor Joint Open Sensor Punch Motor Clock Sensor Punch Home Position Sensor Side Registration Home Sensor Horizontal Unit Door Sensor
MS1-FN Center Front Door SW Staple Rev. Remain Finisher MS2-FN Joint SW PI3P-PK PI1P-PK PI2P-PK PC6-HO Punch Punch Regist. S1 Unit Punch Regist. S2 Punch Regist. S3 Punch Regist. S4 Punch Wastes Punch Timing Punch Motor Clock Punch Home Punch Regist. Home Horizontal Transport Door S
Punch trash full
Blocked HP HP Blocked Unblocked
3-85
Tech. Rep. Mode G. Sensors 5 (Main body)

Symbol Panel Display PC201 SW201 PC202 PC203 IR Home Sensor Part/Signal Name Scanner Home Sensor Size Reset Switch Original Cover Angle Sensor
Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 At home Lowered Less than 15 0 Out of home Raised 15 or more
Org. Org. Cover Detect 15 Degree Sensor Sensor Org. Detect Sensor 1 Org. Detect Sensor 2 Org. Detect Sensor 3 Org. Detect Sensor 4 Org. Detect Sensor 5 Org. Detect Sensor 6 Org. Detect Sensor 7 Org. Detect Sensor 8
Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1
Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded, not loaded mounted
PC204
PC204
PC205
PC205
PC206
Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1
PC206
PC207
3-86

Functions
Tech. Rep. Mode
Table #
To display the Vg/Vb output values calculated for the image density of the test pattern (amount of toner sticking) produced on the Transfer Belt during an AIDC detection sequence. Reference values: C, M, Y Bk Vb: around 400 V, Vg: around 550 V Used for troubleshooting of image problems. If the value is high, correct so that the image density becomes low. If the value is low, correct so that the image density becomes high.
4.12.3
Level History1
To display ATDC (T/C ratio), AIDC/Regist Sensor output values, and fusing temperature. Used for troubleshooting of image problems. AIDC-C/-M/-Y/-Bk : Shows the T/C output reading taken last. AIDC1/AIDC2 : Shows the latest AIDC data. Temp-Belt : Shows the latest Heating Roller temperature data. Temp-Press. : Shows the latest Fusing Pressure Roller temperature data.
Reading taken last means Density of toner of the latest image When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while Level History 1 is being displayed.
4.12.4
Level History2
AIDC Sensor (Transfer Belt bare surface level) as adjusted through the image stabilization sequence and ATVC value. Used for troubleshooting of image problems. AIDC Sensor: Shows the intensity adjustment value (0 to 255) of the AIDC Sensor. ATVC (C, M, Y, Bk): Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 V to 3000 V). ATVC (2nd): Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 V to 5000 V).
3-87

Temp. & Humidity

To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location (AIDC Sensor portion) inside the machine and fusing temperature. Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs. Machine interior temperature : 0 to 100 C in 1 C increments Temperature on Fusing Belt side : 0 to 255 C in 1 C increments Temperature on fusing pressure side : 0 to 255 C in 1 C increments Machine interior humidity : 0 to 100 % in 1 % increments Absolute humidity : 0 to 100 in 1 increments
4.12.6
CCD Check
To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B. Used for troubleshooting for the CCD Sensor. Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values. CLAMP: The difference between the max. and min. output values should be within 100. GAIN : The difference from the CLAMP values (R, B) should be within (90 for R and B. The difference from the CLAMP value (G) should be within 50 for G. The difference between each pair of RO and RE, GO and GE, and BO and BE should be within 30.
4.12.7
Functions
Paper Passage
To check for paper passage performance of the engine only without involving a print action on paper. The counters do not count up. When a paper misfeed or other fault occurs in the paper transport system. Select the paper source and press the Start key. The sequence is halted when the Stop key is pressed or paper runs out.
4.12.8
Option Check
To check the capacity of the add-on memory and mounting of a hard disk and a parallel I/F. Use for check after an option has been installed. When an add-on memory is mounted, the machine automatically recognizes it and displays its capacity.
3-88

Functions
Tech. Rep. Mode
Color Shift
To check each of C, M, Y, and Bk for color shift amount. The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjustment has been completed. Use for check when color shift is evident. For each of C, M, Y, and Bk, the color shift amount (in X and Y directions) at two locations (one at the front and the other in the rear) and the difference in color shift amount between the front and rear (X and Y directions) are displayed. Display unit: dots The shift amount is displayed with reference to Bk for C, M, and Y, and that for Bk is displayed with reference to an ideal position.
4.12.10
IU Lot No.
To display the 10-digit lot number for each of C, M, Y, and Bk IUs. The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU. Use for checking the IU Lot No. The IU lot number is displayed even with the Front Door opened; however, the display is blank, since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the Power Switch is turned ON with the Front Door open. Nonetheless, the lot number will be displayed when the Front Door is closed. (The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the Front Door is closed.)
4.12.11
LPH Status
To check various information on each of the C, M, Y, and Bk LPHs Use for checking the LPH Status. LPH Lot No.: LPH lot number (8 digits) Average Exposure: Average light intensity X: Print width accuracy Y: Linearity accuracy Z: Focus accuracy FFT Rank: Print width rank LPH Rank: 0 to 5
If any one change is made from the default value as a result of LPH chip-to-chip corrections, an asterisk is displayed beside the color identification (C, M, Y, and Bk) on the screen.
3-89
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.13 Settings in Test Print

To check for image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test patterns. The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of Tray2, Tray3, Tray4, and Tray1 for paper of the maximum size for printing. 4.13.1 Procedure
1. Touch Test Print to display the Test Print menu. 2. Touch the desired test pattern key. 3. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key. 4.13.2
Functions Use
Gradation Pattern
To produce a gradation pattern. Used for checking gradation reproducibility.
Pattern
SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan
4036fs3042c0
Setting/ Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999) Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Select the color mode. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), CMYBk, 8Color, 4Color, Black (1PC)
Black (4PC): Uses four colors. Black (1PC): Uses one color of black.
3-90

Functions Use
Tech. Rep. Mode
Halftone Pattern
To produce a solid halftone pattern. Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise.
Pattern
SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 255
4036fs3043c0
Setting/ Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999) Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Select the color mode. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), Red, Green, Blue, CMYBk, 3 Color, 4 Color, Black (1PC), MIX Type the density level (0 to 255).
4.13.4
Functions Use
Lattice Pattern
To produce a lattice pattern. Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density. A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background. SINGLE FEET Cyan CD Width : 5 FD Width : 5 Density: 255 Normal
4036fs3044c0
Pattern
Setting/ Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999) Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution. (Only select HYPER) Select the color mode. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), Red, Green, Blue, CMYBk, 3 Color, 4 Color, Black (1PC) Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots). Type the density level (0 to 255). Select Normal or Reverse.
3-91

Functions Use
Solid pattern
To produce each of the C, M, Y, and Bk solid patterns. Used for checking reproducibility of image density.
Pattern
Bk Y SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255
M C
4036fs3045c0
Setting/ Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999) Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Type the density level (0 to 255).
4.13.6
Functions
Color sample
To produce a color sample. Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors.
Use
Pattern
SINGLE HYPER Gradation
4036fs3046c0
Setting/ Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999) Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Produce 12-gradation-level patches of C, M, Y, K, R, G, and B, and a patch of each of the 12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected.
3-92

Functions Use
Tech. Rep. Mode
8 Color Solid Pattern

To produce an 8-color solid pattern. Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color.
Pattern
SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255
4036fs3047c0
Setting/ Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999) Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Type the density level (0 to 255).
4.13.8
Functions Use
LPH Pattern
To produce an LPH pattern.
Pattern
SINGLE HYPER Gradation Border : OFF
4036fs3048c0
Setting/ Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999) Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Select to turn ON or OFF the Border Line.
3-93
Used for LPH chip-to-chip correction
Tech. Rep. Mode
4.14 ADF Check

For details, see 9990 Service Manual. Original Stop Position
To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes. When Auto Adjust Stop Position is NG.
4.14.1
Functions Use
4.14.2
Functions Use
Registration Loop
To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Registration Rollers. When a document misfeed or skew occurs.
4.14.3
Auto Adjust Stop Position
A. FD 1-Sided
Functions Use Adjust the document stop position for the first side. Check for skew. Upon setup of the ADF
B. FD 2-Sided III Adjustment/Setting

Functions Use Adjust the document stop position for the second side. Upon setup of the ADF
C. CD
Functions Use Adjust the start position for image scanning Upon setup of the ADF
4.14.4
Functions Use
Paper Passage
To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes. Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document misfeed occurs.
4.14.5
Functions Use
I/O Check
To check sensors on the paper path. When a document misfeed occurs.
4.14.6
Functions Use
Tray Width Adjust

To set the maximum and the minimum width for the width sensor. When a document misfeed occurs. When an original size is erroneously detected
3-94

Functions Use
Tech. Rep. Mode
Sensor Auto Adjust

To make an automatic adjustment of the sensor. When a document misfeed occurs. When the sensor is replaced.
4.15 Gradation Adjust

Functions Use To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner Color reproduction performance becomes poor. The IU has been replaced. The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced. The Adj. Values of Max. and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. Conv. Value shows the difference from the ideal image density. The closer the Conv. Value to 0, the more ideal the image. Max: 0 100 Highlight: 0 60 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch Gradation Adjust. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.) Touch OK and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice (a total of three times). Touch Gradation Adjust to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values of each color (C, M, Y and Bk) for Max and Highlight. 8. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value. Max: 0 100 and Highlight: 0 60: It completes the adjustment procedure. If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 2 to 6. If a fault is detected, 0 is displayed for all values. In this case, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjust once again. If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform PRT Max Density or PRT Highlight. If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the specified range, check the image. If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.
Adjustment Specification Adjustment Procedure
3-95
Security
5.
5.1
5.1.1
Security
Security Mode Function Setting Procedure
Procedure
1. Show the Tech. Rep. Mode menu screen. 2. Press the following keys in this order. Stop 9 3. Security Mode menu will appear.
4036fs3035e0
5.1.2 III Adjustment/Setting
Exiting
Touch the Fin. Time key.
5.2
Security Mode Function Tree
Security Mode Total Counter Counter Setting Size Counter Color Mode Key Counter Message Admin. Choice Admin. Unit Interface Vendor Coverage Rate Reset KRDS Remote Diagnosis System Choice RD Mode Lock Job Authentication Mode IU Life Stop Setting Service Code Change Message
3-96
Security
5.3
5.3.1
Settings in the Security Mode

Counter Setting
To set the counting method for the Total Counter and Size Counter. Use to change the counting method for the counters. Total Counter Mode 1: 1 Count per 1 copy cycle (Default: US, Others 4, Japan) Mode 2: Double count-up according to paper size and copying mode (Default: Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3) Size Counter Not counted (Default: US, Others 4, Japan) A3 and 11 17 A3, B4, 11 17, and Legal (Default: Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3) A3, B4, FLS, 11 17, 11 14, and Legal Count-up Table Copying Size Mode 1-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 1 Total Size 2-sided Total 1 0 0 2 1 0 0 Specified sizes Mode 1 1 1 0 2 2 1 0 2-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 1 2 0 1 2 2 0 1 Specified sizes Mode 1 2 2 1 2 4 2 1
0: No count; 1: 1 count; 2: 2 counts; 3: 3 counts; 4: 4 counts
3-97
Security 5.3.2
cm3520 Field Service Manual Admin. Choice

To set whether or not the Key Counter, Data Controller, and Vendor are installed. Use to change the counting method for the administrative units. Key Counter Default setting: Unset Select Color Mode and Message when the Key Counter is mounted. Color Mode If Mode 1 is selected for Total Counter Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle If Mode 2 is selected for Total Counter, Sizes other than those specified is selected for Size Counter, and the paper used is the specified size or one other than those specified Mode 1: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 6 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 8 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 10 counts per 1 copy cycle
If Mode 2 is selected for Total Counter, Sizes other than those specified is selected for Size Counter, and the paper used is the specified size or one other than those specified Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle Message Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted. Type 1: Message for Key Counter Type 2: Message for Card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management Type 4: Message for Remote SW Admin. Unit (Data Controller) Default setting: Unset Vendor Default setting: Unset Select Interface and Message when the vendor is mounted. Interface Select the interface type when the vendor is mounted. Type 1: Coin Vendor is set Type 2: Not used Message Select the message type when the vendor is mounted. Type 1: Message for Coin Vendor Type 2: Message for Card Keeper Type 3: Message common to Coin Vendor and Card Keeper
3-98

Security
Coverage Rate Reset

To clear the coverage rate Use to clear the coverage rate The default setting is No. Yes No
Pressing the END key will clear the coverage rate.
5.3.4
Remote Diagnosis System Choice

To select the Remote Diagnosis System Use to switch to the RD mode.
The default setting is KRDS.

KRDS RD Mode
5.3.5
Functions
Lock Job Authentication Mode

To select the authentication mode for lock jobs Mode 1: Unlock only the document selected Mode 2: Unlock all documents, for which there is coincidence in the password.
Setting/ Procedure
The default setting is Mode 1. Mode 1 Mode 2
5.3.6
IU Life Stop Setting

To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life Use to select not to stop the print cycle when the IU reaches its service life. The default setting is Stop. Stop Not Stop
5.3.7
Service Code Change

To change the service code used to enter the Tech. Rep. mode. Use to change the service code. Enter the new service code from the 10-Key Pad. 8 digits (0 to 9) Current Service Code : Enter the service code currently used. New Service Code : Enter the service code to be newly used. Retype New Code : Enter the new service code a second time. NOTES The new service code is validated when you quit the Tech. Rep. mode after the service code change procedure. NEVER forget the service code. Forgetting the service code means the replacement of the Control Board (PWB-MC).
3-99
Use
Use to change the mode to Mode 2.
Mechanical Adjustment
6.
6.1
Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing Belt
This adjustment must be made in the following case: The Scanner Motor Assy has been removed. The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound. 1. Remove the IR Rear Cover. 2. Remove 16 screws and the reinforcement frame.
[1]
3. Loosen the three screws that secure the Scanner Motor mounting bracket [1].
4036fs3036c0
[2]
[4]
[2] [3]
[2]
4. With the Scanner drive gear set screw [2] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left, slide the Scanner Motor Assy [3] to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring [4]. Perform this step three times. 5. Tighten the three screws [2] to fix the Scanner Motor Assy into position.
4036fs3037c0
3-100
6.2
Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit
This adjustment must be made in the following case: The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound
[2] [1]
1. Slide the Mirrors Unit [1] to the center until it is pressed up against the cutouts in the rails [2].
[2] [1]
4036fs3038c0
[3]
2. If the Mirrors Unit is not pressed up against the cutouts, loosen the adjusting screw (to which red paint is applied) [3] of the Mirrors Unit and press the carriage up against the cutouts. Then, tighten the adjusting screw. III Adjustment/Setting
4036fs3049c0
6.3
Scanner Position Adjustment
This adjustment must be made in the following case: The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound. Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit must be completed.
[1]
1. Slide the Mirrors Unit [1] to the position shown on the left.
118 mm
4036fs3041c0
3-101
[3] [2]
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2. Secure the Scanner [2] in the position shown on the left using the two Scanner positioning screws [3]. 3. Make the FD-Mag. adjustment. 3-52
30 mm
[3]
4036fs3040c0
6.4
Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit
This adjustment must be made in the following case: The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed.
[3] [1]
1. Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on the Bypass Guide Rack Gear [2] are aligned in a straight line.
[2]
[3] [2]
4036fs3050c0
3-102

[1]
Mechanical Adjustment 2. Install the Bypass Unit Cover so that part A (edge) [2] of the Rack Gear [1] for the Bypass Paper Size Unit and part B [3] of the Bypass Unit Cover are aligned in a straight line.
[3] [2]
4036fs3051c0
3. When the Bypass Paper Size Unit base is mounted, align the lever position of the Bypass Paper Size Unit with the tab at the center in a straight line.
4036fs3052c0
4. After the Bypass Paper Size Unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the Bypass Paper Size Unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the Bypass Guide. 5. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen and select Machine Adjust Bypass Guide Adjust. Then, carry out Bypass Guide Adjust. 3-60
3-103
Board switch
7.
7.1
Board switch
PWB Location
PWB-S1
4036fs2175c0
7.2
PWB-S1 (Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board)
4036fs3030j0
Symbol INI MEMORY COM TROUBLE
Name Initialize Point Not Used Not Used Trouble Reset Switch
Description Resets a paper misfeed, malfunction, and erratic display.
Resets the following malfunction displays: Exposure Lamp system (C04XX), Fusing system (C05XX), Scanner system (C06XX), ROM contents failure detected upon start.
SERVICE
Not used
3-104
cm3520 Field Service Manual 7.2.1 1. 2. 3. 4. Initialize Procedure
Board switch
Turn OFF the Power Switch. With the circuit across pins of PJ2 closed, turn ON the Power Switch. In about 5 sec., open the PJ2 circuit. Check that the message Initialize Completed is displayed on the Touch Panel and then touch END. Memory Clear Procedure
7.2.2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 3-39 Press the following keys in this order: Stop 9 Security Mode menu will appear. Press the following keys in this order: Stop 0 Stop 1 Touch the Memory Clear key. Touch the Enable key and touch the OK key. If the machine exhibits an erratic display or operation.
7.2.3 1. 1. 2. 3.
Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. Unplug and plug in the power cord. Initialize the machine. Memory Clear the machine.
7.2.4
Data/Conditions Cleared by Reset Switches/Pins

Clearing Method
Data Cleared Misfeed display Fusing Optical Scanner C3FFX Others Erratic operation/display Utility Mode (Store, Users Choice:1, 2, Admin. Code) Tech. Rep. Mode (System Input) Security Mode (Counter Setting) Touch Panel Correction Mode
Front Door Trouble Open/Close Reset Switch
Initialize
Memory Clear
Malfunction display
: Cleared
: Not cleared
3-105
Do not perform Memory Clear casually, as it clears the types of data mentioned above. If Memory Clear has been performed, be sure to make settings for the functions that have been cleared once again.
Date/Time input mode
8.
8.1
Date/Time input mode

Date/Time input mode screen
This mode is used to set time-of-day and date.
4036fs3802e1
8.2
Date/Time input mode setting procedure
<Procedure> 1. Press the following keys in this order. Stop 1 1 4 4 Clear 2. Enter the 8-digit service code and touch Enter. (The default value is 00000000.) 3. Enter year, month, day, hour, and minute, in that order, from 10-key Pad. 4. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch OK. NOTE When setting the month, day, hour, or minute, enter 0 first if the data is one digit.
3-106
Jam Display
IV Troubleshooting
1.
1.1
Jam Display
Misfeed Display
When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper location are displayed on the Touch Panel of the copier.
[11] [7]
[10]
[1]
[2] [3]
[8] [9] [7] [4]
[2] [9] [5] [6] [8]

Display [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Misfeed Location 2nd Drawer take-up, Vertical Transport Manual Bypass take-up LCT take-up, Vertical Transport Duplex Unit transport 3rd Drawer take-up, Vertical Transport 4th Drawer take-up, Vertical Transport Exit Horizontal transport Finisher (9996) Finisher (9997) Document Feeder (9990) Right Door Horizontal transport cover Finisher Door Finisher Door Document Feeder Door
4036fs4002c0
Misfeed Processing Location 2nd Drawer Right Door Manual Bypass Slide Board LCT Right Door Duplex Unit Right Door Paper Feed Unit Right Door
Action
4-6 4-8 4-11 4-9 4-10 4-12 9997 9996 9996 9997 9990
1.1.1
Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure
Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of misfed paper, and close the door. 4-1
IV Troubleshooting
1st Drawer take-up, 2nd Image Transfer, Fusing Right Door
4-5
Jam Display
1.2
1.2.1
Sensor layout
System Mounted with 9991 and 9992.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7] [8]
4036fs4001c0
IV Troubleshooting
[1] [2] [3]*1 [3]*1 [4]
Exit Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Synchronizing Roller Sensor OHP Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2
PC30 PI1-DU PC28 PC27 PC1-DU
[5] Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 [6] Tray1 Double Feed Sensor [7] LCT Vertical Transport Sensor [8] LCT Paper Feed Sensor PC1 PC2-LCT PC1-LCT
*1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3].
4-2
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.2.2 System Mounted with 9991 and 9994.
Jam Display
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7] [8] [9] [10]
4036fs4003c0
[1] [2]
Exit Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1
PC30 PI1-DU PC28 PC27 PC1-DU PC108
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Tray1 Double Feed Sensor
PC1
Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117-PF Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC116-PF
[3]*1 Synchronizing Roller Sensor [3]*1 OHP Sensor [4] [5] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor
Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126-PF PC125-PF
[10] Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor
*1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3].
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display
1.3
1.3.1
Solution
Initial Check Items
When a paper misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items
Check Item Does paper meet product specifications? Is paper curled, wavy, or damp. Change paper. Change paper. Instruct user in correct paper storage. Action
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the Clean or change the paper path. paper path deformed or worn? Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct position to accommodate paper? Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation? Clean or change the defective Paper Separator Finger. Clean or change the defective roll/roller. Set as necessary. Correct or change the defective actuator.
IV Troubleshooting
4-4
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.3.2 1st Drawer take-up, Fusing Misfeed
Jam Display
A. Detection Timing
Type Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor (PC30) even after 2nd Image Transfer, the lapse of a given period of time after the Synchronizing Roller Clutch has been energized. Fusing misfeed detection The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. The leading edge of the paper does not block the Synchronizing Roller Sensor 1st Drawer take-up (PC28) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st Drawer Paper misfeed detection Take-Up Clutch (CL1) has been energized. Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor Detection of paper left in 2nd Image Transfer Detection of paper left in 1st Drawer The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The OHP Sensor (PC27) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Exit Sensor (PC30) OHP Sensor (PC27) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3) 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL1) Control Board (PWB-MC)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-MC PJ14MC-7B (ON) PWB-MC PJ12MC-6A (ON) PWB-MC PJ12MC-12 (ON) PWB-MC PJ12MC-2 (ON) PWB-MC PJ12MC-13 (ON) PWB-MC PJ14MC-10B (ON) Location (Electrical Component) K-7 R-2 S-2 R-2 S-2 L-7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Initial check items PC1 I/O check, Sensor check PC28 I/O check, Sensor check PC30 I/O check, Sensor check PC27 I/O check, Sensor check CL3 operation check CL1 operation check
Change PWB-MC
4-5
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display 1.3.3
2nd Drawer take-up, Vertical Transport, Manual Bypass take-up
A. Detection Timing
Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray2 Paper Feed Motor has been energized.
2nd Drawer takeup, Vertical Transport misfeed detec- The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a tion given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108). The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC108) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Bypass Paper Bypass Feed Clutch has been energized. Paper left at Tray2 or Bypass Paper left at Tray2 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Tray2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
B. Action 2nd Drawer take-up, Vertical Transport

Relevant Electrical Parts Tray2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Tray2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) Tray2 Board (PWB-Z)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-Z PJ6Z-8 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-MC PJ12MC-6 (ON) PWB-Z PJ5Z-1 ~ 4 Location (Electrical Component) 2-X 2-Y 2-R 2-V
IV Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5 6
Initial check items PC107 I/O check, Sensor check PC108 I/O check, Sensor check PC28 I/O check, Sensor check M102 operation check Change PWB-Z
4-6
cm3520 Field Service Manual Manual Bypass take-up

Relevant Electrical Parts Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) Tray2 Board (PWB-Z)
Jam Display
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ7Z-14B (ON) Location (Electrical Component) 2-Y 2-C
1 2 3 4
Initial check items PC108 I/O check, Sensor check CL101 operation check Change PWB-Z
4-7
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display 1.3.4
LCT Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (9992)
A. Detection Timing
Type Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the LCT Transport Roller Motor (PC2Misfeed detected LCT) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paper Feed Motor has at LCT take-up or been energized. Vertical TransThe Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse of a port Section given period of time after the paper has blocked the LCT Transport Roller Motor (PC2-LCT). The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is Paper left at LCT reset. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Misfeed detected as a result of The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. delayed deactivation of sensor
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 PWB-MC PJ12MC-6A (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 ~ 4 Location (Electrical Component) 9992 6-C 9992 6-C 2-R 9992 6-D
1 2
Initial check items PC1-LCT I/O check, Sensor check PC2-LCT I/O check, Sensor check PC108 I/O check, Sensor check M1-LCT operation check Change PWB-C1 LCT
IV Troubleshooting
3 4 5 6
4-8
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.3.5 Tray3 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (9993/9994)
Jam Display
A. Detection Timing
Type Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC117-PF) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor has been energized. Tray3 take-up or Vertical Transport The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse Section of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF). The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
Paper left at Tray3
Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-8 PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 PWB-MC PJ12MC-6A (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ5C2 PF-1 ~ 4 Location (Electrical Component)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Initial check items PC116-PF I/O check, Sensor check PC117-PF I/O check, Sensor check PC108 I/O check, Sensor check M122-PF operation check Change PWB-C2 PF
9994 3-F 2-E 9994 3-E
4-9
IV Troubleshooting
9994 3-F
Jam Display 1.3.6
Tray4 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (9994)
A. Detection Timing
Type Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC126-PF) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor has been energized. Tray4 take-up or Vertical Transport The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even after the Section lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF). The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
Paper left at Tray4
Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-8 PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2 PF-2 PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 PWB-C2 PF PJ9C2 PF-1 ~ 4 Location (Electrical Component) 9994 8-D 9994 8-E 9994 3-F 9994 8-F
Initial check items PC125-PF I/O check, Sensor check PC126-PF I/O check, Sensor check PC117-PF I/O check, Sensor check M123-PF operation check Change PWB-C2 PF
IV Troubleshooting
2 3 4 5 6
4-10
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.3.7 Duplex Transport Misfeed (9991)
Jam Display
A. Detection Timing
Type Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a Duplex paper take-up sequence has been started. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not blocked even after the lapse Misfeed detected at of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU). Duplex Transport Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper left at Duplex (PC1-DU) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is Transport Section opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) Control Board (PWB-MC)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-MC PJ12MC-6A (ON) PWB-A DU PJ3A-1~4 PWB-A DU PJ2A-1~4 Location (Electrical Component) 2-R 9991 8-D 9991 8-D 9991 8-D 9991 8-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Initial check items PC28 I/O check, Sensor check PI1-DU I/O check, Sensor check PC1-DU I/O check, Sensor check M1-DU operation check M2-DU operation check Change PWB-A DU Change PWB-MC
4-11
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display 1.3.8 Fusing/Exit Misfeed
A. Detection Timing
Type Description PC10 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Exit Sensor (PC30).
Misfeed detected at Fusing/Exit Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Exit Sensor (PC30) has been unblocked by the paper during a switchback sequence. Paper left at Duplex Exit Sensor (PC30) is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON, a door or Transport Section cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Sensor (PC30) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Control Board (PWB-MC)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-MC PJ12MC-12A (ON) Location (Electrical Component) S-2 9991 8-D
1 2 3 4
Initial check items PC30 I/O check, Sensor check PI1 I/O check, Sensor check Change PWB-MC
IV Troubleshooting
4-12
Malfunction Code
2.
2.1
Malfunction Code
Restarting
This machine automatically performs a restarting sequence if a minor fault that would not damage the machine occurs during operation. No screen information is given for the restarting sequence. On completing the restarting sequence, the machine restores its operation to its ordinary condition.
2.2
Alert code
The copier's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel. Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the State Confirm screen.
4036fs4013e0
4036fs4014e0
4-13
IV Troubleshooting
Maintenance call mark
Malfunction Code 2.2.1 Alert list
If an image stabilization or Scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code appears.
Code S-1 P-5 Item Description
It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment CCD clamp gain adjustment failure value is faulty. AIDC Sensor (Front) failure The output from the photoreceiver of the AIDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point of a bare surface on the Transfer Belt is 4.3 V or more during an adjustment of the AIDC Sensor. The output from the photoreceiver of the AIDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point in a toner pattern on the Transfer Belt is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment has been completed. All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the Transfer Belt are 0.5 g/m2 (AIDC Sensor photoreceiver output) or less during max. density adjustment (Vg/Vb adjustment). The number of points detected in the CD direction is more or less than the specified value during CD registration correction. The number of points detected in the FD direction is more or less than the specified value during FD registration correction. The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during CD registration correction. The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during FD registration correction. The skew correction amount is greater than the specified value. An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of Black. An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value. An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of color. The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1,000 ms while the Color PC Drum Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0). The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1,000 ms while the Bk PC Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0).
P-28
AIDC Sensor (Back) failure
P-6 P-7 P-8 P-9
Cyan Imaging Unit failure Magenta Imaging Unit failure Yellow Imaging Unit failure Black Imaging Unit failure
P-21
Color Shift Test Pattern failure
P-22
Color Shift Test Pattern failure
P-26
ATVC (Bk) failure
IV Troubleshooting
P-27
ATVC (2nd) failure
P-29
ATVC (color) failure
P-30
Color PC Drum Main Sensor malfunction
P-31
Bk PC Drum Main Sensor malfunction
4-14
Malfunction Code
2.3
2.3.1
Solution
S-1 : CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Scanner Assy
CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Action
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6
Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty, or change Scanner. Change PWB-A. Change PWB-C.
2.3.2 2.3.3
P-5: AIDC Sensor (Front) failure P-28 AIDC Sensor (Back) failure
AIDC / Registration Sensor /1 (PC8) AIDC / Registration Sensor /2 (PC9) Step 1 2 3 4 5 6
Control Board (PWB-MC) Image Transfer Belt Unit Action
Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged. Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or PC9 if it is installed or connected improperly. Clean PC8 or PC9 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door, run an image stabilization sequence, and select State Confirm Level History 1 to check the AIDC value. AIDC1: PC8, AIDC2: PC9 If the value is 1.0 V or less, change PC8 or PC9. Change PWB-MC
4-15
IV Troubleshooting
Malfunction Code 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure
Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit Bk Step 1 2 3 4 5 6
Image Transfer Belt Unit
Action Select Image Adjust PRT Max Density and, if the setting value is negative, readjust. Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary. Clean the AIDC Sensor window if dirty Clean the contact of the Imaging Unit connector if dirty Change Imaging Unit. Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit.
2.3.8
P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern failure

Image Transfer Belt Unit Step 1 2 Action Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged.
2.3.9
P-22: Color Shift Adjust failure

IV Troubleshooting
AIDC / Registration Sensor /1 (PC8) Step 1 2 3
AIDC / Registration Sensor /2 (PC9) Action
Check the LED retraction lever for locked position and, if there is any faulty condition evident, slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall it in position. Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or PC9 if it is installed or connected improperly. Check the Vertical Transport Guide for installed position and correct as necessary.
4-16
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.3.10 2.3.11 2.3.12 P-26 : 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure P-27 : 2nd image transfer ATVC failure P-29 : 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure
Relevant Electrical Parts High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) Control Board (PWB-MC) Step 1 2 3 4 Image Transfer Belt Unit
Malfunction Code
Action Check the contact of the Transfer Belt Unit and that of HV2 for connection and clean or correct the contact as necessary. Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change HV2. Change PWB-MC.
2.3.13
P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction

Color PC Drum Main Sensor (PC10) Color PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC35) Step 1 2 3 4 5
Control Board (PWB-MC)
Action Reinstall or reconnect PC10 or PC35 if it is installed or connected improperly. Clean PC10 or PC35 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door to reset the fault. If P-30 occurs again, change PC10 or PC35. Change PWB-MC.
2.3.14
P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction

Step 1 2 3 4 5
Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure *1. Check the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, for installed position and proper connector connection. Wipe the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, clean of dirt if any. If P-31 persists, change the sensor which was found faulty. Change PWB-MC.
*1: Faulty sensor check procedure 1. Open the Front Door and turn ON the Power Switch of the machine. 2. Call the I/O Check screen to the screen by way of Tech. Rep. Mode. 3. Close the Front Door and start Stabilizer. 4. During the Stabilizer sequence, check to see if the values of the phase detection sensors (Color PC Drum Main/Sub and Bk PC Drum Main/Sub Sensors) change. 5. A sensor is faulty if its value does not change.
4-17
IV Troubleshooting
Bk PC Drum Main Sensor (PC11) Bk PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC36)
Malfunction Code
2.4
Trouble code
The copier's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel.
4036fs4012e0
2.4.1
Trouble code list
* For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the Service Manual for the corresponding option.
Code Item Description The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning.
C0000 Main Motor's failure to turn
C0001 Main Motor turning at abnormal timing C0016 Bk PC Motor's failure to turn
IV Troubleshooting
C0017 Bk PC Motor's turning at abnormal The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetertiming mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. C0018 Color PC Drum Motor's failure to turn C0019 Color PC Drum Motor's turning at abnormal timing C001A Color Developing Motor's failure to turn The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning.
C001B Color Developing Motor's turning at The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predeterabnormal timing mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.
4-18

Code Item Description
Malfunction Code
C0040 Suction Fan Motor's failure to turn C0046 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 failure to turn C0048 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 or Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 failure to turn C004C Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor's failure to turn C004D Toner Suction Fan Motor's failure to turn C004E Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor's failure to turn C004F Cooling Fan Motor 2s failure to turn C0060 Fusing Drive Motors failure to turn C0061 Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing C0094 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure
The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede-
termined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.
The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is not activated (retracted position) within 2 sec. after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller's retracting motion. The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is not deactivated (pressed position) within 2 sec. after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller's pressing motion. The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is not activated (retracted position) within 5 sec. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the Transfer Belt's retracting motion. The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is not deactivated (pressed position) within 1 sec. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the Transfer Belt's pressing motion. No change is observed in the encoder sensor pulse even after the lapse of 0.5 sec. after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Rollers retracting motion. No change is observed in the encoder sensor pulse even after the lapse of 0.5 sec. after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Rollers pressing motion. The Fusing Pressure Position Sensor is not activated (pressed position) even when 30 encoder sensor pulses are counted after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Rollers pressing motion.
C0096 Image Transfer Belt pressure/ retraction failure
C0098 Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/ retraction failure
4-19
IV Troubleshooting
Malfunction Code
Code Item

Description
An output is automatically produced from the PC Drum Charge Corona of each color when the malfunction resetting procedure is performed after C0208 (PC C0202 Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona Drum Charge Corona malfunction) has been detected. malfunction The SCD signal is detected for a continuous 0.5-sec. C0204 Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona period at this time. malfunction C0206 Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0208 PC Drum Charge Corona malfunc- The SCD signal is detected for a continuous 0.5-sec. tion period while the PC Drum Charge Corona is being energized. C0400 Exposure Lamps failure to turn ON The output from the CCD Sensor is a predetermined value or less during CCD Sensor gain adjustment. C0410 Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing C0500 Heating Roller warm-up failure The average output value of the CCD Sensor with the Scanner at its standby position is a predetermined value or more at the end of a scan job. The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 C within 50 sec. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 C and that of the Fusing Pressure Roller does not reach 195 C within 200 sec. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. The voltage of the Heating Roller Thermistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of 1 sec. or more after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. The voltage of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec. after the predrive of the Fusing Roller has been started during a warm-up cycle.
C0200 Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction
C0501 Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up failure
C0510 Heating Roller abnormally low tem- No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of perature 1 sec. or more during a standby state, print cycle, or Power Save. A temperature of 120 C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during a standby state. A temperature of 120 C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during a print cycle. A temperature of 70 C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during Power Save. C0511 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally . A temperature of 80 C or less of the Fusing Preslow temperature sure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during a standby state. A temperature of 80 C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during a print cycle. A temperature of 80 C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during Power Save.
IV Troubleshooting
4-20

Malfunction Code
C0520 Heating Roller abnormally high temperature
A temperature of 225 C or more of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more.
C0521 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally A temperature of 190 C or more of the Fusing Preshigh temperature sure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more before the start of the heater temperature control. A temperature of 215 C or more of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more after the start of the heater temperature control. C0650 Scanner Home Sensor malfunction The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect the Scanner located at its home position. The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect a Scanner even when the Scanner Motor has been driven to move the Scanner over the maximum traveling distance. The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner when the Scanner has moved 5 mm from the position, at which it blocks the Scanner Home Sensor. C0660 Scanner overrun failure The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins with the time when a prescan command and a scan preparation command are executed and ends when a home return command is executed.
C0900 Tray3 Elevator failure C0910 Tray2 Elevator failure
See the 9993/9994 Service Manual.
The Lift-up Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.
C0950 Tray4 Elevator failure C0960 Bypass lifting motion failure
See the 9994 Service Manual.
C0990 LCT Elevator Motor malfunction (Elevator malfunction) C0991 LCT ascent motion failure (soft limit error) C0996 LCT Shift Motor malfunction C0997 LCT shifting failure C0998 LCT ejection failure C099C LCT Shift Gate malfunction C099D LCT communications error
See the 9992 Service Manual.
4-21
IV Troubleshooting
The Bypass Lift-up Sensor is not blocked even when the Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the standby position to the take-up position was started. The Bypass Lift-up Sensor is not unblocked even when the Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the take-up position to the standby position was started.
Malfunction Code
Code Item

Description
C0B00 Finishing option transport system malfunction C0B05 Finishing option Paddle Motor malfunction C0B20 Finishing option Stapler Unit CD drive failure C0B25 Finishing option Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunction C0B30 Finishing option Aligning Bar moving mechanism malfunction C0B39 Finishing option Front Aligning Motor malfunction C0B3A Finishing option Rear Aligning Motor malfunction C0B48 Finishing option Exit Roller pressure/retraction failure C0B4A Finishing option Storage Roller pressure/retraction failure C0B4C Finishing option Exit Motor malfunction C0B50 Finishing option stapling mechanism malfunction 1 C0B55 Finishing option Staple/Folding Motor malfunction C0B75 Finishing option Punch Cam Motor drive failure C0B76 Finishing option Punch Unit Board malfunction C0B77 Finishing option Punch Side Registration Motor malfunction C0B78 Finishing option Punch Motor malfunction C0B79 Finishing option Punch Sensor malfunction C0B80 Finishing option Shift Motor mechanism malfunction C0BA0 Finishing option Elevator drive malfunction C0BF1 Finishing option Backup RAM failure C0F30 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan ATDC Sensor C0F31 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan ATDC Sensor C0F32 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta ATDC Sensor
See 9997 or 9996 Service Manual.
IV Troubleshooting
T/C 0.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. T/C 15.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. T/C 0.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.
4-22

Malfunction Code
C0F33 Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta ATDC Sensor C0F34 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow ATDC Sensor C0F35 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow ATDC Sensor C0F36 Abnormally low toner density detected Black ATDC Sensor C0F37 Abnormally high toner density detected Black ATDC Sensor
T/C 15.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. T/C 0.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. T/C 15.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. T/C 3 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. T/C 12 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.
C0F3A Cyan ATDC Sensor adjustment fail- ATDC Sensor automatic adjustment does not function ure properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value. C0F3B Magenta ATDC Sensor adjustment failure C0F3C Yellow ATDC Sensor adjustment failure C0F3D Black ATDC Sensor adjustment failure C1200 Standard controller configuration failure C1203 File Memory mounting error C1204 Memory capacity discrepancy C1220 Image Input Time Out The controller of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is faulty. The File Memory mounted on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is faulty. The capacity of the File Memory mounted on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is short. Image data is not input from the Image Processing Board (PWB-C) to the MFP Control Board (PWBMFP).
C1240 JBIG0 Error C1241 JBIG1 Error C1242 JBIG2 Error C1243 JBIG3 Error C1250 Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure C1251 Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure C1252 Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure C1253 Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure C1261 Compression hardware timeout
Memory of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is faulty.
The MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is faulty.
The hardware involved with the compression function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) does not respond.
4-23
IV Troubleshooting
C1229 Image Output Time Out
No image data is output from the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP).
Malfunction Code
Code Item

Description The hardware involved with the extraction function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) does not respond.
C1265 Extraction hardware timeout
C1279 PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure The hardware involved with image transfer in the memory of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) does not respond. C1290 Compression/extraction timeout detection C12B1 Image processing ASIC failure 1 C12B2 Image processing ASIC failure 2 C12B3 Image processing ASIC failure 3 C12B4 Image processing ASIC failure 4 C12C0 Hard disk recognition error C12C1 Hard Disk Error 1 C12C2 Hard Disk Error 2 C12C3 Hard Disk Error 3 C12C4 Hard Disk Error 4 C12C5 Hard Disk Error 5 C12C6 Hard Disk Error 6 C12C7 Hard Disk Error 7 C12C8 Hard Disk Error 8 C12C9 Hard Disk Error 9 C12CA Hard Disk Error A C12CB Hard disk data transfer error Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty. Unformatted hard disk is connected. A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is connected. A controller hardware error is detected in the network I/F. A new installation is not detected when a new Transfer Cleaner Unit (Image Transfer Belt Unit) is installed. A new installation is not detected when a new Fusing Unit is installed. A condition of EEPROM is not connected or There is an access error is detected in EEPROM of the Imaging Unit. The hardware involved with the BTC compression function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWBMFP) does not respond. Image processing ASIC (CPS2300S) on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) does not respond. Image processing ASIC (PIC1200S) on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) does not respond. Image processing ASIC (PIC3400LITE) on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) does not respond. Image processing ASIC (BTCIF) on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) does not respond. Unable to communicate between the hard disk and MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP). Hard disk is faulty.
IV Troubleshooting
C12CC Hard disk unformat C12CF Hard disk specifications error C12D0 Controller hardware error C13C8 New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure C13CA New Fusing Unit resetting failure C13D1 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C13D2 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C13D3 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C13D4 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error
4-24

Malfunction Code
C13D5 Cyan LPH correction data download failure C13D6 Magenta LPH correction data download failure C13D7 Yellow LPH correction data download failure C13D8 Black LPH correction data download failure C1800 Controller start failure
An error is detected while the LPH correction data is being downloaded from EEPROM of LPH to PWBMFP when the Power Switch is turned ON.
A controller start failure is detected in the controller interface.
C3310 CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD clamp adjustment. The peak value of the output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment. C3331 MSC undefined malfunction occur- An undefined malfunction occurs in the MSC of the ring MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP). C3332 Scanner Section undefined malfunction An undefined malfunction occurs in the Scanner Section.
C3333 Engine Section undefined malfunc- An undefined malfunction occurs in the Engine Section tion (PWB-MC, etc.). C3E00 NVRAM initialization failure C3E01 C3E02 C3F00 Vendor connection failure Total Clear is executed in a mode other than the card line mode. An initial command is issued from the terminal in a mode other than the card line mode. A new NVRAM is detected in a mode other than the card line mode. It is detected that communications with the vendor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with "Installed" selected for the setting of vendor installation. A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the LPH Board during starting.
C3FFC ROM contents error upon startup (LPH) C3FFD ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) C3FFE ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) C3FFF ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)
A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the Control Board during starting. A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the MSC (PWB-MFP) during starting
4-25
IV Troubleshooting
A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the PWB-C during starting.
Malfunction Code
2.5
How to reset
Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the type of the malfunction code. * List of Malfunction Resetting Procedures
Resetting Procedure Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board Applicable Malfunctions Exposure lamp Fusing Scanner Mechanical control Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. Scanner Memory NIC Imaging Unit LPH correction data Mechanical control NVRAM initialization Punch Unit Open and close the Front Door All but above Applicable Malfunction Codes C04XX C05XX C06XX C3332, 3333 C0650, C0660, C3310, C3700 C12XX C12D0, C1800 C13D1, C13D2, C13D3, C13D4 C13D5, C13D6, C13D7, C13D8 C3331, C3FXX C3E00, C3E01, C3E02 C0B7X All malfunction codes but those listed above
IV Troubleshooting
4-26
Malfunction Code
2.6
2.6.1
Solution
C0000: Main Motor's failure to turn
Main Motor (M1)
Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 15-R 6-Q
1 2 3 4 5 6
Check the M1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
Check the PWB-MC connector for proper conPWB-MC PJ6MC-1 (DC24 V) nection and correct as necessary. M1 operation check Change PWB-MC. Change PU1. PWB-MC PJ11MC-6A (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-3A (REM)
2.6.2
C0001: Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing

Main Motor (M1)
Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal PWB-MC PJ11MC-6A (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-3A (REM)
Location (Electrical Component)
2 3
Change PWB-MC. Change PU1.
4-27
IV Troubleshooting
M1 operation check
6-Q
Malfunction Code 2.6.3 C0016: Bk PC Motor failure to turn

Relevant Electrical Parts Bk PC Motor (M7)
Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 15-R 13-A
1 2 3 4 5
Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M7 operation check Change PWB-MC.
PWB-MC PJ6MC-3 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ11MC-6B (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-3B (REM)
2.6.4
C0017: Bk PC Motor turning at abnormal timing

Bk PC Motor (M7)
Step
Action
Control Signal PWB-MC PJ11MC-6B (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-3B (REM)
Location (Electrical Component) 13-A
1 2
M7 operation check Change PWB-MC.
2.6.5 IV Troubleshooting
C0018: Color PC Motor failure to turn

Color PC Drum Motor (M5)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 15-R 13-B
1 2 3 4 5
Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M5 operation check (C0018) Change PWB-MC
PWB-MC PJ6MC-5 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ11MC-13B (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-10B (REM)
4-28
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.6 C0019: Color PC Motor turning at abnormal timing
Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Control Board (PWB-MC)
Malfunction Code
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-MC PJ11MC-13B (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-10B (REM) Location (Electrical Component) 13-B
1 2
M5 operation check (C0019) Change PWB-MC
2.6.7
C001A: Color Developing Motor failure to turn

Color Developing Motor (M6)
DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 22-E 13-D
1 2 3 4 5
Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PU-1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M6 operation check (C001A) Change PU-1
PU1 PJ5PU1-13 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ2MC-6 (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ2MC-3 (REM)
2.6.8
C001B: Color Developing Motor turning at abnormal timing

Step
Action
Control Signal PWB-MC PJ2MC-6 (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ2MC-3 (REM)
Location (Electrical Component) 13-D
1 2
M6 operation check (C001B) Change PWB-MC
4-29
IV Troubleshooting
Malfunction Code 2.6.9 C0040: Suction Fan Motors failure to turn

Relevant Electrical Parts Suction Fan Motor (M12)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 6-P
1 2 3 4
Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M12 operation check Change PWB-MC
PWB-MC PJ18MC-9 (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ18MC-7 (REM)
2.6.10
C0046: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1s failure to turn

Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 2-K
1 2 3 4
Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M9 operation check Change PU-1
PU1 PJ17PU1-5 (LOCK)
IV Troubleshooting
4-30
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.11 C0048: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2 /3s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M15) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M16) Control Board (PWB-MC)
Malfunction Code
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component)
1 2
Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M15, M16 operation check
M15: PWB-MC PJ3MC-6A (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ3MC-4A (REM) M16: PWB-MC PJ3MC-9A (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ3MC-7A (REM)
2-I (M15) 2-J (M16)
Change PWB-MC
2.6.12
C004C: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motors failure to turn

Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 26-V
1 2 3 4
4-31
IV Troubleshooting
Malfunction Code 2.6.13
C004D: Toner Suction Fan Motors failure to turn

Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 26-V
1 2 3 4
PWB-MC PJ3MC-3A (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ3MC-1A (REM)
2.6.14
C004E: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motors failure to turn

Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 22-G
1 2 3 4
Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M21 operation check Change PU-1
PU1 PJ12PU1-3 (LOCK)
IV Troubleshooting
2.6.15
C004F: Cooling Fan Motor 2s failure to turn

Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 26-U
1 2 3 4
4-32
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.16 C0060: Fusing Drive Motors failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Control Board (PWB-MC)
Malfunction Code
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 15-R 2-N
1 2 3 4 5
Check the M2 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the Fusing Unit drive for possible overload and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M2 operation check Change PWB-MC
PWB-MC PJ6MC-7 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ11MC-13A (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-10A (REM)
2.6.17
C0061: Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing

Fusing Drive Motor (M2)
Step
Action
Control Signal PWB-MC PJ11MC-13A (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ11MC-10A (REM)
Location (Electrical Component) 2-N
1 2
M2 operation check Change PWB-MC
2.6.18
C0094: 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure

2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC29) Control Board (PWB-MC) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 6-B 6-A
1 2 3 4
Check the M13 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC29 I/O check M13 operation check Change PWB-MC
PWB-MC PJ12MC-9A (ON) PWB-MC PJ18MC-1 (REM)
4-33
IV Troubleshooting
C0096: Image Transfer Belt pressure/retraction failure

1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC12) Control Board (PWB-MC) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 6-B 6-C
1 2 3 4
Check the M11 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC12 I/O check M11 operation check Change PWB-MC
PWB-MC PJ3MC-6B (ON) PWB-MC PJ5MC-1~4 (Pulse Output)
2.6.20
C0098: Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/retraction failure

Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC33) Control Board (PWB-MC) Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) Fusing Unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 2-M 16-P 2-J
1 2 3 4 5 6
Check the M9 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC33 I/O check PC34 operation check M19 operation check Change Fusing Unit Change PWB-MC
PWB-MC PJ7MC-12A (ON) PWB-MC PJ16MC-3A (Pulse Output) PWB-MC PJ19MC-5B,6B (Pulse Output)
IV Troubleshooting
4-34
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.21 2.6.22 2.6.23 2.6.24 2.6.25 C0200: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0202: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0204: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0206: Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0208: PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction
Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y Imaging Unit /Bk High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) Control Board (PWB-MC)
Malfunction Code
1 2 3 4 5
Check the Imaging Unit contact and correct or clean as necessary. Check the HV1 contact and correct or clean as necessary. Change Imaging Unit. Change HV1. Change PWB-MC
2.6.26 2.6.27
C0400: Exposure Lamp's failure to turn ON C0410: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing
Scanner Assy Flat Cable
Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3
Check the flat cable for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Change Scanner Assy. Change PWB-C.
4-35
IV Troubleshooting
WIRING DIAGRAM
Malfunction Code 2.6.28 2.6.29 2.6.30 2.6.31 2.6.32 2.6.33 C0500: Heating Roller warm-up failure C0501: Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up failure
C0510: Heating Roller abnormally low temperature C0511: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature C0520: Heating Roller abnormally high temperature C0521: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature
Fusing Unit
DC Power Supply (PU1) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Check the Fusing Unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). Check the Fusing Unit, PWB-MC and PU1 for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Change Fusing Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PU1.
2 3 4 5
2.6.34 2.6.35
C0650: Scanner Home Sensor malfunction C0660: Scanner overrun failure

Scanner Home Sensor (PC201) Scanner Motor (M201)
Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM
IV Troubleshooting
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) 21-Z 25-Z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Correct or change the Scanner drive (cable, pulley, gear, belt) if it is faulty. Correct the Scanner Motor set screw if loose. Adjust Top Image and FD-Mag. Check the PC201, M201, PWB-IC and PWB-C connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC201 I/O check M201 operation check Change PWB-IC. Change PWB-C.
PWB-C PJ11C-8 (ON) PWB-IC PJ3IC-3 (LOCK) PWB-IC PJ3IC-1 (REM)
4-36
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.36 C0900: 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts Tray2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC105) Tray2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) Tray2 Board (PWB-Z)
Malfunction Code
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 2-Y 2-U
1 2 3 4 5
Check the M101 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of M101 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. PC105 I/O check M101 operation check Change PWB-Z.
PWB-Z PJ6Z-3 (ON) PWB-Z PJ4Z-4 (+) PWB-Z PJ4Z-5 (-)
2.6.37
C0960: Manual Bypass Paper Lifting Failure

Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC115) Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103)
Tray2 Board (PWB-Z) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3 4 5 6
Check the M103 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of M103 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. PC115 I/O check CL101 operation check M103 operation check Change PWB-Z.
PWB-Z PJ7Z-11A (ON) PWB-Z PJ5Z-5-8 (Pulse Output)
2-V
4-37
IV Troubleshooting
2-E
Malfunction Code 2.6.38 2.6.39 2.6.40
C0F30: Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan ATDC Sensor C0F32: Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta ATDC Sensor C0F34: Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow ATDC Sensor
ATDC Sensor/C (PWB-N3) ATDC Sensor/M (PWB-N2) ATDC Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Toner Supply Motor C/Bk (M3) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4)
Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) M3: 19-I M4: 19-J
1 2 3 4 5
Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low. Clean the ATDC Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Correct the ATDC Sensor spring moving part if faulty. Clean the ATDC Sensor LED if dirty Change ATDC Sensor C/M/Y. M3, M4 operation check
M3: PWB-MC PJ16MC-4A~7A (Pulse Output) M4: PWB-MC PJ16MC10A~13A (Pulse Output)
7 8 9
Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFP.
IV Troubleshooting
4-38
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.41 2.6.42 2.6.43
Malfunction Code
C0F31: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan ATDC Sensor C0F33: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta ATDC Sensor C0F35: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow ATDC Sensor
ATDC Sensor/C (PWB-N3) ATDC Sensor/M (PWB-N2) ATDC Sensor/Y (PWB-N1)
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Clean the ATDC Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Clean the ATDC Sensor LED if dirty Correct the contact and/or WIRING of the ATDC Sensor if faulty. Change ATDC Sensor C/M/Y. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFP.
2.6.44
C0F36: Abnormally low toner density detected Black ATDC Sensor

ATDC Sensor/Bk (UN10) Toner Supply Motor C/Bk (M3)
Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal
1 2 3 4 5
Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low. M3 operation check Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFP.
PWB-MC PJ16MC-4A~7A (Pulse Output)
19-I
4-39
IV Troubleshooting
Step
Action
C0F37: Abnormally high toner density detected Black ATDC Sensor

Imaging Unit /Bk ATDC Sensor/Y (PWB-N1)
Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3 4 5
Correct the ATDC connection on the underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFP.
2.6.46 2.6.47 2.6.48
C0F3A: Cyan ATDC Sensor adjustment failure C0F3B: Magenta ATDC Sensor adjustment failure C0F3C: Yellow ATDC Sensor adjustment failure
ATDC Sensor/C (PWB-N3) ATDC Sensor/M (PWB-N2) ATDC Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Toner Supply Motor C/Bk (M3) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4)
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location (Electrical Component) M3: 19-I M4: 19-J
IV Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4
Clean the ATDC Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Clean the ATDC Sensor LED if dirty Correct the contact and/or WIRING of the ATDC Sensor if faulty. Reinstall Imaging Unit C/M/Y. M3, M4 operation check
M3: PWB-MC PJ16MC-4A~7A (Pulse Output) M4: PWB-MC PJ16MC-10A~13A (Pulse Output)
6 7 8
Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFP.
4-40
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.49 C0F3D: Black ATDC Sensor adjustment failure
Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /Bk
Malfunction Code
Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3 4 5
Correct the ATDC connection on the underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFP.
2.6.50
C1200: Standard Controller configuration failure

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component)
Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made: Tech. Rep. Mode System Input Peripheral Setting. If the setting is changed, be sure to turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. Check the connectors of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFP.
4-41
IV Troubleshooting
Malfunction Code 2.6.51 2.6.52 C1203: Memory mounting failure C1204: Memory mounting failure
Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
Standard Memory (DIMMS0) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Check to see if the standard memory (DIMMS0) on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is installed correctly. Change the standard memory (DIMMS0) on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP). Change PWB-MFP.
2 3
2.6.53
C1220: Image Input Time Out

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust Memory/Hard Disk Adjust Memory Bus Check IRMemory. Check the connectors between PWB-MFP and PWB-C for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFP. Change PWB-C.
2 3
IV Troubleshooting
2.6.54
C1229: Image Output Time Out

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component)
Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust Memory/Hard Disk Adjust Memory Bus Check MemoryPRT. Check the connectors on PWB-MFP for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFP.
2 3
4-42
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.55 2.6.56 2.6.57 2.6.58 2.6.59 2.6.60 2.6.61 2.6.62 2.6.63 2.6.64 2.6.65 2.6.66 2.6.67 2.6.68 2.6.69 2.6.70 C1240: JBIG0 Error C1241: JBIG1 Error C1242: JBIG2 Error C1243: JBIG3 Error C1250: Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure C1251: Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure C1252: Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure C1253: Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure C1261: Compression hardware timeout C1265: Extraction hardware timeout C1279: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure C1290: Compression/extraction timeout detection C12B1: Image processing ASIC failure 1 C12B2: Image processing ASIC failure 2 C12B3: Image processing ASIC failure 3 C12B4: Image processing ASIC failure 4
Malfunction Code
Change PWB-MFP.
4-43
IV Troubleshooting
Malfunction Code 2.6.71 2.6.72 2.6.73 2.6.74 2.6.75 2.6.76 2.6.77 2.6.78 2.6.79 2.6.80 2.6.81 2.6.82 C12C0: Hard disk recognition error C12C1: Hard Disk Error 1 C12C2: Hard Disk Error 2 C12C3: Hard Disk Error 3 C12C4: Hard Disk Error 4 C12C5: Hard Disk Error 5 C12C6: Hard Disk Error 6 C12C7: Hard Disk Error 7 C12C8: Hard Disk Error 8 C12C9: Hard Disk Error 9 C12CA: Hard Disk Error A C12CB: Hard disk data transfer error
Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) Hard Disk
1 2 3
Reinstall the hard disk. Change Hard Disk. Change PWB-MFP.
2.6.83
C12CC: Hard disk unformat

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM
IV Troubleshooting
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3
Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust Memory/Hard Disk Adjust Hard Disk Format Change Hard Disk. Change PWB-MFP.
4-44
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.84 C12CF: Hard disk specifications error
Relevant Electrical Parts Hard Disk
Malfunction Code
1 2
Check the hard disk specifications. Change the hard disk.
2.6.85 2.6.86
C13C8: New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure C13CA: New Fusing Unit resetting failure
Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component)
1 2
Reinstall Unit Change PWB-MC
2.6.87 2.6.88 2.6.89 2.6.90
C13D1: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C13D2: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C13D3: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C13D4: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error
1 2 3 4
Clean the connection between the Imaging Unit and copier if dirty Reinstall Imaging Unit C/M/Y/Bk. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC
4-45
IV Troubleshooting
Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y Imaging Unit /Bk
Malfunction Code 2.6.91 2.6.92 2.6.93 2.6.94
C13D5: Cyan LPH correction data download failure C13D6: Magenta LPH correction data download failure C13D7: Yellow LPH correction data download failure C13D8: Black LPH correction data download failure
LPH Assy/C LPH Assy/M LPH Assy/Y LPH Assy/Bk
LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) Control Board (PWB-MC)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Correct the harness connection between LPH and PWB-LED if faulty. Correct the harness connection between PWBLED and PWB-MFP if faulty. Change LPH Assy. Change PWB-LED. Change PWB-MFP. Change PWB-MC
2.6.95
C3310: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure

Scanner Assy
CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
IV Troubleshooting
Control Signal
1 2 3 4 5 6
Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty, or change Scanner. Change PWB-A. Change PWB-C.
4-46
cm3520 Field Service Manual 2.6.96 C3331: MSC undefined malfunction occurring
Malfunction Code
1 2
Check the connectors on PWB-MFP for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFP.
2.6.97
C3332: Scanner Section undefined malfunction

Scanner Assy
CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3
Correct the connector connection between PWBA and PWB-C if faulty. Change PWB-C. Change PWB-A.
2.6.98
C3333: Engine Section undefined malfunction

Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2
Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MC
4-47
IV Troubleshooting
WIRING DIAGRAM
Malfunction Code 2.6.99 2.6.100 2.6.101 C3E00: NVRAM initialization failure C3E01: NVRAM initialization failure C3E02: NVRAM initialization failure
1 2
Check the PWB-MFP connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFP.
2.6.102
C3F00: Vendor connection failure

Coin Vendor (Japan) Coin Vendor Kit (North America, Europe) WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2 3
Check the Vendor connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MC
2.6.103 IV Troubleshooting 2.6.104 2.6.105 2.6.106
C3FFC: ROM contents error upon startup (LPH) C3FFD: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) C3FFE: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) C3FFF: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
1 2
Check the ROM version. Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card.
4-48
Power Supply Trouble
3.
3.1

Machine is not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check)
Power Switch (SW1) Control Board (PWB-MC)
DC Power Supply (PU1)
Step
Check Item Is a power voltage supplied across PJ1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1? Are the fuses (F1 and F2) on PU1 conducting? Is DC24 V being output from PJ5PU1-1 on PU1? Is DC5 V being input to PJ10PU1-1 on PU1? Is DC5 V being input to PJ1MC-7 on the Control Board? (LED on PWB-MC does not blink.)
WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) 26-G 23-E 23-C 14-E
Result NO
Action Check WIRING between the wall outlet and PJ1PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PWB-MC
1 2 3 4 5
NO NO NO NO YES
3.2
Control panel indicators do not light

Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Control Panel (UN201)
Step
Check Item Is the I/F cable between the Scanner and engine connected properly? Is a power voltage being applied across PJ1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1? Is the fuse (F1,F2) on PU1 conducting? Is DC5 V being output from PJ10PU1-5 on PU1 and DC24 V from PJ5PU1-3? Is PJ12C on PWB-C securely connected? Is CN1UN201on UN201 securely connected?
WIRING DIAGRAM (Location)
Result NO NO
Action Reconnect or change the I/F cable.
3 4 5 6
22-H 19-Y 24-F
NO NO NO NO YES
Change PU1. Change PU1. Reconnect. Reconnect. Change UN201. Change PWB-C.
4-49
IV Troubleshooting
26-G
Check the WIRING from the wall outlet to SW1 PJ1PU1.
3.3
Fusing Heaters do not Operate

Upper Right Door Switch (SW5) Fusing Unit
Step
Check Item Is the power source voltage applied across PJ2PU1-1 and 3 on PU1? During this time, the Right Door should be closed. Is the power source voltage applied across CN44-1 and 3, or across 2 and 3?
WIRING DIAGRAM (Location)
Result NO
Action Check wiring from power outlet to SW5 to PJ2PU1. Fusing Unit Change PU1.
26-G
3-G
YES NO
3.4
3.4.1
Power is not Supplied to Options

ADF
WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) 23-E 23-E
Step
Check Item Is DC24 V being output from CN51-1 on 9990? Is DC24 V being output from PJ5PU1-4 on PU1? Is the fuse (F201) on PU1 conducting?
Result YES NO YES NO
Action Malfunction in 9990 Check wiring from PU1 to CN53 to ADF. Change PU1. Change F201. Malfunction in 9990
1 2
3.4.2
Optional Paper Feed Cabinet

WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) 26-J
IV Troubleshooting
Step
Check Item Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connector CN28-1? Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1-2 on PU1? Is the fuse (F204) on PU1 conducting?
Result
Action Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet Check wiring from PU1 to CN49 to Paper Feed Cabinet. Change PU1. Change F204. Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet
NO
22-F
NO YES NO
4-50
cm3520 Field Service Manual 3.4.3 Finisher

WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) 26-J NO 22-F YES NO
Step
Check Item Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to CN20-11 and CN20-1, respectively, of the Finisher? Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to PJ5PU1-6 and PJ10PU1-2 on PU1, respectively? Is there continuity in the 24-V fuse (F202) and 5-V fuse (F205) on PU1?
Result NO
Action Malfunction in Finisher.
Check wiring from PU1 to Finisher. Change PU1. Change F202, F205. Malfunction in Finisher.
3.4.4
Duplex
WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) 26-J 22-F
Step
Check Item Is DC24 V being output from CN42-1 on Duplex? Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1-1 on PU1? Is the fuse (F203) on PU1 conducting?
Result NO NO YES NO
Action Malfunction in Duplex. Check wiring from PU1 to Duplex. Change PU1. Change F203. Malfunction in Duplex.
1 2
4-51
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem
4.
4.1

How to read Element date
As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for State Confirm available from Tech. Rep. Mode can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem.
4036fs4015e0
4.1.1
Table #
4036fs4016e0
IV Troubleshooting
Vb-C Vb-M Vb-Y Vb-Bk Vg-C Vg-M Vg-Y Vg-Bk
Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced. Standard values: Around 390 V A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater. A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller. Relevant Components: Imaging Unit, High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias) Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced. Standard values: Around 500 V A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater. A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller. Relevant Components: Imaging Unit, High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias)
4-52
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.1.2 Level History 1
4036fs4017e0
ATDC-C ATDC-M ATDC-Y ATDC-Bk AIDC1 AIDC2
Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments). Standard value: 7 3 % Relevant Components: LPH Unit, ATDC Sensor Bk Shows the AIDC bare surface output reading taken last (in 0.01 V increments). It should normally be around 4.3 V. The output range is 0 V to 5 V. Reading taken last means: Latest toner density When the Start key is pressed, the output value is displayed while a test print is being produced. Relevant Components: AIDC Sensor, Transfer Belt Unit Shows the temperature of the Heating Roller (Temp-Belt) and the Fusing Pressure Roller (Temp-Press.) (in 5 C increments). Relevant Components: Fusing Unit
Temp Belt. Temp Press.
4.1.3
Level History 2
4036fs4018e0
AIDC Sensor Adjust Value 1, 2
Shows the AIDC intensity adjustment value. It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255. The value becomes greater as the Transfer Belt Unit has been used more. Relevant Components: AIDC Sensor, Transfer Belt Unit Shows the latest ATVC level (which varies according to the paper type). 300 V to 3000 V (ATVC-C/-M/-Y/-Bk) 300 V to 5000 V (ATVC-2nd) Relevant Components: Transfer Belt Unit, High Voltage Unit (Image Transfer, Neutralizing)
ATVC -C ATVC -M ATVC -Y ATVC -Bk ATVC -2nd
4-53
IV Troubleshooting
4.2
How to identify problematic part
This chapter is divided into two parts: Initial Check Items and Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem. When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the Initial Check Items, and if the cause is yet to be identified, go to Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem. 4.2.1 Initial Check Items
A. Initial Check Items 1 Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between Scanner and memory, and between memory and printer.
Action Enter the Tech. Rep. Mode, select Machine Adjust Memory/ Hard Disk Adjust Memory Bus Check, and select and carry out IRMemory and MemoryPRT checks. Result OK NG Next Step Initial Check Items 2
4-43
(action as instructed)
B. Initial Check Items 2 Let the copier produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attributable to the Scanner or printer system.
Document Scan
CCD Sensor Board PWB-A
Scanner system
Image Processing Board PWB-C
I/F Cable
IV Troubleshooting
MFP Control Board PWB-MFP
Printer system
LED Drive Board PWB-LED
Test Print
4036fs4019c0
Evaluation Procedure Image Problem

Lines, bands
Action
From Tech. Rep. Mode, select Test Print Halftone Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation CMYBk Density 64, and produce a test print. Is image problem evident?
Result
YES
Cause
Printer
Next Step
Initial Check Items 3
NO Scanner
4-57
4-54
C. Initial Check Items 3 If the printer is responsible for the image problem, let the copier produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors.
4 Color
Mono Color
4036fs4100c0
Evaluation Procedure
Image Problem Action Result YES NO Cause Printer, 4 colors Printer, single color Next Step
Lines, bands From Tech. Rep. Mode, select Test Print Halftone Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation CMYBk Density 64, and produce a test print. Is image problem evident in each of all four colors?
4-86 4-70
4-55
IV Troubleshooting
4.3
4.3.1
Solution
IR System: white lines in FD, white bands in FD, colored lines in FD, and colored bands in FD
A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in FD White bands in FD Color lines in FD Color bands in FD
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0
4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Shading sheet Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Original Pad is dirty. Original Glass is dirty. Shading sheet is dirty. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Clean. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Clean. Clean. Clean. Clean. Readjust.
Mirror, lens, Exposure Mirror is dirty Lamp, and reflectors Lens is dirty Exposure Lamp is dirty Reflectors are dirty Machine Adjust Scanner Area Left Image (Tech. Rep. Mode) Scanner The adjustment value for Left Image falls within the specified range. The white lines/bands or colored lines/bands are blurry.
IV Troubleshooting
YES
Change Scanner Assy. Change CCD Unit.
4-56
IR System: white lines in CD, white bands in CD, colored lines in CD, and colored bands in CD
A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in CD White bands in CD Color lines in CD Color bands in CD
4036fs4025c0
4036fs4026c0
4036fs4027c0
4036fs4028c0
Step 1 2 3 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Machine Adjust Scanner Area Top Image (Tech. Rep. Mode) Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Original Pad is dirty. Original Glass is dirty. The adjustment value for Top Image falls within the specified range. Result YES YES YES Action Change original. Clean. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Readjust. NO
The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4.
NO
4-57
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.3 IR System: color spots
A. Typical Faulty Images
AA
4036fs4029c0
Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Original Pad is dirty. Original Glass is dirty. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. Result YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Clean. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Change Scanner Assy. Change CCD Unit.
IV Troubleshooting
4-58
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.4 IR System: fog
ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD

4036fs4030c0
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Photo/Density 10 Original Glass Shading sheet Section Original Original Cover Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Original Pad is dirty. Original Cover does not lie flat. Original Glass is dirty. Shading sheet is dirty. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Clean. Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Clean. Clean. Clean. Clean. Try another exposure level in Manual.
Mirror is dirty. Mirror, lens, Exposure Lamp, Lens is dirty. and reflectors Exposure Lamp is dirty. Reflectors are dirty. The problem is eliminated when the image is produced in the Manual exposure setting. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 10.
11
4-59
IV Troubleshooting
NO
Image Quality Problem 4.3.5 IR System: blurred image, blotchy image
4036fs4031c0
Step 1 2 3 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass IR 4 Check Item Original does not lie flat. Original Cover does not lie flat. Original Glass tilts. Scanner is not aligned with the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Result YES YES YES YES Action Change original. Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. Position Original Glass correctly. Check original loading position. Perform Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage and Scanner Position Adjustment. Change Scanner Assy. Change CCD Unit.
NO
IV Troubleshooting
4-60
IR System: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in CD)
AA
4036fs4032c0
Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Slide rails Drive Cables Scanner Assy 5 Check Item Original does not lie flat. Original Cover does not lie flat. Foreign matter on rails. Cable kinks or is damaged. Scanner moves smoothly. Result YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. Clean and apply lubricant. Correct or change. Adjust the Scanner Motor timing belt. Change bushing. Change Scanner Motor. Change CCD Unit.
NO
4-61
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.7 IR System: moire
4036fs4033c0
Step 1 Photo/Density 2 Section Original Check Item Moire distortions recur even after the orientation of original has been changed. Moire distortions recur even after the original mode has been changed. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 2. Result NO Action Change the original mode (select one other than that resulted in moire). Select Gradation (mode optimized for gradation) or Resolution (that optimized for resolution). Change the zoom ratio.
YES
Zoom
NO
IV Troubleshooting
4-62
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.8 IR System: skewed image
AA
4036fs4034c0
Step 1 2 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Section Original Original Glass Check Item Original is skewed. Original Glass is in positive contact with the flat spring without being tilted. Scanner Assy is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. Result YES NO Action Reposition original. Reinstall the glass. Check the original loading position. Perform Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage and Scanner Position Adjustment. Change Scanner Assy. Change CCD Unit.
YES
NO
4-63
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.9 IR System: distorted image
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

4036fs4035c0
Step 1 2 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Section Installation Check Item Machine is installed on a level surface. The Rack is tilted with a lot of play. Scanner Assy is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Scanner Motor turns smoothly. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Result NO Reinstall. Action
YES Adjust machine leg height. YES Perform Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage and Scanner Position Adjustment. NO NO Change belt. Change Scanner Motor. Change Scanner Assy. Change CCD Unit.
4 5
Scanner Motor
IV Troubleshooting
4-64
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.10 IR System: low image density, rough image

4036fs4036c0
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Section Original Original Glass Shading sheet Mirror, lens, Exposure Lamp, and reflectors Check Item Original sticks to Original Glass. Original Glass is dirty. Shading sheet is dirty. Mirror is dirty. Lens is dirty. Exposure Lamp is dirty. Reflectors are dirty. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Reposition original. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Clean. Clean. Clean. Clean. Clean Exposure Lamp. Change Scanner Assy. Change CCD Unit.
4-65
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.11 IR System: defective ACS
AA
Colored Area of Original

4036fs4037c0
Black-and-White Area of Original
Step Section ACS Judgement Level Adjustment (Users Choice 2 1/3) Check Item The problem persists even after the ACS Determination Level Adjust function has been changed. Result Action
YES Change the original loading direction. Make manual settings according to the type of original. (If the original contains a colored area in one of its corners, the copier may fail to properly detect the colored area.)
IV Troubleshooting
4-66
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.12 IR System: blank copy, black copy
A. Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy
4036fs4038c0
4036fs4039c0
Step 1 Section Check Item Result NO Reconnect. Action
Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Scanner and with no pins bent. printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image ProBoard (PWB-C) cessing Board are connected properly. CCD Unit Connectors of the CCD Unit are connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
NO NO
Reconnect. Change I/F connection cable.
Test Print The problem is eliminated as (Tech.Rep.Mode) checked with the image on a test pattern produced. Image Processing The problem is eliminated after Board (PWB-C) the I/F connection cable has been changed.
NO
Change Image Processing Board.
4-67
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.13 IR System: abnormal image

4036fs4040c0 4036fs4041c0
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
Data on previous page
AA
4036fs4042c0
Data on current page
Step 1 Section Check Item Result NO Reconnect. Action
Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Scanner and with no pins bent. printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image ProcessBoard (PWB-C) ing Board are connected properly. MFP Control Board (PWBMFP) Data on previous page is mixed with data on current page.
NO NO
Reconnect. Reinstall expanded memory.
Test Print The problem is eliminated as (Tech.Rep.Mode) checked with the image on a test pattern produced. Image Processing The problem is eliminated after the Board (PWB-C) interface connection cable has been changed. MFP Control Board (PWBMFP) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7.
NO
Change interface connection cable. Change Image Processing Board. Change MFP Control Board.
NO
NO
IV Troubleshooting
4-68
Printer Monocolor: white lines in FD, white bands in FD, colored lines colored bands in FD, white lines in CD, white bands in CD, colored lines in CD, colored bands in CD

White lines in FD White bands in FD Colored lines in FD Colored bands in FD
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0
4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
White lines in CD
White bands in CD
Colored lines in CD
Colored bands in CD
4036fs4025c0
4036fs4026c0
4036fs4027c0
4036fs4028c0
Step Section Check Item Result YES Action Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust LPH Chip Adjust and run LPH Chip Adjust.
Image check A white line or black line in FD is sharp. 1
NO Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is dirty. YES YES YES NO
2 3 4 5
Change Imaging Unit. Clean with cleaning jig. Clean. Clean contact terminals. Reconnect. Clean contact terminal and check terminal position. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust LPH Rank and run LPH Rank. Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change LPH Assy.
Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside. Connectors and contact terminals make good connection between each IU and LPH Assy. Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection. Image check The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7.
NO NO
NO
4-69
IV Troubleshooting
Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever.
Image Quality Problem 4.3.15 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in FD
4036fs4043c0
4036fs4044c0
4036fs4045c0
Step Section Image check 1 Check Item Uneven density of void area occurs. Result YES Action Check LPH Unit connector for proper connection. Check the LED Drive Board connectors for proper connection. Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of paper with no originals placed, as the IU fails to keep up with a high demand for toner. Slide out the IU and reinstall. Change Imaging Unit. Clean. Clean using the LED Cleaning Jig. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust LPH Rank and run LPH Rank.
High image density original 2
Uneven density in FD occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to 50 mm when a multi-copy cycle is run using an original with high image density (50% or more). LED retracting lever is locked in position. The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Dirty on the outside.
YES
3 4 5 6
LPH Assy Imaging Unit
NO YES YES YES YES
LPH Assy Image check
LED surface is dirty. Monocolor uneven image (uneven high density) occurs. Cam gear operates properly. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 8.
IV Troubleshooting
7 Image Transfer Belt Unit
NO NO
Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.

Change IU. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change LPH Assy. Change PIC Board. Change LED Drive Board Change LPH Unit. Change High Voltage Unit (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
4-70
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.16 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in CD
4036fs4046c0
4036fs4047c0
Step 1 2 3 LPH Assy Image check 4 Image Transfer Belt Unit Section Imaging Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Dirty on the outside. The surface of the lens array is dirty. Monocolor uneven image (uneven high density) occurs. Image Transfer Belt Unit makes positive contact with plates on rails. Cam gear operates properly. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. 7 Result YES YES YES YES Action Change Imaging Unit. Clean. Clean with cleaning jig. Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust LPH Rank and run LPH Rank. Check and correct contacts. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
5 6
NO NO NO
4-71
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.17 Printer Monocolor: low image density

4036fs4036c0
Step Section Check Item Result NO Action Go to next step. State Confirm Check data for Vg and Vb. Table # Color Vb: Around 390 V (Tech. Rep. Mode) Vg: Around 500 V Black Vb: Around 390 V Vg: Around 500 V State Confirm Check ATDC data. Level History 1 AIDC output value is around 4.3 V. (Tech. Rep. Mode)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NO NO
Go to next step. Clean AIDC Sensor. Check Image Transfer Belt for damage. Go to step 8. Go to step 14. Go to step 8. Go to step 14. Slide out the IU and reinstall. Clean. Clean with cleaning jig. Clean. Check and correct contacts. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Reconnect. Change gear. Clean.
Level History data check results
Low ATDC and low Vg and Vb Low ATDC and high Vg and Vb ATDC falling within specified range and low Vg and Vb ATDC falling within specified range and high Vg and Vb
YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES
LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy
IV Troubleshooting
LED retracting lever is locked in position. Dirty on the outside. The surface of the lens array is dirty.
ATDC Sensor win- The color ATDC Sensor window on dow the LED Assy is dirty. Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit makes positive contact with plates on rails. Cam gear operates properly. Hopper Unit Connectors are loose. Gear is cracked. Toner empty lever and/or detecting switch are defective.
4-72

Step Section Image Adjust ATDC Toner Supply (Tech. Rep. Mode) Image Adjust ATDC Level Setting (Tech. Rep. Mode) Check Item Toner is properly supplied when ATDC Toner Supply is run. Result NO

Action Go to next step.
17
18
The problem has been eliminated when T/C has been increased.
NO
Go to next step.
19
Gradation Adjust Conv. Value falls within the speci(Tech. Rep. Mode) fied range as checked through Gradation Adjust. Max: 0 100 Highlight = 0 60 Image Adjust PRT Max Density (Tech. Rep.Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of PRT Max.
YES Go to step 23.
NO
Go to next step.
20
21
Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of PRT Highlight. PRT Highlight (Tech. Rep. Mode) Image Adjust Stabilizer Reset + Stabilizer (Tech. Rep. Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed, run Gradation Adjust; if the problem persists, make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 22.
NO
Go to next step.
NO
Go to next step.
22
NO
23
4-73
IV Troubleshooting
Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change LPH Assy. Change LED Drive Board. Change MFP Control Board Change LPH Unit. Change High Voltage Unit/ 2 (Developing Bias). Change High Voltage Unit/ 1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
Image Quality Problem 4.3.18
Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure
4036fs4048c0
4036fs4049c0
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Section Photo/Density LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy ATDC Sensor window Check Item Original type and screen pattern are selected properly. LED retracting lever is locked in position. Dirty on the outside. The surface of the lens array is dirty. ATDC Sensor window is dirty. Result NO YES YES YES YES NO Action Change screen pattern. Slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall. Clean. Clean with cleaning jig. Clean. Clean AIDC Sensor. Check Image Transfer Belt for damage. Go to step 11.
State Confirm AIDC output value is around 4.3 V. Level History 1 (Tech. Rep. Mode) Gradation Adjust Conv. Value falls within the speci(Tech. Rep. fied range as checked through GraMode) dation Adjust. Max: 0 100 Highlight = 0 60 Image Adjust PRT Max Density (Tech. Rep.Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of PRT Max.
YES
IV Troubleshooting
NO
Go to next step.
Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated PRT Highthrough the adjust of PRT Highlight. light (Tech. Rep. Mode) Image Adjust Stabilizer Reset + Stabilizer (Tech. Rep. Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed, run Gradation Adjust; if the problem persists, make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight.
NO
Go to next step.
NO
Go to next step.
10
4-74

Step Section Check Item The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 10. Result NO

Action Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change LPH Assy. Change LED Drive Board. Change MFP Control Board Change LPH Unit. Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
11
4-75
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.19 Printer Monocolor: foggy background
ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD

4036fs4030c0
Step Section State Confirm Table # (Tech. Rep. Mode) State Confirm Level History 1 (Tech. Rep. Mode) Check Item Check data for Vg and Vb. Color Vb: Around 390 V Vg: Around 500 V Black Vb: Around 390 V Vg: Around 500 V Check ATDC data. AIDC output value is around 4.3 V. Result NO Action Go to next step.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
NO NO
Go to next step. Clean AIDC Sensor. Check Transfer Belt for damage. Go to step 8. Go to step 12. Go to step 8. Go to step 12. Slide out the IU and reinstall. Clean. Clean with cleaning jig. Clean. Go to next step.
Level History data Low ATDC and low Vg and Vb check results Low ATDC and high Vg and Vb ATDC falling within specified range and low Vg and Vb ATDC falling within specified range and high Vg and Vb LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy ATDC Sensor window LED retracting lever is locked in position. Dirty on the outside. The surface of the lens array is dirty. The color ATDC Sensor window on the LED Assy is dirty.
YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO
IV Troubleshooting
12
Image Adjust The problem is eliminated after Background Volt- Background Voltage Margin has age Margin (Tech. been adjusted. Rep. Mode) Gradation Adjust (Tech. Rep. Mode) Conv. Value falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. Max: 0 100 Highlight = 0 60
YES
Go to step 17.
13
4-76

Step Section Check Item Result NO

Action Go to next step.
14
Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated PRT Max Den- through the adjust of PRT Max. sity (Tech. Rep.Mode) Image Adjust PRT Highlight (Tech. Rep. Mode) Image Adjust Stabilizer Reset + Stabilizer (Tech. Rep. Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of PRT Highlight.
NO
Go to next step.
15
16
After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed, run Gradation Adjust; if the problem persists, make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 16.
NO
Go to next step.
NO
17
Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change LPH Assy. Change LED Drive Board. Change MFP Control Board Change LPH Unit. Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
4-77
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.20 Printer Monocolor: void areas, white spots

Void areas White spots
4036fs4050c0
4036fs4051c0
Step 1 Section Image Check Check Item There are void areas at the front side or high density section. There is void area at the rear side section. Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Dirty on the outside. Hopper Unit Installation environment Foreign matter or caked toner in the Toner Cartridge. Is the atmospheric pressure at the installation site low? The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Result YES YES Action
4-73
Perform 2nd Transfer Adjust of Image Adjust under Tech. Rep. mode. Change Imaging Unit. Clean. Remove foreign matter. Make the following adjustment: Tech. Rep. Mode Image Adjust Bias Voltage Choice. Change Imaging Unit.
3 4 5
YES YES YES YES
NO
IV Troubleshooting
4-78
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.21 Printer Monocolor: colored spots

Colored spots
AA
4036fs4052c0
Step 1 2 3 4 Section Imaging Unit Check Item Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection. The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Dirty on the outside. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. Result NO YES YES NO Action Clean contact terminal and check terminal position. Change Imaging Unit. Clean. Change Imaging Unit.
4-79
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.22 Printer Monocolor: blurred image

blurred image
4036fs4031c0
Step Section Image Check 1 Check Item Image is distorted (stretched or shrunk). Result YES Action Select Tech. Rep. Mode Machine Adjust PRT Area Zoom for FD and run Zoom for FD. Slide out the IU and reinstall. Clean with cleaning jig. Clean. Change Imaging Unit. Change LPH Assy. Change LPH Unit.
2 3 4 5
LED Assy
LED retracting lever is locked in position. The surface of the lens array is dirty.
NO YES YES NO
Imaging Unit
Dirty on the outside. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4.
IV Troubleshooting
4-80
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.23 Printer Monocolor: blank copy, black copy

Blank copy Black copy
4036fs4038c0
4036fs4039c0
Step Section Image Check 1 Check Item A blank copy occurs. Result YES Action Check LPH Unit connector for proper connection. Check the LED Drive Board connectors for proper connection. Check and correct drive transmitting coupling. Change IU. Check, clean, or correct the contact.
Imaging Unit 2
Coupling of IU drive mechanism is installed properly. The PC Drum Charge Corona voltage contact or PC Drum ground contact of the Imaging Unit is connected properly.
NO
NO
High Voltage Unit/ Connector is connected properly. 1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing) The problem has been eliminated through the check of step4.
NO
Reconnect.
NO
4-81
IV Troubleshooting
Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing). Change MFP Control Board Change LED Drive Board Change LPH Unit.
Printer Monocolor: 0.5-mm-pitch uneven image
0.5 mm
4036fs4053c0
Step 1 Section LPH Assy Check Item LED retracting lever is locked in position. Result NO Action Slide out the IU and reinstall.
YES Change Imaging Unit.
IV Troubleshooting
4-82
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.25 Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-pitch uneven image
2 mm
4036fs4054c0
Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Check Item The drive mechanisms for spent toner conveying and IU are dirty. Result YES NO Clean. Change Imaging Unit. Action
4-83
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.26 Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-pitch uneven image
94 mm
94 mm
94 mm
4036fs4055c0
4036fs4056c0
4036fs4057c0
Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Coupling of IU drive mechanism is installed properly. There is play in the IU Motor. Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit drive gear has chipped off. Image Transfer Roller is damaged. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Result YES NO Action Change Imaging Unit. Check and correct drive transmitting coupling. Change Imaging Unit. Reinstall or change the IU Motor. Correct. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Imaging Unit.
2 3 4 5 6
YES YES YES NO
IV Troubleshooting
4-84
Printer 4-Color: white lines in FD, white bands in FD, colored lines in FD, and colored bands in FD

White lines in FD White bands in FD Colored lines in FD Colored bands in FD
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0
4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
Step 1 Image Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Cleaning Blade is not effective in removing toner completely. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. There is foreign matter on paper path. Image Transfer Paper Separator Fingers are damaged or dirty. Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty or damaged. Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are dirty. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 10. 11 YES Section Image Check Check Item A white line or colored line in FD. Result YES Action Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever. Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Clean Cleaning Blade.
Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.
YES
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO
Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Remove foreign matter.
Clean. Clean. Change Fusing Unit. Clean. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change MFP Control Board
4-85
IV Troubleshooting
Clean or change.
Printer 4-Color: white lines in CD, white bands in CD, colored lines in CD, and colored bands in CD

White lines in CD White bands in CD Colored lines in CD Colored bands in CD
4036fs4025c0
4036fs4026c0
4036fs4027c0
4036fs4028c0
Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Cleaning Blade is not effective in removing toner completely. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. There is foreign matter on paper path. Image Transfer Paper Separator Fingers are damaged or dirty. Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty or damaged. Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are dirty. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9. 10 Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Clean Cleaning Blade. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Remove foreign matter. Clean or change. Clean or change. Clean. Change Fusing Unit. Clean. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change MFP Control Board
YES
3 4 5 6 7
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO
IV Troubleshooting
8 9
4-86
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.29 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in FD
4036fs4043c0
4036fs4044c0
Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Terminal is dirty. Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Clean. Reinstall. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.
YES
2 3 4 5
YES NO YES NO
4-87
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.30 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in CD
4036fs4046c0
4036fs4047c0
Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Terminal is dirty. Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. 6 Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Clean. Reinstall. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
YES
2 3 4 5
YES NO YES NO
IV Troubleshooting
4-88
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.31 Printer 4-Color: low image density

4036fs4036c0
Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. Clean. Reinstall. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Clean with blower brush. Go to step 10.
2 3 4 5
Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit
Terminal is dirty. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched.
YES NO NO YES YES
AIDC Sensor
Sensor is dirty.
Gradation Adjust Conv. Value falls within the speci(Tech. Rep. fied range as checked through GraMode) dation Adjust. Max: 0 100 Highlight = 0 60 Image Adjust PRT Max Density (Tech. Rep.Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of PRT Max.
NO
Go to next step.
Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated PRT Highlight through the adjust of PRT Highlight. (Tech. Rep. Mode) Image Adjust Stabilizer Reset + Stabilizer (Tech. Rep. Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed, run Gradation Adjust; if the problem persists, make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight.
NO
Go to next step.
NO
Go to next step.
4-89
IV Troubleshooting


Action Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change MFP Control Board Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
10
IV Troubleshooting
4-90
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.32 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction
4036fs4058c0
Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. Clean. Reinstall. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Clean with blower brush. Go to step 10.
Paper is damp.
2 3 4 5
Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit
Terminal is dirty. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched.
YES NO NO YES YES
AIDC Sensor
Sensor is dirty.
Gradation Adjust Conv. Value falls within the speci(Tech. Rep. fied range as checked through GraMode) dation Adjust. Max: 0 100 Highlight = 0 60 Image Adjust PRT Max Density (Tech. Rep.Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of PRT Max.
NO
Go to next step.
Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated PRT Highlight through the adjust of PRT Highlight. (Tech. Rep. Mode) Image Adjust Stabilizer Reset + Stabilizer (Tech. Rep. Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed, run Gradation Adjust; if the problem persists, make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight.
NO
Go to next step.
NO
Go to next step.
4-91
IV Troubleshooting


Action Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change MFP Control Board Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
10
IV Troubleshooting
4-92
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.33 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration
AA
4036fs4032c0
Step 1 Section Check Item Result Action
Warning display The maintenance call mark is displayed on the panel. Machine condi- Vibration is given to copier after tion Power Switch has been turned ON. LPH Assy Image Transfer Belt Unit LED retracting lever is locked in position. Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Drive coupling to the copier is dirty. Imaging Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Machine Adjust Brush effect or blurred image Fuser Speed occurs. (Tech. Rep. Mode) Machine Adjust Check the specific color in which Color Shift color shift occurs. Correction (Tech. Rep. MOde) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 11.
YES Take action according to the warning code shown on the State Confirm screen. YES Turn OFF and ON Power Switch. NO Slide out the IU and reinstall.
2 3
YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. YES Clean. YES Change Imaging Unit. NO Reinstall.
5 6 7 8 9
YES Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. YES Readjust Fuser Speed.
10
11
YES Perform Color Shift Correction. If color shift is not corrected even with a correction of 1 dot, go to next step. NO Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change MFP Control Board
12
4-93
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.34 Printer 4-Color: void areas, white spots

Void areas White spots
4036fs4050c0
4036fs4051c0
Step 1 Section Image Check Check Item There are void areas at the front side or high density section. There are void areas in the trailing edge. Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt. Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. 4 5 6 Paper path Transfer Roller Unit Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Charge Neutralizing Cloth is not separated and ground terminal is connected properly. There is foreign matter on paper path. Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate is damaged or dirty. Paper Dust Remover Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9. Result YES 4-92 YES Perform 2nd Transfer Adjust of Image Adjust under Tech. Rep. mode. YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. YES Change Transfer Roller Unit. NO Correct or change. Action
YES Remove foreign matter. YES Clean or change. YES Clean or change. NO Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.
IV Troubleshooting
8 9
10
4-94
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.35 Printer 4-Color: colored spots
AA
4036fs4052c0
Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. There is foreign matter on paper path. Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7. 8 Result YES YES Action Change Imaging Unit. Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Remove foreign matter. Clean or change. Change Fusing Unit.
YES
4 5 6 7
YES YES YES YES NO
4-95
IV Troubleshooting
Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Fusing Unit.
Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset

Poor fusing performance Offset
CF CF CF
4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0
Step 1 Section Paper Machine Adjust Fuser Temp. (Tech. Rep. Mode) Check Item Paper type does not match the setting on the paper type setting dial. Changing fusing temperature eliminates the problem of poor fusing performance and offset. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 2. Result YES YES Action Change the setting of the paper type setting dial. Readjust Fuser Temp.
NO
Change Fusing Unit.
IV Troubleshooting
4-96
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.37 Printer 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image

Brush effect Blurred image
4036fs4061c0
4036fs4031c0
Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. Change the setting of the paper type setting dial. Clean. Change Fusing Unit. Readjust Fuser Speed.
2 3 4 Machine Adjust Fuser Speed (Tech. Rep. Mode) Fusing Unit
Paper type does not match the setting on the paper type setting dial. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty. Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched. Changing fusing speed eliminates the problem of brush effect and blurred image. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.
YES YES YES YES
NO
Change Fusing Unit.
4-97
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.38 Printer 4-Color: back marking
AA
4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0
Step 1 2 3 4 Section Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Fusing Unit Check Item Image Transfer Roller is scratched or dirty. There is foreign matter on paper path. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is scratched or dirty. Lower Fusing Roller is scratched or dirty. Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. 6 Result YES YES YES YES YES Action Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Remove foreign matter. Clean or change. Change Fusing Unit. Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.) Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Fusing Unit. Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
NO
IV Troubleshooting
4-98
cm3520 Field Service Manual 4.3.39 Printer 4-Color: 204-mm-pitch uneven image

204-mm-pitch uneven image
204 mm
4036fs4064c0
Step 1 Section Fusing Unit Check Item The Fusing Belt is scratchy. Result YES Action Change Fusing Unit.
4-99
IV Troubleshooting
Image Quality Problem 4.3.40 Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-pitch uneven image
94 mm
94 mm
94 mm
4036fs4055c0
4036fs4056c0
4036fs4057c0
Step 1 2 3 Section Imaging Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. The Image Transfer Belt Unit drive gear is intact. Image Transfer Roller is damaged. Result YES NO YES Action Change Imaging Unit. Correct. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.
IV Troubleshooting
4-100
Parts Layout Drawing
V Appendix
1.
1.1
1.1.1

Main unit
IR section
4036fs5501c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Scanner Motor (M201) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Size Reset Switch (SW201) Inverter Board (PU201) Exposure Lamp (FL201)
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
Scanner Home Sensor (PC201) Original Size Sensor CD (PC206) Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC202) Original Size Sensor FD2 (PC204) Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC)
5-1
V Appendix
Parts Layout Drawing 1.1.2 Engine section

[2]
[1] [13] [12] [11]
[14]
[3]
[4]
[10] [9] [8] [6] [7]

4036fs5502c0
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9) Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC33) AIDC/Registration Sensor/2 (PC9) AIDC/Registration Sensor/1 (PC8) Temperature/humidity Sensor (PC7) DC Power Supply (PU1)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21) Left Door Switch (SW3) Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18) Control Board (PWB-MC) Standard Memory (DIMMS0) Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
V Appendix
5-2
[14] [13] [12]
[1]
[2]
[3] [5] [6] [7] [11] [9] [10]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] LPH Assy/Bk (LPH Bk) LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) Main Erase Lamp/Bk (LA4) Main Erase Lamp/C (LA3) ATDC Sensor/C (PWB-N3) Main Erase Lamp/M (LA2) ATDC Sensor/M (PWB-N2) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA1) ATDC Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor (PC32) Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC31) LPH Assy/Y (LPH Y) LPH Assy/M (LPH M) LPH Assy/C (LPH C)
4036fs5503c0
[4]
[8]
5-3
V Appendix
[30] [29] [28]
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
[27]
[26]
[9] [10] [25] [24] [23] [14] [22] [21]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M15) Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M16) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) Suction Fan Motor(M12) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Toner Set Sensor/Bk (PC20) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/Bk (PC24) Toner Supply Motor C/Bk (M3) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Bk (PC18) Toner Set Sensor/C (PC19) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/C (PC23) Toner Set Sensor/M (PC26)
[12] [13]
[11]
[15] [20] [18] [16] [19] [17]
4036fs5504c0
[16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30]
Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/C (PC17) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/M (PC22) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/M (PC16) Toner Set Sensor/Y (PC25) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/Y (PC21) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y (PC15) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2) Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Color Developing Motor (M6) Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) Bk PC Motor (M7) Main Motor (M1) Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19)
V Appendix
[12] [13] [14] [15]
5-4
[1] [2] [3] [13]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[12] [8] [9]
[10]
[11]
4036fs5505c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Right Door Switch (SW2) Fusing Paper Loop Control Solenoid (SL1) Control Panel (UN201) Fusing Paper Loop Sensor (PC4) Upper Right Door Switch (SW5) Power Switch (SW1) Total Counter (CNT1)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
Bypass Paper Size Unit (VR1) Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board (PWB-S1) Bypass Paper Pick-Up Solenoid (SL101) Front Door Switch (SW4) High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1)
5-5
V Appendix

[15] [14] [13] [12] [1]
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8] [9] [10]
[11]
4036fs5506c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Fusing Retraction Position Sensor (PC34) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure /Retraction Sensor (PC29) OHP Sensor (PC27) Exit Sensor (PC30) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC114) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC113) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC111)
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC112) Bypass Paper Empty Sensor (PC110) Bk PC Drum Main Sensor (PC11) 1st Image Transfer Retraction (PC12) Color PC Drum Main Sensor (PC10) Color PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC35) Bk PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC36)
V Appendix
[8]
5-6
cm3520 Field Service Manual 1.1.3 Tray 1
[1] [8] [7] [6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
4036fs5518c0
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Tray1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC2) Paper Type Board (PWB-S)
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Tray1 CD Paper size Sensor (PC3) Tray1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) Tray1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC13) Tray1 Set Sensor (PC14)
5-7
V Appendix
Parts Layout Drawing 1.1.4 Tray 2

[12] [13] [14]
[7] [6]
[10] [8] [11] [9]
[15]
[1] [2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
4036fs5519c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC106) Tray2 Lift-Up Sensor(PC105) Tray2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) Tray2 Board (PWB-Z) Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor/L (PC102) Tray2 Set Sensor (PC103)
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor/S (PC101) Tray2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) Tray2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC104) Tray2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC115) Tray2 Door Set sensor (PC109)
V Appendix
5-8
1.2
RADF - 9990 (Option)

[17] [16] [15] [14] [1] [2]
[3] [4]
[13]
[5]
[12] [11] [10] [9]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Exit Motor (M3-DF) Exit Cover Sensor (PC7-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) Document Size Volume (R1-DF) Tray Open/Close Sensor (PC8-DF) Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17]
[6]
[7] [8]
4036fs5511c0
Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Take-up Cover Sensor (PC3-DF) Transport Motor (M2-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) ROM (IC7-DF)
5-9
V Appendix
1.3
9993/9994 (Option)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[23] [24] [22] [20] [21]
[25]
[26]
[6] [7]
[19]
[8]
[18]
[17] [16] [15] [13] [14] [12] [10] [11]
[9]
4036fs5512c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Tray3 Transport Roller Motor (M120-PF) Door Set Sensor (PC111-PF) Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117PF) Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor (PC115-PF) Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126PF) Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor (PC124-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor (PC123-PF) Tray4 Transport Roller Motor (M121-PF) Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PF)
[14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26]
Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC122-PF) Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC128-PF) Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC127-PF) Tray4 FD Paper Size Detection Board (PWB-I4 PF) Tray4 Set Sensor (PC121-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) Tray3 FD Paper Size Detection Board (PWB-I3 PF) Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC118-PF) Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC119-PF) Tray3 Set Sensor (PC112-PF) Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC113-PF) Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF)
V Appendix
[10] [11] [12] [13]
5-10
1.4
9992 (Option)
[23] [24] [1] [2] [3] [21] [4] [5]
[22]
[6]
[20] [7] [19] [8] [9] [10]
[18] [17] [15] [13] [14] [16]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Transport Roller Motor (M2-LCT) Right Lower Door Sensor (PC5-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) Upper Paper Empty Sensor (PC3-LCT) Paper Empty Board (PWB-E LCT) Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Shift Motor (M4-LCT) [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24]
[11] [12]
4036fs5513c0
Paper Descent Key (UN1-LCT) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC9-LCT) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT) Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) Interface Board (PWB-H LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
Tray Set Sensor (PC6-LCT) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT)
5-11
V Appendix
Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT)
1.5
9997 (Option)
[22] [1] [2] [3] [21] [4] [5] [6] [7] [19]
[20]
[18] [17]
[8] [9] [10] [16]
[15]
[11] [14] [13]
[12]
4036fs5514c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Upper Cover Sensor (PC18-FN) 1st Tray Full Sensor (PC6-FN) 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2FN) Front Door Sensor (PC17-FN) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C FN) Elevator Motor (M7-FN)
[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22]
CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN) Shift Motor (M8-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Elevator Tray Paper Sensor (PC8-FN) CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Lower Paddle Motor (M9-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN)
V Appendix
[9] [10] [11]
5-12
[1] [16] [13] [14] [15]
[2]
[12] [11] [10] [9]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Entrance Motor (M1-FN) Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12FN) Set Switch (S1-FN) ROM (IC3-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] Exit Motor (M3-FN)
4036fs5515c0
Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) Upper Paddle Motor (M15-FN) Upper Paddle Solenoid (SL3-FN) Elevator Tray Full Sensor (PC7-FN) Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13FN) Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN)
5-13
V Appendix
Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN)
1.6
Job Tray - CM3500010 (Option)
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
4036fs5526c0
[1] [2]
Job Tray Cover Sensor (PC21-FN) Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN)
[3] [4]
Job Tray Full Sensor (PC20-FN) 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL-4)
V Appendix
5-14
1.7
1.7.1
9996 (Option)
Main unit
[37] [35] [34] [33] [32] [31] [30] [28] [26] [25] [24] [23] [22] [21] [36]
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [6]
[5] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[29]
[27]
[20] [19] [18] [17]

4036fs5516c0
[16]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
Transport Motor (M1-FN) Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) Entrance Motor (M9-FN) Saddle Clutch (CL1-FN) Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) Joint Open Switch (MS2-FN) Upper Cover Open Sensor (PI23-FN) Front Door Open Sensor (PI22-FN) Front Door Open Switch (MS1-FN) Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
[20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32]
Saddle Tray Sensor (PI13-FN) Shift Motor (M6-FN) Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN) Stack Full Sensor (PI24-FN) Slide Motor (M8-FN) Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN)
ROM (IC6-FN) Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN) Staple Safety Switch (Rear) (MS3-FN) Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN)
5-15
V Appendix
Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN)

[14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN) Finisher Tray Sensor (PI6-FN) Staple Safety Switch (Front) (MS4-FN) Exit Tray Sensor (PI8-FN) Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) [33] [34] [35] [36] [37]

Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN) Paddle Motor (M2-FN) Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN)
1.7.2
Horizontal Transport Unit
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
4036fs5527c0
[1] [2]
Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-HO) Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO)
[3] [4]
Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Horizontal Unit Door Sensor (PC4-HO)
V Appendix
5-16
1.8
Punch Unit - CM3100010 (Option)

[1] [10] [9] [5] [2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[8]
4036fs5525c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Punch Motor (M1P-PK) Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Motor Clock Board (PI3P-PK) Photo Sensor Board (PWB-C PK) LED Board (PWD-D PK)
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Side Registration Motor (M2P-PK) Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK) Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board (PWB-E PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK)
5-17
V Appendix
1.9
9991 (Option)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [6]
[5]
4036fs5517c0
[1] [2] [3]
Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor (in PWB-A) (Pl2-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (in PWB-A) (PI1-DU)
[4] [5] [6]
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
V Appendix
5-18
Connector layout drawing
2.

Description Number of Pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover.
1 Not possible to confirm by removing external cover.
[1]
[2] [3]
[4] [5]
3 2
[6]
[7] 2 [16] [15] [14] 8 7 2 6 4 [10] [13] [12] 3 4 6 [9] 2 12 2 6 [8]
[11]
4036fs5507c0
No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
CN No. CN31 CN32 CN54 CN5 CN37 CN35 CN61 CN9 3P 3P 2P 2P 2P 12P 2P 6P
Location I-3 J-3 Y-21 O-3 L-3 K~L-3 S-25 J-18
No. [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
CN No. CN47 CN4 CN39 CN40 CN7 CN41 Blank CN60 4P 6P 4P 3P 2P 6P 7P 8P
Location K-7 O-7 J~K-18 F~G-23 P~S-25 M~N-20 M~N-25
5-19
V Appendix
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
3 2 14 14
[5] [6] 2
4 14 [7]
4036fs5509c0
No. [1] [2] [3] [4]
CN No. CN44 CN45 CN18 CN19 3P 2P 14P 14P
Location G~H-3 H~I-3 B~C-18 D~E-18
No. [5] [6] [7]
CN No. CN58 CN8 CN10 2P 4P 14P
Location T~U-25 I-18 Q~R-25
V Appendix
5-20

[1]
[27] [26] [2]
[25] 10 6
[24]
[3] 3 12 [4] 4 [5] 3 [6] [7] [8] [9] [12] [11] [10]
5 [23] 3 6 [22] [21] [20] [19] 3 3 5 6
3 l 9
6 15
11 4 4
2 3 3 [18]
No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] CN No. CN52 CN1 CN20 CN2 Blank Blank CN13 Blank CN56 CN28 CN48 CN49 CN101 CN102 10P 3P 12P 3P 9P 4P 3P 6P 15P 2P 2P 2P 4P 4P
13 [15] [14]
No. [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27]
[17] [16]
Location K~L-25 G-22 M~N-27 H-22 V-25 W~X-7 J-26 Y-7 J-26 V-3 V-3
[13]
4036fs5508c0
CN No. CN105 CN103 CN108 CN106 CN42 CN43 CN25 CN21 CN15 CN14 CN17 CN11 CN53 13P 3P 3P 2P 11P 5P 3P 3P 6P 6P 3P 3P 6P
Location D~E-3 A-3 E-3 C~D-3 K~L-27 L-27 P~Q-7 S-2~3 H~I-18 G-18 K-17 V-25 W~X-24
5-21
V Appendix
[1]
[2]
[15] 3 4 4 [14] 4 2 2 9 14 [13] [12] [11] [10]

No. [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[3]
2 [4]
2 2 [7] [9] [8]
12 [5] [6]
11
15
4036fs5510c0
No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
CN No. CN22 CN57 CN5 CN12 CN26 CN71 CN3 CN34 3P 4P 2P 2P 2P 12P 2P 2P
Location U-25 R-7 O-3 D-13 S~T-2~3 I~J-26 K~L-7 U-3
CN No. CN24 CN6 CN104 CN107 CN27 CN29 CN23 14P 15P 11P 2P 9P 4P 4P
Location R~S-3~4 X~Y-3 B~C-3 D~E-3 P~Q-3~4 Q-3 C-7
V Appendix
[8]
5-22
Timing chart
3.
3.1
Timing chart
Main unit
Print request received Main Motor (M1) Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Bk PC Motor (M7) Color Developing Motor (M6)
With reference to print request
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Developing Bias DC (Y/M/C/Bk) Drum Charge Corona Bias Y, M, C Drum Charge Corona Bias Bk Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA1) Main Erase Lamp/M (LA2) Main Erase Lamp/C (LA3) Main Erase Lamp/Bk (LA4) TOD Signal 1st 2nd Original Original
With reference to TOD
Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3) Exit Sensor (PC30)
4036fs5545j0
5-23
V Appendix
1st Original Preliminary Take-up Start Misted Original Detecting Signal Start 1st Original Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on off
104ms 61ms
1st Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Start
2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete
2nd Original Exchange to Start
/DSET
High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW
DSET Signal Transmission
104ms
61ms
On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm]
High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Low
50ms
86ms
Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on
705ms
With Paper Without Paper
9990 RADF
1-sided mode
705ms 766ms
Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF)
Timing chart
Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF)
off on off Original Exchange Time Preliminary Take-up Time

384ms 952ms
3.2.1
3.2
900mm/sec=High 150mm/sec=Low
4036fs5528e0
5-24
Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW
V Appendix
Timing chart
3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Start on /SCEND off on off DSET Signal Transmission
104ms 61ms
3rd Original Exchange to Start
/DSET CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on off Original Exchange Time
384ms 86ms
off
705ms
Preliminary Take-up Time

952ms
4036fs5529e0
5-25
V Appendix
3rd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exit to Start 4th Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exit to Complete 3rd Original Exchange to Complete 4th Original Preliminary Take-up Start on /SCEND off on off DSET Signal Transmission
104ms 61ms
4th Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exit to Start
3rd Original Exit to Start
2nd Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exchange to Complete
/DSET CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW
82ms 181ms 315ms 86ms
88ms
CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exchange Time
384ms
82ms
181ms
315ms
off
705ms
off on
Timing chart
Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms Original Exit Time

1397ms
Original Exchange Time

384ms
Original Exit Time

1397ms
4036fs5530e0
5-26
V Appendix
Timing chart
3rd Original Exit to Start on /SCEND off on off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW
82ms 181ms 315ms 82ms
3rd Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exit to Start
4th Original Exit to Complete
/DSET
181ms
315ms
CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exit Time
1397ms
off
With Paper Without Paper on off on
off on Original Exit Time

1397ms
4036fs5531e0
5-27
V Appendix
1st Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Preliminary Take-up Start Misted Original Detecting Signal Start 1st Original Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on off
104ms 61ms
2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete
1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete
/DSET
High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Low
50ms
104ms
61ms
86ms
Mixed original detection mode
Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on
705ms
705ms
766ms
Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF)
Timing chart
off on off Original Exchange Time

384ms

952ms
3.2.2
4036fs5532e0
5-28
Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW
V Appendix
Timing chart
1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on off /DSET
High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Low
97ms 150ms 103ms 456ms
1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete
2nd Original Exchange to Start
Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on off
1330ms 563ms 133ms
Reverse side Original Exchange Time
4036fs5533e0
5-29
V Appendix
3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exit to Start on /SCEND off on off
104ms 61ms
2nd Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exit to Complete
2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start
/DSET
High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW
181ms 86ms
315ms
Exit Motor (M3-DF) off Low High CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on
939ms 20ms
High CW Low
705ms
Timing chart
off on off
Original Exchange Time

730ms

952ms
Original Exit Time

1365ms
4036fs5534e0
5-30
V Appendix
Timing chart
2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW
97ms 150ms 103ms 456ms
2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete
1st Original Exchange to Start
/DSET
CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor( off PC1-DF) on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Reverse side Original Exchange Time
1330ms
off
off on
563ms 563ms
4036fs5535e0
5-31
V Appendix
3rd Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exit to Start 3rd Original Exchange to Complete on /SCEND off on off /DSET
High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW
86ms
2nd Original Exit to Complete
3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start
High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW

181ms 315ms
Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) With Paper Without Paper on
High CW Low
939ms 20ms
Timing chart
off on off
Original Exchange Time Original Exit Time

730ms 1365ms
4036fs5536e0
5-32
V Appendix
Timing chart
3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW
97ms 150ms 103ms 456ms
3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete
3rd Original Exit to Start
/DSET
CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off on Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) off on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Reverse side Original Exchange Time
1330ms
off
off on
563ms 133ms
4036fs5537e0
5-33
V Appendix
3rd Original Exit to Start on /SCEND off on off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW
181ms 315ms
3rd Original Exit to Complete
/DSET
CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on off on With Paper Without Paper on off
939ms
Timing chart
off on off
20ms
Original Exit Time

1365ms
4036fs5538e0
5-34
V Appendix
cm3520 Copier
cm3520
cm3520
cm3520
cm3520
Blank page
Standard Controller
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Standard Controller
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1
General
Controller specifications ....................................................................................... 1-1 Supporting client specifications ......................................................................... 1-2 I General IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance
II
1. 2. 2.1
Maintenance
Checking the controller firmware version ............................................................. 2-1 Firmware rewriting................................................................................................ 2-1 Preparations for updating the firmware.............................................................. 2-1 Service environment..................................................................................... 2-1 Application to be used .................................................................................. 2-1 Installing the Cygwin..................................................................................... 2-1 Writing into the Compact flash...................................................................... 2-3 Updating method .......................................................................................... 2-5 Action When Data Transfer Fails .................................................................. 2-6 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2
Updating procedures of firmware ...................................................................... 2-5
III
1. 2. 2.1 2.2
Adjustment/Setting
Checking the external interface operation mode setting ...................................... 3-1 Setting for PageScope Remote Care ................................................................... 3-1 Setting procedures............................................................................................. 3-1 Server Set (RD) settings ................................................................................. 3-1 E-mail reception settings .............................................................................. 3-1 E-mail transmission settings ......................................................................... 3-2 Checking the E-mail Transmission/Reception Settings ................................ 3-2 Example of successful test transmission/reception: ..................................... 3-3
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.4 2.3.1
Supplementary information: Log check ............................................................. 3-3 Connection with PageScope Remote Care Device Management Server.......... 3-3
IV Troubleshooting
1. 2. 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Checking the system configuration ...................................................................... 4-1 Status codes ........................................................................................................ 4-1 Troubleshooting procedures ................................................................................. 4-1 Unable to print over the network........................................................................ 4-1 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP. ................................................... 4-3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX. .......................... 4-4 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail/Scan to Internet FAX is completed. ........................................... 4-5 i
cm3520 Service Manual - Standard Controller 3.5 Data cannot be received in Internet FAX........................................................... 4-5
IV Troubleshooting
II Maintenance
I General
ii
Controller Specifications
I General
1.
Type Print Speed * Printer Language CPU Program ROM RAM Host Interface
Built-in type controller B&W :35 ppm Color :22 ppm PCL5c MPC8245-350MHz (using the main unit's CPU) 16 MB (8 MB 2); *Including 46 internal fonts. 256 MB Ethernet (10/100BASE-TX, RJ-45) IEEE1284 (Compatible/Nibble/ECP)*2 IPX/SPX (Auto, Ethernet II, 802.2, 802.3, 802.3 SNAP) NetBEUI TCP/IP SMTP. POP3, FTP, SNMP, HTTP 1.1 DHCP, ARP/ICMP, BOOTP SLP
Network Protocol
Pserver (NDS) ... NetWare 4.x, 5.x, 6.x Pserver (Bindery) ... NetWare 4.x NDPS ... NetWare 5.x, 6.x SMB RAW Port Printing (Port 9100: To be changed from Page Scope Light) IPP 1.1 LPD Network Print Service IFAX to print Data that can be received Resolution: 200 100, 204 98, 200 200, 204 196, 204 391, 300 300, 400 400, 408 391 Size: Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4, B4, A3 Color Mode: Monochrome Compression method: MH, MR, MMR Scan to FTP with URL Notification Scan to PC with URL Notification Scan to E-Mail Scan to HDD with URL Notification TWAIN Scan to IFAX Data to be transmitted Resolution: 200 200 Size: A4/Letter/Legal Color Mode: Monochrome Compression method: MH PCL5c Printer Driver, TWAIN Driver, Front Manager, BOX Utility OS: Windows98/98SE/Me, NT4.0, 2000, XP, Server2003 Page Scope Web Connection has been built into the controller firmware. Max. standard paper size A3 Wide 600 600 dpi Shared with main unit
Network Scan Functions
Software Accessories (1) Drive CD Software Accessories (2) Compatible Paper Size Resolution Power Requirements
1-1
I General
Operating Environmental Requirements 10 - 30 C 15 - 85 %
Fonts
Internal fonts: Outline font: 45Agfa Intellifont: 35 TrueType font: 10 Bitmapped font: 1 Screen Font: 110 TrueType (Font Manager) Not available *3
I General
Options
*1:When printing one side of the same A4 original *2:The optional Local Interface Kit is required. *3:If the controller option is not specified, the optional Hard Disk (cm3500040) must be installed on the main unit in order for the Store to HDD settings (printer driver settings), Set Numbering function (printing with distribution numbers), the Scan to HDD operation, and the box function to be used. (In order to use the Set Numbering function, the 256 MB Expanded Memory Unit (cm3500030) must also be installed.)
1.1
PC RAM OS
Supporting client specifications

IBM PC and its compatible 64 MB or more (128MB or more for XP) Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, Windows Server 2003 With a network connection Connection method Protocols Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX (NetWare 4.x, 5.x, 6.x)
Interface
With a parallel connection IEEE1284 (Compatible/Nibble/ECP)*1 Browser The following browser is required to use Page Scope Web Connection: Netscape Communicator version 4.5 or later (Java-compliant) Internet Explorer version 5.5 or later (Java-compliant)
*1:The optional Local Interface Kit is required.
1-2
Checking the Controller Firmware Version
II Maintenance
1. Checking the Controller Firmware Version
The version of the controller firmware can be checked on the control panel of the machine. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [ROM Version]. 3. Touch [2]. 4. Check the versions of the following.
Controller DSS DPS Demo Page NM MIO MIOM Font
2.
2.1
2.1.1
Firmware Rewriting
Preparations for updating the firmware
Service environment
OS: Windows2000 Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash Compact flash (with 64MB or more) 2.1.2 Application to be used
Cygwin (Free software) 2.1.3 Installing the Cygwin
The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC. 1. Execute the Self-uncompressing-file Cygwin_set.exe to develop it into the optional directory. 2. Execute the setup.exe inside the developed folder to start installing. NOTES Except for the selection of Install from Local Directory, carry out installing according to the instruction from Installer during installing. Do not change the Default c:\cygwin for the address to be installed. 3. After installing, open the Property of My Computer, and click the Environment Variables of Advanced tab.
2-1
II Maintenance
Firmware Rewriting
4. Click the New in System Variable Setting.
II Maintenance
4036fs2620e0
5. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable.

Variable Name CYGWIN HOME Variable Value ntsec /home/username
4036fs2621e0
2-2
cm3520 Service Manual - Standard Controller 2.1.4 Writing into the Compact flash
Firmware Rewriting
1. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. (C:\TSS2 in the below figure)
4036fs2622e0
NOTE The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe. 2. Double-click the Firmware data, and specify the directory to be uncompressed, and then uncompress it. NOTE When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed, delete it before uncompressing. 3. Mount the Compact flash on the PC, and check the Drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-Drive in the following figure) II Maintenance
4036fs2623e0
4. Click StartProgramAccessoriesCommand prompt to open the Command prompt. 5. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory.
2-3
Firmware Rewriting
6. Specify the Drive of Compact flash, which was recognized through the procedure 3, and execute the mkcf.bat. (Input the C:\TSS2\card_work>mkfc f (Drive number) in the below figure, and push the Enter.)
II Maintenance
4036fs2624e0
7. Once the mkcf.bat is executed, data writing into the Compact flash is started. 8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched, VERYFY OK appears.
4036fs2625e0
9. Remove the Compact flash from PC. NOTE When removing the Compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method.
2-4
Firmware Rewriting
2.2
Updating procedures of firmware
When removing the Compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. 2.2.1 Updating method
NOTE NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON. 1. With the Power Switch in the OFF position, unplug the power cord from the power outlet. 2. Remove the screw[1] and the metal Blanking Plate[2]. II Maintenance
4036fs2602c0
3. Insert the Compact Flash card [3] into the slot.
4036fs2603c0
4. Plug the power cord into the power outlet and turn ON the Power Switch. 5. Six different types of F/W appear on the Touch Panel. 6. Select the particular type of F/W (APP/Font) to be updated.
4036fs2604c0
7. Press the Start key. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.) 8. Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly (Downloading Completed). Check also the Check Sum value (Check Sum XXXX) shown on the Touch Panel. (The Start key blinks green.) 9. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet. NOTE Do not turn OFF the Power Switch. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot. Turn OFF the Power Switch. Plug the power cord and turn ON the Power Switch. Call the Tech. Rep. mode to the screen. Select ROM Version. Make sure that the Firmware is updated. 2-5
Firmware Rewriting 2.2.2
Action When Data Transfer Fails
If NG appears on the Touch Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps. 1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again. 2. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the memory card for a new one and try another rewriting sequence. 3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused NG and carry out data rewriting procedure.
APP Font MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
II Maintenance
2-6
Checking the External Interface Operation
1. Checking the External Interface Operation Mode Setting
Whenever the controller is mounted, it is necessary to select Controller 3 in Peripheral Setting. 1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen. 2. Touch System Input. 3. Check that Controller 3 is selected in Peripheral Setting. NOTE If the mode is changed, be sure to turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. The change of the setting becomes valid when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON after the appropriate change has been made on the panel.
2.
Setting for PageScope Remote Care
Be sure to make the following settings to use PageScope Remote Care. After the settings have been made, establish a connection with the PageScope Remote Care Device Management Server.
2.1
Setting procedures
Follow these procedures to make the settings. 1. In the Tech. Rep. mode accessed from the machine control panel, check that e-mail is selected in RD Mode. 2. Select System Input - Peripheral Setting - Server Set (RD) from the Tech. Rep. mode and make the e-mail transmission/reception settings. Server Set (RD) will not be displayed unless Controller 3 has been selected in Peripheral Setting. 3. In TX/RX Test, check the e-mail transmission/reception settings. Obtain the following information from the network administrator in advance. IP addresses of mail servers (POP3 and SMTP) Logon user name and password set for the controller Mail domain name POP3 port number of the mail server (ordinarily, 110) SMTP port number of the mail server (ordinarily, 25)
2.2
Server Set (RD) settings
To use PageScope Remote Care, it is necessary to make the e-mail reception settings and e-mail transmission settings. 2.2.1 E-mail reception settings
These settings may be the same as, or different from, the mail reception settings for Internet Fax. 1. Touch Server for RX. 2. Touch POP3 Server and type the IP address of the reception mail server. 3. Touch POP3 login Name and type the logon user name. 4. Touch POP3 password and type the logon password. 5. Touch POP3 port number and type the port number to be specified when connecting with the POP3 server. Ordinarily, type 110. 3-1
6. Touch Receive. 7. Touch E-Mail Address and type the reception mail address. The reception mail address is [POP3 Login Name]@mail domain name. E.g.: controller@xxx.xxx.com 8. Touch Mail check and type the time interval (min.) for mail check. No mails can be received if No is selected. NOTE Since load placed by Mail Check on the network can be minimal, set the minimum time interval permitted by the network administrator. 9. Touch Connection timeout and check the set time (sec.). The default setting does not basically cause any problem. 2.2.2 E-mail transmission settings
These settings may be the same as, or different from, the mail transmission settings for Scan to E-mail and Internet Fax. 1. Touch Send. 2. Touch SMTP server and type the IP address of the transmission mail server. 3. Touch SMTP port number and type the port number to be specified when connecting with the SMTP server. Ordinarily, type 25. 4. Touch Timeout of SMTP Server and check the set time (sec.). The default setting does not basically cause any problem. III Adjustment/Setting 2.2.3 Checking the E-mail Transmission/Reception Settings
When the e-mail transmission/reception settings have been made, check the settings by following the procedure given below. 1. Touch Receive - Mail check and set the mail check time interval to the minimum 1 min. 2. Touch TX/RX Test and press the Start key. NOTE Before starting the test, it is necessary that the first drawer of the machine must be loaded with A4R paper. If the drawer is loaded with paper of any other size, the Start key LED will remain lit red and it is not possible to carry out the test. The test cannot be started, either, immediately after the Power Switch has been turned ON, during which period the controller is in the process of starting. Start the test after booting of the controller is completed (which takes about 1 min. or more after the Power Switch has been turned ON). 3. Wait for 1 min. or more after the Start key has been pressed. Then, touch Communication Log Print and press the Start key. Then transmission/reception log will then be printed. 4. Check the printed log. 5. Touch Receive - Mail check and set the mail check time interval back to the original value.
3-2
2.3
Supplementary information: Log check
TX/RX Test is the function that sends an e-mail to the mail address of the controller (Email Address set in Receive). The e-mail sent to the controller is received by the controller during mail check. The log shows the record of transmission and reception of this e-mail and, if the transmission/reception is normally terminated, the test can be regarded as being okay. The log is a record of ten different transmissions and/or receptions, no. 1 being the latest. 2.3.1 Example of successful test transmission/reception:
Log showing successful reception
Same time and date
Log showing successful test transmission
2.4
Connection with PageScope Remote Care Device Management Server
When the above settings have been made, call the Center software administrator and ask him or her to make the initial connection to the set mail address.
3-3
Blank page
3-4
Checking the System Configuration
IV Troubleshooting
1. Checking the System Configuration
When a malfunction occurs, let the printer print a Configuration Page to check for system configuration. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the Utility key. Touch Print Set. Touch the Report Types key. Touch Configuration and press the Start button.
2.
Status Codes
Code C-12DO C-1800 Description Action Faulty controller hardware Change the controller board (MFP Control Board). Controller start failure Change the controller board (MFP Control Board) if the problem occurs again when the Power Switch of the machine is turned OFF and ON.
3.
3.1
Troubleshooting Procedures
Unable to print over the network.
Check Possible Cause Action Remark See Operators Manual, Administrators of the machine.
An error on machine side (paper running Correct the error. out, toner running out, etc.) Check the machine control panel for jobs in print queue. Priority may be changed as necessary. Enter the password to unlock the job.
Waiting its turn Is the print job displayed on the 1 machine control panel? Yes
See Operators Manual, Basic of the machine.
The job is locked.
Enter the correct divi- See Job Management in Operators sion ID in the printer The correct division ID driver and try re-trans- Manual. has not been entered. mitting the job again. (access code) No Data is yet to be received. Go to item 2.
4-1
IV Troubleshooting
Check

Possible Cause The print destination port setting is wrong. Action Set the correct port. Restart the PC. Uninstall the printer See Uninstalling the driver through the Driver in Operators proper steps and then Manual. reinstall it properly. Turn OFF and ON the machine main switch. Remark See For Network Connection in Installation Guide.
PC operates erratiYes cally temporarily. Printer driver incorrectly installed Is the response of 2 Ping sent from the PC to the machine?
Controller board (MFP Control Board) oper- Restart the controller ates erratically tempo- board. rarily. No Network cable is disconnected or a relay device is faulty. IP address and/or subnet mask incorrectly set.
Reconnect the cable Check with the conand restart or change troller network LED. the faulty relay device. Set the correct IP address and subnet mask. See TCP/IP Setting in Installation Guide.
IV Troubleshooting
4-2
3.2
Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP.

Check Possible Cause Action Remark
The FTP server is not in Check with the network service. administrator. IP address of the FTP server is wrong. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address. Check with the network administrator and make the correct proxy setting. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number. See Settings and Operations for Scan Functions in Operators Manual.
Proxy setting is wrong.
Port number is wrong.
The message Failed to A directory not existing Check with the network 1 connect to the destina- in the FTP server is administrator and enter tion appears. specified. the correct directory. Failed to log on to the FTP server because of the wrong user account. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct user name and password. Set a longer value for FTP Connection Timeout. The timeout value depends on the networks traffic conditions and load on the FTP server.
A timeout condition occurs.
The FTP server stops during file transfer.
Check with the network administrator.
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
The message Server 2 Connect error appears.
Send Ping from PC to the The network is discon- controller and FTP server nected during file trans- to check to see if both fer. parties are connected to the network or not. The FTP server hard disk becomes full during file transfer. Check with the network administrator.
3.3
Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX.

Check Possible Cause The SMTP server is not in service. IP address of the SMTP server is wrong. Action Check with the network administrator. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number. Set a longer value for SMTP Connection Timeout. The timeout value depends on the networks traffic conditions and load on the FTP server. See Settings and Operations for Scan Functions in Operators Manual. Remark
Port number is wrong. The message 1 Server Connect error appears. A timeout condition occurs.
Send Ping from PC to the controller and SMTP server to The network is disconnected check to see if both parties are during file transfer. connected to the network or not. Decrease resolution to make small the data size or change The size of the scan data the setting for Scanned File exceeds the upper limit value Separation and Binary Diviset for Maximum E-Mail Size. sion as necessary so that the scan data does not exceed the Maximum E-Mail Size. See Settings and Operations for Scan Functions Scan to E-mail in Operators Manual.
The message 2 E-mail Size Over appears.
Depending on the model of the Internet Fax machine on the receiving end, a file
transmitted through binary division may not be properly received by the receiving machine. Check with the receiving end before actually sending the Internet Fax.
IV Troubleshooting
4-4
3.4
E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail/Scan to Internet FAX is completed.
Check Possible Cause Action Remark See Settings and Operations for Scan Functions Scan to Email Error Message and Internet Fax Error Message
Yes An error message 1 is returned from the mail server.
The destination mail address is wrong.
Enter the correct mail address.
The Internet FAX machine on the receiving end is being unable No to receive, or is not receiving, mail stored in the POP3 server.
3.5
Data cannot be received in Internet FAX.

Check Possible Cause The mail portion is in a format not good for reception. The reason why the sender attaches a file of a format not supported is probably because the sender uses PC mail softThe format of the file ware to send the mail and attached to the mail is not does not pay attention to supported for reception. the format of the file when attaching it. Ask the sender to attach the file of the correct format. IP address of the POP3 server is wrong. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct user name and password. Action Remark Support format MIME
The error report 1 <Out of Support File> is printed.
Port number is wrong. is displayed on the control panel of the Failed to log on to the machine. POP3 server due to a wrong user account.
4-5
IV Troubleshooting
Check Possible Cause

Action The reason why the file is not attached to the mail sent by the sender is probably because the sender uses PC mail software to send the mail and fails to attached the file to the mail. Ask the sender to attach the file. Supported character codes US ASCII, ISO 8859 Latin 1, ISO 8859 Latin 2, ISO 2022 JP Remark
The error report 3 <Not Attached File> No files are attached. is printed.
The error report A character code not sup<Out of Support ported is specified in the 4 Character Code> is mail portion. printed.
IV Troubleshooting
4-6
9990
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
General
Product specifications .......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-2 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-2 Mixed original feed ............................................................................................... 1-2 Mixed original feed chart.................................................................................... 1-2 Paper feed not guaranteed originals.................................................................. 1-3 II Maintenance IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting Paper feed prohibited originals .......................................................................... 1-3 I General
II
1. 1.1
Maintenance
Periodical check ................................................................................................... 2-1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) .............................................. 2-1 Transport Belt ............................................................................................... 2-1 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roll .............................................................. 2-2 Separation Roller .......................................................................................... 2-3 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roll / Separation Roller ............................... 2-4 Registration Roller ........................................................................................ 2-4 Exit Roller / Roll ............................................................................................ 2-5 Turnover Roller ............................................................................................. 2-5 Sensor Section ............................................................................................. 2-5 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Other .................................................................................................................... 2-7 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ......................................................... 2-7 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........................................................... 2-8 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..................................................................... 2-8 Front Cover/Rear Cover................................................................................ 2-8
2.3.1
III
1. 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 3.1
Adjustment/Setting
How to use the adjustment section ...................................................................... 3-1 Tech. Rep. / Test Mode......................................................................................... 3-2 Tech. Rep. Mode setting procedure ................................................................... 3-2 Type of the Tech. Rep. Mode ............................................................................. 3-2 ADF Paper Passage .......................................................................................... 3-3 I/O check .............................................................................................................. 3-4 Check procedure ............................................................................................... 3-4 i
bizhub C350 Field Service Ver1.0 Mar. 2004 3.2 4. 4.1 4.2 I General 4.3 4.4 I/O check list ...................................................................................................... 3-4 I/O check screen .......................................................................................... 3-4 Mechanical adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-6 Adjustment of the tray volume ........................................................................... 3-6 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position ............................. 3-7 Adjustment of the document skew..................................................................... 3-8 Adjustment of the document stop position ........................................................ 3-9 Auto adjust: FD 1-Sided Stop Position ......................................................... 3-9 Auto adjust: FD 2-Sided stop position ........................................................ 3-10 Auto adjust: CD image scan start position ................................................. 3-11 Manual adjust: FD 1-Sided / 2-Sided document stop position adjustment. 3-12 Manual adjust: CD Image scan position adjustment .................................. 3-13
3.2.1
4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5
II Maintenance
4.5 4.6
Adjustment of the loop value ........................................................................... 3-14 Automatic adjustment of the sensor ................................................................ 3-15
IV Troubleshooting
1. 1.1 Jam Display.......................................................................................................... 4-1 Initial check items .............................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display .................................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display resetting procedure............................................................. 4-1 Sensor layout..................................................................................................... 4-2 Solution ............................................................................................................. 4-2 Paper Take-Up section misfeed.................................................................... 4-2 Transport section misfeed ............................................................................ 4-3 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed .......................................................... 4-4 Transport Tray section misfeed..................................................................... 4-5
III Adjusting/Setting
1.2 1.3 1.4
1.2.1
1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3
IV Troubleshooting
1.4.4 2.
Set error detection ............................................................................................... 4-6
ii
I General
1.
1.1
Name
Type
I General
Duplexing Document Feeder Paper Take-Up Transport Paper Take-Up from top of stack Endless Belt Transport Mode Loop Turnover Mode U-turn Turnover + Switchback U-Turn Turnover Mode (only in 1-Sided Mode)
Type
Turnover Paper Exit
Installation Document Alignment Document Loading
Screw cramp to the main unit Center Face up
1.2
Functions
Standard Mode 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode
Modes
Thick Paper Mode Mixed Original Detection Mode
1.3
Paper type
1-Sided Mode Standard Mode Plain Paper 35 to 128 g/m2 (9-1/4 to 34 lb) 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13-1/4 to 29-1/4 lb) 1-Sided Mode 129 to 210 g/m2 (34-1/4 to 55-3/4 lb) 1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13-1/4 to 29-1/4 lb)
Type of Document
Thick Paper Mode Plain Paper Mixed Original Detection Mode Plain Paper
Detectable Document Size*1
Metric area B6R to A3 Inch area 5-1/2 8-1/2R / 5-1/2 8-1/2 to 11 17 Document Feed Table: 100 sheets Standard Mode / Mixed Original Detection Mode (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) Original Exit Tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) Document Feed Table: 38 sheets Thick Paper Mode (210 g/m2, 55-3/4 lb) Original Exit Tray: 38 sheets (210 g/m2, 55-3/4 lb)
Capacity
*1 For the Combined Original Detection Mode, Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled Size Combination Table.
1-1
Mixed Original Feed
1.4
Machine specifications
DC24V (supplied from the main unit) DC5V (generated within the DF-601)
Power Requirements
Max. Power Consumption
60 W or less 586 mm (W) 519 mm (D) 135 mm (H) 23 inch (W) 20-1/2 inch (D) 5-1/4 inch (H) 14.2 kg (31-1/4 lb)
I General
Dimensions Weight
1.5
Operating environment
Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
2.
2.1
Mixed Original Feed

Mixed original feed chart
For Metric
Max. Original Size Mixed Original Size 297 mm A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R 297 mm A3 OK OK OK OK OK NG NG NG A4 OK OK OK OK OK NG NG NG 257 mm B4 OK OK OK OK OK NG B5 OK OK OK OK OK NG 210 mm A4R OK OK OK NG A5 OK OK OK NG 182 mm 148 mm B5R OK OK A5R OK
257 mm
210 mm 182 mm 148 mm
For Inch
Max. Original Size Mixed Original Size 11 11 17 8-1/2 11 8-1/2 14 8-1/2 8-1/2 11R 5-1/2 8-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 8-1/2R 11 17 OK OK OK OK NG NG 11 8-1/2 5-1/2
8-1/2 11 8-1/2 14 8-1/2 11R 5-1/2 8-1/2 5-1/2 8-1/2R OK OK OK OK NG NG OK OK OK NG OK OK OK NG OK OK OK NG OK
OK NG -
Mixed Original Feed available (Tilted with in 1.5% or less) NO. Mixed Original Feed Can not Set Original
1-2
Mixed Original Feed
2.2
Paper feed prohibited originals
If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.

Type of Original Sheets stapled or clipped together Sheets glued together Sheets of 211g/m2 (56-1/4 lb) or more Sheets of Mode 110g/m2 (29-1/4 lb) or more in 2-Sided Possible Trouble Take-up failure, damaged sheet, defective drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips
Take-up failure Take-up failure Take-up failure, damaged sheet Sheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in askew Take-up failure Take-up failure Take-up failure Damaged sheet Patched part folded or torn sheet
Sheets folded, torn or wrinkled Sheets severely curled OHP Film (Transparency Film) Label Paper Offset Master Paper Sheets clipped or notched Sheets patched
2.3
Paper feed not guaranteed originals
If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of Original Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 - 15 mm) Heat Sensitive Paper Ink Jet Paper Sheets with smooth surface (Coated Paper) Intermediate paper Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Possible Trouble Dog-eared, exit failure Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes to vertical feeding Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Sheets two-folded or Z-folded (A3 or 11 17) Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead) Sheets penciled Sheets folded Sheets other than detectable-size sheets Transport failure Transport failure, image deformation Take-up failure Contamination Image deformation, multi-page feed, take-up failure Image deficit
1-3
I General
Take-up failure, damaged sheet
Mixed Original Feed
I General
Blank page
1-4
Periodical Check
II Maintenance
1.
1.1
Periodical Check
NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 1.1.1 Transport Belt A. Replacing procedure 1. Remove two C-clips [1].
[1]
[1]
4582s2501c0
[2] [3]
2. Remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy [2] from the belt [3] connected.
4582fs2502c0
[4]
3. Pull out and remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy [4]. NOTE In reassembling, ensure that the Transport Belt Roller Assy is set exactly to the connection belt.
4582fs2503c0
[6] [5]
[5]
4. Remove two screws [5], and pull up the Roller Section [6].
4582fs2504c0
2-1
II Maintenance
Periodical Check
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 5. Remove the Transport Belt [7].
[7]
4582fs2505c0
1.1.2
[2]
Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller A. Replacing procedure 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1], press inward and unlock the locking claws [2] at both ends of the Paper Take-up Section Guide (the Inner Cover), and remove the Paper Take-up Section Guide [3].
[3]
II Maintenance
[1]
4582fs2506c0
[5]
[6]
[5] [4]
2. Remove the screw [4] (on the rear side) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller Assy shaft positioning plate and two C-clips [5] (at both ends) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller Assy shaft, and remove the Pick-up/ Paper Take-up Roller Assy [6].
4582fs2507c0
[9]
[10]
[8] [7]
[7] [11]
3. Remove four C-clips [7] of the Pickup Roller and the gear-fixing C-clip [8] (black) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller connected Timing Belt, and remove the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller connecting section [9] from the shaft [10]. 4. Remove the Pick-up Roller [11].
4582fs2508c0
2-2
Periodical Check 5. Remove C-clip (black) of the Paper Take-up Roller, and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [12]. NOTE Be careful not to lose the Pick-Up/ Take-Up Roller fixing pin.
[12]
4582fs2509c0
1.1.3
Separation Roller
[1]
4582fs2510c0
[2]
2. Remove the Separation Roller Assy [2]. NOTE The Separation Roller Assy is of a set-in type. Pinch the roller shaft at both ends and pull out the Separation Roller Assy upward.
4582fs2511c0
[5]
[4]
3. Remove the Holder [3] and the shaft [4], and remove the Separation Roller [5].
[3]
4582fs2524c0
2-3
II Maintenance
A. Replacing procedure 1. Unlock the Separation Roller Cover locking claws, and remove the Separation Roller Cover [1].
Periodical Check 1.1.4

[2]
Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller

[1]
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. 2. Wet a cloth with alcohol, and use it to wipe up the Pick-up Roller [2], Paper Take-up Roller [3] and Separation Roller [4].
[3]
[4]
4582fs2523c0
II Maintenance
1.1.5
Registration Roller
[2] [1] [2]
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. 2. Remove four screws [2] from the Registration Roller Cover.
4582fs2512c0
[5] [3]
3. Remove the Wire Harness Saddle [4] and the screw [5] from the Registration/Timing Sensor mounting plate [3].
[4]
4582fs2513c0
4. Wet a cloth with alcohol, and use it to wipe up the Registration Roller [6].
[6]
4582fs2514c0
2-4
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 1.1.6 Exit Roller / Roll

[3] [1]
Periodical Check
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover [1]. 2. Wet a cloth with alcohol, and use it to wipe up the Exit Roller [2]/Roll [3].
[2]
4582fs2515c0
1.1.7
Turnover Roller A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover [1], and open the Turnover Guide Plate [2].
[2]
4582fs2516c0
[3]
2. Wet a cloth with alcohol, and use it to wipe up the Turnover Roller [3].
4582fs2517c0
1.1.8
Sensor Section
[1]
[2]
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Remove the Registration/Timing Sensor mounting plate. 2-4 2. Clean the Registration [1]/Timing Sensor [2] with a blower brush or the like.
4582fs2522c0
2-5
II Maintenance
[1]
Periodical Check
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 3. Remove the Registration Roller Cover. 2-4 4. Clean the Paper Empty Sensor [3] with a brush or the like.
[3]
4582fs2519c0
5. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover. 6. Clean the Paper Exit Sensor [4] with a brush or the like.
II Maintenance
[4]
4582fs2520c0
2-6
Other
2.
2.1
Other
A. Paint-locked Screws NOTE Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field. B. Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment. Accordingly, check the adjustment items in the operation manual and make necessary adjustments.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures described below omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
2-7
II Maintenance
Other
2.2
No 1 2

Section Exterior Parts Front Cover Rear Cover Part name Ref. page
2-8 2-8
2.3
2.3.1
Front Cover/Rear Cover
[5] [6] [2]
II Maintenance
[3]
[1]
[3]
[4]
4582fs2521c0
1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1] and the Paper Exit Section Cover [2]. 2. Remove the Front Cover [4] by removing two screws [3]. 3. Remove the Rear Cover [6] by removing two screws [5].
2-8
How to Use the Adjustment Section
1. How to Use the Adjustment Section
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Throughout this section, the default settings are shown in boldface. A. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve a customers problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, be careful not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. III Adjusting/Setting
3-1
Tech. Rep. / Test Mode
2.
2.1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Tech. Rep. Mode setting procedure
Press the Utility key. Touch the Counter List Check key. Press the keys, STOP --> 0 --> 0 --> STOP --> 0 --> 1, in this order. Enter the service code (8 digits). Select ADF Check.
The Tech. Rep. / Test Modes are set from the Tech. Rep. Mode screen of the main unit.
NOTE Do not teach this procedure to others unless it is absolutely necessary.
4582fs3527e0
2.2
Type of the Tech. Rep. Mode
The ADF Check in the Tech. Rep. Mode has 7 items as follows:
Original Stop Position (Adjust) Auto Adjust Stop Position (Adjust) I/O Check (Test) Sensor Auto Adjust (Adjust) Registration Loop (Adjust) Paper Passage (Test) Tray Width Adjust (Adjust)
3-2
2.3
ADF Paper Passage
The Paper Passage motion of the Automatic Document Feeder is checked. <Procedure> 1. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. 2. Touch the ADF Check key. 3. Touch the Paper Passage key. 4. Select the Paper Passage Mode to be tested from 1-Sided (No Detect), 1-Sided (Mixed Orig) and 2-Sided. 5. Set the Original in the Take-up Tray. The Start key color changes from orange to green. 6. Press the Start key. The operation starts. NOTES After starting the operation by pressing the Start key, if the Start key is pressed during the operation, the operation will be suspended. If the Start key is then pressed again during the suspension, the operation will be resumed. If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation, the test will be forced to end. If there is no Original set in the Take-up Tray, the Start key will not work. All Originals set in the Take-up Tray are passed through. Upon completion of all Originals passed through, the Paper Through Test ends.
4582fs3528e0
3-3
I/O Check
3.
3.1
I/O Check
Check procedure
To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition). <Procedure> 1. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. 2. Touch the ADF Check key. 3. Touch the I/O Check key. 4. Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like, and check the screen display. (Paper detected: 1, No paper detected: 0)
3.2
3.2.1
I/O check list

I/O check screen
This is the only typical screen which may be different from that shown on each individual main unit.
4582fs3529e0
Note with care that the Take-up (Feed) Section Open / Close Sensor, the Transport (Convey) Section Open / Close Sensor, the Exit Section Open / Close Sensor and the Middle Tray Open / Close Sensor are displayed as Faulty Set Detected when they are opened. The Convey S on the IR. The ADF up to 15 degree open when sensor (PC202) detected. <Output display of Width S> The operation of the sensor can be checked whether it is normal or faulty by changing the guide width of the Document Take-up Tray to change the output value.
3-4
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF A. Sensor monitor
I/O Check
Symbol PC4-DF PC3-DF PC7-DF PC202 PC8-DF PC1-DF PC6-DF PC5-DF PC2-DF R1-DF
Panel display Empty FeedS Exit Section ConveyS* Middle TrayS Registration FinisherS Duplex Timing WidthS
Part/Signal name Empty Sensor Take-up Cover Sensor Exit Cover Sensor Original Cover Angle Sensor Tray Open/Close Sensor Registration Sensor Exit Sensor Turnover Sensor Pick-up Sensor Document Size Volume
Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 Paper not present OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present 0 Paper present CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present
3-5
4.
4.1
Adjustment of the tray volume
Read out the value of maximum width and minimum width of the document width detection volume interlocked with the Document Take-up Tray Edge Guide. 1. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. 2. Touch ADF Check. 3. Touch Tray Width Adjust. A. Adjustment procedure 1. Widen the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to their maximum width. 2. Touch Max. Width.
[1]
4582fs3504c0
3. Press the Start key. Confirm that the Result is OK.
4582fs3530e0
4. Narrow the width across the edge guides [2] by sliding them to their minimum width.
[2]
4582fs3506c0
5. Touch Min. Width. 6. Press the Start key. Confirm that the Result is OK. 7. Touch END. 8. Touch Fin. Time on the Tech. Rep. Mode screen. If the Result is NG: Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection volume, wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the PWB-CONT.
4582fs3531e0
3-6
4.2
Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position
Adjustment standard: Displacement of the document edge should be within 4 1 mm to the FD scale. A. Adjustment procedure 1. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). 2. Set up the following functions: Auto Paper 1-sided original / 1-side copy
4582fs3508c0
[1]
A B
4582fs3509c0
[2]
4582fs3510c0
6. Loosen screw [2] (two on the front side and three on the backside) on the document feeding tray. If the crease deviates on the side of A, move the tray to the front. If the crease deviates on the side of B, move the tray to the rear. 7. Make recheck.
3-7
3. Press the Start key. 4. Fold the copy in half. 5. With reference to the crease, check to see if the arrow is on the side of A or B. Specifications: 2 mm from the center If the deviation falls outside the specified range, use the following procedure to make an adjustment.
4.3
Adjustment of the document skew
Adjustment standard: Skew should be 1.0 % or less with respect to the document length; within 3.0 mm for document of A4 size. 1. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). 2. Set up the following functions: Auto Paper 1-sided original / 1-side copy
4582fs3508c0
[1]
[2]
3. Press the Start key. 4. Check in which direction, [2] or [3], the image tilts on the copy fed out of the machine. Specifications: Tilt 3.0 mm max. If the image tilts more than the specifications, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Loosen two front screws [4] on the right hinge. 6. If the image tilts in direction of [2], move the Document Feeder toward the front. If the image tilts in direction of [3], move the Document Feeder toward the rear. 7. Tighten two screws [4]. 8. Make recheck.
[3]
4582fs3511c0
[4]
4582fs3512c0
3-8
4.4
Adjustment of the document stop position
Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually (by entering numbers). The following adjustment is made in the Tech. Rep. Mode.
4582fs3527e0
4.4.1 A. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Auto adjust: FD 1-Sided Stop Position
4582fs3532e0
[1]
5. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). 6. Press the Start key.
4582fs3508c0
3-9
Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. Touch ADF Check. Touch Auto Adjust Stop Position. Touch FD 1-Sided.
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 7. Make sure that Result is OK. Then, touch SET. 8. Touch END. 9. Touch Fin. Time on the Tech. Rep. Mode screen. If the Result is NG: Check and correct the skew of the document. Manually correct the value of Position Correction.
4582fs3533e0
4.4.2 A. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Auto adjust: FD 2-Sided stop position
Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. Touch ADF Check. Touch Auto Adjust Stop Position. Touch FD 2-Sided.
4582fs3534e0
[1]
5. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder [1] in the document feeding tray. NOTE Make sure that the blank surface of the chart faces up. 6. Press the Start key.
4582fs3508c0
4582fs3535e0
7. Check that Result is OK and then touch SET. 8. Touch END. 9. Touch Fin. Time on the Tech. Rep. Mode screen. If the Result is NG: Check and correct the skew of the document. Manually correct the value of Position Correction. 3-10
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 4.4.3 A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Auto adjust: CD image scan start position
Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. Touch ADF Check. Touch Auto Adjust Stop Position. Touch CD.
4582fs3536e0
[1]
4582fs3508c0
4582fs3537e0
7. Check that Result is OK and then touch SET. 8. Touch END. 9. Touch Fin. Time on the Tech. Rep. Mode screen. If the Result is NG: Check and correct the skew of the document. Manually correct the value of Position Correction.
3-11
5. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 6. Press the Start key.
Mechanical Adjustment 4.4.4
Manual adjust: FD 1-Sided / 2-Sided document stop position adjustment
Adjusted range: -7 mm to + 7 mm A. 1. 2. 3. Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. Touch ADF Check. Touch Original Stop Position.
4582fs3538e0
[1]
4. Select 1-Sided Set or 2-Sided Set 5. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the ID key to change the +/code.)
4582fs3516c0
To shift the position in the direction of F, set the code to +. To shift the position in the direction of E, set the code to -. 6. Touch END.
4582fs3517c0
3-12
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 4.4.5 Manual adjust: CD Image scan position adjustment
Adjusted range: -3 mm to + 3 mm A. 1. 2. 3. Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. Touch ADF Check. Touch Original Stop Position.
4582fs3539e0
[1]
4582fs3516c0
C D
To scan the image in the direction of C, set the code to -. To shift the image in the direction of D, set the code to +. 6. Touch END.
4582fs3518c0
3-13
4. Select Feed Set (Common). 5. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the ID key to change the code.)
4.5
Adjustment of the loop value
Adjusted range: -5 mm to + 5 mm Default value: 0 (Loop value: 5 mm) The loop value is increased by the entered + value and decreased by the entered value. Too much loop value may result in dog-eared document, and too little loop value may result in askew document. A. 1. 2. 3. Adjustment Procedure Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. Touch ADF Check. Touch Registration Loop.
4582fs3540e0
[1]
4. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the ID key to change the +/code.) 5. Touch END.
4582fs3516c0
3-14
4.6
Automatic adjustment of the sensor
The detection level of the document through path sensor is automatically adjusted. The adjustment has two modes: Reset and ADF Sensor Auto Adj. and ADF Sensor Auto Adj. Make this adjustment as appropriate after the replacement of the ADF board or in case of the document detection error. A. 1. 2. 3. Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. Touch ADF Check. Touch Sensor Auto Adjust. 4. Select Reset and ADF Sensor Auto Adj. or ADF Sensor Auto Adj. 5. Press the Start key. 6. If the result is OK touch the END key on the panel. 7. If the result is NG check the influencing sensor, replace it if necessary, and then make readjustment.
4582fs3541e0
3-15
Blank page
3-16
Jam Display
IV Troubleshooting
1.
1.1
Jam Display
Initial check items
When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper. Replace paper. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. Action
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. Set as necessary. Correct or replace the defective actuator.
1.2
Misfeed display
When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location Blinking and paper location Lighting are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.
Misfeed location Paper Exit / Turnover section Transport section Paper Take-Up section Transport Tray section Misfeed access location Paper Exit section Cover Paper Take-Up section Cover Paper Take-Up section Cover Paper Exit section Cover Action
4-4 4-3 4-2 4-5 IV Troubleshooting
1.2.1
Misfeed display resetting procedure
Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
4-1
Jam Display
1.3
Sensor layout
[4] [1]
[3]
[1] Exit Sensor [2] Turnover Sensor PC6-DF PC5-DF [3] Pick-up Sensor
[2]
4582fs4502c0
PC2-DF PC1-DF
[4] Registration Sensor
1.4
1.4.1
Solution
Paper Take-Up section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Misfeed due to paper not reached the Registration Sensor Description Misfeed is detected if the Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started normal rotation.
Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned ON within a prepaper not reached set time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse rotation. the Pick-Up Sensor
B. Action IV Troubleshooting
Relevant electrical parts Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A DF CN7A DF-9 PWB-A DF CN7A DF-12 Location (Electrical components) E-2 F-2 A-4 E-5
1 2 3 4 5
Initial check items PC1-DF I/O, sensor check PC2-DF I/O, sensor check M1-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement
4-2
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 1.4.2 Transport section misfeed
Jam Display
A. Detection timing
Type Description
Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned OFF within a paper remaining at preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse rotation. the Pick-Up Sensor Misfeed due to paper not reached the Turnover Sensor Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Transport Motor (M2-DF) started.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Transport Motor (M2-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A DF CN7A DF-12 PWB-A DF CN9A DF-3 Location (Electrical components) F-2 G-2 A-4 B-4 E-5
1 2 3 4 5 6
Initial check items PC2-DF I/O, sensor check PC5-DF I/O, sensor check M1-DF operation check M2-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display 1.4.3 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description
Misfeed due to paper remaining at Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned OFF within a the Turnover Sen- preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was tuned ON. sor Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor (in the 2-Sided Mode) Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was turned ON in the 2-Sided mode.
Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned OFF within a preset paper remaining at time after the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) was tuned ON. the Exit Sensor
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Exit Motor (M3-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A DF CN9A DF-3 PWB-A DF CN9A DF-6 Location (Electrical components) G-2 H-2 B-7 E-5
1 2 3 4 5
Initial check items PC5-DF I/O, sensor check PC6-DF I/O, sensor check M3-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement
IV Troubleshooting
4-4
cm3520 Service Manual - 9990 RADF 1.4.4 Transport Tray section misfeed
Jam Display
A. Detection timing
Type Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor (in the 1-Sided Mode) Misfeed at the Transport Tray Description
Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after exit operation started in the 1-Sided Mode.
Misfeed is detected if the difference between the paper feeding size measured at the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) and that measured at the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is 20 mm or more.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A DF CN9A DF-3 PWB-A DF CN9A DF-6 Location (Electrical components) G-2 H-2 E-5
1 2 3 4
Initial check items PC5-DF I/O, sensor check PC6-DF I/O, sensor check PWB-A DF replacement
4-5
IV Troubleshooting
NOTE Each sensor is automatically adjusted when the Power Switch is turned ON as special means for detecting a paper misfeed. If a sensor adjustment error occurs through this procedure, a misfeed is detected as paper remaining misfeed at the corresponding sensor.
Set Error Detection
2.
Set Error Detection
When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected, the Panel of the main unit will have the following display.
[1]
[3]
[2]
4582fs4503e0
<Panel display and detection timing for each>

Panel display [1] Description of error Paper Exit section Cover set error Transport Tray section Cover set error Paper Take-Up section Cover set error ADF set error Detection start When the Power Switch turn ON. When the Power Switch turn ON. When the Power Switch turn ON. When the document is set in the ADF Detection timing Paper Exit section Open/ Close Sensor (when lightblocked) Transport Tray Open/Close Sensor (when lightblocked) Paper Take-Up Section Open/ Close Sensor (when lightblocked) Size Reset Switch on the main unit (when turned ON)
[2]
[3]
IV Troubleshooting
4-6
9991
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - 9991 Duplex Unit
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
General
Product specifications .......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I General IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance
II
1. 1.1
Maintenance
Periodical check ................................................................................................... 2-1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) .............................................. 2-1 Transport Roller / Roll 1 ................................................................................ 2-1 Transport Roller / Roll 2, 3 ............................................................................ 2-1 Ventilation Section ........................................................................................ 2-2 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Other .................................................................................................................... 2-3 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ......................................................... 2-3 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........................................................... 2-4 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..................................................................... 2-4 Duplex Unit ................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1
III
1. 2. 2.1 2.2
Adjustment/Setting
How to use the adjustment section ...................................................................... 3-1 I/O check .............................................................................................................. 3-2 Check procedure ............................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check list ...................................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check screen........................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check list ................................................................................................. 3-2
2.2.1 2.2.2 3. 3.1 3.2
Mechanical adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-3 Changing the cable tension strength (moving of the lever)................................ 3-3 Adjusting the paper reference position .............................................................. 3-3
IV Troubleshooting
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Jam Display .......................................................................................................... 4-1 Initial check items .............................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display .................................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............................................................. 4-1 Sensor layout ..................................................................................................... 4-2 Solution.............................................................................................................. 4-3 i
1.2.1
cm3520 Service Manual - 9991 Duplex Unit 1.4.1 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed.......................................................... 4-3
IV Troubleshooting
II Maintenance
I General
ii
I General
1.
1.1
Name Type Installation Document Alignment
Type
I General
Duplex Unit Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Mounted on the right side door of main unit Center
1.2
Paper type
Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
Paper Type Paper Size
A5R to A3 Wide, 5-1/2 8-1/2R to 12-1/4 18
1.3
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V 5 % (supplied from the main unit) 17 W or less 109 mm (W) 440 mm (D) 344 mm (H) 4-1/4 inch (W) 17-1/4 inch (D) 13-1/2 inch (H) 2.9 kg (6-1/2 lb)
Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight
1.4
1-1
I General
Blank page
1-2
Periodical Check
II Maintenance
1.
1.1
Periodical Check
NOTE The alcohol used in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance is isopropyl alcohol. 1.1.1 Transport Roller / Roll 1
[1]
A. 1. 2.
4535fs2501c0
1.1.2
Transport Roller / Roll 2, 3 A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Duplex Unit Door [1]. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Transport Roller / Roll 2 [2], 3 [3] clean of dirt.
[2]
[1]
[3]
4535fs2502c0
2-1
II Maintenance
Cleaning procedure Remove the Duplex Unit. 2-4 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Transport Roller / Roll 1 [1] clean of dirt.
Periodical Check 1.1.3 Ventilation Section
[1]
[2]
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the outside of the Ventilation Section [1] clean of dirt.
4535fs2503c0
II Maintenance
[2] [3]
2. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2]. 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the inside of the Ventilation Section [3] clean of dirt.
4535fs2504 c0
2-2
Other
2.
2.1
Other
A. Paint-locked Screws NOTE Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field. B. Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment. Accordingly, check the adjustment items in the operation manual and make any necessary adjustments. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
2-3
II Maintenance
Other
2.2
No 1

Section Unit Duplex Unit Part name Ref. page
2-4
2.3
2.3.1
Duplex Unit 1. Remove the wiring cover. For details of how to remove the wiring cover, see the Maintenance of the main unit service manual. 2. Unplug two connectors [1].
[1]
II Maintenance
4535fs3503c0
[4]
[3] [2] [3]

4535fs3502c0
3. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2]. 4. Remove two screws [3], and remove the Duplex Unit [4].
2-4
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Throughout this section, the default settings are indicated in boldface. A. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve a customers problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use the utmost of care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. III Adjusting/Setting
3-1
I/O Check
2.
2.1
I/O Check
Check procedure
To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition). <Procedure> 1. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. 2. Touch the State Confirm Check key. 3. Touch the I/O Check key.
2.2
2.2.1
I/O check list

I/O check screen
This is the only typical screen which may be different from what is shown on each individual main unit.
4036fs3027e0
2.2.2
I/O check list
A. Sensor monitor 2
Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PI2-DU PI1-DU PC1-DU Set Paperpassage 1 Paperpassage 2 Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 OPEN Paper present Paper present 0 CLOSE Paper not present Paper not present
Symbol
Panel display
Part/Signal name
3-2
3.
3.1
Changing the cable tension strength (moving of the lever)
[1]
4535fs3501c0
1. Remove the Exit Tray of the main unit. For details about how to remove the Exit Tray of the main unit, see the Maintenance section of the main unit service manual. 2. Move the green lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to change the mounting position. NOTE When the Duplex Unit is mounted, the Right Door of the main unit can jerk open by its own weight as it is opened, damaging the main unit. Be sure to move the green lever to change the tension strength of the cable.
3.2
Adjusting the paper reference position

1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen. For details about how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting section of the main unit service manual. 2. Touch Machine Adjust.
4535fs3507e0
3. Touch PRT Area.
4535fs3508e0
4. Touch Dup. Left Margin.
4535fs3509e0
3-3
cm3520 Service Manual - 9991 Duplex Unit 5. Touch 1st and then press the Start key. A test print will then be produced.
4535fs3510e0
6. Measure the width of printed reference line A. Specifications: 3.0 mm 1.0 mm 7. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range, enter the correction value. 8. Produce another test print and check for width A.
4535fs3506c0
3-4
Jam Display
IV Troubleshooting
1.
1.1
Jam Display
Initial check items
Check item Does the paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper. Replace paper. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. Action
1.2
Misfeed display
Misfeed location Duplex Unit transport section misfeed Misfeed access location Duplex Unit Door Action
4-3
1.2.1
Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door. IV Troubleshooting 4-1
Jam Display
1.3
Sensor layout
[1] [2]
[3]
4535fs4502c0
IV Troubleshooting
[1] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 [2] Synchronizing Roller Sensor
PI1-DU PC28
[3] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2
PC1-DU
4-2
Jam Display
1.4
1.4.1
Solution
Duplex Unit transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Duplex Paper Take-up sequence started. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is blocked by the paper. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is blocked by the paper. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is blocked by the paper. Detection of paper remaining in the Duplex Unit transport section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) are blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Duplex Unit transport section misfeed detection
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) Control Board (PWB-MC)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-MC PJ12MC-6 PWB-A DU PJ1A DU-12 PWB-A DU PJ4A DU-3 Location (Electrical components) R-2 H-4 C-2 D-8 H-2 F-5 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Initial check items PC28 I/O, sensor check PI1-DU I/O, sensor check PC1-DU I/O, sensor check M1-DU operation check M2-DU operation check PWB-A DU replacement PWB-MC replacement
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display
Blank page
IV Troubleshooting
4-4
9992
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - 9992 LCC
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
General
Product Specifications.......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I General IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance
II
1. 1.1
Maintenance
Periodical Check .................................................................................................. 2-1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) .............................................. 2-1 Separation Roller Assy ................................................................................. 2-1 Paper Take-up Roller .................................................................................... 2-2 Pick-up Roller ............................................................................................... 2-4 Vertical Transport Roller ............................................................................... 2-5 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Other .................................................................................................................... 2-6 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ......................................................... 2-6 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........................................................... 2-7 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..................................................................... 2-7 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover ............ 2-7 Rear Cover ................................................................................................... 2-7 Drawer .......................................................................................................... 2-8 Wire .............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4
III
1. 2. 2.1 2.2
Adjustment/Setting
How to Use the Adjustment Section..................................................................... 3-1 I/O Check ............................................................................................................. 3-1 Check procedure ............................................................................................... 3-1 I/O check list ...................................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check screen........................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check list ................................................................................................. 3-2
2.2.1 2.2.2 3. 3.1 3.2
Mechanical Adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-4 Adjusting the paper reference position .............................................................. 3-4 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment........................................................... 3-6
IV Troubleshooting
1. Jam Display .......................................................................................................... 4-1
cm3520 Service Manual - 9992 LCC 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 I General 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 II Maintenance Initial check items .............................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display .................................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display resetting procedure............................................................. 4-1 Sensor layout..................................................................................................... 4-2 Solution ............................................................................................................. 4-3 LCT Paper Take-Up section misfeed ............................................................ 4-3 Trouble Code........................................................................................................ 4-4 Trouble code display .......................................................................................... 4-4 Trouble code list................................................................................................. 4-4 How to reset ................................................................................................. 4-5 C0990:LCT Elevator Motor Failure ............................................................... 4-6 C0991: LCT Lift Failure ................................................................................ 4-7 C0996: LCT Lock Release Failure ............................................................... 4-8 C0997: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure .................................................... 4-8 C0998: LCT Shift Failure .............................................................................. 4-9 C099C: LCT Shift Motor Failure ................................................................. 4-10 C099D: LCT communication error.............................................................. 4-10 Solution ............................................................................................................. 4-6
1.2.1
1.4.1
2.2.1 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 III Adjusting/Setting IV Troubleshooting
ii
I General
1.
1.1
Type
I General
56 to 110 g/m2 (15 to 29-1/4 lb) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) Large Capacity Tray Front loading type LCT Desk type Center
1.2
Paper type
Plain paper
Paper Type Recycled paper Paper Size Capacity A4, 8-1/2 11
2500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb)
1.3
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V 5 % 45 W or less 570 mm (W) 263 mm (H) 548 mm (D) 22-1/2 inch (W) 10-1/4 inch (H) 21-1/2 inch (D) 25.9 kg (57 lb)
1.4
1-1
I General
Blank page
1-2
Periodical Check
II Maintenance
1.
1.1
Periodical Check
NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 1.1.1 Separation Roller Assy
[2] [1] [1]
4348fs2509c0
A. 1. 2.
[3]
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt.
4348fs2510c0
[6] [4] [4] [5]

4348fs2511c0
B. Replacing procedure 1. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 2. Remove two C-rings [4] and the shaft [5], and remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing Bracket Assy [6]. NOTE Be careful not to lose spring at this time. 3. Remove the C-ring [7], the Guide [8], and remove the Separation Roller Assy [9].
[9] [8] [7]
4348fs2512c0
2-1
II Maintenance
Cleaning procedure Remove the Right Door. 2-7 Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [2].
Periodical Check
N
NOTES Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the copier. Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed.
4348fs2623c0
II Maintenance
1.1.2

[1]
4348fs2501c0
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Remove the Tray3. 2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-Up Roller [1] clean of dirt. B. 1. 2. 3. Replacing procedure Remove the Rear Right Cover. 2-7 Remove the Tray3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 4. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. 5. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.
[3]
[2]
[2] [2]
4348fs2502c0
[5] [4] [4]
4348fs2503c0
2-2
Periodical Check 6. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
[7] [6] [6]

4348fs2504c0
7. Remove two C-rings [8] and remove the bushing [9].
[8]
[8]
[9]
4348fs2505c0
[10]
8. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left, and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12]. 9. Remove the shaft Assy [10].
[12] [11]
4348fs2506c0
2-3
II Maintenance
Periodical Check
[15]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9992 LCC 10. Remove two E-rings [13] and the bushing [14], and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [15].
[13]
[13]
[14]
4348fs2507c0
[16] [17]
11. Remove the C-ring [16] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [17].
II Maintenance
4348fs2508c0
NOTE Replace the Paper Take-up Roller and the Separation Roller Assy at the same time. 1.1.3 Pick-up Roller
[1]
4348fs2513c0
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Remove the Tray3. 2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1] clean of dirt. B. 1. 2. 3. 4. Replacing procedure Remove the Rear Right Cover. 2-7 Remove the Tray3. Remove the Right Door. 2-7 Remove four screws [2] and the Paper Take-up Unit [3].
[2]
[2] [3]
4348fs2514c0
[4] [4]
5. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with frame.
[5]
4348fs2516c0
2-4
Periodical Check 6. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
[7] [6]
[6] [8]
4348fs2515c0
[8]
7. Remove two C-rings [8], two bushings [9], and the Pick-up Roller Assy [10].
[9]
[10]
4348fs2517c0
[11]
8. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12].
[12]
4348fs2518c0
1.1.4
Vertical Transport Roller

[1]
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt.
4348fs2519c0
2-5
II Maintenance
[9]
Other
2.
2.1
Other
A. Paint-locked Screws NOTE Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field. B. Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
II Maintenance
2-6
Other
2.2
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Section Right Door Rear Right Cover Exterior Parts Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Unit Drawer Wire Part name Ref. page
2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7
2.3
2.3.1
II Maintenance
4348fs2520c0 4348fs2521c0
Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover

[7]
[1]
[2] [3] [5] [4]
[6]
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Open the Right Door [1]. Remove the Right Door [1]. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3]. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5]. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7]. Rear Cover
2.3.2
[1]
[2]
[1]
1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2]. 2-7
Other 2.3.3 Drawer

[3]
[2] [3] [1]

4348fs2522c0
1. Press the Drawer Eject Button [1] and slide out the drawer [2]. 2. Remove the paper. 3. Remove four screws [3] and slide out the drawer [2].
[4] [4] [6]
II Maintenance
[5]
4. Remove two screws [4], the connector [5], and remove the Connector Board [6]. 5. Remove the Drawer. NOTE When removing the Connector Board, use care not to drop the drawer from the guide rail.
4348fs2523c0
[7]
NOTE To prevent injuries, press the guide rail [7] inside the machine.
[7]
4348fs2524c0
2.3.4
Wire
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
4348fs2525c0
1. Remove the Drawer. 2-8 2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Front Cover Assy [2]. 3. Unplug the connector [3].
[4] [5]
[4]
4. Remove two screws [4] and the Inner Cover Assy [5]. NOTE Do not peel off pulley protective mylar sheet.
4348fs2526c0
2-8
Other 5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Driver Cover [7].
[7]
[6]
4348fs2527c0
[9]
6. Remove three screws [8] and remove the Driver Mounting Plate Assy [9].
4348fs2528c0
[10] [11]
NOTE When assembling, be sure to engage rib of gear 1 [10] with convex section of gear 2 [11].
4348fs2529c0
[13] [12] [12]

4348fs2530c0
7. Remove three screws [12] and remove the Reinforcement Bracket Assy [13].
[15] [16] [15] [16]
[16] [15] [14]
8. Remove two C-clips [14]. 9. Remove four Pulley Covers [15]. 10. Unhook four pulleys [16].
[15] [14]
4348fs2531c0
2-9
II Maintenance
[8]
Other
[18] [18] [19] [18] [18] [17]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9992 LCC 11. Remove the Ground Plate [17]. 12. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs [18] and remove the Main Drawer [19]. NOTE Use care not to bend the wires.
4348fs2532c0
[21]
[20]
13. Remove four screws [20] and remove the Rear Trailing Edge Assy [21].
II Maintenance
[20]
4348fs2533c0
[22] [23]
14. Remove four screws [22] and remove the Front Trailing Edge Assy [23].
[22]
4348fs2534c0
[24]
[27] [25] [26] [24] [24] [26]

4348fs2535c0
15. Remove three C-rings [24], the bushing [25], and two gears [26]. 16. Remove the Take-up Drum Assy [27].
[28]
[29]
[29]
[28]
[30]
4348fs2536c0
17. Remove two C-rings [28]and the Take-up Drum [29]. NOTES Take care not to lose fixing pins. When reinstalling the Take-up Drum, check that the direction of the wire coming from both Take-up Drums are the same. Install so that cut parts [30] at both ends of shaft face up.
2-10
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Throughout this Adjustment/Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface. A. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. III Adjusting/Setting
2.
2.1
I/O Check
Check procedure
3-1
I/O Check
2.2
2.2.1
I/O check list

I/O check screen
This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4036fs3027e0
2.2.2 A.
I/O check list
Sensor monitor 2
Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Not raised Not lowered Not at home Not at return position Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present operational OFF Not at home
Symbol PC4-LCT PC13LCT PC12LCT PC11LCT PC1-LCT PC2-LCT PWB-E LCT PC3-LCT PC9-LCT PC7-LCT UN1-LCT PC14LCT
Panel display Lift-Up Upper Sensor Lift-Up Lower Sensor Shift Tray Home Sensor Shift Tray Stop S
Part/Signal name Tray Upper Limit Sensor Tray Lower Position Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor
Raised Position Lowered Position At home Return position Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present malfunction ON At home
Take-Up Vertical Transport S Paper Empty Main Tray Empty Shift Tray Empty Lower Over Run Manual Button Down Division Board Position S
Paper Feed Sensor LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Empty Board Upper Paper Empty Sensor Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Lower Limit Sensor Paper Descent Key Shift Gate Home Position Sensor
3-2
I/O Check
Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Out of position Unblocked Unblocked
Symbol PC6-LCT PC8-LCT PC10LCT
Panel display Cassette Open Shift Motor Pulse S Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor
Part/Signal name Tray Set Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor
Set Blocked Blocked
3-3
3.
3.1
NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. When the PH Unit has been replaced. When the image on the print is offset in the FD direction. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. 1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode. For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. 2. Touch Machine Adjust.
4348fs3505e0
3. Touch PRT Area.
4348fs3506e0
4. Touch Left Margin.
4348fs3507e0
5. Touch 3rd and then press the Start key. 6. A test print will be produced.
4348fs3508e0
3-4
Mechanical Adjustment 7. Measure the width of printed reference line A. Specification: 3.0 mm 1.0 mm 8. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range, enter the correction value. 9. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range. If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value, perform adjustment according to the following procedure. 10. Press the Drawer Release button [1] and then slide out the drawer [2] from the Paper Feed Cabinet.
4348fs3509c0
[2] [1]
4348fs3510c0
4348fs3511c0
If width A is greater than the specified value Turn screw D counterclockwise.
4348fs3512c0
If width A is smaller than the specified value Turn screw D clockwise.
4348fs3513c0
13. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation. 3-5
[3]
[4]
11. Open the Right Door. 12. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and turn screw D [4] to make the adjustment. NOTE Do not damage the passage surface of the Right Door.
14. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range. 15. Tighten the adjustment screw.
3.2
[1]
Shifter movement timing belt adjustment

1. Slide out the Drawer and remove it. 2. Lift the Main Drawer [1], and remove two screws [2] fixing the Shift Tray. NOTE When reinstalling, use caution because the wire of the Main Drawer comes off easily.
4348fs3501c0
[2]
[2]
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Shifter [4].

[4] [3]
[3]
4348fs3502c0
[5] [6]
4. Push the tab [6] of the Shift Tray [5] as shown on the left and release the lock. 5. Remove the Shift Tray [5].
4348fs3503c0
[7]
6. Loosen the screw [7] fixing the Tension Pulley Assy as shown to the left and move it in the direction of the arrow. 7. After moving the Shifter, tighten the fixing screw [7].
4348fs3504c0
3-6
Jam Display
IV Troubleshooting
1.
1.1
Jam Display
Initial check items
1.2
Misfeed display
Misfeed location LCT Paper Take-Up section Misfeed access location Right Door Action
4-3
1.2.1
Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door. IV Troubleshooting 4-1
Jam Display
1.3
Sensor layout
[1] [2]
IV Troubleshooting
4348fs4502c0
[1] LCT Vertical Transport Sensor
PC2-LCT
[2] Paper Feed Sensor
PC1-LCT
4-2
Jam Display
1.4
1.4.1
Solution
LCT Paper Take-Up section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) or the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) is energized. The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse LCT Paper Take-Up of a given period of time after the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) has section misfeed been blocked by a paper. detection The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC1-LCT has been blocked by a paper. The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC2-LCT has been blocked by a paper. The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
LCT detection of paper remaining
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 Location (Electrical components) C-6 C-6 W-2 D-6 E-8
1 2 3 4 5 6
Initial check items PC1-LCT I/O, sensor check PC2-LCT I/O, sensor check PC108 I/O, sensor check M1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code
2.
2.1
Trouble Code
Trouble code display
The main unit's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.
4036fs4012e0
2.2
Code C0990
Trouble code list

Item LCT Elevator Motor Failure Description The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower). The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operating. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-down operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-down operation began. The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) is blocked while the paper lift-down operating.
C0991
LCT Lift Failure
IV Troubleshooting
4-4

Code C0996 Item LCT Lock Release Failure Description
Trouble Code
The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) is energized after the lowering operation is finished.
C0997
LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3LCT) began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) set to L. LCT Shift Failure The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower). Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed.
C0998
C099C
LCT Shift Motor Failure
C099D
LCT communication error
2.2.1
How to reset
Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board to reset the following malfunctions: scanner-related malfunctions, fusing-related malfunctions, exposure lamp-related malfunctions and C3FFF. For any other malfunctions, open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch.
4-5
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code
2.3
2.3.1
Solution
C0990:LCT Elevator Motor Failure
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0990 Description The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Interface Board (PWB-H LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) -
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC10-LCT I/O, sensor check M5-LCT operation check PWB-H LCT replacement PWB-C1 LCT replacement
2 3 4 5 6
PWB-C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT-5 PWB-C1 LCT PJ4C1 LCT-7,6 -
F-2 H-2 F-6 E-8
IV Troubleshooting
4-6
cm3520 Service Manual - 9992 LCC 2.3.2 C0991: LCT Lift Failure
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began. C0991 The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operating. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper liftdown operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper liftdown operation began. The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) is blocked while the paper lift-down operating.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM Control signal
1 2 3 4 5 6
Check the sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC4-LCT I/O, sensor check PC13-LCT I/O, sensor check PC10-LCT I/O, sensor check PC7-LCT I/O, sensor check PWB-C1 LCT replacement
PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-12 PWB-C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT-9 PWB-C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT-5 PWB-C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT-2 -
B-6 D-2 F-2 H-2 E-8
4-7
IV Troubleshooting
Step
Action
Location (Electrical components)
Trouble Code 2.3.3 C0996: LCT Lock Release Failure
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0996 Description The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) is energized after the lowering operation is finished.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) E-6 E-8
1 2 3
Check the SL1-LCT connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. SL1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement
PWB-C1 LCT PJ7C1 LCT-4 -
2.3.4
C0997: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0997 Description The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3LCT) began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) set to L.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts
IV Troubleshooting
Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) -
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC14-LCT I/O, sensor check M3-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement
2 3 4 5
I-2 I-2 E-8
4-8
cm3520 Service Manual - 9992 LCC 2.3.5 C0998: LCT Shift Failure
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left).
C0998
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) G-2 E-2 D-2 E-8
1 2 3 4 5
Check the sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC8-LCT I/O, sensor check PC11-LCT I/O, sensor check PC12-LCT I/O, sensor check PWB-C1 LCT replacement
PWB-C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT-3 PWB-C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT-7 PWB-C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT-8 -
4-9
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.6 C099C: LCT Shift Motor Failure
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C099C Description The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Shift Motor (M4-LCT) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC8-LCT I/O, sensor check M4-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement
2 3 4 5
G-2 H-2 E-8
2.3.7
C099D: LCT communication error
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed.
IV Troubleshooting
C099D
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) E-8
1 2
Turn the main unit off, then on again. PWB-C1 LCT replacement
4-10
9993/9994
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - 9993/9994 Paper Feed
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
General
Product specifications .......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I General IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance
II
1. 1.1
Maintenance
Periodical check ................................................................................................... 2-1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) .............................................. 2-1 Separation Roller Assy ................................................................................. 2-1 Paper Take-up Roll ....................................................................................... 2-2 Pick-up Roller ............................................................................................... 2-4 Vertical Transport Roller ............................................................................... 2-6 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Other .................................................................................................................... 2-7 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ......................................................... 2-7 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........................................................... 2-8 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..................................................................... 2-8 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover ............ 2-8 Rear Cover ................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.1 2.3.2
III
1. 2. 2.1 2.2
Adjustment/Setting
How to use the adjustment section ...................................................................... 3-1 I/O check .............................................................................................................. 3-1 Check procedure ............................................................................................... 3-1 I/O check list ...................................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check screen........................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check list ................................................................................................. 3-2
2.2.1 2.2.2 3. 3.1
Mechanical adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-3 Adjusting the paper reference position .............................................................. 3-3
IV Troubleshooting
1. 1.1 1.2 Jam Display.......................................................................................................... 4-1 Initial check items .............................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display .................................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............................................................. 4-1
1.2.1
cm3520 Service Manual - 9993/9994 Paper Feed 1.3 1.4 Sensor layout..................................................................................................... 4-2 Solution ............................................................................................................. 4-3 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section misfeed (9993/9994)...................................... 4-3 Tray4 Paper Take-Up section misfeed (9994)............................................... 4-4
1.4.1 1.4.2 2. I General 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Malfunction Code ................................................................................................. 4-5 Malfunction code display ................................................................................... 4-5 Trouble code list................................................................................................. 4-5 How to reset ...................................................................................................... 4-5 Solution ............................................................................................................. 4-6 C0900: Tray3 Lift-Up Motor Failure C0950: Tray4 Lift-Up Motor Failure............................................................... 4-6
2.4.1
IV Troubleshooting
II Maintenance
ii
Product specifications
I General
1.
1.1
Type
I General
2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device Desk type Center
1.2
Paper type
Plain paper 56 to 110 g/m2 (15 to 29-1/4 lb) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
Paper Type Recycled paper Paper Size Capacity
A5R to A3, 5-1/2 8-1/2R to 11 17 3rd Drawer 4th Drawer 500 sheets 500 sheets
1.3
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V 5 % 15 W or less 570 mm (W) 263 mm (H) 548 mm (D) 22-1/2 inch (W) 10-1/4 inch (H) 21-1/2 inch (D) 9993: 22.0 kg (48-1/2 lb) 9994: 25.9 kg (57 lb)
1.4
1-1
I General
Blank page
1-2
Periodical check
II Maintenance
1.
1.1
Periodical check
NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 1.1.1 Separation Roller Assy A. 1. 2. Cleaning procedure Remove the Right Door. 2-8 Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
4348fs2611c0
[4]
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [4].
[3] [3]
4348fs2612c0
[5]
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller [5] clean of dirt. 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 similarly for the 4th Drawer.
4348fs2613c0
[8] [6]
[7] [6]
4348fs2614c0
B. Replacing procedure 1. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 2. Remove two C-rings [6] and the shaft [7], and remove the Paper Separation Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [8]. NOTE Be careful not to lose spring at this time.
2-1
II Maintenance
Periodical Check
[11] [10] [9]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9993/9994 Paper Feed 3. Remove the C-ring [9], the Guide [10], and remove the Separation Roller Assy [11]. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer.
4348fs2615c0
NOTES Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the copier. Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed. II Maintenance
4348fs2623c0
1.1.2

[1]
4348fs2601c0
A. Cleaning procedure 1. Remove the Tray3.(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row.) 2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-up Roller [1] clean of dirt. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer. B. Replacing procedure 1. Remove the Rear Right Cover. (Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row.) 2-8 2. Remove the Tray3.(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row.) 3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 4. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3].
[3] [2] [2] [2]

4348fs2603c0
2-2
Periodical check 5. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.
[4] [4] [5]

4348fs2604c0
[7]
6. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
[6]
4348fs2605c0
[8]
7. Remove the C-ring [8] and remove the bushing [9].
[9]
4348fs2606c0
[10]
8. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left, and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12].
[12]
[11]
4348fs2607c0
2-3
II Maintenance
Periodical check
[15]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9993/9994 Paper Feed 9. Remove the C-ring [13], the bushing [14], and remove the shaft Assy [15].
[14] [13]
4348fs2608c0
[16]
[18] [16]
10. Remove two E-rings [16] and the bushing [17], and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [18].
[17]
II Maintenance
4348fs2609c0
[19]
11. Remove the C-ring [19] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [20]. 12. Repeat steps 1 to 11 similarly for the 4th Drawer.
[20]
4348fs2610c0
NOTE Replace the Paper Take-up Roller and the Separation Roller Assy at the same time. 1.1.3
[1]
Pick-up Roller A. Cleaning procedure 1. Remove the Tray3.(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row.) 2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2-1 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1] clean of dirt. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer.
4348fs2602c0
2-4
Periodical check B. Replacing procedure 1. Remove the Rear Right Cover. (Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row.) 2-8 2. Remove the Tray3. (Remove the Tray4 from 4th row.) 3. Remove the Jam Access Cover. 2-1 4. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. 5. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with frame.
[2] [2]
[3] [2] [2]
4348fs2616c0
[4]
[5] [4]
4348fs2617c0
[7]
6. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
[6]
4348fs2605c0
[8]
[8]
7. Remove two C-rings[8], two bushings [9], and remove the Pick-up Roller Assy [10].
[9]
[9] [10]
4348fs2618c0
[11] [12]
8. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12]. 9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 similarly for the 4th Drawer.
4348fs2619c0
2-5
II Maintenance
Periodical check 1.1.4

[1] [1]
Vertical Transport Roller A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt.
4348fs2620c0
II Maintenance
2-6
Other
2.
2.1
Other
A. Paint-locked Screws NOTE Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field. B. Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment. Accordingly, check the adjustment items in the operation manual and any make necessary adjustments. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures described below omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
2-7
II Maintenance
Other
2.2
No 1 2 3 4 5

Section Right Door Rear Right Cover Exterior parts Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Part name Ref. page
2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8
2.3
Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover
[7] [1]
[2] [3]
[6]
[5] [4]
4348fs2621c0
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Open the Right Door [1]. Remove the Right Door [1]. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3]. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5]. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7]. Rear Cover
2.3.2
[1] [1] [2]

4348fs2622c0
1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
2-8
How to use the adjustment section
1. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Throughout this Adjustment/Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface. A. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. III Adjusting/Setting
2.
2.1
I/O check
Check procedure
3-1
I/O check
2.2
2.2.1
I/O check list

I/O check screen
This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4036fs3029e0
4036fs3026e0
2.2.2
I/O check list
A. Sensor monitor 1 (9993/9994)

Symbol PC112-PF Set PC115-PF Paper Empty PC113-PF Paper Near Empty PC117-PF Vertical Transport S PC116-PF Take-Up PC114-PF Upper Limit Sensor PC121-PF Set PC124-PF Paper Empty PC122-PF Paper Near Empty PC126-PF Vertical Transport S PC125-PF Take-Up PC123-PF Upper Limit Sensor Panel display Part/Signal name Tray3 Set Sensor Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor Tray4 Set Sensor Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 Set Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present Raised Position Set Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present Raised Position 0 Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not raised Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not raised
3-2
Mechanical adjustment
3.
3.1
NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. When the PH Unit has been replaced. When the image on the print is offset in the FD direction. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. 1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode. For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. 2. Touch Machine Adjust.
4348fs3603e0
3. Touch PRT Area.
4348fs3604e0
4. Touch Left Margin.
4348fs3605e0
5. Touch 3rd and then press the Start key. 6. A test print will be produced.
4348fs3510e0
3-3
cm3520 Service Manual - 9993/9994 Paper Feed 7. Measure the width of printed reference line A. Specification: 3.0 mm 1.0 mm 8. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range, enter the correction value. 9. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range. If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value, perform adjustment according to the following procedure. 10. Slide out the drawer [1] and unload paper from it. 11. Loosen three screws [2] at the center of the Paper Lifting Plate.
4348fs3509c0
[2]
[1]
4348fs3601c0
[4]
[3]
4348fs3602c0
12. Watching the graduations [3] provided in the drawer, move the Edge Guide [4] in the rear. If width A is greater than the specified value, move the Edge Guide toward the front. If width A is smaller than the specified value, move the Edge Guide toward the rear.
13. 14. 15. 16.
Perform another test print and check the reference deviation. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range. Tighten the adjustment screw. Repeat steps 1 to 15 similarly for the tray4.
3-4
Jam Display
IV Troubleshooting
1.
1.1
Jam Display
Initial check items
1.2
Misfeed display
Misfeed location Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Section Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Section Misfeed access location Right Door Right Door Action
4-3 4-4
1.2.1
Misfeed display resetting procedure IV Troubleshooting
4-1
Jam Display
1.3
Sensor layout
[1] [2] [3] [4]
IV Troubleshooting
4348fs4602c0
[1] Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor [2] Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor
PC117-PF [3] Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC116-PF [4] Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor
PC126-PF PC125-PF
4-2
Jam Display
1.4
1.4.1
Solution
Tray3 Paper Take-Up section misfeed (9993/9994)
A. Detection timing
Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) is energized. Tray3 Paper TakeThe Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse Up section misfeed of a given period of time after the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) has detection been blocked by a paper. The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC117-PF has been blocked by a paper. The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Tray3 detection of paper remaining
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-8 PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 Location (Electrical components) F-3 F-3 W-2 E-3 E-5
1 2 3 4 5 6
Initial check items PC116-PF I/O, sensor check PC117-PF I/O, sensor check PC108 I/O, sensor check M122-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display 1.4.2
Tray4 Paper Take-Up section misfeed (9994)
A. Detection timing
Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) is energized. Tray4 Paper TakeThe Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even after the Up section misfeed lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126detection PF) has been blocked by a paper. The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC126-PF has been blocked by a paper. The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Tray4 detection of paper remaining
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-8 PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2 PF-2 PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 Location (Electrical components) E-8 E-8 F-3 F-8 E-5
1 2
Initial check items PC125-PF I/O, sensor check PC126-PF I/O, sensor check PC117-PF I/O, sensor check M123-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement
IV Troubleshooting
3 4 5 6
4-4
Trouble code
2.
2.1
Trouble code
4036fs4012e0
2.2
Code C0900 C0950
Trouble code list

Item 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure Description The Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer began.
2.3
How to reset
Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board to reset the following malfunctions: scanner-related malfunctions, fusing-related malfunctions, exposure lamp-related malfunctions and C3FFF. For any other malfunctions, open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. IV Troubleshooting 4-5
Trouble code
2.4
2.4.1
Solution
C0900: Tray3 Lift-Up Motor Failure C0950: Tray4 Lift-Up Motor Failure
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0900 C0950 Description The Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer began.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PF) Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor (PC123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) main unit Control Board (PWB-MC) main unit DC Power Supply (PU1)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of each motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. Check the PU1 connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC114-PF I/O, sensor check PC123-PF I/O, sensor check M124-PF operation check M125-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement PWB-MC replacement PU1 replacement
3 4 5
PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-3 PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-3 PWB-C2 PF PJ4C2 PF-5,4 PWB-C2 PF PJ8C2 PF-12,13 -
G-3 D-8 D-3 G-3 E-5 -
IV Troubleshooting
6 7 8 9 10
4-6
9996
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
General
Product Specifications.......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Non-Sort ....................................................................................................... 1-1 Sort ............................................................................................................... 1-2 Sort staple .................................................................................................... 1-2 Saddle staple................................................................................................ 1-2 II Maintenance IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting Hole punch (optional) ................................................................................... 1-2 I General
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
Stapling.............................................................................................................. 1-3 No. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple) ............................................................ 1-3 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-3 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-4
II
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance
Other .................................................................................................................... 2-1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ......................................................... 2-1 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........................................................... 2-2 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..................................................................... 2-3 Exit Tray ........................................................................................................ 2-3 Front Cover ................................................................................................... 2-3 Rear Cover ................................................................................................... 2-3 Upper Door ................................................................................................... 2-4 Finisher Tray Upper Cover ............................................................................ 2-4 Upper Cover ................................................................................................. 2-5 Side Guide.................................................................................................... 2-5 Middle Transport Unit.................................................................................... 2-6 Stapler .......................................................................................................... 2-6
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 1.3.9
1.3.10 Stapler Phase Adjustment ............................................................................ 2-7 1.3.11 Saddle Section ............................................................................................. 2-9 1.3.12 Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment ................................................................. 2-10 1.3.13 Finisher Tray ............................................................................................... 2-11 1.3.14 Paddle Section........................................................................................... 2-12
1.3.15 Exit Roller (Upper) ...................................................................................... 2-13 1.3.16 Paddle......................................................................................................... 2-13 i
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 1.3.17 Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt ...................................................... 2-14 1.3.18 Stapler/Folding Drive Unit .......................................................................... 2-16 1.3.19 Transport Roller .......................................................................................... 2-17 1.3.20 Middle Transport Roller .............................................................................. 2-18 1.3.21 Punch Unit.................................................................................................. 2-19 I General 1.3.22 Finisher Control Board ............................................................................... 2-20 1.3.23 Punch Control Board .................................................................................. 2-20 1.3.24 Transport Motor Unit................................................................................... 2-21 1.3.25 Middle Transport Motor .............................................................................. 2-21 1.3.26 Punch Motor ............................................................................................... 2-21 1.3.27 Side Registration Motor.............................................................................. 2-21 II Maintenance
III
1. 2. 2.1 2.2
Adjustment/Setting
How to Use the Adjustment Section .................................................................... 3-1 I/O Check ............................................................................................................. 3-1 Check procedure ............................................................................................... 3-1 I/O check list ...................................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check screen .......................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check list................................................................................................. 3-2
2.2.1 III Adjusting/Setting 2.2.2 3. 3.1
Mechanical Adjustment........................................................................................ 3-4 Adjustment of the stapling position.................................................................... 3-4 9990-equipped machine............................................................................... 3-4 9990-unequipped machine........................................................................... 3-5 9990-equipped machine............................................................................... 3-6 9990-unequipped machine........................................................................... 3-7 3.1.1 3.1.2
3.2
Adjustment of the folding position...................................................................... 3-6
3.2.1 IV Troubleshooting 3.2.2 3.3 4. 4.1
Adjustment of height and inclination.................................................................. 3-8 Board Switch...................................................................................................... 3-10 PWB-A FN (Finisher Control Board) ............................................................... 3-10 Adjustment of the folding positions............................................................. 3-11 Adjustment of the center stapling position.................................................. 3-12 Adjustment of the sensor output................................................................. 3-14 Registration of the number of punch holes................................................. 3-14 Procedure after replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002) .................................... 3-15 Punch center position adjustment .............................................................. 3-15
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4
PWB-B PK (Punch Control Board) .................................................................. 3-13
ii
IV Troubleshooting
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Jam Display .......................................................................................................... 4-1 Initial check items .............................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display .................................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............................................................. 4-1 I General IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance Sensor layout ..................................................................................................... 4-2 Solution.............................................................................................................. 4-3 Transport section misfeed............................................................................. 4-3 Horizontal Transport section misfeed ........................................................... 4-3 Folding position section misfeed................................................................... 4-4 Stapler section misfeed ................................................................................ 4-4
1.2.1
1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Trouble Code ........................................................................................................ 4-5 Trouble code display .......................................................................................... 4-5 Trouble code list................................................................................................. 4-5 How to reset ................................................................................................. 4-8 C0B00:Transport System Drive malfunctions ............................................... 4-9 C0B05:Paddle Motor malfunctions ............................................................. 4-10 C0B25:Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions ............................................ 4-11 C0B39:Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions ......................................... 4-12 C0B3A:Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions ......................................... 4-13 C0B4C:Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions..................................................... 4-14 C0B55:Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions ................................................ 4-15 C0B75:Punch Control Board malfunctions ................................................. 4-18 C0B76:Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions.................................. 4-19 Solution.............................................................................................................. 4-9
2.2.1 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9
2.3.10 C0B77: Punch Motor malfunctions ............................................................. 4-20 2.3.11 C0B79:Punch Sensor malfunctions............................................................ 4-21 2.3.12 C0BA0:Elevate Mechanism malfunctions................................................... 4-22 2.3.13 C0BF1:Backup RAM malfunction ............................................................... 4-23
iii
IV Troubleshooting
II Maintenance
I General
iv cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher
I General
1.
1.1
Type Installation Document Alignment Supplies
Type
I General
Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled Elevator Tray Multi Staple Finisher with Saddle (Booklet) Freestanding Center Staple Cartridge
1.2
Functions
No. of Holes (optional) Metric: 4holes, Inch: 2holes / 3holes Non-Sort Normal Modes Sort Sort Staple Saddle Staple Non-Sort Hole Punch Hole Punch (optional) Sort Hole Punch Sort Staple Hole Punch
1.3
1.3.1
Paper type
Non-Sort
Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
A4R / 8B4/ 1/211R 8-1/214 or smaller or larger
Paper Type
Plain Paper
A6R to A3 Wide 5-1/2 8-1/2R/ 5-1/2 8-1/2 to 12-1/4 18
60 to 256 g/m 16 to 68 lb
2
No. of Sheets Height
1000 150 mm
500 75 mm
Max. Min. Envelop OHP Film CD311.15 86 mm mm Label Paper Thick Paper FD457.2 139.7 mm mm
Controlled by whichever reached earlier
20 sheets
1-1
Product Specifications 1.3.2 Sort

Paper Size Weight
Paper Type
Tray Capacity
A4R / 8B4/ 1/211R 8-1/214 or smaller or larger No. of Sheets Height 1000 150 mm 500 75 mm
Exit Tray
No. of Sheets to be Stapled
I General
Plain Paper
B5R/B5 to A3 8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11 to 11 17
60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
Elevator Tray
1.3.3
Sort staple
Paper Size Weight Normal Mode 60 to 90 B5R/B5 to A3 8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11 to 1117 g/m2 16 to 24 lb Cover Mode 60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55-1/2 lb Controlled by whichever reached earlier Tray Capacity
A4R / 8B4/ 1/211R 8-1/214 or smaller or larger No. of Sheets Height No. of Sets 1000 150 mm 30 500 75 mm 30
Paper Type
Exit Tray

Normal Mode *1
Plain Paper Cardboard
A4R/8- B4/81/2 1/214 11R or or larger Elevator Tray smaller 2 to 50 2 to 25
* The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high-density images. (Color Wise: 3 to 20 sheets) 1.3.4 Saddle staple
Paper Size A4R, B4, A3 8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11, 8-1/2 14 11 17 Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled
Paper Type
60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
Plain Paper
10 sets (No. of Sheets to be 2 to 10 sheets Stapled: 6 to 10 sheets) Booklet Tray (Max. 40 20 sets pages) (No. of Sheets to be Stapled: 2 to 5 sheets)
1.3.5
Hole punch (optional)

Paper Size 4 holes A4, A3 Weight 60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55-1/2 lb Elevator Tray Tray Capacity Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled
Paper Type
Plain Paper 2 holes Thick Paper 3 holes
8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11, 8-1/2 14, 11 17 8-1/2 11, 11 17
1-2
1.4
Stapling
Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (5000 staples) Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples) Rear: Parallel 1 point
Staple Filling Mode Staple Detection
Stapling Position
Front: Parallel 1 point Center: Parallel 2 points
Stapled Paper Size Manual Staple Folding Mode Folding Position
B5R/B5 to A3, 8-1/2 11R / 8-1/2 11 to 11 17 None Roller Pressure Folding Center of Paper
1.5
No. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple)
A. A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller

No. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 30 31 to 50 No. of Sets Rear: Parallel 100 80 60 30 30 Center: Parallel 40 40 40 30 30 30 sets or 1000 sheets Front: Parallel 40 40 40 30 30
B. B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger

No. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 25 No. of Sets Rear: Parallel 100 80 40 Center: Parallel 50 40 40 30 sets or 1000 sheets Front: Parallel 50 40 40
1.6
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V (generated by Finisher) 65 W or less 601 mm (W) 933 mm (H) 603 mm (D) 23-3/4 inch (W) 36-3/4 inch (H) 23-3/4 inch (D) 41.6 kg (91-3/4 lb)
1-3
I General
1.7
I General
1-4
Other
II Maintenance
1.
1.1
Other
A. Paint-locked Screws NOTE Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field. B. Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment. Accordingly, check the adjustment items in the operation manual and make any necessary adjustments. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures described below omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
2-1
II Maintenance
Other
1.2
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Section Exit Tray Front Cover Exterior Parts Rear Cover Upper Door Finisher Tray Upper Cover Upper Cover Side Guide Middle Transport Unit Stapler Saddle Section Finisher Tray Paddle Section Unit Exit Roller (Upper) Paddle Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt Stapler/Folding Drive Unit Transport Roller Middle Transport Roller Punch Unit Finisher Control Board Punch Control Board Electrical Parts Transport Motor Unit Middle Transport Motor Punch Motor Side Registration Motor Part name Ref. page
2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-9 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21
II Maintenance
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
2-2
Other
1.3
1.3.1
Exit Tray
[2] [1]
1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the Exit Tray [2].
[1]
4583fs2526c0
1.3.2
[1]
Front Cover
[4]
[4]
[3] [2]
4583fs2527c0
[6]
5. Remove the screw [5], and remove the Front Cover [6].
[5]
4583fs2528c0
1.3.3
Rear Cover 1. Remove the Middle Transport Unit. 2-6 2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Rear Cover [2].
[1]
4583fs2529c0
[2]
[1]
4583fs2530c0
2-3
II Maintenance
1. 2. 3.
Remove the Middle Transport Unit. 2-6 Open the Front Door [1]. While pinching the claws [2], remove the Folding Jam Release Dial [3]. 4. Remove two screws [4].
Other 1.3.4 Upper Door

[1]
[4] [3] [2]
1. Open the Upper Door [1], and remove the Door Band Holder [2] by turning it clockwise. 2. Remove the Door Band [3]. 3. Remove the screw [4], and remove the grounding wire.
4583fs2531c0
[7]
4. Remove the screw [5], remove the Finisher Tray Rear Cover [6], and remove the Upper Door [7].
II Maintenance
[6] [5]
4583fs2532c0
1.3.5
Finisher Tray Upper Cover 1. 2. 3. 4.

4583fs2533c0
[1]
Remove the Front Cover. 2-3 Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 Remove the Upper Door. 2-4 Unplug the connector [1].
[2]
[3]
5. Unplug the connector [3] while holding up the Finisher Tray Upper Cover [2], and remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover [2].
4583fs2534c0
2-4
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 1.3.6 Upper Cover 1. 2. 3. 4.

[1]
4583fs2535c0
Other
Remove the Front Cover. 2-3 Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 Remove two screws [1]. Open the Upper Door[2],and remove the Upper Cover [3].
[2]
[1]
4583fs2536c0
1.3.7
Side Guide 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Exit Tray. 2-3 Remove the Front Cover. 2-3 Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 Derail the Exit Tray Support Plate (Front) [1] and the Exit Tray Support Plate (Rear) [2] to the outside off the respective rail grooves. 5. Remove four screws [3]. 6. Pull down the Side Guide [4] lightly, disengage the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever (Rear) [5], and then remove the Side Guide [4].
[3] [2] [3] [3]
[3] [1]
4583fs2537c0
[5]
[4]
4583fs2538c0
[5] [5] [6]

4583fs2539c0
[6]
NOTES In reassembling, ensure of exact installation with the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever (Rear) [5] set in the slot of the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever (Center) [6]. After reassembly, press each of these levers for several times to make sure of exact installation. 2-5
II Maintenance
[3]
Other 1.3.8
[2]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher Middle Transport Unit

[3] [1]
[1]
1. Remove four screws [1]. 2. Hold up the Middle Front Cover [2] and the Middle Rear Cover [3], and remove them while shifting them back and forth.
4583fs2540c0
3. Unplug two connectors [4]. 4. Pinch the tie band [5], and remove it from the sheet metal.
[5]
II Maintenance
[4]
4583fs2541c0
[7]
[7]
5. Remove two screws [6]. 6. Loosen two screws [7]. 7. Remove the Middle Transport Unit by sliding it upwards.
[6]
4583fs2542c0
1.3.9
Stapler
[1]
1. Open the Front Door [1]. 2. Pull out the Stapler [3] while pressing the Stop Lever [2].
[3]
[2]
4583fs2502c0
[5] [4]
4583fs2503c0
NOTES Do not remove the Stapler from the shaft of the stapler frame, or displacement will be caused between the position to which the Staple Driver [4] (the lower unit of the Stapler) feeds staples and the position from which the Staple Clincher [5] (the upper unit of the Stapler) receives them.
2-6
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 1.3.10 Stapler Phase Adjustment
Other
4583fs2504c0
Make phase adjustment of the Stapler following the procedures given below whenever the Gear or Timing Belt in front of the Stapler has been replaced or removed for some reason, since such replacement or removal will cause mis-timing between the staple driving by the Staple Driver (the lower unit of the Stapler) and the staple clinching by the Staple Clincher (the upper unit of the Stapler). 1. Remove the Stapler. 2-6 2. Remove the E-Ring [1], and remove the Jam Release Dial 1[2]. 3. Remove the Jam Release Dial 2 [3]. 4. Remove the three screws [4], and remove the Stapler Front Cover [5].
[1]
[3] [4]
[4]
[2]
[4]
[5]
4583fs2543c0
[8] [10] [7]
[9] [6]
5. Remove the Gear Cover [7] from the Staple Driver [6]. 6. Remove the E-Ring [8], and remove the Side Cover [10] from the Staple Clincher [9].
4583fs2505c0
[12] [13] [11] [16] [14] [15] [17]
4583fs2506c0
7. Remove two E-Rings [11], and remove the Staple Jam Release Gear [12], the Timing Belt [13] and the Middle Gear 1 [14]. 8. Remove the spacer and the spring located behind the Staple Jam Release Gear. 9. Remove the screw [15] and the spring [16], and remove the Belt Tension Roller [17].
2-7
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 10. Remove the Timing Belt [18]. 11. Remove the E-Ring [19], and remove the Staple Position Confirm Gear [20].
[20]
[19]
[18]
4583fs2507c0
12. Turn the Gear [21] to position the hole [22] in the Gear of the Staple Driver to the hole behind.
[21]
II Maintenance
[22]
4583fs2508c0
13. Insert a pin of approx.2 [23] (alternatively, 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used) into the hole, and fix the Gear.
[23]
4583fs2509c0
[24]
14. Turn the Gear [24] to position the hole [25] in the Cam of the Staple Clincher to the hole behind.
[25]
4583fs2510c0
[26]
15. Insert a pin of approx.2 [26] (alternatively, 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used) into the hole, and fix the Cam.
4583fs2511c0
2-8
Other 16. Set the Timing Belt [27] to the Gear [28] and Gear [29] with the Gear and the Cam in the fixed condition.
[28] [29] [27]
4583fs2512c0
[31]
[30] [32]
4583fs2513c0
17. Install the Staple Position Confirm Gear [32] in such a way that the blue mark [30] of the Gear comes face to face with the hole [31] in the frame. NOTE The position in which the blue mark meets face to face with the hole is the home position for stapling. If the Staple Jam Release Gear is turned for some reason, this home position will shift and the Staple Cartridge will not come off. In this case, the Staple Position Confirm Gear plays a role of resuming the stapling home position by referring to the blue mark. Therefore, the Gear should be set in place correctly. 18. Remove the pin fixing the Gear and the Cam to release them. 19. Set the spring [33], the spacer [34], the Staple Jam Release Gear [35], the Timing Belt [36] and the Middle Gear 1 [37], and fix them with two ERings [38].
[33]
[36] [37]
[34] [35]
[38]
4583fs2514c0
1.3.11
Saddle Section
[3] [5] [2]
[2] [1] [4]

4583fs2544c0
1. 2. 3.
Remove the Front Cover. 2-3 Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 Open the Jam Access Cover [1], remove two screws [2], and remove the Right Stay [3]. 4. Remove two screws [4], and remove the Lever [5].
2-9
II Maintenance
Other
[7]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 5. Turn the Folding Jam Release Dial [6] to move the Paper Pressure [7] inside.
[6]
4583fs2518c0
[10] [9]
[8]
6. Remove the C-clip [8], and remove the Timing Belt [9]. 7. Unplug two connectors [10].
II Maintenance
4583fs2519c0
[11]
[12] [13]
8. Remove the Stapler[11]. 2-6 9. Remove three screws [12], and pull out and remove the Saddle [13].
[12]
4583fs2520c0
1.3.12
Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment

[2]
[1]
[1]
4583fs2545c0
Whenever the Gear in front of the Saddle or the Folding Roller has been replaced or removed for some reason, make gear phase adjustment following the procedures given below. 1. Remove the Saddle. 2-9 2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the Saddle Gear Cover [2]. 3. Set the Folding Roller [3] and Saddle Cam [4] within the Saddle as shown in the figure. 4. With the Folding Roller and the Saddle Cam positioned as shown in the Left figure, set the gears as shown in the figure in the following way.
[4] [3]
4583fs2515c0
2-10
Other NOTE The mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear [5] (either of the two marks) comes face to face with the mark on the Middle Gear [6] (the mark on the semispherical part with narrow gear face width). 5. With the Saddle Cam Drive Gear [5] and the Middle Gear [6] positioned as above, the mark on the Middle Gear [6] (the mark on the other semispherical part) meets face to face with the rib of the Folding Roller Drive Gear [7]. II Maintenance
[5] [6] [7]

4583fs2516c0
1.3.13
Finisher Tray
[2]
[1] [1]
[2] [2] [2]

4583fs2546c0
1. Remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover. 2-4 2. Remove the Side Guide. 2-5 3. Remove two screws [1],and unplug six connectors [2].
[6] [4]
[5] [4] [3]

4583fs2522c0
4. Pull out the Finisher Stopper Base [3], and disengage the front claw [5] and the rear claw [6] of the Finisher Stopper [4].
5. Remove the Motor Harness [8] from two Harness Saddles [7]. 6. Unplug three connectors [9].
[8]
[7]
[9]
4583fs2523c0
2-11
Other
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 7. Remove the C-clip [10], and remove the spacer [11], and remove the Timing Belt [13] from the Gear [12]. 8. Unplug the connector [14], and remove the Harness [16] from the Wire Saddle [15].
[12] [13] [11] [10] [6]
[14] [16] [15]

4583fs2547c0
9. Remove two screws [17], and remove the Finisher Tray [18] by sliding it to the far side and lifting it.
[18]
II Maintenance
[17]
4583fs2525c0
1.3.14
Paddle Section
[1]
[2] [2]
4583fs2548c0
1. Remove the Finisher Tray. 2-11 2. Place the Finisher Tray [1] as shown in the figure. NOTE Be careful not to damage the Aligning Plate [2].
[4]
[3]
3. Remove the Timing Belt [3], and remove two screws [4].
[4]
4583fs2549c0
[6]
4. Separate the section into the Tray Section[5] and the Paddle Section [6].
[5]
4583fs2550c0
2-12
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 1.3.15 Exit Roller (Upper)
Other
[1]
1. Remove the Paddle Section. 2-12 2. Place the Paddle Section [1] as shown in the figure.
4583fs2551c0
3. Turn the gear [2] in the direction indicated by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller (Upper) section [3].
[3] [2]
4583fs2552c0
4. Push up the Exit Roller (Upper) [4] from the bottom to release it from the shaft [5].
[4] [5]
4583fs2553c0
[7] [6]
5. Turn up the Exit Roller (Upper) [6], and then push it down to remove it. 6. Remove the front Exit Roller (Upper) [7] as well in the same way.
4583fs2554c0
1.3.16
Paddle 1. Remove the Paddle Section. 2-12 2. Place the Paddle Section [1] as shown in the figure.
[1]
4583fs2551c0
2-13
II Maintenance
Other
[3]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 3. Turn the gear [2] in the direction indicted by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller (Upper) section [3].
[2]
4583fs2555c0
4. Push up the Safety Guide [4] from the bottom to release it on one side from the shaft [5].
II Maintenance
[5]
[4]
4583fs2556c0
[4]
5. Push up the Safety Guide [4] from the bottom to release it from the shaft [5] and remove it.
[5]
4583fs2557c0
[6]
6. Remove the Paddle [6]. 7. Remove the other Paddles as well in the same way.
4583fs2558c0
1.3.17
Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt 1. Remove the Tray Section. 2-12 2. Slide the Aligning Plate (Front) [2] and the Aligning Plate (Rear) [3] outside to remove them from the Tray [1].
[1]
[3] [2]
4583fs2559c0
2-14
Other 3. Remove two Holders [4], and remove the Finisher Tray Stopper [5].
[4]
[4]
[5] [6]
4583fs2560c0
[8]
4. Remove the screw [6], and remove the Paper Guide (Front) [8] while disengaging two claws [7].
[7]
4583fs2561c0
[9]
5. Remove the screw [9], and remove the Paper Guide (Rear) [11] while disengaging the claw [10].
[11] [10]
4583fs2562c0
6. Remove two C-clips [12], and move two bushings [13] inside, respectively.
[13] [12]
[12]
[13]
4583fs2563c0
[14]
7. Remove four screws [14], and remove the Exit Roller (Lower) section [15] by lifting it.
[15]
[14]
4583fs2564c0
2-15
II Maintenance
Other
[17]
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 8. Remove the Exit Roller (Lower) [16] and two Paper Exit Belts [17].
[16]
4583fs2565c0
[18]
NOTE When installing, align the edge of claws of the Paper Exit Belt [18].
II Maintenance
4583fs2566c0
1.3.18
Stapler/Folding Drive Unit

[2]
1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 2. Open the Front Door [1], and slightly pull out the stapler section [2].
[1]
4583fs2567c0
[6]
[5] [5]
3. Remove screw [3], and remove the interface cable presser [4]. 4. Remove the Harness from seven Harness Saddles[5]. 5. Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle, and unplug two connectors [6].
[4] [8]
[3]
[5]
4583fs2568c0
[7]
6. Remove the Harness from the Harness Saddle, and unplug the connector [7]. 7. Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle, and unplug two connectors [8].
4583fs2569c0
2-16
Other 8. Remove the screw [9], and remove the claw of Harness Guide [11] from the square hole [10] in the base plate.
[9]
[10]
[11]
4583fs2570c0
9. Unplug two connectors [12], and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle.
[12]
[12]
4583fs2571c0
10. Remove three screws [13].

[13] [13]
[13]
4583fs2572c0
11. Remove the screw [14], and remove the Stapler/Folding Drive Unit [15].
[14] [15]
4583fs2573c0
1.3.19
[1]
Transport Roller 1. 2. 3. Remove the Upper Door. 2-4 Remove the Upper Cover. 2-5 Remove two screws [1], and remove the Upper Cover Unit [2].
[1]
[2]
4583fs2576c0
2-17
II Maintenance
Other
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 4. 5. 6.

[3] [4] [5]
4583fs2575c0
Remove the Transport Motor Unit. 2-21 Remove the screw [3]. Remove the C-clip [4], and remove the bushing [5].
7. Remove two screws [6].

[6]
II Maintenance
4583fs2577c0
[10] [12]
[7]
[11] [9]
[8]
4583fs2578c0
8. Remove the gear 1 [7], and remove the gear 2 [8] while disengaging the claw. NOTE Be careful not to lose the gear pin. 9. Remove the C-clip [9], and remove the bushing [10]. 10. Remove the screw [11], and remove the Paper Guide (Lower) [12]. 11. Remove the Transport Roller [13].
[13]
4583fs2579c0
1.3.20
Middle Transport Roller 1. Remove the Middle Front Cover and the Middle Rear Cover. 2-6 2. Remove Two screws [1], and remove the Middle Upper Cover[2].
[1]
[1] [2]
4583fs2581c0
2-18
Other 3. Remove the C-clip[3], and remove the bushing [4].
[3] [4]
4583fs2582c0
[8] [7] [6] [5]
4. Shift the Shaft Assy in the orientation as shown on the left. 5. Remove the C-clip [5], the Gear [6], the bushing [7], and remove the Middle Transport Roller [8]. II Maintenance
4583fs2583c0
1.3.21
Punch Unit
[1]
1. Remove the Punch Trash Box. 2. Unplug the connector J1005 [1]. 3. Remove the Harness from the Harness Guide [2].
[2]
4583fs2586c0
[3]
4. Unplug the connector [3]. 5. Remove the screw [4], and remove the Sensor Support Plate [5].
[4]
[5]
4583fs2587c0
[6] [8]
6. Remove the screw [6] and the washer [7]. 7. Unplug the connector [8]. 8. Remove two screws [9], and remove the base cover [10].
[10] [9]
[7]
4583fs2588c0
2-19
Other
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 9. Remove four screws [11], and remove the Sensor Unit (Upper) [12] and the Sensor Unit (Lower) [13].
[11] [12]
[11]
[11] [13] [11]

4583fs2589c0
[15]
[16]
10. Remove the spring[14]. 11. Remove the Punch Unit [16] from the Side Registration Motor section [15].
II Maintenance
[14]
4583fs2590c0
1.3.22
[1]
Finisher Control Board

[2]
1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 2. Unplug all connectors on the Board, and remove the screw [1]. 3. Release the PCB support [2], and remove the Finisher Control Board [3].
[3]
4583fs2592c0
1.3.23
Punch Control Board

[3] [2] [2]
1. Remove two screws [1]. 2. Unplug seven connectors [2], and remove the Punch Control Board [3].
[2] [1] [2] [1]
4583fs2591c0
2-20
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 1.3.24

[4]
Other
Transport Motor Unit

[4]
[5] [1]
1. 2. 3.
Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 Unplug the connector [1]. Remove screw [2], and remove the Harness Guide [3]. 4. Remove three screws [4], and remove the Transport Motor Unit [5].
[4] [2] [3]

4583fs2574c0
1.3.25
Middle Transport Motor 1. Remove the Middle Rear Cover. 2-6 2. Remove the harness from the Wire Saddle [1]. 3. Unplug the connector [2]. 4. Remove two screws [3].
[3] [3] [1] [2]
4583fs2580c0
1.3.26
Punch Motor
[2]
1. 2. 3.
[3] [1]
4583fs2584c0
Remove the Upper Cover. 2-5 Remove two screws [1]. Unplug the connector [2], and remove the punch motor [3].
1.3.27
[3]
Side Registration Motor

[3]
[1] [4] [2]

4583fs2585c0
1. Unplug the connector J1001 [1]. 2. Remove the harness from the Harness Guide [2]. 3. Remove two screws [3], and remove the Side Registration Motor [4].
2-21
II Maintenance
Other
II Maintenance
Blank page
2-22
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Throughout this section, the default settings are shown in boldface. A. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve a customers problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, be careful to not be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. III Adjusting/Setting
2.
2.1
I/O check
Check procedure
3-1
I/O check
2.2
2.2.1
I/O check list

I/O check screen
This is the only typical screen which may be different from that shown on each individual main unit.
4036fs3029e0
4036fs3029e0
2.2.2 A.
I/O check list
Sensor monitor 4 (9996 Finisher, CM3100010 Punch Unit)

Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Paper not present
Symbol PI1-FN PI2-FN PI3-FN PI4-FN PI5-FN PI6-FN PI7-FN PI10-FN PI13-FN PI11-FN PI12-FN PI14-FN PI8-FN PI9-FN PI15-FN
Panel display Entrance Paddle Home Bundle Roller Home Align Home (Front) Align Home (Back) Alignment Tray Exit Belt Home Crease Position Crease Tray Crease Home Crease Roller Home Crease Clock Paper Paper Surface Raised Position
Part/Signal name Entrance Sensor Paddle Home Position Sensor Swing Guide Home Position Sensor Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Finisher Tray Sensor Exit Belt Home Position Sensor Folding Position Sensor Saddle Tray Sensor Folding Home Position Sensor Folding Roller Home Position Sensor Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor Exit Tray Sensor Exit Tray Home Position Sensor Shift Upper Limit Sensor
Paper present HP HP HP HP Paper present HP Paper present Paper present HP HP
Paper not present
Paper not present Paper not present
Paper present DETECTE D UPPER LIMIT
Paper not present
3-2
I/O check
Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0
Symbol PI16-FN PI17-FN
Panel display Lowered Position Clock Middle
Part/Signal name Shift Lower Limit Sensor Shift Motor Clock Sensor
LOWER LIMIT
FULL Slide Home Position Sensor Staple Drive Home Position Sensor Staple Detecting Sensor HP SUPPLIED EMPTY DETECTE D Staple Safety Switch (Rear) Staple Safety Switch (Front) Self-Priming Sensor Front Door Open Sensor Upper Cover Open Sensor Front Door Open Switch CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN CLOSE READY OPEN OPEN OPEN HORIZONTAL Joint Open Switch CLOSE OPEN HP
PI18-FN PI19-FN PI20-FN
Slide Home Stapler Home Needle Stapler Connect
MS3-FN MS4-FN PI21-FN PI22-FN PI23-FN MS1-FN
Stapler Safety SW Self Prime Front Door Upper Door Front Door SW Rev. Remain
MS2-FN
Joint SW Punch Regist. S1 Punch Regist. S2 Punch Regist. S3 Punch Regist. S4 Punch Waste Punch Timing
FULL
PI3P-PK PI1P-PK PI2P-PK PC4-HO
Punch Motor Clock Punch Home Punch Regist. Home Horizontal Transport Doors
Punch Motor Clock Sensor Punch Home Position Sensor Side Registration Home Sensor Horizontal Unit Door Sensor
Blocked HP HP Blocked
Unblocked
Unblocked
3-3
3.
3.1
Adjustment of the stapling position
The stapling position is adjusted by aligning the stapling position to the folding position. This adjustment is made in the Tech. Rep. Mode of the main unit. Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm, this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more. For the effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm, refer to Board switch. Adjustable range: - 7 to + 7 mm (Increment: 1 mm) 3.1.1 9990-equipped machine
1. Set A3 or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray. 2. Select the functions as follows: Orig Copy4in1/BookletBookletBind. 3. Set five sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) in the Original Tray. These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation. 4. Press the Start Key. 5. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. 6. Touch Machine Adjust. 7. Touch Center Binding Position.
4583fs3523e0
8. Touch Center-Staple Position.
4583fs3524e0
9. Renew the center folding of the finished copies. Take the top surface of the finished copies as A, and the under surface as B. 10. Check the deviation of the stapling position from the newly folded position. NOTE In checking the deviation, refer not to the folded position by the Finisher but to the newly folded position.
3-4
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher Standard:0 2 mm <To - side>

A A
<Standard>
A
<To + side>
B
4583fs3501c0
11. Adjust with the and Keys. When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A: Adjust the value to the - side. When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B: Adjust the value to the + side. 12. Touch END.
4583fs3524e0
13. Make the copy and check again. NOTE Set five or more sheets of original under the ADF, and then take copies and bind them into a booklet. 3.1.2 1. 2. 3. 4. 9990-unequipped machine III Adjusting/Setting
Set A3 or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray. Select the functions as follows: Orig Copy4in1/BookletBookletBind. Set A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) on the Original Glass. Press the Start Key five times (to cause reading operation five times) Adjust the variation to the minimum by using five sheets. 5. Touch the Finish of the panel. 6. Press the Start Key. 7. Take the Steps from 5 to 14 of (1) 9990-equipped machine in 3.1.1 Adjustment of the stapling position.
3-5
3.2
Adjustment of the folding position
The folding position is adjusted by aligning the folding position to the stapling position. This adjustment is made in the Tech. Rep. Mode of the main unit. Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm, this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more. For the effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm, refer to Board switch. Adjustment range: - 7 to + 7 mm (Increment: 1 mm) 3.2.1 9990-equipped machine
1. Return to the basic screen. 2. Select the functions as follows: Orig Copy4in1/BookletBookletBind. 3. Set five sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) in the Original Tray. These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation. 4. Press the Start Key. 5. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode. 6. Touch Machine Adjust. 7. Touch Center Binding Position.
4583fs3523e0
8. Touch Fold-Position.
4583fs3525e0
9. Check the finished copies for deviation of the stapling position of from the newly folded position. Take the top surface of the finished copies as A, and the under surface as B.
3-6
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher Standard: 0 2 mm <To + side>

A A
<Standard>
A
<To - side>
B
4583fs3502c0
10. Adjust with the and Keys.When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A: Adjust the value to the + side.When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B: Adjust the value to the - side. 11. Touch END.
4583fs3525e0
12. Make the copy and check again. 3.2.2 1. 2. 3. 4. 9990-unequipped machine
3-7
Return to the basic screen. Select the functions as follows: Orig Copy4in1/BookletBookletBind. Set A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) in the tray for original. Press the Start Key five times (to cause reading operation five times) Adjust the variation to the minimum by using five sheets. 5. Touch the Finish of the panel. 6. Press the Start Key. 7. Take the Steps from 5 to 13 of (1) 9990-equipped machine in 3.2.1 Adjustment of the folding position.
3.3
Adjustment of height and inclination

1. Gently move the finisher toward the machine and check for following. Is the positioning pin aligned with the hole in the finisher?
4583fs3503c0
A B
Does the horizontal transport unit run excessively slantwise? Does the clearance at A equal that at B? If the finisher is not at the same height as the machine, adjust the machine as follows.
4583fs3504c0
[1]
2. Remove the Finisher [1] from the main unit, and remove two caster covers [2].
[2] [3] [3] [3]
4583fs3505c0
[3]
3. Remove four adjusting screw covers[3].
4583fs3506c0
3-8
Mechanical adjustment 4. Loosen four caster fixing screws[4].
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
4583fs3507c0
[5]
[5]
4583fs3508c0
3-9
5. Turn the adjustment screw[5] to make adjustment. To heighten: Turn the screw counterclockwise. To bring down: Turn the screw clockwise. 6. Fasten the caster fixing screws. 7. Install the caster covers and the adjustment screw covers.
Board switch
4.
4.1
Board switch
PWB-A FN (Finisher Control Board)
6 CN8 3 CN1 1 5 CN14 1 1 CN17 4 1 CN12 5 1 CN16 12 1
1 4 CN6
1 5 CN22
1 1 21 CN18
12 1 CN10 CN3
10 1 CN13 CN7
6 1
73 19 1 15 CN4 CN20
[3]
[2] [1]
CN5
LED2 LED1
CN19 CN15
1 12
PSW2 PSW1 CN2 4 1 CN21 11
SW1 CN9 1 9 7 CN11 1
4583fs3509c0
Symbol 1 2 3 SW1 PSW1 PSW2
Description Used to adjust the folding position and adjust the center 2-point stapling position. Used to adjust the folding position and adjust the center 2-point stapling position. Used to adjust the folding position and adjust the center 2-point stapling position.
3-10
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 4.1.1 Adjustment of the folding positions
Board switch
When a folding position is adjusted, adjust the folding position to the stapling position. Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the folding position must be changed for some reason. NOTE Depending on the type of paper, both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate. In this case, make adjustment independently from the Finisher. In this independent adjustment from the Finisher, set the adjustment value of Center Stapling Position and Folding Position in the service mode to 0 mm on the main unit. 1. Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure.
ON
4583fs3510c0
- direction
+ direction
4583fs3523e0
2. Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Control Board for the required times to adjust the folding position. One pressing of the switch moves the folding position by approx. 0.16 mm. Press PSW1 to move the folding position in the - direction. Press PSW2 to move the folding position in the + direction. Press PSW1 and PSW2 simultaneously to clear the present set adjustment value.
3. After setting the adjustment value of the folding position, set all bits of SW1 on the Finisher Control Board to OFF. 4. Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit, and confirm that the folding position has been correctly adjusted. If not, redo the adjustment.
3-11
Board switch 4.1.2
Adjustment of the center stapling position
When a stapling position is adjusted, adjust the stapling position to the folding position. Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the stapling position must be changed for some reason. NOTE Depending on the type of paper, both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate. In this case, make adjustment independently from the Finisher. In this independent adjustment from the Finisher, set the adjustment value of Center Stapling Position and Folding Position in the service mode to 0mm on the main unit. 1. Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure.
ON
4583fs3512c0
- direction
+ direction
4583fs3523e0
2. Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Control Board for the required times to adjust the stapling position. One pressing of the switch moves the stapling position by approx. 0.14 mm. Press PSW1 to move the stapling position in the - direction. Press PSW2 to move the stapling position in the + direction. Press PSW1 and PSW2 simultaneously to clear the present set adjustment value.
3. After setting the adjustment value of the stapling position, set all bits of SW1 on the Finisher Control Board to OFF. 4. Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit, and confirm that the stapling position has been correctly adjusted. If not, redo the adjustment.
3-12
Board switch
4.2
PWB-B PK (Punch Control Board)

13 J1007 1 J1005 4 91 SW1002 SW1003 LED1001 LED1002 LED1003 J1004 5 5 1
4583fs3514c0
SW1001
[2] [3]
J1003 1
Symbol 1 2 3 SW1001 SW1002 SW1003
Description Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output. Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output. Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output.
J1002 J1001 41 1 1 2
[1]
J1006
3-13
Board switch 4.2.1 Adjustment of the sensor output
Be sure to make this adjustment after replacing the Punch Control Board, the Side Registration Sensor (Photosensor Board or LED Board) or the Punch Dust Full Sensor (Punch Dust Full Sensor Board or Punch Dust Full LED Board). 1. Set the bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure. 2. Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Control Board. The sensor output will be automatically adjusted. When all LED1001, LED1002 and LED1003 light up, the adjustment has been completed. 3. Set all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
ON
4583fs3515c0
4.2.2
Registration of the number of punch holes
In order for the Finisher to recognize the number of punch holes that can be achieved by the installed Punch Unit, such number of punch holes is registered in the IC on the Punch Control Board. Make this registration whenever the Punch Control Board has been replaced. However, this registration is not necessary if the EEP-ROM used on an old board has been reinstalled to a new board. III Adjusting/Setting 1. Set the bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure.
ON
4583fs3516c0
2. Press SW1002 on the Punch Control Board to select the number of punch holes. Each time SW1002 is pressed, the following display changes in the descending order shown below:
Number of punch holes 2 (Punch Unit J1) 2/3 (Punch Unit K1) 4 (Punch Unit G1) 4 (Punch Unit H1) LED 1001 ON ON OFF OFF LED 1002 OFF ON ON OFF LED 1003 OFF OFF OFF ON
3. Press SW1003 on the Punch Control Board twice. The number of punch holes will be registered in the Punch Control Board. The pressing of SW1003 changes the steady lighting of the LED to flickering, and the pressing of SW1003 again changes the flickering of the LED to steady lighting. This completes the registration. 4. Set all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
3-14
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 4.2.3 Procedure after replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)
Board switch
ON
4583fs3517c0
1. Turn OFF the Power switch of the main unit. 2. Set the bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure.Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Control Board simultaneously. This will initialize the EEP-ROM. After the initialization, all LED1001, LED1002 and LED1003 light up. 3. Adjust the sensor output, and register the number of punch holes. 4. Set all bits of DIP SW 1001 to OFF.
4.2.4
Punch center position adjustment
This adjustment is made when the Punch lateral movement is changed from the lateral registration motion (automatic through end face detection) to fixed system based on the paper size. 1. Turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit. 2. Remove the Rear Cover. 2-3 3. Check that all keys of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board are OFF. 4. Turn ON the Power Switch of the main unit and wait until the Finisher completes its initial operation. Use the following procedure to clear the adjustment of the Punch lateral movement. 5. Turn ON keys 4, 5, 6, and 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
4583fs3523c0
ON
4583fs3524c0
ON
6. Turn ON key 1 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. 7. Press PSW1 and PSW2 of the Finisher Control Board at the same time.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3525c0
3-15
Board switch
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 8. Turn OFF key 4 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. 9. Wait until the machine becomes capable of paper feed.
ON
4583fs3526c0
4583fs3529c0
10. Feed one sheet of paper through the machine. Fold the copy fed out of the machine in half and check that the punch holes are aligned with each other. Specifications:0 2 mm If the specified range is not met, use the following procedure to adjust the Punch center position. 11. Press PSW1 or PSW2 of the Finisher Control Board once according to the direction of deviation. Pressing PSW1 moves the punch position to the front. Pressing PSW2 moves the punch position to the rear. Each press of PSW1 or PSW2 moves the position 1 mm. The adjustment range should be within 5 mm. 12. Feed another sheet of paper. If the punch hole position is not properly adjusted, make the adjustment once again. When the adjustment procedure has been completed, use the following procedure to finish the adjustment mode. 13. Turn OFF key 1 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board.
REAR SIDE
FRONT SIDE
4583fs3528e0
ON
4583fs3527c0
ON
14. Turn OFF keys 5, 6, and 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. 15. Turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3523c0
3-16
Board switch 16. Turn ON key 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. NOTES Flipping ON key 7 of SW1 validates the setting made to the fixed system based on the paper size as changed from the lateral registration motion (automatic through end face detection). To return the setting back to the lateral registration motion, flip OFF key 7 of SW1. 17. Turn ON the Power Switch of the main unit. 18. Reinstall the rear cover. 2-3
ON
4583fs3530c0
3-17
NOTE The procedure must be carried out as specified. In particular, switching ON or OFF must be performed properly. If a step or steps are wrongly performed in mid procedure, stop the procedure immediately. Then, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch and start the procedure over. This adjustment is applicable only to the punch position center adjustment. The adjustment range is 5 mm. It does not adjust for variations in the punch hole positions.
Board switch
Blank page
3-18
Jam Display
IV Troubleshooting
1.
1.1
Jam Display
Initial check items
1.2
Misfeed display
Misfeed location Transport section Horizontal Transport section Folding Position section Stapler section Misfeed access location Front Door Horizontal Transport Cover Front Door Front Door Action
4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4
1.2.1
4-1
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display
1.3
Sensor layout
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
4583fs4521c0
[1] Turnover Empty Sensor [2] Entrance Sensor
PC6-HO PI1-FN
[3] Folding Position Sensor [4] Staple Drive Home Position Sensor
PI10-FN PI19-FN
IV Troubleshooting
4-2
Jam Display
1.4
1.4.1
Solution
Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description The Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) does not detect paper even after the lapse of approx. 1.5 sec. after the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) has received the paper exit signal from the main unit. Paper is not removed from the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) even after the lapse of approx. 2 sec. after the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) has detected paper edge.
Transport section misfeed detection
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN CN16 FN-11 Location (Electrical components) G-3 E-6
1 2 3
Initial check items PI1-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
1.4.2
Horizontal Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type horizontal transport section misfeed detection Description The Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN CN21 FN-5 Location (Electrical components) H-2 E-6
1 2 3
Initial check items PC6-HO I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display 1.4.3 Folding position section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description The Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) does not detect paper even after the set period of time after the paper has been fed from the Transport Booklet Tray to the stapling position during stapling operation. Paper is not removed from the Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) even after the lapse of approx. 10.5 sec. after the Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) has been driven during stapling operation.
Folding position section misfeed detection
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN CN16 FN-2 Location (Electrical components) F-3 E-6
1 2 3
1.4.4
Stapler section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description
The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) is not turned OFF or does not Stapler section misreturn to its home position even after the set period of time after the stapler has feed detection been driven.
IV Troubleshooting
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) E-6
1 2 3
4-4
Trouble Code
2.
2.1
Trouble Code
4036fs4012e0
2.2
Code C0B00
Trouble code list

Item Description
Transport System Drive malfunc- The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is tions not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from its home position. The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from a position not the home position. Paddle Motor malfunctions The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from its home position. The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from a position not the home position. The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from its home position. The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from a position not the home position.
C0B05
4-5
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code
Code C0B25 Item

Description
Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunc- The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not tions unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from its home position. The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from a position not the home position. Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position. The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position. The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position. The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an initial operation. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ordinary operation. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an initial operation. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an ordinary operation.
C0B39
C0B3A
Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions
C0B4C
Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions
IV Troubleshooting
4-6

Code C0B55 Item Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions Description
Trouble Code
The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the clinch operation has started. An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a clinch operation. The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Unit has started moving from a position out of the home position during an initial operation. The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started during an ordinary operation. The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started and the sensor has been unblocked during an ordinary operation. An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a folding operation. No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during initial communications. No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during ordinary communications. There is no match in the checksum values of the backup data as checked twice. The 24 V power source of the Punch Unit is OFF when an operation request is made from the Finisher. The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from its home position. The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from a position not the home position. The home position is not detected within a given period of time after the Punch Motor has been rotated a half turn. An encoder clock input is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time during operation of the Punch Motor. The setting value calculated during the initial operation falls outside the threshold value range. The light receiving voltage is 2.5 V or less when the illuminating voltage is set to 4.4 V. The light receiving voltage is 2.5 V or more when the illuminating voltage is set to 0 V. The illuminating voltage setting is 4.4 V or more after the adjustment has been made.
C0B75
Punch Control Board malfunctions
C0B76
Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions
C0B77
Punch Motor malfunctions
C0B79
Punch Sensor malfunctions
4-7
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code
Code C0BA0 Item

Description
Elevate Mechanism malfunctions The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray has started moving up. An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during operation of the tray. Backup RAM malfunction Data written in the Backup Memory differs from what is recorded in it and writing operation is not correctly performed even with two retry sequences (a total of three writing sequences).
C9BF1
NOTE The Punch Unit detects punch-related malfunctions and notifies the Finisher of any malfunction detected. 2.2.1 How to reset
Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board to reset the following malfunctions: scanner-related malfunctions, fusing-related malfunctions, exposure lamp-related malfunctions and C3FFF. For any other malfunctions, open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. NOTE Before starting the troubleshooting in relation to the Punch Mechanism C0B7X, be sure to turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit.
IV Troubleshooting
4-8
Trouble Code
2.3
2.3.1
Solution
C0B00:Transport System Drive malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from its home position. The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from a position not the home position.
C0B00
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) Transport Motor (M1-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PI12-FN I/O, sensor check M1-FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5
PWB-A FN CN16 FN-9 -
G-3 A-9 E-6
4-9
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.2 C0B05:Paddle Motor malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from its home position. The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from a position not the home position. The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from its home position. The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from a position not the home position.
C0B05
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) Paddle Motor (M2-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PI2-FN I/O, sensor check PI3-FN I/O, sensor check M2-FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement
PWB-A FN CN9 FN-2 PWB-A FN CN9 FN-8 -
H-5 I-5 A-9 E-6
IV Troubleshooting
3 4 5 6
4-10
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 2.3.3 C0B25:Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from its home position. The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from a position not the home position.
C0B25
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) Slide Motor (M8-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PI18-FN I/O, sensor check M8-FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5
F-2 I-8 E-6
4-11
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.4
C0B39:Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position. The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position.
C0B39
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4FN) Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
2 3 4 5
PWB-A FN CN4 FN-2 -
E-8 B-7 E-6
IV Troubleshooting
4-12
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 2.3.5 C0B3A:Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position. The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position.
C0B3A
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5FN) Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
2 3 4 5
E-8 B-7 E-6
4-13
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.6
C0B4C:Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an initial operation. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ordinary operation. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an initial operation. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an ordinary operation.
C0B4C
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
2 3
PWB-A FN CN5 FN-6 -
F-8 B-7 E-6
IV Troubleshooting
4 5
4-14
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 2.3.7 C0B55:Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the clinch operation has started. An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a clinch operation. The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Unit has started moving from a position out of the home position during an initial operation. C0B55 The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started during an ordinary operation. The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started and the sensor has been unblocked during an ordinary operation. An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a folding operation.
B. Action (1) Wiring

Relevant electrical parts Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PI19-FN I/O, sensor check M7-FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5
PWB-A FN CN6 FN-3,4 -
A-4 E-6
4-15
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code
(2) Stapler/Crease Clock Sensor (Stapler Section)

Relevant electrical parts Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
2 3 4 5
PWB-A FN CN9 FN-5 PWB-A FN CN6 FN-3,4 -
I-5 A-4 E-6
(3) Home Position Sensor

Relevant electrical parts Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
IV Troubleshooting
2 3 4 5
F-3 A-4 E-6
4-16
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher (4) Stapler/Crease Clock Sensor (Saddle Section)
Relevant electrical parts Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Trouble Code
2 3 4 5
I-5 A-4 E-6
4-17
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.8
C0B75:Punch Control Board malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during initial communications. C0B75 No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during ordinary communications. There is no match in the checksum values of the backup data as checked twice. The 24 V power source of the Punch Unit is OFF when an operation request is made from the Finisher.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) -
1 2
Turn OFF and ON the main switch. Check the connection condition between the Punch Unit and PWB-A FN. Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) of the PWB-A FN. Is the voltage 24VDC? Initialize Punch Unit EEP-ROM. PWB-B PK replacement PWB-A FN replacement
3 4 5 6
C-1 E-6
IV Troubleshooting
4-18
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 2.3.9 C0B76:Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from its home position. The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from a position not the home position.
C0B76
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) C-2 C-1
1 2 3
Check the sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PI2P-PK I/O, sensor check PWB-B PK replacement
PWB-B PK J10063 -
4-19
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.10 C0B77: Punch Motor malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The home position is not detected within a given period of time after the Punch Motor has been rotated a half turn. C0B77 An encoder clock input is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time during operation of the Punch Motor. The setting value calculated during the initial operation falls outside the threshold value range.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK) Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P-PK) Punch Motor (M1P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PI1P-PK I/O, sensor check PI3P-PK I/O, sensor check M1P-PK operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-B PK replacement
2 3 4 5 6
PWB-B PK J1006 PK-6 PWB-B PK J1006 PK-9 PWB-B PK J1002 PK-1,2 -
C-2 C-2 D-2 C-1
IV Troubleshooting
4-20
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 2.3.11 C0B79:Punch Sensor malfunctions
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The light receiving voltage is 2.5 V or less when the illuminating voltage is set to 4.4 V. C0B79 The light receiving voltage is 2.5 V or more when the illuminating voltage is set to 0 V. The illuminating voltage setting is 4.4 V or more after the adjustment has been made.
B. Action (1) Side Registration Sensor

Relevant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) C-2 C-1
1 2 3
Check the sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PI2P-PK I/O, sensor check PWB-B PK replacement
PWB-B PK J1006 PK-3 -
(2) Wastes Full Sensor

Relevant electrical parts Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board (PWB-E PK) Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK)
Step
Action
Control signal
Location (Electrical components) A-3 A-3 C-1
1 2 3 4 5
Check the connection condition between PWB-B PK and PWB-E PK. Check the connection condition between PWB-B PK and PWB-F PK. PWB-E PK replacement PWB-F PK replacement PWB-B PK replacement
4-21
IV Troubleshooting
WIRING DIAGRAM
Trouble Code 2.3.12
C0BA0:Elevate Mechanism malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray has started moving up. An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during operation of the tray.
C0BA0
B. Action (1) Upper Limit Sensor

Relevant electrical parts Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) G-8 E-6
1 2 3
Check the sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PI15-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
(2) Finisher Control Board

Relevant electrical parts Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN) Shift Motor (M6-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
IV Troubleshooting
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PI9-FN I/O sensor check PI17-FN I/O sensor check M6-FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5 6
PWB-A FN CN5 FN-12 PWB-A FN CN15 FN-6 PWB-A FN CN6 FN-1,2 -
E-8 G-8 A-4 E-6
4-22
cm3520 Service Manual - 9996 Finisher 2.3.13 C0BF1:Backup RAM malfunction
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0BF1 Description Data written in the Backup Memory differs from what is recorded in it and writing operation is not correctly performed even with two retry sequences (a total of three writing sequences).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) -
Disconnect and then connect the power cord to turn OFF and ON the main switch. Check the connectors for proper connection on the PWB-A FN. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3
E-6
4-23
IV Troubleshooting
Blank page
9997
Blank page
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
General
Product Specifications.......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Non-Sort ....................................................................................................... 1-1 Sort/Group.................................................................................................... 1-1 Sort staple/Group staple............................................................................... 1-2 I General IV Troubleshooting III Adjustment/Setting II Maintenance
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4 1.5
Stapling.............................................................................................................. 1-2 Sort and Staple Capacity................................................................................... 1-2 Stacking with no stapling, with the same size paper (80g/m2) ..................... 1-2 Stacking with stapling ................................................................................... 1-3
1.5.1 1.5.2 1.6 1.7 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
Machine Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-3 Operating Environment...................................................................................... 1-3 Job Tray Product Specifications ........................................................................... 1-4 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-4 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-4 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-4 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-4 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-4
II
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
Maintenance
Other .................................................................................................................... 2-1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ......................................................... 2-1 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........................................................... 2-2 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..................................................................... 2-2 Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover ................. 2-2 Stapling Unit ................................................................................................. 2-3
1.3.1 1.3.2
III
1. 2. 2.1 2.2
Adjustment/Setting
How to Use the Adjustment Section..................................................................... 3-1 I/O Check ............................................................................................................. 3-1 Check procedure ............................................................................................... 3-1 I/O check list ...................................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check screen........................................................................................... 3-2 I/O check list ................................................................................................. 3-2
2.2.1 2.2.2 3.
Mechanical Adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-4 i
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 3.1 Adjustment of the solenoids .............................................................................. 3-4 Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) ... 3-4 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2-FN) .............. 3-4 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Timing Belt.................... 3-4 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Timing Belt.................... 3-4 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt....................................... 3-5
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.2.1 I General 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 4. 5. 5.1 5.2 II Maintenance 5.3
Timing belt tension adjustment.......................................................................... 3-4
Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor ......................................... 3-5 Board Switch........................................................................................................ 3-6 Test Mode ............................................................................................................ 3-7 Test mode setting procedure ............................................................................. 3-7 Test mode operations ........................................................................................ 3-7 Operation in each test mode operation ............................................................. 3-8 1st Tray Exit .................................................................................................. 3-8 Elevator Tray Exit.......................................................................................... 3-8 Finisher Tray Exit .......................................................................................... 3-8 Shifting Operation......................................................................................... 3-8 Aligning Plate Operation............................................................................... 3-9 Stapling Unit CD Movement ......................................................................... 3-9 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing .............................................................................. 3-9 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing ..................................................................... 3-10 Elevator Tray Operation .............................................................................. 3-10
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5
5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9
5.3.10 Sensor Test ................................................................................................ 3-10
IV Troubleshooting
IV Troubleshooting 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Jam Display.......................................................................................................... 4-1 Initial check items .............................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display .................................................................................................. 4-1 Misfeed display resetting procedure............................................................. 4-1 Sensor layout..................................................................................................... 4-2 Solution ............................................................................................................. 4-3 Transport section misfeed ............................................................................ 4-3 Tray1 Exit section misfeed............................................................................ 4-4 Job Tray Exit section misfeed (CM3500010) ................................................ 4-4 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed................................................................ 4-5 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed ................................................................. 4-5 Stapler section misfeed ................................................................................ 4-6 Horizontal Transport section misfeed ........................................................... 4-6
1.2.1
1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7
ii
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 Malfunction Code ................................................................................................. 4-7 Malfunction code display ................................................................................... 4-7 Trouble code list................................................................................................. 4-7 How to reset ................................................................................................. 4-8 C0B20:Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) drive malfunction .................... 4-9 C0B30:CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) drive malfunction ................................ 4-10 C0B48:Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) drive malfunction ......... 4-11 C0B4A:Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) drive malfunction... 4-12 C0B50:Stapling Motor drive malfunction .................................................... 4-12 C0B80:Shift Motor (M8-FN) drive malfunction............................................ 4-13 II Maintenance IV Troubleshooting iii III Adjustment/Setting C0BA0:Elevator Motor (M7-FN) drive malfunction ..................................... 4-14 Solution.............................................................................................................. 4-9 I General
2.2.1 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7
IV Troubleshooting
II Maintenance
I General
iv cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher
I General
1.
1.1
Type Installation Document Alignment Supplies Option
Type
I General
Tray Capacity 250 sheets Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled 20 sheets 1st Tray Tray Capacity 1,000 sheets (A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller); 500 sheets (B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger) Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled Elevator Tray Single Staple Finisher Freestanding Center Staple Cartridge Job Tray (CM3500010)
1.2
Modes
Functions
Non-Sort/ Sort/ Group/Sort Staple/ Group Staple
1.3
1.3.1
Paper type
Non-Sort
Paper Size Weight
Paper Type Plain paper Thick paper OHP Film Translucent paper Envelope Label paper Letterhead
A6R to A3 Wide 5-1/2 8-1/2R/ 5-1/2 8-1/2 to 12-1/4 18
60 to 256 g/m2 16 to 68 lb
1.3.2
Sort/Group
Paper Size Weight
Paper Type Plain paper
Thick paper
B5R/B5 to A3 Wide 7-1/4 10-1/2R/ 7-1/4 10-1/2 to 12-1/4 18
60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55-1/2 lb
1-1
Product Specifications 1.3.3 Sort staple/Group staple

Paper Size Weight 60to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
Paper Type
Tray Capacity
Exit Tray
I General
Plain paper
B5R/B5 to A3 7-1/4 10-1/2R/ 7-1/4 10-1/2 to 11 17
1,000 sheets (A4R, 8-1/2 11R or Cover Mode smaller); 91 to 209 500 sheets g/m2 (B4, 8-1/2 14 24-1/4 to or larger) 55-1/2 lb
30 sheets Elevator Tray (60 to 80 g/m2, 16 to 21-1/4 lb)
*: 20 sheets if originals of high ID (Color Wise 3) is used. *: 15 sheets when using Color Copy 90 paper. *: 20 sheets when using Hammermill Laser Print 90 paper.
1.4
Stapling
Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (3000 staples) Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples) Diagonal back side (45 ) 1 point Rear Parallel 1 point B5R/B5 to A3 8-1/2 11R / 8-1/2 11 to 11 17 None
Staple Filling Mode Staple Detection Stapling Position Stapled Paper Size Manual Staple
1.5
1.5.1
Sort and staple capacity

Stacking with no stapling, with the same size paper (80g/m2)
Determined by the item whose value is reached first among number of stacked paper, stacked height or mass of stack. Determined by the stacked height when stacking with stapling and no stapling mixed. A. Number of stacked paper
FD A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger No. of Sheets 1000 sheets 500 sheets
B. Stacked height
FD A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger Height 150 mm 75 mm
C. Mass of stack
FD A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger Mass correspond to 1000 sheets correspond to 500 sheets
1-2
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 1.5.2 Stacking with stapling
(Reference: Actual value) Determined by number of Sets or number of Sheets based on number of bindings. A. Number of stacked paper
No. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 pages 3 to 5 pages 6 to 10 pages 11 to 20 pages 21 to 30 pages No. of Sets 100 sets 80 sets 60 sets 40 sets 33 sets No. of Sheets 200 Sheets 400 Sheets 600 Sheets 800 Sheets 1000 Sheets
1.6
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V (generated by Finisher) 63 W or less 538 mm (W) 978 mm (H) 637 mm (D) 21-1/4 inch (W) 38-1/2 inch (H) 25 inch (D) 38.1 kg (84 lb)
1.7
1-3
I General
Job Tray (CM3500010) Product Specifications
2.
2.1
Name
Job Tray (CM3500010) Product Specifications

Type
Job separator Fixed to Finisher Center
Installation
I General
Document Alignment
2.2
Modes
Functions
Non-Sort (in the fax or printer output mode)
2.3
Paper type
Paper Size Weight 100 sheets: A4, 8-1/2 11 Tray Capacity
Paper Type
Plain paper
A5R to A3 5-1/2 8-1/2R to 11 17
60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
(80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) 50 sheets: except A4, 8-1/2 11 (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) (Height: up to 28 mm, 1 lb)
2.4
DC 5 V, DC 24 V (supplied from Finisher) 341 mm (W) 149 mm (H) 527 mm (D) 13-1/2 inch (W) 5-3/4 inch (H) 20-3/4 inch (D) 1.75 kg (3-3/4 lb)
Power Requirements Dimensions Weight
2.5
1-4
Other
II Maintenance
1.
1.1
Other
A. Paint-locked Screws NOTE Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field. B. Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment. Accordingly, check the adjustment items in the operation manual and make any necessary adjustments. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures. The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
2-1
II Maintenance
Other
1.2
No 1 2 3 4 5

Section Upper Cover Exterior Parts Upper Front Cover Lower Front Cover Rear Cover Unit Stapling Unit Part name Ref. page
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3
1.3
Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover
[1]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[4] [2]
[2]
[3]
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Open the Upper Door [5] Remove four screws [1] and remove the Upper Cover. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Upper Front Cover. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Lower Front Cover. Remove four screws [4] and remove the Rear Cover.
2-2
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 1.3.2 Stapling Unit
Other
[1]
1. Holding both sides of the cover [1], lift the cover up and take it off.
4684fs2501c0
[4]
2. Remove two screws [2], unplug the connector [3], and remove the Stapling Unit [4] from the moving cradle. II Maintenance 2-3
[2]
[3]
4684fs2502c0
Other
II Maintenance
Blank page
2-4
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Throughout this section, the default settings are shown in boldface. A. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve a customers problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, be careful not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. III Adjusting/Setting
2.
2.1
I/O Check
Check procedure
3-1
I/O Check
2.2
2.2.1
I/O check list

I/O check screen
This is the only typical screen that may be different from that shown on each individual main unit.
4036fs3028e0
2.2.2
I/O check list
A. Sensor monitor 3
Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PC1-FN PC19-FN PC3-FN PC4-FN PC2-FN PC6-FN PC20-FN PC7-FN PC5-FN PWB-D FN PC8-FN PC9-FN PC14-FN PC12-FN Exit (Non-sort1) Exit (Non-sort3) Exit (Finisher) Transport Upper Transport Lower Full (Non-sort1) Full (Non-sort3) Full (Elev. Tray) Empty (Finisher) Surface (Elev.) Empty (Elev.) Home (CD-Align) Home (Stap. Unit) Home (store roller) 1st Tray Exit Sensor Job Tray Exit Sensor Storage Sensor Upper Entrance Sensor Lower Entrance Sensor 1st Tray Full Sensor job Tray Full Sensor Elevator Tray Full Sensor Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ Elevator Tray Paper Sensor CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Blocked Paper present Blocked Paper present Paper present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked 0 Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked
Symbol
Panel display
Part/Signal name
3-2
I/O Check
Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked OFF Unblocked Blocked
Symbol PC13-FN
Panel display Home (Exit roller) Home (Stapler 1) Empty St. 1 Needle Self Priming S1
Part/Signal name Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Stapler Home Sensor 1 Staple Empty Detecting Sensor 1 Self-Priming Sensor 1 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch Shift Home Position Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor
Blocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked ON Blocked Unblocked
S2-FN S3-FN PC10-FN PC11-FN
Elevate Tray Raised/ Lowered Home (Shift) Shift Speed
3-3
3.
3.1
3.1.1
Adjustment of the solenoids
Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
[3]
[1] [2]
1. Loosen the screw [1] that secures the solenoid in position. 2. Move the solenoid [2] up and down and lower the lever [3] downward. At this time, find a position at which the clearance at portion A becomes 0.5 mm or less. Then, tighten the screw [1].
4684fs2503c0
3.1.2
Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2-FN) 1. Loosen the screw [1] that secures the solenoid in position. 2. Move the solenoid [2] to the right or left and, when dimension B measures 3.6 mm, tighten the screw [1].
[2]
[1]
4684fs2504c0
3.2
3.2.1
[2]
Timing belt tension adjustment

Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Timing Belt
[3]
1. Loosen two screws [1]. 2. Move the mounting bracket [2] and tighten the screw [1] so that the center of the screw [1] on the upper right side is located at the marked position [3] of the mounting bracket [2].
[1]
4684fs2505c0
[1]
3.2.2
[2]
Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Timing Belt 1. Loosen two screws [1]. 2. Move the mounting bracket [2] and, when the belt deflects 2 mm at C, tighten two screws [1].
[1] [1]
4684fs2506c0
3-4
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 3.2.3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt
[1]
[1]
1. Loosen three screws [1]. 2. Tighten three screws [1] so that the distance D between the upper end face of the head of screws [1] and the upper end face of the slot in the mounting bracket [2] measures about 0.5 mm.
[1]
[2]
4684fs2507c0
3.3
Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor
[1]
[2]
4684fs2509c0
1. 2. 3. 4.
Set up the sensor test mode. Turn VR1 on PWB-A FN fully counterclockwise. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C FN). Check that LED4 on PWB-A FN turns OFF. If it stays ON, slowly turn VR1 clockwise and stop turning it as soon as the LED turns OFF.
3-5
Board Switch
4.
Board Switch
[4]
[1] [2] [3]

4684fs4503c0
Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] S1 S2 S3 LED1 to 4
Description Used to run the Test Mode operation. Used to run the Test Mode operation. DIP switch used to set the Test Mode operation. Turn ON or OFF, or blink to indicate a specific condition during Test Mode operations.
3-6
Test Mode
5.
5.1
Test Mode
Test mode setting procedure
<Setting Procedure> 1. Turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit. 2. Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF position as necessary. (See Table below.) 3. Turn ON the Power Switch of the main unit. 4. This sets the Finisher into the corresponding Test Mode operation. <Resetting Procedure> Flip all keys of the DIP switch to their respective initial positions and turn OFF, then ON, the Power Switch of the main unit.
5.2
Test mode operations

Test mode operation DIP Switch (S3) 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 2 3 4 1 2 LED 3 4
1st Tray exit Elevator Tray exit Finisher Tray exit Shifting operation Aligning Plate operation Stapling Unit CD movement Exit Roller/Rolls spacing Storage Roller/Rolls spacing Elevator Tray operation Sensor test
Indicates sensor state :Blinking :OFF
NOTE Whenever the Control Board (PWB-A FN) is to be replaced, take note of the initial positions of all keys of the DIP switch. After the replacement procedure has been completed, be sure to flip all keys of the DIP switch on the new Control Board (PWB-A FN) to their respective initial positions.
3-7
Test Mode
5.3
5.3.1
Operation in each test mode operation

1st Tray Exit
S1-FN:ON
Motors and solenoids: Energized Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Upper/ Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN), 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN) Motors and solenoids: Deenergized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Upper/ Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN), 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN)
S2-FN:ON
5.3.2
Elevator Tray Exit

S1-FN:ON
Motors: Energized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN), Exit Motor(M3-FN) Motors: Deenergized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN), Exit Motor (M3-FN)
S2-FN:OFF
5.3.3
Finisher Tray Exit

S1-FN:ON
Motors and solenoids: Energized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN), Exit Motor (M3-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) Motors and solenoids: Deenergized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN), Exit Motor (M3-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
S2-FN:OFF
5.3.4
Shifting Operation
S1-FN:ON
The Elevator Tray shifts to the front.

S2-FN:ON
The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear.
3-8
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 5.3.5 Aligning Plate Operation

S1-FN:ON
Test Mode
At the home position

S1-FN:ON
At a position to align A4 paper

S1-FN:ON
At a position to align Letter paper

S1-FN:ON
At a position to align A4R paper

S1-FN:ON
At a position to align Letter paper
5.3.6
Stapling Unit CD Movement

S1-FN:ON
At home position
S1-FN:ON
At a position for A4 corner stapling

S1-FN:ON
At home position
S1-FN:ON
At a position for A4R corner stapling
5.3.7
Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing

S1-FN:ON
Pressed
S2-FN:ON
Separated
3-9
Test Mode 5.3.8 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing

S1-FN:ON
Pressed
S2-FN:ON
Separated
5.3.9
Elevator Tray Operation

S1-FN:ON
Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is blocked. Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is unblocked.
S2-FN:ON
5.3.10
Sensor Test
Sensor State Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked LED 1 2 3 4
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) Lower Entrance Sensor(PC2-FN) Upper Entrance Sensor(PC4-FN)
:ON :OFF
3-10
Jam Display
IV Troubleshooting
1.
1.1
Jam Display
Initial check items
1.2
Misfeed display
Misfeed location Horizontal Transport section Transport section Tray1 Exit section Elevator Tray Exit section Paper Stack Exit section Stapler section Job Tray Exit section (CM3500010) Misfeed access location Horizontal Transport section Cover Front Door Front Door Front Door Front Door Front Door Job Tray Upper Cover Action
4-6
4-3 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-6 4-4
1.2.1
4-1
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display
1.3
Sensor layout
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
4684fs4502c0
IV Troubleshooting
[1] Job Tray Exit Sensor [2] 1st Tray Exit Sensor [3] Upper Entrance Sensor [4] Lower Entrance Sensor [5] Turnover Empty Sensor
PC19-FN PC1-FN PC4-FN PC2-FN PC6-HO
[6] [7] [8]
Paper Sensor Storage Sensor Finisher Tray Paper Sensor
PC1-HO PC3-FN PC5-FN
4-2
Jam Display
1.4
1.4.1
Solution
Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description The 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit. The Job tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit. The Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit. The Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit.
Transport section misfeed detection
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) Entrance Motor (M1-FN) Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN PJ14A FN-6 PWB-A FN PJ19A FN-6 PWB-A FN PJ15A FN-4 PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-9 PWB-A FN PJ19A FN-8 PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-3 Location (Electrical components) B-9 G-9 D-9 H-7 H-9 H-7 B-4 B-4 A-4 E-5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Initial check items PC19-FN I/O, sensor check PC1-FN I/O, sensor check PC1-HO I/O, sensor check PC4-FN I/O, sensor check PC2-FN I/O, sensor check PC3-FN I/O, sensor check M1-FN operation check M4-FN operation check M2-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement
4-3
IV Troubleshooting
Jam Display 1.4.2 Tray1 Exit section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Tray1 Exit section misfeed detection Description The 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN PJ19A FN-6 Location (Electrical components) G-9 E-5
1 2 3
Initial check items PC1-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
1.4.3
Job Tray Exit section misfeed (CM3500010)
A. Detection timing
Type Description
Job Tray Exit secThe Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a tion misfeed detecgiven period of time after it has been blocked. tion (CM3500010)
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN PJ14A FN-6 Location (Electrical components) B-9 E-5
IV Troubleshooting
1 2 3
Initial check items PC19-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
4-4
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 1.4.4 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed
Jam Display
A. Detection timing
Type Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed detection Description The Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-3 Location (Electrical components) H-7 A-3 E-5
1 2 3 4
Initial check items PC3-FN I/O, sensor check M3-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement
1.4.5
Paper Stack Exit section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Paper Stack Exit section misfeed detection Description The Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) remains activated when a copy stack, which has been stapled together, is fed out.
B. Action IV Troubleshooting
Relevant electrical parts Exit Motor (M3-FN) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-2 Location (Electrical components) I-2 A-3 E-5
1 2 3 4
Initial check items PC5-FN I/O, sensor check M3-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement
4-5
Jam Display 1.4.6 Stapler section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description
Stapler section mis- The Stapler does not return to its home position within a given period of time after feed detection the forward drive of the Stapler has been started.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN PJ22A FN-3 Location (Electrical components) I-7 A-4 E-5
1 2 3 4 5
Initial check items PC14-FN I/O, sensor check M6-FN operation check Stapling Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1.4.7
Horizontal Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
Type Description The Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has unblocked the Paper Exit Sensor of the main unit. The Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO).
Horizontal Transport section misfeed detection
IV Troubleshooting
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal PWB-A FN PJ15A FN-4 PWB-A FN PJ15A FN-12 Location (Electrical components) D-9 C-9 E-5
1 2 3 4 5
Initial check items Horizontal Transport section gear check PC1-HO I/O, sensor check PC6-HO I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
4-6
Trouble Code
2.
2.1
Trouble Code
4036fs4012e0
2.2
Code C0B20
Trouble code list

Item Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6FN) drive malfunction Description The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M6-FN has been energized (to return the Stapling Unit to its home position).
C0B30
CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) drive The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) does malfunction not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5-FN has been energized (to return the Aligning Plate to its home position). Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) drive malfunction The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M13-FN has been energized (to start spacing/pressure sequence). The Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M12-FN has been energized (to start spacing/pressure sequence). A fault is found in the Staple Motor. The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8-FN has been energized (to start returning the Elevator Tray to its home position). The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8-FN has been energized (to start moving the Elevator Tray for job offset).
C0B48
C0B4A
Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) drive malfunction Stapling Motor drive malfunction Shift Motor (M8-FN) drive malfunctions
C0B50 C0B80
4-7
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code
Code C0BA0 Item Elevator Motor (M7-FN) drive malfunctions

Description The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is not activated even after the lapse of a given period of time after M7-FN has been energized (to start raising the Elevator Tray). The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) or Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) is actuated after M7-FN has been energized.
2.2.1
How to reset
Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board to reset the following malfunctions: scanner-related malfunctions, fusing-related malfunctions, exposure lamp-related malfunctions and C3FFF. For any other malfunctions, open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch.
IV Troubleshooting
4-8
Trouble Code
2.3
2.3.1
Solution
C0B20:Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) drive malfunction
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0B20 Description The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M6-FN has been energized (to return the Stapling Unit to its home position).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC14-FN I/O, sensor check Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Stapling Unit out of its home position, and turn ON the Power Switch. Operation check of the Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) at this time. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3
PWB-A FN PJ22A FN-3
I-7
A-4
E-5
4-9
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.2
C0B30:CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) drive malfunction
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0B30 Description The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5-FN has been energized (to return the Aligning Plate to its home position).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC9-FN I/O, sensor check Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Aligning Plate out of its home position, and turn ON the Power Switch. Operation check of the CD aligning Motor (M5FN) at this time. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3
PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-6
I-2
A-6
E-5
IV Troubleshooting
4-10
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 2.3.3
Trouble Code
C0B48:Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) drive malfunction
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0B48 Description The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M13-FN has been energized (to start spacing/ pressure sequence).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC13-FN I/O, sensor check M13-FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5
PWB-A FN PJ19A FN-15 PWB-A FN PJ16A FN-1,2 -
H-9 E-9 E-5
4-11
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.4
C0B4A:Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) drive malfunction
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code C0B4A Description The Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M12-FN has been energized (to start spacing/pressure sequence).
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC12-FN I/O, sensor check M12-FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5
PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-6 PWB-A FN PJ8A FN-5,6 -
H-7 A-3 E-5
2.3.5
C0B50:Stapling Motor drive malfunction
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description A fault is found in the Staple Motor.
IV Troubleshooting
C0B50
B. Action
Check the Stapling motor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of Stapling motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary.
4-12
cm3520 Service Manual - 9997 Finisher 2.3.6 C0B80:Shift Motor (M8-FN) drive malfunctions
Trouble Code
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8-FN has been energized (to start returning the Elevator Tray to its home position). The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8-FN has been energized (to start moving the Elevator Tray for job offset).
C0B80
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN) Shift Motor (M8-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PC10-FN I/O, sensor check PC11-FN I/O, sensor check M8-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5 6
PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-12 PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-14 PWB-A FN PJ5A FN-3,4 -
H-2 H-2 D-2 E-5
4-13
IV Troubleshooting
Trouble Code 2.3.7
C0BA0:Elevator Motor (M7-FN) drive malfunctions
A. Detection timing
Malfunction code Description The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is not activated even after the lapse of a given period of time after M7-FN has been energized (to start raising the Elevator Tray). The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) or Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) is actuated after M7-FN has been energized.
C0BA0
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) Elevator Motor (M7-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) -
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. PWB-D FN I/O, sensor check S2-FN operation check S3-FN operation check M7-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement
2 3 4 5 6 7
PWB-A FN PJ21A FN-2,4 PWB-A FN PJ18A FN-4 PWB-A FN PJ16A FN-4 PWB-A FN PJ5A FN-1,2 -
I-7 F-9 E-9 D-2 E-5
IV Troubleshooting
4-14
9990
9991
9992
9994
9996
9997
cm3520
Theory of Operation Service Manual
Blank page

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, Imagistics International Inc. strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Imagistics-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, Imagistics does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate. The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended. Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly. Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and " CAUTION" is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with the utmost of care. DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when servicing the product. :Prohibition when servicing the product. :Direction when servicing the product.
General precaution General prohibition General instruction
Electric hazard High temperature
Do not touch with wet hand Unplug
Do not disassemble Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY IMAGISTICS:
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Using any cables or power cord not specified by Imagistics.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Imagistics. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object. Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts).
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.). Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. Making any modification to the product unless instructed otherwise by Imagistics. Using parts not specified by Imagistics.
S-2
[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

This product was tested extensively before being shipped to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and service personnel from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, service personnel must perform regular safety checks. 1. Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

Check that main voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

Make sure the power cord is plugged into the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire. Check if the power cord is damaged. Check if the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath are damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each end) specified by Imagistics. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
S-3

When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this product, be sure to observe the following precautions: a. Make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet on the rear panel of the product. Secure the cord with a fixture properly. b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Imagistics. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. Check that the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists. When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists.
S-4
WARNING: Wiring
When an extension cord is required, use the one specified. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using an extension cord that is too long may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result.
WARNING: Ground connection

Check if the product is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer electric shock while operating the product. Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet. 2. Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: When not using product for a long time

When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
S-5
CAUTION: Ventilation
The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple products at the same time
CAUTION: Fixing
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to a injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists. The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burned.
S-6
WARNING: Work Performed with the product Powered

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury. Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages. The user or CE may be injured. Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the product. They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire. Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire. Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
S-7

Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authorities. Improper replacement can cause an explosion. After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam). Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-8
WARNING: HANDLING OF CONSUMABLES

Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician. Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.
CAUTION: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists. Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists. Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
S-9
[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the local Imagistics district office must be notified so that immediate emergency measures can be taken to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and Imagistics must be notified. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Imagistics.
2. 3.
[4] CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer. When performing service, each product on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
2.
[5] FUSE
CAUTION Double pole / neutral fusing ATTENTION Double ple / fusible sur le neutre.
[6] LED Radiation Safety

This product is a copier which operates by means of a LED (light emitting diodes) exposure system. There is no possibility of danger from the LED optical radiation, because the LED optical radiation level dose not exceed the accessible radiation limit of class 1 under all conditions of operation, maintenance, service and failure.
S-10
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
High voltage High temperature
High voltage
High temperature
4036fsS001c0
S-11
Do not throw into a fire
4036fsS002c0
High voltage
High voltage
4036fsS003c0
S-12
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation
CONTENTS I
1. 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 3. 4. 5.
Outline
System configuration............................................................................................ 1-1 Product specifications .......................................................................................... 1-3 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-3 Types of paper ................................................................................................... 1-4 Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 1-4 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-4 Built-in controllers .............................................................................................. 1-5 Center cross section ............................................................................................ 1-6 Paper path............................................................................................................ 1-7 Image creation process ........................................................................................ 1-8 II Composition/Operation Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-4 I Outline Type ................................................................................................................... 1-3
II
1. 1.1 1.2 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Composition/Operation
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Timing chart at machine power up .................................................................... 2-1 Control block diagram ........................................................................................ 2-2 Scanner section (IR section) ................................................................................ 2-3 Composition....................................................................................................... 2-3 Drive .................................................................................................................. 2-5 Operation ........................................................................................................... 2-5 Scan and Exposure Lamp control ................................................................ 2-5 Original Size Detection control ..................................................................... 2-6
2.3.1 2.3.2 3. 3.1 3.2
Write section (PH section).................................................................................... 2-9 Composition....................................................................................................... 2-9 Operation ......................................................................................................... 2-10 Outline ........................................................................................................ 2-10 Color Shift Correction System .................................................................... 2-11
3.2.1 3.2.2 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 5. 5.1 5.2
Imaging Unit section (IU section) ....................................................................... 2-12 Composition..................................................................................................... 2-12 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-13 Operation ......................................................................................................... 2-14 IU Life control.............................................................................................. 2-14 Photo Conductor section .................................................................................... 2-15 Composition..................................................................................................... 2-15 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-15 i
4.3.1
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 5.3 Operation......................................................................................................... 2-16 PC Drum Drive mechanism........................................................................ 2-16 PC Drum Phase control ............................................................................. 2-16 PC Drum small amount rotation control ..................................................... 2-17
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 6. I Outline 6.1
Charge Corona section ...................................................................................... 2-18 Operation......................................................................................................... 2-19 PC Drum Charge Corona ON/OFF control................................................. 2-19 Cleaning/Main Erase mechanism............................................................... 2-19 6.1.1 6.1.2
7. 7.1 7.2 II Composition/Operation 7.3
Developing section............................................................................................. 2-20 Composition .................................................................................................... 2-20 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-21 Operation......................................................................................................... 2-22 Developing Drive control ............................................................................ 2-22 Developer flow............................................................................................ 2-22 Developing bias .......................................................................................... 2-23 HMT (High grade Micro Toning) development ............................................ 2-23 Developer scattering prevention mechanism.............................................. 2-23 ATDC Sensor control.................................................................................. 2-24
7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 8. 8.1 8.2 8.3
Toner Supply section.......................................................................................... 2-26 Composition .................................................................................................... 2-26 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-27 Operation......................................................................................................... 2-28 Toner Replenishing mechanism/control ..................................................... 2-28 Toner Near-Empty and Toner Empty detection control............................... 2-29 Shutter mechanism .................................................................................... 2-30
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 9. 9.1
Transfer Corona section ..................................................................................... 2-31 Composition .................................................................................................... 2-31 1st Image Transfer section ......................................................................... 2-31 2nd Image Transfer section ........................................................................ 2-33 1st Image Transfer section ......................................................................... 2-34 2nd Image Transfer section ........................................................................ 2-35 Transfer Belt speed control......................................................................... 2-35 1st Image Transfer Roller mechanism ........................................................ 2-36 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure mechanism........................................ 2-39 AIDC Sensor Shutter mechanism .............................................................. 2-40 ATVC (Auto Transfer Voltage Control) ........................................................ 2-41 9.1.1 9.1.2
9.2
Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-34
9.2.1 9.2.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5
Operation......................................................................................................... 2-35
ii
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9 Transfer Belt cleaning ................................................................................. 2-42 2nd Image Transfer Roller cleaning ............................................................ 2-43 Charge neutralization and separation of paper .......................................... 2-44 Detection of New Transfer Belt Unit ............................................................ 2-45
9.3.10 ACS control................................................................................................. 2-46 10.1 Composition..................................................................................................... 2-47 10.2 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-48 10.3 Operation ......................................................................................................... 2-49 10.3.1 Toner collecting mechanism ....................................................................... 2-49 10.3.2 Waste Toner Bottle-in-position detection .................................................... 2-49 10.3.3 Waste Toner Near-Full/Full detection control.............................................. 2-50 11. Paper feed section.............................................................................................. 2-51 11.1.1 Tray1 ........................................................................................................... 2-51 11.1.2 Tray2 ........................................................................................................... 2-52 11.2 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-54 11.2.1 Tray1 ........................................................................................................... 2-54 11.2.2 Tray2 ........................................................................................................... 2-54 11.3 Operation ......................................................................................................... 2-55 11.3.1 Paper Take-up control (Tray1)..................................................................... 2-55 11.3.2 Tray1 double feed control............................................................................ 2-55 11.3.3 Deceleration control.................................................................................... 2-55 11.3.4 Paper supply level detection control ........................................................... 2-56 11.3.5 Paper Near-Empty/Paper Empty detection................................................. 2-56 11.3.6 Tray1 paper type setting ............................................................................. 2-57 11.3.7 Paper size detection control ....................................................................... 2-58 11.3.8 Tray2 paper lifting motion control................................................................ 2-61 12. Bypass section ................................................................................................... 2-62 12.1 Composition..................................................................................................... 2-62 12.2 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-63 12.3 Operation ......................................................................................................... 2-64 12.3.1 Bypass Paper Take-up control .................................................................... 2-64 12.3.2 Paper Empty detection ............................................................................... 2-64 12.3.3 Bypass Paper Lifting Motion Control .......................................................... 2-64 12.3.4 Paper size detection ................................................................................... 2-66 13. Conveyance section ........................................................................................... 2-68 13.1 Composition..................................................................................................... 2-68 11.1 Composition..................................................................................................... 2-51 II Composition/Operation I Outline 10. Toner Collecting section ..................................................................................... 2-47
iii
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 14. Synchronizing Roller section.............................................................................. 2-69
14.1 Composition .................................................................................................... 2-69 14.2 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-69 14.3 Operation......................................................................................................... 2-70 14.3.1 Synchronizing Roller control....................................................................... 2-70 I Outline 14.3.2 OHP detection ............................................................................................ 2-71 15. Fusing section.................................................................................................... 2-72 15.1 Composition .................................................................................................... 2-72 15.2 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-73 15.3 Operation......................................................................................................... 2-74 15.3.1 Fusing Roller drive control.......................................................................... 2-74 II Composition/Operation 15.3.2 Fusing Roller pressure/retraction mechanism............................................ 2-76 15.3.3 Fusing temperature control ........................................................................ 2-77 15.3.4 Protection against abnormal conditions ..................................................... 2-79 15.3.5 Detection of a New Fusing Unit.................................................................. 2-81 15.3.6 PPM control................................................................................................ 2-81 16. Paper exit section............................................................................................... 2-82 16.1 Composition .................................................................................................... 2-82 16.2 Drive ................................................................................................................ 2-83 17. Image stabilization control ................................................................................. 2-84 17.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 2-84 17.2 Operation......................................................................................................... 2-85 17.2.1 Background margin control ........................................................................ 2-85 17.2.2 AIDC Sensor LED intensity control ............................................................ 2-85 17.2.3 Max. density control ................................................................................... 2-85 17.2.4 correction control ..................................................................................... 2-85 17.3 Operation timing .............................................................................................. 2-85 17.4 Operation flow ................................................................................................. 2-86 18. Image processing............................................................................................... 2-87 18.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram .......................................... 2-87 18.2 Write section image processing block diagram ............................................... 2-89 19. Other control ...................................................................................................... 2-91 19.1.1 Construction ............................................................................................... 2-91 19.1.2 Operation.................................................................................................... 2-92 19.2 Power distribution control at machine power up .............................................. 2-93 19.2.1 Parts operated when the Power Switch is turned ON ................................ 2-93 19.3 Counter control ................................................................................................ 2-94 19.3.1 Construction ............................................................................................... 2-94 iv 19.1 Fan control....................................................................................................... 2-91
System Configuration
I Outline
1. System Configuration
1/2 System front view
[11] [12] [13]
[10]
[9]
[1] [8]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
4036fs1001j0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Machine Automatic Duplex Unit (9991) Paper Feed Cabinet (9994) Paper Feed Cabinet* Desk (9995) Paper Feed Cabinet (9992) Single-Position Stapling Finisher (9997)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
Job Tray for 9997 (CM3500010) Saddle Stitch Finisher (9996) Punch Kit for 9996 (CM3100010) Reverse Automatic Document Feeder (9990) Original Cover* Working Table*
*Not offered
1-1
I Outline
System Configuration 2/2 System rear view
[10]
[11]
[9]
I Outline
[2] [8] [7] [5] [1]
[3] [6]
9992 9993 9994
9995
[4]
4036fs1002e0
[1] [2]
Machine Vendor Kit* (South Central America, North America, Europe Only) Data Terminal* (South Central America, North America Only) Dehumidifier Heater* Video Interface Kit (CM3500050) Embedded Controller (9998)
[7] [8]
Local Interface Kit* Mechanical Counter
[3] [4] [5] [6]
[9] [10] [11]
Key Counter Kit (CM3500120) Hard Disk (CM3500040) Expanded Memory Unit (CM3500030)
*Not offered
1-2
2.
2.1
Type
Type
Desktop-type printer integrated with scanner Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper
Copying System Printing Process PC Drum Type Scanning Density Print Density Platen Original Scanning Registration Paper Feeding System (Standard) Three-way system Exposure System Developing System Charging System Image Transfer System
OPC (organic photo conductor) Equivalent to 600 dpi Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction 1800 dpi in sub scanning direction Stationary (mirror scan) Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD (one-shot reading system) Rear left edge Multiple Bypass: 150 sheets Tray1: 250 sheets Tray2: 500 sheets Four-LED exposure HMT developing system DC comb electrode Scorotron system with electrode cleaning function (manual) Intermediate transfer belt system
Paper Separating System Selecting either application of nonwoven fabric bias + low-pressure paper separator claws Fusing System Belt fusing
2.2
Functions
Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects A3 or 11 17 1 to 999 99 sec. or less (at ambient temperature of 23 C and rated source voltage) Leading edge: 5 mm, Trailing edge: 3 mm, Rear edge: 3 mm, Front edge: 3 mm (Tray1, A4, full size) Monochrome print 6.8 sec. or less Color print 12.8 sec. or less
Types of Original Max. Original Size Multiple Copies Warming-up Time Image Loss First Copy Time
Copying Speed for Multicopy Cycle (A4, 8-1/2 11) Fixed Zoom Ratios
Monochrome print 1-sided: 35 copies/min; 2-sided: 31 copies/min Color print Full size Reduction Enlargement 1-sided: 22 copies/min; 2-sided: 22 copies/min 1.000 Metric Area: 0.500, 0.707, 0.816, 0.866 Inch Area: 0.500, 0.647, 0.733, 0.785 Metric Area: 1.154, 1.224, 1.414, 2.000 Inch Area: 1.214, 1.294, 1.547, 2.000 in 0.001 increments
Variable Zoom Ratios Exposure Lamp
0.250 to 4.000
White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
1-3
I Outline
Tandem-type indirect electrostatic recording system
2.3
Types of paper
Paper Source Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Translucent paper OHP transparencies (crosswise feeding only) Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2) Thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2) Tray1 Tray2 (20 sheets or less) (10 sheets or less) (20 sheets or less) 311 457 mm 90 140 mm (20 sheets or less) Multiple Bypass
I Outline
Copy paper type
Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2) *1 Postcards Envelopes
Labels Copy paper dimensions Max (width length) Min (width length) 311 457 mm 90 140 mm
297 432 mm 140 182 mm
*1: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used. Optional Paper Feed Cabinet: Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2 is reliably fed. Automatic Duplex Unit: Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 is reliably fed.
2.4
Maintenance
800,000 prints or 5 years, whichever is earlier
Machine Durability
2.5
Voltage: Frequency: AC110 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 0.3 Hz Less than 1.4 kW (120 V, 12 A) / 1.55 kW (220-240 V, 6.7 A) 903 (W) 730 (D) 770 (H) mm 1014 (W) 1151 (D) mm Approx. 100 kg (without IU)
Power Requirements
Max Power Consumption Dimensions Space Requirements Mass
2.6
10 to 30 C (with a fluctuation of 10 C/h) 15 to 85 % (with a fluctuation of 20 %/h)
Temperature Humidity
1-4
2.7
Built-in controllers
PCL5c printer driver TWAIN driver Windows 98/Me, Windows NT/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Printer Driver Scan Driver OS Compatibility Interface
NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-5
I Outline
Center Cross Section
3.
Center Cross Section

[1]
I Outline
[2] [10] [3] [4] [9] [8] [5] [6]
[7]
4036ma101c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
CCD Unit Fusing Unit Imaging Unit/Bk Imaging Unit/C Tray1
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Multiple Bypass Tray2 Imaging Unit/M Imaging Unit/Y Transfer Belt Unit
1-6
Paper Path
4.
Paper Path
4036ma102c0
1-7
I Outline
Image Creation Process
5.
[1] Photoelectric Conversion
[2] IR Image Processing
I Outline
[10] Paper Separation [9] 2nd Image Transfer
[11] Transfer Belt Cleaning [8] 1st Image Transfer [12] PC Drum Cleaning [4] PC Drum [13] Main Erase [3] Printer Image Processing [7] Developing [5] PC Drum Charging [6] LED Exposure
[1]
Photoelectric Conversion
The light reflected off the surface of the original is separated into different colors using the color filters (R, G, and B); CCD then converts it into a corresponding electric signal and outputs the signal to the IR Imaging Processing Section. The electric signal is converted to 8-bit digital image signals. After going through some corrections, video signals (C, M, Y, and Bk) are output to the Printer Image Processing Section. The video signals (C, M, Y, and Bk) go through some corrections. Following digital-to-analog conversion, these signals are used for the control of the intensity level of the LED. The image of the original projected onto the surface of the PC Drum is changed to a corresponding electrostatic latent image.
[2]
IR Image Processing Printer Image Processing PC Drum
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
PC Drum Charging A negative DC charge layer is formed on the surface of the PC Drum. LED Exposure The surface of the PC Drum is irradiated with LED light and an electrostatic latent image is thereby formed. The toner, agitated and negatively charged in the Developer Mixing Chamber, is attracted onto the electrostatic latent image formed on the surface of the PC Drum. It is thereby changed to a visible, developed image. AC and DC negative bias voltages are applied to the Developing Roller, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the background image portion. A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the Transfer Belt, thereby allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of each of the PC Drums (Y, M, C, and Bk) to be transferred onto the Transfer Belt. A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the paper, thereby allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of the Transfer Belt to be transferred onto the paper.
[7]
Developing
[8]
1st Image Transfer
[9]
2nd Image Transfer
1-8
[10] Paper Separation Transfer Belt Cleaning
The paper, which has undergone the 2nd image transfer process, is neutralized so that it can be properly separated from the Transfer Belt by the Paper Separator Claws. A charge is applied to the Transfer Belt. By potential difference, residual toner on the surface of the Transfer Belt is collected for cleaning.
[11]
[12] PC Drum Cleaning The residual toner left on the surface of the PC Drum is scraped off. [13] Main Erase
1-9
I Outline
The surface of the PC Drum is irradiated with light, which neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the surface of the PC Drum.
I Outline
Blank page
1-10
Overall Composition
II Composition/Operation
1.
1.1
Overall Composition
Timing chart at machine power up
Power Switch ON Temperature Control
Fusing Pressure Roller Heater Lamp (H3) Heating Roller Heater Lamp/1 (H1) Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M19) Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Exposure Lamp (FL201) Scanner Motor (M201) Main Motor (M1) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M11) 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC12) Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M13) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Position Sensor (PC29) 2nd Image Transfer Bias
4036ma2052e0
Retraction
100C Pressure
Bk Pressure Retraction
Pressure/Retraction
Retraction Pressure
2-1
II Composition/Operationn
Retraction
Overall Composition
1.2
Control block diagram
Scanner Section
CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Inverter Board Exposure Lamp (FL201)
Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC)
Scanner Motor (M201)
9990
Panel
Printer Section
MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) Standard Controller Image Processing Control Board (PWB-MC) Paper Takeup/Transport CPU Process Fusing
LED Drive Board (PWB-LED)
LPH/Y LPH/M LPH/C LPH/Bk
9998
Finishing Option
Paper Source Option
9991
Control System Line
Image Bus Line
4036ma2053e0
2-2
Scanner Section (IR Section)
2.
2.1

Composition
4036ma2110c0
4036ma2501c0
[4] [3] [2] [1]
[5]
[6] [7]
[8]
[9] [10] [13] [12] [11]

4036ma2001c1
2-3
Key [1] [2] [3] [4]
Name
Function/System
Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC202) Validates or resets the size of the original. Original Size Sensor FD1 (PC203) Detects the original of a small size in the FD direction.
Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) Drives the Scanner Motor. Original Size Sensor FD2 (PC204) Detects the original of a large size in the FD direction. Drives the Scanner Drive Cables for moving the Exposure Lamp and Scanner. Drives the Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC). Three-phase stepping motor F5.0, focal length 71.2 mm Changes optical image data to a corresponding electric signal (600 dpi). Three-line (RGB) linear image sensor Detects the position of the Original Cover or ADF, whether it is raised or lowered. Resets the size of the original when the ADF is raised. Magnetic sensor type Processes image data that has been scanned. Slit exposure Reflects the light reflected off the original. Detects the original of a large size in the CD direction. Detects the Scanner at its home position.
[5]
Scanner Motor (M201)
[6] [7]
Lens CCD Unit *1
[8]
Size Reset Switch (SW201)
[9]
[10] Exposure Unit [11] Mirror Unit [12] Original Size Sensor CD1 (PC206) [13] Scanner Home Sensor (PC201)
1: CCD Unit
Scanning Direction Sub Scanning Direction
CCD Sensor
R G B
37.3 m 37.3 m
Main Scanning Direction

9.325 m 9.325 m
4036ma2602c0
2-4
2.2
Drive
[4] [3] [2] [5] [1]
[6]
4036ma2002c1
[1] [2] [3]
Scanner Drive Cable/R Mirror Unit Exposure Unit
[4] [5] [6]
Scanner Motor Scanner Drive Cable/F Scanner Home Sensor
2.3
2.3.1
Operation
Scan and Exposure Lamp control
A. When the Power Switch is turned ON 1. The Exposure Unit moves in the return direction until the Scanner Home Sensor is activated. It does not move if the Scanner Home Sensor is already activated. 2. The Exposure Unit moves in the scan direction and stops at a position under the shading correction sheet. 3. The gain value of the CCD Sensor output voltage is adjusted for R, G, and B. 4. A shading correction is made. 5. After the adjustment has been made, the Exposure Unit moves in the return direction and stops at the Scanner Home Sensor. This position serves as the home position. * The same operation is performed for the auto and manual exposure control.
Home Position
Gain Adjustment and Shading Correction Exposure Lamp (FL201) ON Scanner Movement
4036ma2190c0
2-5
B. When the Start key is pressed 1. The Exposure Lamp turns ON when the Start key is pressed. 2. The gain adjustment is made when the Exposure Unit moves past the point under the shading sheet. Thereafter, a shading correction is made. 3. The Exposure Unit starts a scan motion with the original position. 4. After completing the scan motion for the original, the Exposure Unit temporarily stops and the Exposure Lamp goes out. 5. The Exposure Unit makes a return motion and stops at the home position. Each of the R, G, and B data is stored in memory during a single scan motion. The Exposure Unit therefore makes only a single scan motion even for a multi-copy cycle.
Home Position Original Position Exposure Lamp (FL201) ON
Gain Adjustment and Shading Correction Scan
4036ma2191c0
2.3.2
Original Size Detection control
A. Detection Method Reflective size sensors are used for detection of the size of the original. Mounting the optional size sensors permits detection of originals of inch size.
Original Size Sensor FD1 (PC203) Original Size Sensor FD2 (PC204) Original Size Sensor FD3 (PC205): Option
11 X 17
Metric area: Standard Inch area: Option
8.5 X 11 8.5 X 11 R 8.5 X 14
2 3 4 5
A5R B5R A4R B4, B5 A3, A4 8.5 X 14 8.5 X 11 R 11 X 17 8.5 X 11 A4, B5 A5R B5R
7 6 8
Original Size Sensor CD1 (PC206) Original Size Sensor CD2 (PC207): Option
A4R
B4
A3
4036ma2003c0
2-6
The Image Processing Board determines the size of the original based on the combination of detection made by each of the Original Size Sensors, whether or not there is an original loaded. An original of an irregular size is rounded to the nearest standard size. Metric Area
Original Size Determined A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 A5R 8.5 11R FD1 1 2 FD2 3 6 CD1 7
: Original Loaded : Original Not Loaded When the optional sensors are mounted
Original Size Determined A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5R 11 17 8.5 14 8.5 11R 8.5 11 FD1 1 2 FD2 3 4 FD3 (option) 5 6 CD1 7 CD2 (option) 8
: Original Loaded : Original Not Loaded
2-7
Scanner Section (IR Section) Inch Area - Standard

Original Size Determined 11 17 B4 8.5 14 8.5 11R 8.5 11 B5 FD2 2 3 6 CD1 7
: Original Loaded : Original Not Loaded When the optional sensors are mounted II Composition/Operationn
Original Size Determined 11 17 8.5 14 FLS 8.5 11R 8.5 11 5.5 8.5R A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 FD1 (option) 1 2 FD2 3 4 FD3 (option) 5 6 CD1 7 CD2 (option) 8
: Original Loaded : Original Not Loaded B. Detection Timing (When the ADF is Used)
Validates the original size when the ADF is lowered Original Size Sensors FD1 (PC203), FD2 (PC204), and FD3 (PC205) Original Size Sensors CD1 (PC206) and CD2 (PC207) Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC202) Size Reset Switch (SW201)
4036ma2007c0
Resets the original size when the ADF is raised
The original size is validated if the Start key is pressed with the ADF in the raised position.
2-8
Write Section (PH Section)
3.
3.1

Composition
[1]
4036ma2218c0 4036ma2502c0
[2] [5] [3]
[4]
4036ma2219c0
Key [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] LED Unit
Name
Function/System Four LED assemblies are integrated into a single unit. The rays of light emitted by the LED chips are brought to a focus on the surface of the PC Drum to form a full-size image. Approximately 7,700 LED chips (600 dpi) arranged in the main scanning direction LED Assy for each color of Y, M, C, and Bk Irradiated with LED light to form an electrostatic latent image.
SELFOC Lens LED Chips LED Assy/Y, M, C, Bk PC Drum/Y, M, C, Bk
2-9
3.2
3.2.1
Operation
Outline
Each of the PC Drums is irradiated with LED light and an electrostatic latent image is thereby formed. The LED print head is a fixed scanning type exposure system that includes approx. 7,700 LED chips (600 dpi) arranged in the main scanning direction and a SELFOC lens array, or SLA that brings rays of light emitted by the LED chips to a focus on the surface of the PC Drum to form a full-size image. The special service jig for cleaning the surface of the LED print head should be used, since a special coating is applied to the surface of the SLA to prevent ozone from sticking to it.
Transfer Belt 2nd Image Transfer Roller
PC Drum Y
Bk
LED/Y
LED/M
LED/C
LED/Bk
4036ma2004c1
SELFOC Lens Approx. 7,700 LED chips
4036ma2222c0
2-10
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 3.2.2 Color Shift Correction System
In a tandem engine, in which an independent image reproduction process is provided for each of the four different colors of toner. Incorrect color registration, or color shift, is therefore more likely to occur due to each of the LED assemblies being out of correct position. The color shift correction system automatically detects any misalignment among the different colors, correcting it both in the main scanning and sub scanning directions. The color shift detection sequence proceeds as follows. A detection pattern each in the sub scanning direction is produced at the front and rear on the Transfer Belt. Each of AIDC/Registration Sensor/1 and /2 at the front and rear reads the corresponding pattern. The amount of color shift in the sub scanning direction is then calculated and stored in memory. A detection pattern each in the main scanning direction is next produced at the front and rear on the Transfer Belt. Each of AIDC/Registration Sensor/1 and /2 at the front and rear reads the corresponding pattern. The amount of color shift in the main scanning direction is then calculated and stored in memory. Based on the data representing the amounts of color shift, the machine calculates how much each of the different colors should be corrected. The correction data is further stored in memory. Based on the data stored in memory, the machine controls each dot during production of image outputs, thereby correcting the color shift (varying the timing at which the LED is turned ON). The color shift correction is made when the Left Door is opened and closed, the IU is removed and reinstalled, or an image stabilization sequence is carried out from the control panel.
Detection Pattern for Sub Scanning Direction
Detection Pattern for Main Scanning Direction
4036ma2226c0
Transfer Belt
AIDC/Registration Sensor/1 and /2 (PC8 and PC9)
4036ma2227c0
2-11
Imaging Unit Section (IU Section)
4.
4.1

Composition
[1]
4036ma2130c0
4036ma2503c0
[1] [2] [6] [3] [4] [5]
4036ma2239c0
Key [1] [2] [3]
Name PC Drum/Y, M, C, Bk Cleaning Blade Toner Collecting Screw
Function/System Forms an image of each of different colors. OPC drum (30 mm) Scrapes toner off the surface of the PC Drum. Conveys waste toner from the IU to the Toner Collecting Section. Screw type Deposits a charge across the entire surface of the PC Drum. DC comb electrode Scorotron system Neutralizes any charge left on the surface of the PC Drum. LED type Developer capacity 400 g (C, M, Y, Bk) T/C ratio 8% (C, M, Y, Bk)
[4]
PC Drum Charge Corona/Y, M, C, Bk
[5]
Main Erase Lamp/Y, M, C, Bk (LA1 to LA4) Developing Unit/Y, M, C, Bk
[6]
2-12
4.2
Drive
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
4036ma2008c1
4036ma2007c1
[1] [2]
Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2) Bk PC Motor (M7)
[3] [4]
Color Developing Motor (M6) Color PC Drum Motor (M5)
2-13
4.3
4.3.1
Operation
IU Life control
Each IU has EEPROM that detects a new IU and keeps track of the service life of the IU. A. New IU detection New IU is detected when 24 V is turned ON as the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON or the Front Door is opened and closed. If a new IU is not detected the machine does not execute image stabilization sequence. When a new IU is detected, an ATDC adjustment sequence is carried out. Operation when a new IU is detected
Transfer Belt is retracted ATDC automatic adjustment Transfer Belt cleaning 1st image transfer/ ATVC adjustImage stabilization
Operation when a new IU is not detected

Transfer Belt is retracted Transfer Belt cleaning 1st image transfer/ATVC adjustment Image stabilization
4036ma2133c0
B. When life is reached The IU Life Counter is used to keep track of IU life. When the life value is reached, a warning message is given on the screen. When a predetermined number of printed pages are produced after the life value has been reached, the machine inhibits the initiation of a new print cycle with a message prompting the user to replace the IU given on the screen. When a life value is reached At print stop
4036ma2058e0
4036ma2059e0
The warning screen and IU replacement screen change when the settings are changed for Display PM Parts Lifetime and Unit Change available from the Tech. Rep. mode and IU Life Stop Setting available from the Security mode.
2-14
Photo Conductor Section
5.
5.1

Composition
Charge Generating Layer (CGL) Charge Transport Layer (CTL) Aluminum Cylinder
4036ma2338c0
[1]
4036ma2543c0
Key [1]
Name PC Drum/Y, M, C, Bk
Function/System Forms an image of each of different colors. OPC drum (30 mm)
5.2
Drive
[2] [1] [3]
[4] [6]
[1] [2] [3] Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Bk PC Motor (M7) PC Drum/Bk [4] [5] [6]
[5]
PC Drum/C PC Drum/M PC Drum/Y
4036ma2551c0
2-15
5.3
5.3.1
Operation
PC Drum Drive mechanism
Two independent PC Drum motors are used for the drive mechanism to suppress incorrect color registration and uneven pitch. The Color PC Drum Motor drives the PC Drums/Y, M, and C, while the Bk PC Motor drives the PC Drum/Bk. Gears having a large diameter are used to enhance rotating accuracy of the PC Drums. The use of gears having a large diameter provides a large number of gear teeth, which suppresses uneven pitch and eccentricity. Drive is transmitted to each of the PC Drums when the triangular coupling is engaged with the mating part that also has a triangular shape. II Composition/Operationn
Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Bk PC Motor (M7) Large-diameter Gear
Shaft
Coupling
4036ma2051c0
Coupling
4036ma2552c0
4036ma2544c0
5.3.2
PC Drum Phase control
To enhance image quality, sensors are used to detect operating conditions while the PC Drum turns, thereby providing drum drive control.
2-16
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 5.3.3 PC Drum small amount rotation control
Humidity around the IU can produce a difference in sensitivity among different PC Drums. This could lead to drum memory, allowing black bands to occur in the image. In addition, ozone stagnant in areas near the PC Drum Charge Corona reduces sensitivity of the PC Drums, causing white bands to occur in the image. To prevent these image problems, it should be ensured that the same face of the PC Drum is left exposed to the same condition for an extended period of time. The PC Drum is therefore turned at regular intervals to keep the surface sensitivity uniform. A. PC Drum small amount rotation timing The PC Drum is turned the small amount when a predetermined threshold value of the cumulative PC Drum driven distance is exceeded during a multi-print cycle or when intermittent print cycles are consecutively run with an intermission of less than a predetermined period of time between them.
PC Drum
4036ma2549c0
2-17
Charge Corona Section
6.
[1]
[3]
4036ma2130c0
4036ma2506c0
[4] [1] [5]
[3]
[2]
4036ma2138c0
4036ma2009c1
Key [1] [2] [3] [4] Corona Wire
Name
Function/System Comb electrode type For cleaning the corona wire Slide out to clean the corona wire. Applies the grid voltage Scrapes residual toner off the surface of the PC Drum Illuminates the surface of the PC Drum to neutralize any surface potential remaining on the surface of the PC Drum LED type
Corona Wire Cleaning Lever Grid Mesh Cleaning Blade
[5]
Main Erase Lamp
2-18
6.1
6.1.1
Operation
PC Drum Charge Corona ON/OFF control
The grid voltage (VG) applied to the Grid Mesh is controlled through the image stabilization control.
Color PC Drum Motor Energized Bk PC Motor Energized Drum Charge Corona Bias Y, M, C Drum Charge Corona Bias Bk Color Developing Motor (M6) Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2)
4036ma2251c0
6.1.2
Cleaning/Main Erase mechanism
A. Cleaning/main erase operation 1. The Cleaning Blade is pressed up against the surface of the PC Drum, scraping residual toner off the surface (forward blade system). 2. Toner, which has been scraped off the surface of the PC Drum, is fed by the Toner Collecting Screw back toward to the Conveying Screw in the rear of the machine. It is then collected in the Waste Toner Collecting Box. 3. The surface of the PC Drum after the image transfer process is irradiated with light from the Main Erase Lamp. This neutralizes any potential left on the surface of the PC Drum.
Toner Collecting Screw
Cleaning Blade
4036ma2539c0
Main Erase Lamp Cleaning Blade

4036ma2505c0
2-19
Developing Section
7.
7.1
Developing Section
Composition
[3] [1]
[2]
4036ma2139c0 4036ma2130c0
[7] [9] [8]
[4]
[5] [6] [2] [3]
4036ma2010c1
4036ma2011c1
Key
Name Supply/Agitating/Conveying Screws
Function/System Controls the height of the developer brush on the Developing Roller Vertical two-shaft circulating system that employs screws having a small diameter arranged in the vertical direction Conveys developer through magnetism to the point of development Two-component developing system Drives the PC Drum of the IU/Bk Energized by the Control Board (PWB-MC) Brushless DC motor Forms an image OPC drum (30 mm) Transmits drive to the Developing Roller, Supply/Agitating/Conveying Screws, and Toner Collecting Screw of the IU/Bk. Drives the PC Drums of the IU/Y, IU/M, and IU/C Energized by the Control Board (PWB-MC) Brushless DC motor Forms an image of each of different colors OPC drum (30 mm) Drives the Developing Rollers, Supply/Agitating/Conveying Screws, and Toner Collecting Screws of the IU/Y, IU/M, and IU/C Energized by the Control Board (PWB-MC) Brushless DC motor
[1] Doctor Blade [2]
[3] Developing Roller
[4] Bk PC Motor (M7)
[5] PC Drum/Bk [6] Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2) Color PC Drum Motor (M5)
[7]
[8] PC Drum/Y
[9]
2-20
Developing Section
7.2
Drive
[9]
[6]
[8] [7] [5] [4] [1] [2] [3]
4036ma2603c0
4036ma2604c0
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
PC Drum/Bk Developing Roller Toner Collecting Screw Supply/Agitating/Conveying Screws Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2)
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Bk PC Motor (M7) PC Drum/Y Color Developing Motor (M6) Color PC Drum Motor (M5)
2-21
Developing Section
7.3
7.3.1
Operation
Developing Drive control
Main Motor ON Signal Developing Bias/Y, M, C Main Motor (M1) Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Bk PC Motor (M7) DC Developing Bias/Bk Printing DC Drum Charge Corona Bias Y, M, C AC *1 DC DC Printing DC AC *1 Retraction Signal DC
Drum Charge Corona Bias Bk Color Developing Motor (M6) Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M11) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M13)
4036ma2152c0
*1: Actual YMC timing depends on the position of each PC Drum.
7.3.2
Developer flow
1. Toner supplied from the front end of the Developing Unit is fed to the lower screw. It is then fed to the rear of the unit, while being mixed with developer and electrically charged by the Supply/Agitating/Conveying Screws. 2. The ATDC Sensor installed on the underside of the Developing Unit detects toner-tocarrier ratio during this time. 3. The developer, fed to the rear of the Developing Unit, is conveyed further to the upper screw. 4. Because of the magnetic pole positioning of the Developing Roller, the developer is conveyed onto the upper part of the Developing Roller. The Doctor Blade then controls the height of the developer brush to ensure that the developer on the Developing Roller levels out. 5. The Toner sticks to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the PC Drum. The developer that is left on the Sleeve is returned to the upper screw by the magnetic pole positioning of the Developing Roller. It is then conveyed to the front side of the Developing Unit.
2-22
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation For IU/Y

Developing Roller
Developing Section
PC Drum/Y
Doctor Blade
Toner Supplied from Hop-
Supply/Agitating/Conveying Screws
4036ma2605c0
7.3.3
Developing bias II Composition/Operationn
The developing bias voltage (Vb) is applied to the Developing Roller so that an adequate amount of toner is attracted onto the surface of the PC Drum. In addition to the negative DC component, AC voltage is applied during development to help toner to be attracted more easily to the surface of the PC Drum. This AC component is applied only while development is taking place. The developing bias (Vb) is supplied from High Voltage Unit/2.
Developing Bias Developing Roller
4036ma2507c0
7.3.4
HMT (High grade Micro Toning) development
The machine employs the two-component non-contact development system. With the HMT method, the magnetic developer brush does not rub against the surface of the PC Drum (the images). Accordingly, sharper line images can be reproduced, involving no uneven image density at the trailing edge or thin lines and achieving even finer reproduction of the solid image areas.
Developing Roller
PC Drum
4036ma2013c1
7.3.5
Developer scattering prevention mechanism
To prevent the image and machine interior from being dirtied, a filter installed in the rear of the IU and the Toner Suction Fan Motor work to trap toner particles rising up during development. 2-23
Developing Section
IU
Holder Filter Holder
4036ma2247c0
7.3.6 II Composition/Operationn
ATDC Sensor control
The ATDC Sensor is mounted on the underside of each of the Developing Sections. The sensor for C, M, and Y is an optical type, while that for Bk is a magnetic type. Each of these sensors detects toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C) of the developer. The reading is used for determining the amount of toner supplied. Only when a new Imaging Unit is installed in the machine, an automatic adjustment is made of each of these ATDC Sensors. The sensors cannot be adjusted manually. The target T/C is 8 % both for color and Bk. This T/C can, however, be changed using ATDC Level of Image Adjust available from the Tech. Rep. mode. A. Optical ATDC sensor A bias is applied to the ATDC Sensor window to prevent toner from sticking to it. There is a magnetic brush provided for the Conveying Screw portion to clean the surface of the window. The sensor portion is separated from the Developing Section (Imaging Unit). When the ATDC Sensor is replaced, it is necessary to replace the Imaging Unit with a new one. This represents the fact that the ATDC Sensor is adjusted only when a new Imaging Unit is installed. In addition, if the LPH Unit is to be replaced, it is necessary to remove the ATDC Sensor from the old LPH Unit and mounted it in the new LPH Unit. B. Magnetic ATDC Sensor The magnetic permeability (powder density) of the carrier in the developer is measured to determine the T/C. A mylar is provided for the Conveying Screw portion to scrape toner off the surface of the ATDC Sensor. The ATDC Sensor is integrated with the Imaging Unit. When the ATDC Sensor is to be replaced with a new one, the entire Imaging Unit must be replaced.
2-24
Developing Section
ATDC Sensor/Y, M,
Optical ATDC Sensor
ATDC Sensor/Bk
Magnetic ATDC Sensor
4036ma2508c0
4036ma2504c0
Magnetic Brush ATDC Sensor Window
Mylar ATDC Sensor/C, M, Y (PWB-N1, N2, N3)

4036ma2187c0
ATDC Sensor/Bk
4036ma2188c0
C. ATDC window bias Since the optical ATDC Sensor is used for C, M, and Y, a bias is applied to the ATDC window to prevent toner from sticking to it. No bias is applied to the ATDC Sensor for Bk, which is the magnetic type. The bias is applied from the bias terminal of the LED Unit by way of the mounting screw of the ATDC window to the ATDC window.
ATDC
ATDC Window
Screw
4036ma2509c0
2-25
Toner Supply Section
8.
8.1

Composition
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
4036ma2143c0
4036ma2510c0
[11] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
[12] [13]
[10]
4036ma2511c0
[14]
4036ma2512c1
Key [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Cartridge/Y Cartridge/M Cartridge/C Cartridge/Bk
Name
Function/System Replenishes the supply of Y toner Replenishes the supply of M toner Replenishes the supply of C toner Replenishes the supply of Bk toner Detects Cartridge/Bk as it is loaded in position Detects Cartridge/C as it is loaded in position
Toner Set Sensor/Bk Toner Set Sensor/C
2-26

Key [7] [8] Name Toner Set Sensor/M Toner Set Sensor/Y

Function/System
Detects Cartridge/M as it is loaded in position Detects Cartridge/Y as it is loaded in position Drives the Agitating Blades and Metering Rollers of Cartridges/Y and M Energized by the Control Board (PWB-MC) Two-phase stepping motor Drives the Agitating Blades and Metering Rollers of Cartridges/C and Bk Energized by the Control Board (PWB-MC) Two-phase stepping motor Agitates each of different colors of toner Detects a near-empty condition of toner in Toner Cartridge/Y, M, C, Bk
[9]
Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4)
[10]
Toner Supply Motor C/Bk (M3)
[11] [12] [13] [14]
Agitating Blade/Y, M, C, Bk Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y, M, C, Bk (PC15, PC16, PC17, PC18)
Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/Y, M, C, Detects a near-empty condition of toner in Toner Bk (PC21, PC22, PC23, PC24) Cartridge/Y, M, C, Bk Metering Roller/Y, M, C, Bk Limits the amount of each of different colors of toner supplied
8.2
Drive
[1] [2] [3]
4036ma2514c0
[4]
4036ma2515c1
[1] [2]
Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) Toner Supply Motor C/Bk (M3)
[3] [4]
Agitating Blade/Y, M, C, Bk Metering Roller/Y, M, C, Bk
2-27
8.3
8.3.1
Operation
Toner Replenishing mechanism/control
A. Toner replenishing mechanism Toner is supplied from the Toner Cartridge of each color to the Imaging Unit of each color according to the T/C detected by the corresponding ATDC Sensor. A single Toner Supply Motor is turned either forward or backward to supply toner of two different colors (Toner Supply Motor for Bk and C, and Toner Supply Motor for Y and M).
Toner Supply Motor C/Bk (M3) Turned forward Bk Toner Energized C Toner Deenergized Energized Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) Turned forward Y Toner Energized M Toner Deenergized Energized
Turned backward Deenergized
Turned backward Deenergized
When Bk Toner is Supplied
When C Toner is Supplied
One-way clutch turns.

4036ma2018c1
One-way clutch turns.

4036ma2025c1
Replenishing operation 1. Drive of the Toner Supply Motor is transmitted through a gear train to the drive gears of the Toner Cartridges of two colors. A one-way clutch is used for each of these drive gears, meaning that the drive gear turns in one direction only. Either one of these two drive gears is turned according to whether the Toner Supply Motor turns forward or backward. 2. As the drive gear turns, the Metering Roller turns to replenish the supply of a predetermined amount of toner for the Imaging Unit. Rotation of the drive gear also turns the Agitating Blade of the Toner Cartridge to agitate toner in the Toner Cartridge. B. Toner replenishing control T/C is detected when the Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2) is energized for Bk or when the Color Developing Motor (M6) is energized for C, M, and Y (during a copy cycle). The actual reading of T/C taken is compared with the T/C setting made in ATDC Level of Image Adjust available from the Tech. Rep. mode. Based on this comparison, the toner replenishing time is determined. Since toner replenishing is possible only while the developer is being agitated, the maximum toner replenishing time is fixed. If it is not possible to replenish the supply of the required amount of toner within this maximum replenishing time, the remainder time is stored in memory and added to the replenishing time for the next replenishing sequence.
2-28
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 8.3.2 Toner Near-Empty and Toner Empty detection control
A toner near-empty/empty condition is detected by the Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ and LED mounted on each of the Toner Cartridges. A toner empty condition is detected by the ATDC Sensor. Detection timing 1. The number of times is detected, in which the sensor remains activated for a given period of time or more while the Agitating Blade turns one complete turn. If this count reaches two, a toner near-empty condition is detected and the machine gives a corresponding warning display. 2. A toner empty condition is detected if the T/C reading taken by the ATDC Sensor is lower by 0.5% than the target value for a given continuous period of time after the toner near-empty condition has been detected. The machine is then brought to a stop. 3. The toner empty condition is reset if the Toner Near-Empty Sensor remains deactivated for a given period of time or more after the Toner Cartridge set lever has been unlocked and locked or the Power Switch has been turned OFF and ON.
Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y, M, C, Bk (PC15, PC16, PC17, PC18) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/Y, M, C, Bk (PC21, PC22, PC23, PC24)
Clear Window Toner Near-Empty
4036ma2149c1
Toner Empty
4036ma2054e0
4036ma2055e0
A different toner empty screen is displayed if User is selected for Unit Change available from the Tech. Rep. mode.
2-29
Toner Supply Section 8.3.3 Shutter mechanism
To prevent toner from being spilled when the Toner Cartridge is removed from the machine, there is a shutter mechanism provided. When the Toner Cartridge is installed in the machine, the shutter opens.
Before Toner Cartridge is Installed When Toner Cartridge is Installed
Shutter
4036ma2516c0
4036ma2517c0
2-30
Transfer Corona Section
9.
9.1
9.1.1

Composition
1st Image Transfer section
4036ma2152c0
[1]
4036ma2518c0
[9] [8]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[7] [6]
4036ma2606c0
[13]
[15]
4036ma2157c0
[14]
2-31
Key [1]
Name Paper Separator Claws Separate paper
Function/System
[2]
1st Image Transfer Roller/C
Transfers the toner image from the PC Drum/C onto the Transfer Belt (1st image transfer) Image Transfer Roller system Constant voltage control Forms an appropriate contacting surface between the PC Drum and the Transfer Belt at the 1st Image Transfer Roller/Bk portion Transfers the toner image from the PC Drum/Bk onto the Transfer Belt (1st image transfer) Image Transfer Roller system Constant voltage control Driven by the Main Motor Changes the Transfer Belt face between the color mode and monochrome mode Conveys waste toner from the Belt Cleaning Section to the Toner Collecting Section Screw type Whisks the surface of the Transfer Belt clean of toner Prevents the Transfer Belt from slacking Transfers the toner image from the PC Drum/Y onto the Transfer Belt (1st image transfer) Image Transfer Roller system Constant voltage control Transfers the toner image from the PC Drum/M onto the Transfer Belt (1st image transfer) Image Transfer Roller system Constant voltage control The belt, on which toner images are formed by the 1st Image Transfer Rollers in the order of Y, M, C, and Bk. Changes the position of the 1st Image Transfer Roller/Y, M, C, Bk either in the pressed or retracted position Detects the 1st Image Transfer Roller at its retracted position Provides drive for pressure and retraction operation of the 1st Image Transfer Roller/Y, M, C, Bk Two-phase stepping motor
[3]
Lifting Mylar
[4]
1st Image Transfer Roller/Bk
[5] [6]
Transfer Belt Drive Roller Retraction Roller
[7]
Waste Toner Conveying Screw
[8] [9]
Cleaning Brush Tension Roller
[10]
1st Image Transfer Roller/Y
[11]
1st Image Transfer Roller/M
[12]
Transfer Belt
[13]
Pressure Cam 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC12) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11)
[14]
[15]
2-32
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 9.1.2 2nd Image Transfer section
[1]
4036ma2019c1
[1] [2]
4036ma2243c0
[6] [5]
[4]
4036ma2154c0
[7]
Key Name
4036ma2542c0
Function/System Transfers the toner images in four colors of toner on the Transfer Belt to the paper Image Transfer Roller system Constant voltage control Detects the 2nd Image Transfer Roller at its retracted position Provides drive for pressure and retraction operation of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller DC brush motor Detects color shift (incorrect color registration) in the image on the front side in the main scanning direction Prevents AIDC/Registration Sensors/1 and 2 (PC8 and 9) from being contaminated Detects color shift in the image on the rear side in the main scanning direction
[1]
2nd Image Transfer Roller
[2]
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Sensor (PC29) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M13) AIDC/Registration Sensor/1 (PC8) Shutter AIDC/Registration Sensor/2 (PC9)
[3]
[4] [5] [6] [7]
Temperature/Humidity Sensor (PC7) Detects temperature/humidity inside the machine
2-33
[3]
9.2
9.2.1
Drive
1st Image Transfer section
[1]
[2]
4036ma2020c1
[10]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[6]
4036ma2158c0
[7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Transfer Belt Main Motor (M1) Sliding Plate Cam 1st Image Transfer Roller/Y [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] 1st Image Transfer Roller/M 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC12) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) 1st Image Transfer Roller/C 1st Image Transfer Roller/Bk
2-34
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 9.2.2 2nd Image Transfer section
[1] [4] [2] [3]
[8] [7] [4]
[6]
[5]
4036ma2156c0
[1] [2] [3] [4]
2nd Image Transfer Roller 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC29) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Cam
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Pressure Lever AIDC/Registration Sensor/1 (PC8) Shutter AIDC/Registration Sensor/2 (PC9)
9.3
9.3.1
Operation
Transfer Belt speed control
The Transfer Belt is driven by the Main Motor. The appropriate belt speed is selected according to the print mode and paper type as detailed below.
Paper Type Print Mode Monochrome Plain paper Color ACS Thick paper 1, 2, 3; envelopes, OHP transparencies, Glossy Mode Main Motor Speed (mm/s) 165 100
60
2-35
Transfer Corona Section 9.3.2
1st Image Transfer Roller mechanism
The machine is provided with a mechanism that presses the 1st Image Transfer Rollers up against the inside of the Transfer Belt during the 1st image transfer stage. The 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) provides the drive for this operation. The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor detects the 1st Image Transfer Roller at its retracted position. The pressure position is determined through pulse control. A. Pressure/retraction operation Pressure operation 1. Drive from the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor is transmitted through a gear train to the drive gear. 2. Rotation of the drive gear turns the pressure cam, which allows the Sliding Plate to move. 3. As the Sliding Plate moves, the spring is released. This lowers the 1st Image Transfer Roller and the roller presses against the Transfer Belt. Retraction operation 1. When the drive gear turns backward, the pressure cam also turns backward, pushing to move the Sliding Plate. 2. As the Sliding Plate moves, the Pressure Lever is then pressed to raise the 1st Image Transfer Roller, allowing the roller to leave the Transfer Belt.
1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M11) Cam
4036ma2159c0
When Retracted
When Pressed
Spring
4036ma2021c1 4036ma2022c1
1st Image Transfer Roller
Operation timing
Start Key ON Paper Moves Past 2nd Image Transfer Roller
Main Motor (M1) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M11) 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC12)
4036ma2160c0
2-36
B. Pressure position changing mechanism To extend the service life of the PC Drum/Y, M, C, the pressure position of the 1st Image Transfer Roller is changed between the monochrome mode and the color mode. In the monochrome mode, the 1st Image Transfer Roller/Y, M, C is left in the retracted position and the PC Drum/Y, M, C is stopped. The pressure position is changed by varying the pulse count of the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor, which results in the pressure cam stop position being varied. The pressure position of the Image Transfer Roller is also changed by changing the stop position of the Sliding Plate. Color mode: The pressure position of the Image Transfer Roller is where the PC Drum is in contact with the Transfer Belt for all four colors of toner. II Composition/Operationn Monochrome mode: The pressure position of the Image Transfer Roller/Y, M, C is where the PC Drum/Y, M, C leaves the Transfer Belt. While that of the Image Transfer Roller/Bk is where the PC Drum/Bk is in contact with the Transfer Belt. This allows the PC Drum/Y, M, C to remain stationary in this mode.
Sliding Plate Cam Position A Retracted Position
Bk
Cam Position B Monochrome Mode
Bk
Cam Position C Color Mode
Bk
Retraction Roller
Transfer Belt
1st Image Transfer Roller PC Drum
Lifting Mylar
4036ma2161c0
2-37
C. Retraction mechanism At the same time that the pressure position is changed, the Retraction Roller moves up and down to change the position of the image transfer on the surface of the Transfer Belt to suit the specific mode, either monochrome or color. Like the pressure position changing mechanism, the position at which the pressure cam is stopped is changed to move the Retraction Lever, which results in the Retraction Roller being moved up and down.
Retracted Position Retraction Roller Cam Position C
4036ma2162c0
Driven Roller
Retraction Lever Color Mode
Monochrome Mode
4036ma2165c0 4036ma2166c0
D. Backup mechanism Since the Retraction Roller changes the belt path so that the Transfer Belt does not touch the PC Drum/Y, M, C in the monochrome mode, the nip width between the Transfer Belt and PC Drum/Bk at the 1st Image Transfer Roller/Bk will become smaller, thus resulting in possible void images. To prevent this from occurring, there is Lifting Mylar installed before the 1st Image Transfer Roller/Bk to help maintain a good nip width.
Transfer Belt Lifting Mylar
Retraction Roller
Bk
4036ma2163c0
Lifting Mylar
1st Image Transfer Roller/Bk
PC Drum/Bk
4036ma2164c0
2-38
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 9.3.3 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure mechanism
The machine is provided with a mechanism that presses the 2nd Image Transfer Roller up against, and retracts it from, the Transfer Belt to prevent the 2nd Image Transfer Roller from being dirtied due to patterns produced for purposes other than an actual copying operation (which may be a pattern produced during the image stabilization sequence or other function). A. Pressure/retraction operation 1. Drive from the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor is transmitted through a gear train to the drive gear. 2. The rotation of the drive gear turns the pressure cam a half turn, which pushes down the Pressure Lever. This causes the 2nd Image Transfer Roller to be pressed up against the Transfer Belt. 3. At this time, the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Sensor detects whether the 2nd Image Transfer Roller is located at the pressure position. 4. When the motor is energized a second time, the pressure cam turns another half turn. This releases the Pressure Lever, which moves the 2nd Image Transfer Roller to, and stops it at, the retracted position.
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC29) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M13)
Cam
4036ma2519c0
When Retracted
When Pressed
Drive Roller 2nd Image Transfer Roller Cam

4036ma2168c0 4036ma2023c1
2-39
Transfer Corona Section Operation Timing

Start Key ON
Paper moves past 2nd Image Transfer Roller
Main Motor (M1) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M13) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Sensor (PC29)
4036ma2170c0
9.3.4
AIDC Sensor Shutter mechanism
The AIDC Sensor can be contaminated with toner since it is located under the Transfer Belt. There is a shutter mechanism provided for the sensor to prevent it from being contaminated. The shutter opens and closes in synchronism with the pressure and retraction motion of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller. When the 2nd Image Transfer Roller is retracted from the Transfer Belt, the Pressure Pin pushes the Shutter Holder. This moves the Shutter at the AIDC Sensor to the front side. When the 2nd Image Transfer Roller is pressed against the Transfer Belt, on the other hand, the Shutter of the AIDC Sensor is moved by a spring force to the rear side and closed.
2nd Image Transfer Roller Retracted Pressed Shutter Open Closed
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M13)
AIDC Sensor/2 (PC9) Shutter AIDC Sensor/1 (PC8)

4036ma2171c0
Shutter Holder
Pressure Pin
4036ma2172c0
When Sensor Shutter is Closed
When Sensor Shutter is Open
4036ma2540c0
4036ma2541c0
2-40
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 9.3.5 ATVC (Auto Transfer Voltage Control)
To optimize image transfer output, the machine is provided with ATVC control, or Auto Transfer Voltage Control. The control lets a constant current flow through each of the Image Transfer Rollers. Then, from the voltage detected, the resistances of the 1st Image Transfer Roller, 2nd Image Transfer Roller, and Transfer Belt are measured. The optimum image transfer output voltages applied to the 1st and 2nd Image Transfer Rollers during printing are thereby automatically adjusted. A. Overview of ATVC operation
HV1 Constant Voltage Constant Current Measured Resistance Value Constant Current
The resistance of the 1st or 2nd Image Transfer Roller is measured.
2nd Image Transfer Roller Transfer Belt Transfer Belt Drive Roller
1st Image Transfer Roller Transfer Belt
The voltage to be applied to the 1st or 2nd Image Transfer Roller is deter mined.
PC Drum Ground
4036ma2520c0
2nd Image Transfer Current Feedback Terminal
B. 1st image transfer ATVC operation 1. The 1st image transfer constant current for each color of toner output from the DC power Supply/1 is fed back to the DC power Supply/1 via the 1st Image Transfer Roller, Transfer Belt, and PC Drum ground. This allows the resistance of the Transfer Belt to be measured. 2. The measured resistance is used as the basis for determining the optimum 1st image transfer voltage for each color of toner. C. 2nd image transfer ATVC operation 1. The 2nd image transfer constant current output from the DC power Supply/1 is fed back to the DC power Supply/1 via the 2nd Image Transfer Roller, Transfer Belt, and Transfer Belt Drive Roller, allowing the resistance of the Transfer Belt to be measured. 2. The measured resistance, together with the type of paper, temperature and humidity, and the color or monochrome mode, is used as the basis for determining the optimum 2nd image transfer voltage. D. 1st and 2nd image transfer ATVC operation timing The 1st and 2nd image transfer ATVC operations are carried out immediately before the execution of image stabilization control. The control operation is not, however, performed in Image Stabilizer Mode 3. 2-41
Constant current is output to the 1st or 2nd Image Transfer Roller.
Transfer Corona Section 9.3.6 Transfer Belt cleaning
To scrape residual toner off the surface of the Transfer Belt, the Transfer Belt is provided with a Cleaning Brush and a Charging Brush. The Cleaning Brush is a rotary brush. To enhance its ability to scrape residual toner off the surface of the Transfer Belt, the brush is turned in a direction opposite to that of the Transfer Belt. The Cleaning Brush Motor provides the drive for this system. The Charging Brush is located on the upstream side of the Cleaning Brush. A bias (+DC) is applied to the Toner Collecting Roller to let current flow through the Cleaning Brush, Transfer Belt, and Charging Brush. Through potential difference involved, toner left on the surface of the Transfer Belt is conveyed to the Toner Collecting Roller.
Charging Brush Transfer Belt
Cleaning Brush
Toner Collecting Roller
Driven Roller
HV1
Toner Collecting Screw Cleaning Brush

4036ma2609c0
4036ma2024c2
A. Operation timing Since there is a possibility of the machine being stopped with toner left on the Transfer Belt, the machine operates the Transfer Belt cleaning sequence when the Power Switch is turned ON, or when the Right Door, Left Door, or Front Door is opened and closed.
Cleaning Start Signal Main Motor (M1) Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias
4036ma2174c0
2-42
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 9.3.7 2nd Image Transfer Roller cleaning
To remove residual toner off the surface of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller, a +/- DC bias is applied alternately to the roller, thereby moving the residual toner to the surface of the Transfer Belt. The Cleaning Brush then scrapes off the toner on the surface of the Transfer Belt.
- -
- -
+
HV1
4036ma2175c0
Operation timing The cleaning sequence is carried out after a sequence, in which the Image Transfer Rollers are retracted from the Transfer Belt, which takes place when the Power Switch is turned ON, or the Right Door, Left Door, or Front Door is opened and closed. The sequence is also carried out at the end of a print cycle that is run after the cumulative number of printed pages produced has exceeded 100, or during a print cycle that is run after the cumulative number of printed pages produced has exceeded 120, since the previous cleaning operation. At this time, the cumulative number of printed pages counts up 1 for 216 mm or less of printed paper FD length, and 2 for more than 216 mm of printed paper FD length.
After the end of Transfer Belt Cleaning 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M11) 2nd Image Transfer Reverse Bias 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor (M13)
Retracted
Retracted
4036ma2178c0
2-43
Transfer Belt Cleaning Brush
Transfer Corona Section 9.3.8
Charge neutralization and separation of paper
To neutralize any charge potential left in the paper which has undergone the 2nd image transfer stage, a Charge Neutralizing Cloth is installed to the guide plate after the 2nd Image Transfer Roller. The output of the Charge Neutralizing Cloth is switched automatically using the DC power Supply/1 according to the paper type and the environmental conditions. Also provided are the three Transfer Belt Paper Separator Claws that properly separate paper after the 2nd image transfer stage from the Transfer Belt.
Charge Neutralizing Cloth Paper Separator Claws
HV1
Transfer Belt 2nd Image Transfer Roller
4036ma2176c0 4036ma2546c0
Switching of output of the Charge Neutralizing Cloth

Paper Type Ambience Control Detailed Description A negative charge, which is the reverse polarity to the positive output from the 2nd Transfer Roller, is applied to prevent the paper from being wound around the Transfer Belt. Bias is applied regardless of the ambient conditions, since the paper to go to the 2nd side print cycle, which has undergone the fusing process, has the condition equivalent to paper under low humidity ambience. Paper is stiff enough to present no separation problems. To prevent separation noise, grounded through resistors regardless of the ambient conditions.
1-sided printing on the plain paper
Low humidity
Bias applied
Normal High humidity
GND through resistors
2nd side of 2sided printing on the plain paper Special paper other than plain paper
Bias applied
GND through resistors
2-44
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 9.3.9 Detection of New Transfer Belt Unit
When a new Transfer Belt Unit is installed in the machine, the life counter is automatically cleared through new unit detection. The new unit detection is made when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON or the Right Door is opened and closed. New unit detection timing/operation
The Power Switch is turned OFF and ON, Front Door opened and closed, or Left Door opened and closed
Lets the Transfer Belt perform initial operation.
Checks whether the Transfer Belt Unit is mounted or not.
New unit detection check
Runs image stabilization sequence.
New Unit is release (Life counter clear)
2-45
Makes image transfer ATVC adjustment.
Transfer Corona Section 9.3.10 ACS control
This machine adopts ACS (Auto Color Selection) control, which controls switching of the print mode according to the number of the continuous monochrome originals to achieve both a higher copying productivity and longer service life of the consumables. This control functions in the ACS mode only. In the ACS control, the number of the continuous monochrome originals is checked when the color originals are switched to the monochrome ones. If the number of the continuous monochrome originals is less than a predetermined value, monochrome printing is made in the color mode. If, however, the number of the continuous monochrome originals is the predetermined value or more, the print mode is switched to monochrome since the time wasted for PC Drum rotation is larger than the time loss required for switching to the monochrome mode. The ACS control does not function until the number of the continuous monochrome originals has been counted. Accordingly, ACS control is provided only within the range of the number of the originals scanned for the first set of copies. This will result in ACS control not necessarily functioning at the optimum performance. This function works most effectively in the following conditions: For the 2nd set of copies onward in electronic sorting Printing using job programs Multiple Enlargement mode (that involves ACS detection processing made at the end of the prescan)
Paper Size A4/Letter A4R/Letter R B4/11 14 A3/11 17 Effecting monochrome printing in color mode 3 sheets or less 2 sheets or less 2 sheets or less 1 sheet or less Switching to monochrome mode 4 sheets or more 3 sheets or more 3 sheets or more 2 sheets or more
Effecting monochrome printing in color mode (effecting monochrome printing with the four PC Drums rotating) Color print Monochrome print Color print
PC Drum/Bk
PC Drum/Y Switching to monochrome mode Color print Monochrome print
4036ma2241c0
4036ma2242c0
2-46
Toner Collecting Section
10. Toner Collecting Section

10.1 Composition
[1]
4036ma2180c0
[3] [2]
4036ma2026c1
Key [1]
Name IU Toner Collecting Screw
Function/System Conveys waste toner from the IU to the Toner Collecting Section. Screw type Conveys waste toner from the Transfer Belt Cleaning Section to the Toner Collecting Section. Screw type Container for waste toner
[2] [3]
Transfer Belt Toner Collecting Screw Waste Toner Bottle
2-47
10.2 Drive
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
4036ma2027c1
[1] [2] [3]
Bk PC Motor (M7) IU Toner Collecting Screw Cleaning Brush
[4] [5] [6]
Transfer Belt Toner Collecting Screw Toner Collecting Roller Cleaning Brush Motor (M22)
2-48
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Toner collecting mechanism Toner collected by the Cleaning Brush of the Transfer Belt and waste toner in each of the Imaging Units are conveyed by the corresponding Toner Collecting Screws to the Waste Toner Bottle.
IU Toner Collecting Screw
Waste Toner Bottle

4036ma2554c0
Transfer Belt Toner Collecting Screw
4036ma2547c0
10.3.2
Waste Toner Bottle-in-position detection
The Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor is provided to detect a Waste Toner Bottle loaded in position. Timing for this detection is when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON, or the Left Door is opened and closed. If the Waste Toner Bottle is found to be out of position, the machine inhibits the initiation of a new print cycle.
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor(pc32)
Waste Toner Bottle
4036ma2545c0
2-49
Toner Collecting Section 10.3.3
Waste Toner Near-Full/Full detection control
A. Waste toner near-full detection control An optical sensor is used to detect waste toner. When the sensor is blocked for a given period of time, the machine determines that the Waste Toner Bottle is nearly full of waste toner. At this time, a corresponding warning (near-full warning) is given on the control panel. To prevent false detection, an Agitation Screw is mounted in the Waste Toner Bottle so that the waste toner is accumulated in the bottle evenly. B. Waste toner full detection control At the same time that the waste toner near-full condition has been detected, the counter exclusive for the waste toner inside of the machine starts counting. When the counter reaches about 8k, the machine determines that the Waste Toner Bottle is full and stops operation. Counting method of the counter exclusive for the waste toner is corrected to count the value appropriately according to the color or monochrome mode or paper length. After the Waste Toner Bottle has been replaced and the Waste Toner Full Sensor has been unblocked for a given period of time, the machine cancels the copying-disabled condition, while at the same time automatically clearing the counter exclusive for the waste toner.
Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC31)
Agitating Screw
4036ma2028c1 4036ma2524c0
Near-Full Condition Warning Display Before Near-Full Condition Near-Full Condition is Detected Detected
4036ma2182c0
Waste Toner
Full Condition Warning Display 4036ma2056e0
4036ma2057e0
A different toner full warning screen is displayed if User is selected for Unit Change available from the Tech. Rep. mode. 2-50
Paper Feed Section
11. Paper Feed Section

11.1 Composition
11.1.1 Tray1
[2] [1]
[3]
4036ma2033c1
4036ma2111c0
[4] [13] [12] [11]
[3]
[5]
[2] [1]
[6] [7] [10] [9] [8]

4036ma2034c1
Key [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Name Tray1 Separator Roller Tray1 Paper Take-up Roller Tray1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC2) Paper Type Setting Dial Paper Type Board (PWB-S)
Function/System Prevents double feed of paper from Tray1 Takes up a sheet of paper from Tray1 Detects double feed of paper in Tray1 Transmits drive from the Main Motor to Paper Take-up Roller/1 Detects paper in Tray1 Used to set the type of paper in Tray1 Detects the type of paper loaded in Tray1
Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor (PC3) Detects the paper size in the width direction in Tray1 Paper Guide Aligns the paper stack in Tray1 Plate on which the paper stack is loaded in Tray1 Maximum paper capacity Plain paper: 250 sheets Thick paper, OHP transparencies, postcards, and labels: 20 sheets
[10]
Paper Lifting Plate
2-51
Paper Feed Section

Key [11] [12] [13] Name Tray1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) Tray1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC13) Tray1 Set Sensor (PC14)

Function/System Detects the paper size in the length direction in Tray1 Detects the paper level in Tray1 Detects Tray1 slid in the correct position
11.1.2
Tray2
[6] [1] [2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[3]
4036ma2039c1
4036ma2521c0
[8] [7]
[9]
4036ma2538c0
[16] [15]
[19] [17] [18] [20]
[10] [11] [8] [7] [9]
[14]
[2] [13] [12]
[4]
4036ma2035c1
2-52
Paper Feed Section
Key [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Name Tray2 Pick-up Roller Tray2 Lift-up Sensor (PC105) Polyethylene Sheet Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC106) Tray2 Separator Roller Tray2 Paper Take-up Roller Tray2 Paper Take-up Sensor (PC107) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Vertical Transport Roller/2 Tray2 Paper Feed Motor (M102)
Function/System Takes up a sheet of paper from Tray2 Detects the upper limit of paper stack in Tray2 Prevents paper skew Detects paper in Tray2 Prevents double feed of paper from Tray2 Takes up a sheet of paper from Tray2 Detects paper at the paper take-up section of Tray2 Detects paper at the transport section of Tray2 Transports paper
[11]
Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103)
Drives the paper transport mechanism of Tray2 Energized by the Tray2 Board (PWB-Z) Two-phase stepping motor Plate on which the paper stack is loaded in Tray2 Maximum paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets Aligns the paper stack in Tray2 Detects the paper size in the length direction in Tray2 Drives the motor Detects the paper size in the width direction in Tray2 Detects Tray2 slid in the correct position Detects the paper size in the width direction in Tray2 Drives the Paper Lifting Plate for ascent motion DC brush motor Detects the paper level in Tray2
[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20]
Paper Lifting Plate Paper Guide Tray2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) Tray2 Board Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor/L (PC102) Tray2 Set Sensor (PC103) Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor/S (PC101) Tray2 Lift-up Motor (M101) Tray2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC104)
2-53
Drives the paper take-up mechanism Energized by the Tray2 Board (PWB-Z) Two-phase stepping motor
Paper Feed Section
11.2 Drive
11.2.1 Tray1
[3]
[1] [2]
4036ma2036c1
[1] [2]
Tray1 Paper Take-up Roller Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1)
[3]
Main Motor (M1)
11.2.2
Tray2
[1] [2] [6]
[7]
[5]
[3] [4]
4036ma2037c1
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Vertical Transport Roller/2 Tray2 Paper Take-up Roller Tray2 Pick-up Roller Paper Lifting Plate
[5] [6] [7]
Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) Tray2 Lift-up Motor (M101) Tray2 Paper Feed Motor (M102)
2-54
Paper Feed Section
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Paper Take-up control (Tray1)
Start Key ON Synchronizing Roller ON Synchronizing Roller ON Main Motor (M1) Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28)
4036ma2121c0
11.3.2
Tray1 double feed control
To reduce paper misfeed involved with double feed, the Tray1 Double Feed Sensor is provided at a point immediately after the Tray1 Paper Take-up Roller. If the second sheet of paper reaches the Tray1 Double Feed Sensor during the paper take-up sequence for the first sheet of paper, the paper take-up motion is delayed to allow an appropriate distance between two successive sheets of paper.
1st Sheet of Paper Synchronizing Roller Tray1 Paper Take-up Roller 2nd Sheet of Paper Tray1 Double Feed Sensor (PC13)
4036ma2115c0
11.3.3
Deceleration control
Deceleration control is provided only when paper is fed from Tray2 or Bypass with a system speed of 165 mm/sec. or 100 mm/sec. The Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor is controlled so that the period of time that begins when the paper take-up sequence is started and ends when the paper reaches the Synchronizing Roller becomes a predetermined value. The control thereby prevents a paper misfeed from occurring and ensures productivity. The deceleration control is provided based on the information on the timing, at which the Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor is activated.
2-55
Paper Feed Section 11.3.4
Paper supply level detection control
There is a window in the front cover of the cassette for indicating the paper supply level. When the Paper Lifting Plate goes up, a red lever appears in the window. The lower the level of the paper stack, the more the red portion is visible.
4036ma2525c0
Paper Supply Level Indicator in Cassette Front Cover
Lever
4036ma2526c0
11.3.5
Paper Near-Empty/Paper Empty detection
When the Paper Near-empty Sensor is blocked, a corresponding warning display is given on the control panel. The paper supply level when a paper near-empty condition is detected is about 50 30 sheets. The Paper Empty Sensor detects a paper empty condition. Tray1
A Near-empty Condition An Empty Condition
4036ma2038c1
4036ma2116c0
Tray1 Paper Near-empty Sensor (PC13)
Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC2)
Tray2
A Near-empty Condition Tray2 Paper Near-empty Sensor (PC104) Tray2 Lift-up Motor (M101) An Empty Condition Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC106)
4036ma2017c1
4036ma2612c0
2-56
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 11.3.6 Tray1 paper type setting
Paper Feed Section
Tray1 is an MPC that requires that the type of paper be set. Changing the position of the Paper Type Setting Dial selects different controls on the machine side as detailed below.
Paper Type System Speed (mm/s) Monochrome mode 165 Color/ACS mode 100 Heating Roller Set 1st Image 2nd Image Temperature (C) Transfer Transfer 190 180 Vg Vb Table
Plain paper, 2nd side plain paper
Thick paper 2, 2nd side thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 2nd side thick paper 3 Envelopes 60
185
190
OHP transparencies
170 (humidity during a color print cycle exceeds 60%)
: Varies depending on the paper type : Not vary Select thick paper 2 to use postcards. Select thick paper 1 to use labels.
Paper Type Board (PWB-S)
Paper Type Setting Dial
4036ma2040c0
2-57
Thick paper 1, 2nd side thick paper 1
Paper Feed Section 11.3.7 Paper size detection control
The width size (CD) and length size (FD) of the paper are detected. The paper size is determined based on the combination of these two sizes detected. A. Tray1 Metric Area
Tray1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) SW1 ON ON OFF OFF SW2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF SW3 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON/OFF OFF ON ON OFF SW4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF/ON ON ON OFF Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor (PC3) H L H L H L H L L L L Paper Size A6R A5 B6R B5 A5R A4 B5R A4R A3 A3 Wide FLS
OFF OFF ON/OFF OFF ON OFF ON
2-58
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation Inch Area

Tray1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) SW1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF SW2 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON SW3 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON SW4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor (PC3) H L L L H L H L L
Paper Feed Section
Paper Size 5.5 8.5R 8.5 11 8.5 11R Executive Executive R 5.5 8.5 8.5 14 11 17
Tray1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) 4 3 2 1
Guide
4036ma2042c1
2-59
A3 Wide
Paper Feed Section B. Tray2

Tray2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) SW1 OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON SW2 OFF ON ON ON ON/OFF OFF ON/OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF SW3 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON SW4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor/S (PC101) H L H L L H H L H L L H H L L L L H H
Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor/L (PC102) L L L L H L L L H H H H H H H H H H H
Paper Size B5 A5R *1 A4 B5R A4R B4 A3 5.5 8.5 *2 Letter Letter R Legal 11 14 11 17 FLS(8 13) *3 Folio *3 (8-1/4 13) 8-1/2 13 *3 FLS *3 K16 K8
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
*1: Metric Area only *2: Inch Area only *3: Detected if selected using FLS Paper available from Tech. Rep. mode
Tray2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) 4 3 2 1
Guide
4036ma2043c1
2-60
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 11.3.8 Tray2 paper lifting motion control
Paper Feed Section
A. When Tray2 is slid in The paper lifting motion is started if the Tray2 Lift-up Sensor is unblocked with Tray2 slid in the machine. When the Tray2 Lift-up Sensor is blocked after the paper lifting motion has been started, the motor is deenergized.
Tray2 Lift-up Motor (M101) Tray2 Lift-up Sensor (PC105)
Paper Lifting Plate
4036ma2232c0
4036ma2607c0
Tray2 Slid in Tray2 Set Sensor (PC103) Tray2 Lift-up Sensor (PC105) Tray2 Lift-up Motor (M101)
Lifting Completed
4036ma2231c0
B. During a copy cycle As paper is consumed, the Paper Take-up Roller gradually lowers to unblock the Tray2 Lift-up Sensor. The Tray2 Lift-up Motor is then energized again to lift the paper stack. When the Tray2 Lift-up Sensor is then blocked, the Tray2 Lift-up Motor is deenergized. The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep constant the pressure between the Paper Take-up Roller and paper stack (paper take-up pressure) regardless of the amount of paper still available for use.
Tray2 Lift-up Sensor (PC105)
4036ma2233c0
4036ma2232c0
2-61
Bypass Section
12. Bypass Section

12.1 Composition
[4]
4036ma2122c0
[3] [2] [1]
4036ma2528c0
[9] [6] [5]

4036ma2125c0
4036ma2124c0
[8]
Key [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Name
[7]
Function/System Detects the Bypass paper size in the length direction Detects the Bypass paper size in the length direction Detects the Bypass paper size in the length direction Detects the Bypass paper size in the length direction Takes up a sheet of paper Detects paper in the Bypass Section Plate on which the paper stack is loaded in the Bypass Section Maximum paper capacity Plain paper: 150 sheets Thick paper, postcards, and labels: 50 sheets Prevents double feed of paper For ascent and descent motion of the Paper Lifting Plate
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC114) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC113) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC112) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC111) Bypass Paper Take-up Roller Bypass Paper Empty Sensor (PC110)
[7]
Paper Lifting Plate
[8] [9]
Bypass Separator Roller Bypass Paper Pick-up Solenoid
2-62
Bypass Section
12.2 Drive
[1] [2]
[3] [1] [2] [5] [4]
4036ma2529c0
[3]
4036ma2047c1
[1] [2] [3]
Bypass Lift-up Sensor (PC115) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) Bypass Paper Pick-up Solenoid (SL101)
[4] [5]
Bypass Paper Take-up Roller Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103)
2-63
Bypass Section
12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Bypass Paper Take-up control
Start Key ON Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) Bypass Paper Pick-up Solenoid (SL101) Bypass Lift-up Sensor (PC115) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Move to Standby Position
4036ma2123c0
12.3.2
Paper Empty detection
The Bypass Paper Empty Sensor detects a paper empty condition in the Bypass Section.
Bypass Paper Empty Sensor (PC110)
4036ma2530c0
12.3.3
Bypass Paper Lifting Motion Control
At the start of a Bypass paper take-up sequence, the Bypass Paper Pick-up Solenoid is energized to raise the Paper Lifting Plate so that the sheet of paper can be taken up. When the print cycle is completed, the Bypass Paper Pick-up Solenoid is energized again to return the Paper Lifting Plate to the standby position.
2-64
Bypass Section
Bypass Paper Take-up Roller
Bypass Lift-up Sensor (PC115)
Bypass Paper Pick-up Solenoid (SL101)
4036ma2126c0
4036ma2531c0
4036ma2236c0
Paper Lifting Plate
Start Key ON Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) Bypass Paper Pick-up Solenoid (SL101) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) Bypass Lift-up Sensor (PC115)
Paper Fed out
4036ma2235c0
2-65
Bypass Lift-up Sensor (PC115)
Bypass Section 12.3.4 Paper size detection
The size of the paper loaded in the Bypass Section is detected by the combination of ON or OFF positions of the four Bypass FD Paper Size Sensors and the Bypass Paper Size Unit. Moving the Paper Guide varies the resistance value of the Bypass Paper Size Unit VR. Metric Area
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC111) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC112) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC113) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC114) Bypass Paper Size Unit (VR1) Width (mm) 80 to less than 115 OFF OFF OFF OFF 115 to 144 inclusive 196 to 225 inclusive 242 to 268 inclusive 133 to 164 inclusive 169 to less than 196 ON OFF OFF OFF 196 to 225 inclusive 225 to less than 288 288 to 330 inclusive ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 188 to 235 inclusive 201 to 231 inclusive 268 to 288 inclusive 255 to less than 288 ON ON ON ON 288 to less than 301 301 to 330 inclusive Paper Size Detected A6R B6R A5 B5 A5R B5R A4R Letter A4 FLS Legal 11 14 11 17 A3 A3 Wide
2-66
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation Inch Area

Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC111) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC112) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC113) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC114) Bypass Paper Size Unit (VR1) Width (mm) 115 to 144 inclusive OFF OFF OFF OFF 201 to 231 inclusive 242 to 282 inclusive 125 to 155 inclusive 169 to less than 201 ON OFF OFF OFF 201 to 231 inclusive 225 to less than 288 288 to 330 inclusive ON ON OFF OFF 188 to 235 inclusive 201 to 231 inclusive ON ON ON OFF 242 to less than 268 268 to 288 inclusive 255 to less than 288 ON ON ON ON 288 to less than 301 301 to 330 inclusive Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC111) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC112)
Bypass Section
Paper Size Detected B6R 5.5 8.5 Executive 5.5 8.5R Executive R Letter R Letter
FLS Legal B4 11 14 11 17 A3 A3 Wide
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC113)
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC114)
4036ma2532c0
Bypass Paper Size Unit (VR1)
4036ma2533c0
2-67
A4
Conveyance Section
13. Conveyance Section

13.1 Composition
4036ma2127c0
[1]
4036ma2534c0
[2]
[1]
4036ma2535c0
Key [1] Transport Roller
Name
Function/System Transports paper taken up from Tray1 or Tray2 to the Synchronizing Roller. Drives the Transport Roller Two-phase stepping motor Energized by the Control Board (PWB-MC)
[2]
Intermediate Transport Motor (M14)
2-68
Synchronizing Roller Section
14. Synchronizing Roller Section

14.1 Composition
[4]
4036ma2128c0
[3]
[2]
[1]
4036ma2536c0
Key
Name
Function/System Removes paper dust off the surface of the Synchronizing Roller Paper dust is attracted onto the surface of the roller through static attraction and the Paper Dust Remover removes the paper dust from the roller. Detects OHP transparencies Transports the paper fed by the Transport Roller onto the Transfer Corona Section. Transmits drive from the Main Motor (M1) to the Synchronizing Roller.
[1]
Paper Dust Remover
[2] [3] [4]
OHP Sensor (PC27) Synchronizing Roller Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3)
14.2 Drive
[1] [2]
4036ma2048c1
[1]
Synchronizing Roller
[2]
Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3)
2-69
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Synchronizing Roller control A loop is formed in the paper between the Transport Roller and Synchronizing Roller during the paper transportation to correct skewed paper feeding. The amount of the paper loop can be adjusted using "Loop Adjust" of the Tech. Rep. mode. The ON timing of the Intermediate Transport Motor as the motor is restarted is varied by changing this setting. (This adjustment should be made when a tilted image is printed due to paper skew or a Z-folded paper misfeed occurs at the Synchronizing Roller.) "Top Margin" available from the Tech. Rep. mode should be adjusted based on the image writing start timing. (This adjustment should be made if the image on the copy deviates in the FD direction.)
Start Key ON Synchronizing Roller ON Synchronizing Roller ON
Main Motor (M1) Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28)
4036ma2121c0
Synchronizing Roller
Transport Roller
Loop
Paper
4036ma2129c0
2-70
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 14.3.2 OHP detection
To prevent failed copies of OHP transparencies, whether or not the paper type fed through is a piece of OHP transparency, is detected using the OHP Sensor. OHP detection is made after a loop has been formed in the paper at the Synchronizing Roller. If the paper type setting made using the Paper Type Setting Dial does not match the results of OHP detection, the machine stops copying and gives a paper misfeed warning display.
Position on Paper Type Setting Dial or paper type set from control panel OHP Results of OHP Sensor (PC27) Detection Other than OHP Operation Determines that there is a mismatch of paper type, bringing all mechanisms to an immediate stop. Gives a warning message that there is a mismatch of paper type on the display.
Paper Type Setting Dial Synchronizing Roller
OHP Sensor (PC27)
4036ma2197c0 4036ma2062e0
2-71
Other than OHP
OHP
Fusing Section
15. Fusing Section

15.1 Composition
4036ma2102c0
[1]
4036ma2537c0
[12]
[13]
[1] [2] [3]
[11] [10]
[4] [5]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
4036ma2029c1
Key [1]
Name
Function/System
Separates paper properly to prevent it from winding around the Upper Paper Separator Claw Fusing Roller. Controls the temperature of the Pressure Roller Fusing Pressure Roller Ther Positioned in a non-contact fashion (to prevent the Pressure mistor (TH3) Roller from being damaged) Pressure Roller Fusing Pressure Roller Heater Lamp (H3) Fixes toner by working with the Fusing Roller Heats the Pressure Roller Heater Lamp: 700 W
[2] [3] [4]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Detects an abnormally high temperature of the Pressure Roller Fusing Pressure Roller Ther Positioned in a non-contact fashion (to prevent the Pressure mostat (TS2) Roller from being damaged) Fusing Roller Fusing Belt Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) Gives heat with the Pressure Roller and fixes toner by working with the Pressure Roller Controls the temperature of the Heating Roller Positioned in a contact fashion (at the center of the Heating Roller inside the Fusing Belt)
2-72

Key [9] Name Heating Roller Thermistor/2 (TH2) Function/System
Fusing Section
Controls the temperature of the Heating Roller Positioned in a contact fashion (at the front of the Heating Roller inside the Fusing Belt)
[10]
Heats the Heating Roller Heating Roller Heater Lamp/ For large-sized paper (having a CD width of 216 mm or more) 1 (H1) Heater Lamp: 1000 W Heats the Heating Roller Heating Roller Heater Lamp/ For small-sized paper (having a CD width of less than 216 mm) 2 (H2) Heater Lamp: 790 W Heated to a predetermined temperature by the Heater Lamps provided inside Gives heat to the Fusing Belt
[11]
[12] Heating Roller
[13]
15.2 Drive
[1]
[4] [3]
[5]
[2]
4036ma2553c0
[1] [2] [3]
Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC33) Fusing Retraction Position Sensor (PC34)
[4] [5]
Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Pressure Roller
2-73
Heating Roller Thermostat (TS1)
Detects an abnormally high temperature of the Heating Roller Positioned in a non-contact fashion (to prevent the Fusing Belt from being damaged)
Fusing Section
15.3 Operation
15.3.1 Fusing Roller drive control A. Speed change control Drive for the Fusing Unit is provided by the Fusing Drive Motor. To prevent poor fusing performance, the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor is changed in three steps according to the type of paper used and the copy mode.
Paper Type/Copy Mode Plain paper/Monochrome Plain paper/ACS or color Special paper, high gloss paper Fusing Speed (mm/sec) 165 100 60
B. Speed stabilization To prevent double transferred image or brush effect, the difference between the fusing speed and paper transport speed during image transfer is corrected. The fusing speed is made either faster or slower than the system speed. The two-step speed control is accomplished using the Fusing Paper Loop Control (solenoid) and planetary gears. When the Fusing Paper Loop Control (solenoid) is deenergized, the planetary gears rotate, which sets lower speed. When the solenoid is energized, the planetary gears stop and the higher speed is selected.
Fusing Drive Motor (M2)
Planetary gear Fusing Paper Loop Control Solenoid (SL1)
4036ma2614c0
2-74
Fusing Section
1. The fusing speed in the beginning is set to the higher speed, thereby forming a loop in the paper between the 2nd Image Transfer Roller and the Fusing Roller. 2. When the length of the loop becomes small to deactivate the Fusing Paper Loop Sensor, the fusing speed is switched to the lower level. 3. When the length of the loop becomes large to activate the Fusing Paper Loop Sensor, the fusing speed is again switched to the higher level. 4. The sequence of these operations is repeated so that the fusing speed is automatically changed in two steps according to the loop length. This effectively makes for the difference between the fusing speed and paper transport speed during image transfer.
Pressure Roller Detecting Lever Fusing Paper Loop Sensor (PC4)
Paper 2nd Image Transfer Roller
4036ma2032c1
2-75
Fusing Section 15.3.2
Fusing Roller pressure/retraction mechanism
To ensure prolonged durability of the Fusing Belt, the Pressure Roller is retracted from the Fusing Belt during any time other than a print cycle. (The roller is, however, retracted during a print cycle using envelopes.) The Fusing Pressure Roller/Retraction Motor is turned forward or backward to press the Pressure Roller up against, and retract it from, the Fusing Belt. The Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor detects the pressed position of the Pressure Roller. The retracted position of the Pressure Roller is determined by counting a predetermined number of encoder pulses from the pressed position using the Fusing Retraction Position Sensor. In reality, the retracted position is where the Pressure Roller is lightly pressed against the Fusing Belt. II Composition/Operationn
Pressure Operation
Retraction Operation
Pressure Roller Sector Gear

4036ma2106c0 4036ma2107c0
Pressure/Retraction Timing
Conditions Power Switch ON Not retracted position Heater less than 100 C Warm-up Heater 100 C or more At end Standby Copy *1 Power Save mode ON Heater OFF (cover open, malfunction, etc.) At start At end Pressure/Retraction Operation Pressure Retraction Retraction Retraction Pressure Pressure Retraction Retraction Retraction Pressure Pressure Retraction Retraction Retraction
*1: Retracted (lightly pressed) condition for envelopes
2-76
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 15.3.3 Fusing temperature control
Fusing Section
The surface temperature of the Heating Roller and Pressure Roller are detected using thermistors, and the corresponding Heater Lamps are turned ON or OFF as necessary to maintain the set fusing temperature. Temperature Control during the first-in-the-morning warm-up and setting using plain paper
Warm-up Completed Power Switch ON Start Key ON Canceled
[1] 195 190 180 160 150 130

Heating Roller 100 Thermistor (TH1) Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor (TH3)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
99 sec
4036ma2229c0
[1] [2] [3]
In standby (first in the morning) Heating Roller set temperature: 195 C In standby (first in the morning) Heating Roller temperature: 190 C During a copy cycle
[4] [5]
In standby Heating Roller temperature: 190 C Power Save
A. Warm-up Four different types of warm-up control are employed for varying the set temperature of each roller, thereby preventing fusing performance from being degraded due to environmental changes. Priority is given to the high humidity control.
2-77
Fusing Section

Heating Roller Temperature (C) Pressure Roller Temperature (C)
Warm-up completed state
Remarks If a multi-print cycle is run immediately after the warmup cycle has been completed, the machine produces one printed page only and resumes the print cycle for the rest of printed pages to be produced after the Fusing Pressure Roller temperature reaches 130 C.
First-in-the-morning warm-up completed (Fusing Pressure Roller temperature is 60 C or less)
192
97
Ordinary warm-up completed (Fusing Pressure Roller temperature exceeds 60 C) High humidity warm-up completed (machine interior humidity is 70 % or more)
190
130 Priority is given to this mode if the humidity is 70% or more. Temperature control during Power Save is 160 C for the Heating Roller and 150 C for the Fusing Pressure Roller.
190
150
Recovery from Power Save
190
150
B. During a copy cycle To achieve the intended level of fusing performance, the set temperature of each roller is varied according to the paper type.
Paper Type Plain paper (165 mm/s) Plain paper (100 mm/s) Plain paper (60 mm/s) Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 Envelopes OHP OHP (humidity during a color print cycle exceeds 60%) Heating Roller Set Temperature (C) 190 180 190 185 185 185 185 190 170 Pressure Roller Set Temperature (C) 130 130 150 130 130 130 130 170 160
C. In standby The fusing temperature in the standby state is prevented from being dropped.
Standby State Ordinary standby When the Power Switch is turned ON Machine interior humidity 70% or higher (high humidity) Heating Roller Set Temperature (C) 190 195 190 Pressure Roller Set Temperature (C) 150 130 150
2-78
Fusing Section
D. Power Save Temperature control is provided with a decreased fusing temperature so that power consumption in the standby state can be minimized.
Mode Power Save Heating Roller Set Temperature (C) 160 Pressure Roller Set Temperature (C) 150
15.3.4
Protection against abnormal conditions
The machine provides protection against abnormally high temperature of the Fusing Unit in the following three steps. 1. When the Heating Roller Thermistor/1 detects 230 C, or the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor detects 190C (before the temperature control) or 220C (during the temperature control), the machine displays the malfunction code representing an abnormally high temperature and inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle. (This is an ordinary detection of a malfunction of an abnormally high temperature.) 2. A different protection is provided when the CPU overruns, becoming unable to detect the malfunction of an abnormally high temperature. If the Heating Roller Thermistor/1,2 detects 235 C, or the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor detects 167C (before the temperature control) or 220C (during the temperature control), the heater relay of the DC Power Supply is turned OFF through the Control Board and the power supply to each of the heater lamps is shut down. If the detected temperature thereafter decreases, the heater relay is turned ON again and supply of power to the heater lamps is resumed. The sequence of these operations is repeated until the CPU recovers from the overrun and becomes able to detect the malfunction of an abnormally high temperature. This control allows the power supply to each of the heater lamps to be shut down before the corresponding thermostat operates. It thereby suppresses damage to the Fusing Unit itself. 3. If detection of the abnormally high temperature through approaches 1 and 2 above is not possible due to a defective thermistor or other reason, the thermostat comes into play to shut down the power supply to each of the heater lamps. The Heating Roller Thermostat is rated at 210 C, while the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermostat is rated at 180 C. The ratings do not, however, represent the actual surface temperature of the corresponding rollers, since the thermostats are installed in a non-contact fashion with respect to each of the rollers (ordinary protection against high temperatures).
2-79
Fusing Section
5V 5V TH3 TH1 TH2 5V
TS2
H3
H2
H1
TS1
HETER2 HETER1 HETER3 SSR SSR SSR
24V
Hard Protection
AC
4036ma2109c0
2-80
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation 15.3.5 Detection of a New Fusing Unit
Fusing Section
When a new Fusing Unit is installed in the machine, the life counter is automatically cleared through the machines capability of detecting a new Fusing Unit. The new unit is detected when the Power Switch is turned ON or the Right Door is opened and closed. 15.3.6 PPM control
A. Plain paper When the surface temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller is a predetermined temperature or less for 10 sec. during a print cycle with the machine interior temperature at 18C or less, PPM (printed pages/min) is decreased.
Printed pages/min (PPM) when the Fusing Pressure Roller temperature is decreased Standard temperature 35 26 21 22 17 13 11 115 C or less 28 20.3 15.8 22 17 13 11 110 C or less 20 14.5 11.3 20 14.5 11.3 9.4
System Speed
Paper Length (mm)
216 or less 165 mm/sec Color print 217 to 297 inclusive 298 to 381 inclusive 216 or less 100 mm/sec Monochrome print 217 to 297 inclusive 298 to 381 inclusive 382 or more
B. Color OHP Different types of PPM control are provided according to the mode, regardless of the interior temperature or the Pressure Roller surface temperature during the print cycle. The control does not cover the monochrome mode and any paper size other than A4 and Letter.
Mode OHP continuous paper feed mode OHP + OHP Interleave mode *1 Printed pages/min (PPM) of A4 and Letter 8 5
*1: PPM control is provided only when OHP transparencies are fed through the machine for OHP + OHP Interleave.
2-81
PPM (printed pages/min.) control is provided to ensure the condition of one power outlet for one system and, at the same time, good fusing performance during continuous paper feeding. Only the Heating Roller Heater Lamp is preferentially turned ON during a print cycle. In a continuous print cycle, therefore, the surface temperatures of the Heating Roller and Fusing Pressure Roller decrease, resulting in the fusing performance of the printed image being degraded. Fusing performance is therefore estimated based on the surface temperature of the Pressure Roller. The printed pages/min value is decreased according to the paper length and system speed, thereby achieving the intended level of fusing performance of the printed images (toner).
Paper Exit Section
16. Paper Exit Section

16.1 Composition
4036ma2246c0
[3]
4036ma2550c0
[4] [1] [2] [3]
4036ma2245c0
Key [1] [2] [3] [4]
Name Paper Exit Roller/1 Exit Sensor (PC30) Paper Exit Roller/2 Charge Neutralizing Brush
Function/System Feeds paper out of the machine onto the Paper Exit Tray. Detects a sheet of paper fed out of the machine. Feeds paper out of the machine onto the Paper Exit Tray. Neutralizes any charge left on the paper.
2-82
Paper Exit Section
16.2 Drive
[1]
[2] [3]
4036ma2016c1
[1] [2]
Main Motor (M1) Paper Exit Roller/1
[3]
Paper Exit Roller/2
2-83
Image Stabilization Control
17. Image Stabilization Control

17.1 Overview
The machine provides the following image stabilization control to ensure stabilized copy image.
Purpose Control AIDC intensity control Max. density control Registration control (color shift correction) correction control ATDC control (Y, M, C, Bk) Image transfer output control Control Means
To stabilize image density To stabilize gradation
AIDC Sensor Temperature/Humidity Sensor
To stabilize toner density
ATDC Sensor Temperature/Humidity Sensor
To stabilize image transfer
An explanation is given of the control for each section.

1st Image Transfer Roller 2nd Image Transfer Roller
Toner Supply Motor
PC Drum/ Y
PC Drum/ M
PC Drum/ C
PC Drum/ Bk
ATDC Sensor Toner Replenishing Control
Registration Control
Developing Bias Vb
Grid Voltage Vg
Image Density Gradation Control Correction Data AIDC Table
AIDC Sensor
Transfer ATVC Control OUT/IN To be set on control panel PRT MAX Density PRT Highlight Background Voltage Margin ATDC Level Setting AE Adjust ATDC Toner Supply Temperature/ Humidity Sensor IN OUT
4036ma2060e0
2-84
17.2 Operation
17.2.1 Background margin control The PC Drum Charge Corona grid voltage (Vg) is set for the pattern based on the information provided by the temperature sensor, the PC Drum rotation time, the system speed, and the target surface potential. The background margin becomes the required voltage, thereby correcting changes in charging efficiency as a result of a deteriorated PC Drum and environmental condition changes. 17.2.2 AIDC Sensor LED intensity control
Controls changes in characteristics due to change with time and contamination of the AIDC Sensor, part-to-part variations in the sensors, and change of environment. The intensity (current value) of the LED is adjusted on the surface of the Transfer Belt, on which no toner sticks (background level). 17.2.3 Max. density control II Composition/Operationn
The developing bias (Vb) is adjusted to control changes in the solid density resulting from variations in developing characteristics and LED intensity, variations in sensitivity of the PC Drum, and changes in the environment, durability, and the amount of charge in toner. Patterns are produced on the surface of the Transfer Belt and the AIDC Sensor detects the amount of toner sticking to them. The correction data appropriate for each color is selected based on the correction data with four different levels for each color. The developing bias and grid voltage values that result in the maximum density are calculated from the detected data and stored in memory. 17.2.4 correction control
The intensity of LED in all gradation levels is adjusted to correct changes in gradation characteristics to a linear one. The changes in gradation characteristics are caused by variations in the PC Drum sensitivity and developing characteristics and changes with time and in environment. Patterns are produced on the surface of the Transfer Belt and the AIDC Sensor detects the amount of toner sticking to them. The correction data is calculated using the density measurements of different gradation levels. The optimum LED intensity is set for each of the different gradation levels.
17.3 Operation timing

Mode Mode 1 Mode 2 Operation Timing Reset + Stabilizer mode; a new IU is detected; a new Transfer Belt Unit is detected Stabilizer mode; Left Door is opened and closed; Front Door is opened and closed (IU removed and reinstalled) At the end of a print cycle making a given number of printed pages*1; Power Switch is turned ON; at the end of a print cycle following reset from Sleep; at the end of a print cycle following an event, in which the interior temperature upper limit threshold value is exceeded At the end of a print cycle making a given number of printed pages Gradation correction
Mode 3
Mode 4 Mode 5
*1: Vg and Vb are readjusted if the LED intensity falls outside a predetermined range. (Mode 3) 2-85
17.4 Operation flow

Mode 1 Background margin control AIDC intensity control Max. density control 1 Mode 2 Background margin control AIDC intensity control Max. density control 2 correction control Registration control Mode 3 Background margin control AIDC intensity control Max. density control 2 correction control correction control Mode 4 Mode 5 Background margin control AIDC intensity control Max. density control 2 correction control Test pattern output
4036ma2061e0
correction control Registration control
2-86
Image Processing
18. Image Processing

18.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram
1. Photoelectric conversion
CCD Sensor Board

2. Analog-to-digital conversion
3. Shading correction
Image Processing Board
4. Line-to-line variation correction
5. Zoom/movement processing
6. ACS processing
7. Image data editing
8. AE processing
To the MFP Control Board
The following describes the image processing operations performed by the Scanner Section.
1. A reduction type CCD Sensor is used to read the light reflected off the original and convert the optical data to a corresponding electric signal. To make data processing faster, data transfer and output are done through two channels, one for even-numbered pixels and the other for odd-numbered pixels. 2. The odd and even analog signals output from the CCD Sensor chips are synthesized to form a single string of signal data which is in turn converted to 8-bit digital signals (256 gradation levels). 3. A correction is made of errors that occur due to variations in sensitivity of each CCD chip and the light distribution varying along the length of the Exposure Lamp. The shading correction is made by holding the peak value (i.e., the maximum value of readings taken of multiple lines), to prevent adverse effects on the image due to dust on the shading sheet. 4. Memory called FIFO is employed to compensate for a deviation in the scanning position of the original, which represents a gap between two adjacent CCD chips, thereby matching the output timing of R, G, and B data. Also, the color aberration of the Lens is compensated at this time. 5. FIFO memories are used to enlarge or reduce the image. The image is enlarged by increasing the number of data readings and reduced by decreasing the number of data readings.
2-87
Image Processing
6. The scanning is divided into multiple blocks. The ratio of color or monochrome is calculated for each of these blocks. The machine then determines whether the entire original is colored or monochrome. A histogram of lightness is also created for later AE processing. 7. R, G, and B data are then converted to value and color component data for adjustments of saturation, lightness, and hue. 8. The scanning area is divided into two in the FD direction. The lightness histogram generated through ACS processing is tallied for each four gradation levels. A lightness histogram is then created for AE processing. The AE level of the original is determined based on this histogram and AE processing is performed. The R, G, and B image data is transmitted to MFP Control Board on the Write Section through the interface cable.
2-88
Image Processing
18.2 Write section image processing block diagram

From Scanner Section
MFP Control Board

2. Color correction processing (reflection/density conversion, masking, UCR/BP)
1. Image area discrimination
3. Miscellaneous processing (improved reproduction of black text, edge emphasis, edge expansion, smoothing, color balance, and correction)
4. GBTC compression
5. Input buffer memory
6. File (code) memory Standard: 256 MB Extended memory: 256 MB (option) HDD: 40 G (option) 8. Frame memory Standard: 192MB
7. Memory access coordinator
9. Output buffer memory
10. 600-dpi color shift/skew correction
11. CD position correction 14. Area discrimination FEET 12. GBTC expansion 15. Interpolation 13. 1,800-dpi color shift/skew correction 16. correction
17. Screening
LED Drive Board

18. High-speed LED drive
19. Intensity correction
To each LED Unit
2-89
Image Processing
The following detail the image processing operations performed by MFP Control Board on the Write Section. 1. Each image area, whether it is a color edge area, black edge area, dot area, or a continuous gradation area, is discriminated to optimize edge emphasis and smoothing just right for the image. 2. The color component data are converted to the Y, C, M, and Bk density data. Also, the masking processing, which compensates for the deviation in the spectral reflection characteristics of the toner, and UCR/BP processing are performed on the image data. 3. Other types of processing performed are the improved reproduction of black text, edge emphasis, edge expansion, smoothing, color balance, and correction. 4. Compresses the C, M, Y, and Bk image data to reduce its volume. 5. Temporarily stores the GBTC-compressed image data. 6. Stores the compressed image data. 7. Spreads out the image data stored in the file memory to the frame memory and performs the following control functions: delaying outputs to make up for the distance between the PC Drums of Y, M, C, and Bk and adjusting the different speeds between the Scanner and the Write Section. 8. Stores the Y, M, C, and Bk image data. 9. Temporarily stores the image data output from the frame memory. 10. Corrects skew in the print position at 600 dpi to ensure correct alignment in the main scanning direction between each of the Y, M, C, and Bk LPH assemblies and the PC Drums. 11. Corrects any deviation in the print start position in the main scanning direction that occurs when each of the Y, M, C, and Bk LPH assemblies illuminates the surface of the corresponding PC Drum. 12. Expands the image data using the method opposite to that used in GBTC compression. 13. Corrects skew in the print position at 1,800 dpi to ensure correct alignment in the main scanning direction between each of the Y, M, C, and Bk LPH assemblies and the PC Drums. 14. Discriminates the edges of text and line figures and, according to the results of the area discrimination, performs the Fine Edge Enhanced Technology (FEET) operation. 15. In order to prevent the gradation balance from changing, interpolation converts the resolution only for the continuous gradation areas when resolution changes from 600 dpi to 1,800 dpi when using FEET. 16. Makes the necessary corrections so that the printed gradations have linear characteristics, since the image density of the input image data is not directly proportional to that of the printed image due to the changing developing and PC Drum characteristics. 17. Creates the density distribution of a predetermined pattern to enable outstanding gradation reproduction. 18. Rearranges the image data, which has undergone the processes up to screening, so that the LEDs can then be illuminated and transfer the corrected image data. 19. Adjusts the variations in each of the LEDs, approx. 7,700 chips, to ensure that each emits a uniform intensity of light.
2-90
Other Control
19. Other Control

19.1 Fan control
19.1.1 Construction
[8] [7] [1] [2]
Draws outside air in Exhausts heat
[6]
[3]
[4] [5]
4036ma2049c1
Key [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Name
Function/System
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M15) Cools the Exit Sections Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M16) Cools the Exit Sections Suction Fan Motor (M12) Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21) Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18) Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20) Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9) For stabilized paper transport Cools the DC Power Supply (PU1) There is a filter that removes ozone from the air drawn by this motor to the outside. Draws toner particles Cools the drive mechanism, High Voltage Unit, and DC Power Supply (PU1) Exhausts heat from the Exit Sections and used for deodorization
2-91
Other Control 19.1.2 Operation
A. Fan control
Motor Name Paper Passage Mode Control Conditions Turns at full speed when the Color PC Drum Motor (M5) or Bk PC Motor (M7) is energized. Turns at half speed when the Color PC Drum Motor (M5) or Bk PC Motor (M7) is deenergized. Deenergized in Sleep mode. Turns at full speed when the Color PC Drum Motor (M5) or Bk PC Motor (M7) is energized. Turns at full speed for the period from 0 to 120 sec. after the Color PC Drum Motor (M5) or Bk PC Motor (M7) has been deenergized. Turns at half speed for the period from 121 to 900 sec. after the Color PC Drum Motor(M5) or Bk PC Motor (M7) has been deenergized and then is deenergized. Turns at half speed for the period of 0 to 600 sec. in the Sleep mode before stopping. Turns at full speed when any of the Color PC Drum Motor (M5), Bk PC Motor (M7), Color Developing Motor (M6), or Developing Clutch/Bk (CL2) is energized. Deenergized in conditions other than above. Turns at full speed when the Main Motor (M1) is energized. Turns at full speed for the period of 10 sec. after the Main Motor (M1) has been deenergized. Turns at full speed when the Main Motor (M1) is energized and the Exit Sensor (PC 30) is activated. Turns at half speed Turns at full speed when the Main Motor (M1) and Fusing Drive Motor (M2) are energized. Turns at full speed for 30 sec. after the Main Motor (M1) and Fusing Drive Motor (M2) have been deenergized and then is deenergized. Deenergized Turns at full speed when the Main Motor (M1) and Fusing Drive Motor (M2) are energized. Turns at full speed for 30 sec. after the Main Motor (M1) and Fusing Drive Motor (M2) have been deenergized and then is deenergized. Turns at half speed
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21)
Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18)
Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20)
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 and /3 (M15 and M16)
OHP OHP Interleave Plain paper 2nd side Auto Duplexing Mode other than above In standby
Suction Fan Motor (M12)
Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10)
Power Save mode
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9)
Power Save mode
2-92
Other Control
19.2 Power distribution control at machine power up

19.2.1 Parts operated when the Power Switch is turned ON When the Power Switch is turned ON, the Control Board detects it and sends a control signal to the DC Power Supply. The DC Power Supply then supplies 3.3V DC, 5V DC, 15V DC, and 24V DC to all PWBs and options. It also turns ON the relays in the PWBs, supplying AC power to each of the heater lamps.
24VDC
9990 PWB-IC PWB-C 24VDC

5VDC
SW1
24VDC 5VDC 24VDC 5VDC
9996/9997 (OPTION) 9991 (OPTION) 9994 9993 (OPTION) 9992 (OPTION)
PWB-MC
5VDC 24VDC 5VDC
5VDC 5VDC
PWB-MFP
5VDC 3.3VDC
PWB-LED H1,H2,H3
4036ma2194c0
RY
2-93
PU1 24VDC 5VDC 24VDC 15VDC 5VDC
Control Panel PWB-A
Other Control
19.3 Counter control

19.3.1 Construction
Total Counter
Mechanical Counter (option)
PWB-MFP
Electronic Counter
Key Counter (option)
PWB-MC
Vendor (option)
4036ma2195c0
Name Total Counter
Function/System Shows the cumulative number of copies made in all copy modes A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it Displays the cumulative number of copies and prints made in each of the following copy and print modes Black, full color, mono color, and 2 color Total Counter, Size Counter, 2-Sided Copy Counter, 2-Sided Print Counter, and Scanner Counter Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
Electronic Counter
Counter for exclusively counting monochrome copies Since the Total Counter is available as standard, the number of color Mechanical Counter (option) copies can be calculated by subtracting the Monochrome Counter count from the Total Counter count. Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it The counter that disables copying when counting the predetermined number of copies A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal Counts one when a paper take-up start signal or image forming start signal, whichever occurs earlier, is applied to it Controls enabling or disabling copying according to whether a coin exists or not
Key Counter (option)
Vendor (option)
2-94
9990
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9990 RADF
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
Outline
Product specification ............................................................................................ 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-2 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-2 Mixed original feed ............................................................................................... 1-2 Paper feed prohibited originals .......................................................................... 1-3 Paper feed not guaranteed originals.................................................................. 1-3 II Composition/Operation Mixed original feed chart.................................................................................... 1-2 I Outline Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1
II
1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Drive system ........................................................................................................ 2-2 Paper path............................................................................................................ 2-3 Mechanical operations ......................................................................................... 2-4 Document pick-up mechanism .......................................................................... 2-4 Document take-up/transport mechanism........................................................... 2-5 Document exit mechanism ................................................................................ 2-7 Single-sided document mode ....................................................................... 2-7 Double-sided document mode...................................................................... 2-7 Exit operation flow ........................................................................................ 2-8
4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.5
Turnover mechanism (two-sided mode)............................................................. 2-9 Raised/lowered position detecting mechanism................................................ 2-10 Document size detection ............................................................................ 2-10 Raised/lowered position detection .............................................................. 2-10
4.5.1 4.5.2
I Outline
ii
Product specification
I Outline
1.
1.1
Name
Type
I Outline
Duplexing Document Feeder Paper Take-Up Transport Paper Take-Up from top of stack Endless Belt Transport Mode Loop Turnover Mode U-turn Turnover + Switchback U-Turn Turnover Mode (only in 1-Sided Mode)
Type
Turnover Paper Exit
Installation Document Alignment Document Loading
Screw cramp to the main unit Center Face up
1.2
Functions
Standard Mode 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode
Modes
Thick Paper Mode Mixed Original Detection Mode
1.3
Paper type
1-Sided Mode Standard Mode Plain Paper 35 to 128 g/m2 (9-1/4 to 34 lb) 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13-1/4 to 29-1/4 lb) 1-Sided Mode 129 to 210 g/m2 (34-1/4 to 55-3/4 lb) 1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13-1/4 to 29-1/4 lb)
Type of Document
Thick Paper Mode Plain Paper Mixed Original Detection Mode Plain Paper
Detectable Document Size*1
Metric area B6R to A3 Inch area 5-1/2 8-1/2R / 5-1/2 8-1/2 to 11 17 Document Feed Table: 100 sheets Standard Mode / Mixed Original Detection Mode (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) Original Exit Tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) Document Feed Table: 38 sheets Thick Paper Mode (210 g/m2, 55-3/4 lb) Original Exit Tray: 38 sheets (210 g/m2, 55-3/4 lb)
Capacity
*1 For the Combined Original Detection Mode, Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled Size Combination Table. 1-1
Mixed original feed
1.4
DC24V (supplied from the main unit) DC5V (generated within the 9990)
Power Requirements
Max. Power Consumption
60 W or less 586 mm (W) 519 mm (D) 135 mm (H) 23 inch (W) 20-1/2 inch (D) 5-1/4 inch (H) 14.2 kg (31-1/4 lb)
I Outline
Dimensions Weight
1.5
2.
2.1
Mixed original feed

Mixed original feed chart
For Metric
Max. Original Size Mixed Original Size 297 mm A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R 297 mm A3 OK OK OK OK OK NG NG NG A4 OK OK OK OK OK NG NG NG 257 mm B4 OK OK OK OK OK NG B5 OK OK OK OK OK NG 210 mm A4R OK OK OK NG A5 OK OK OK NG 182 mm 148 mm B5R OK OK A5R OK
257 mm
210 mm 182 mm 148 mm
For Inch
Max. Original Size Mixed Original Size 11 11 17 8-1/2 11 8-1/2 14 8-1/2 8-1/2 11R 5-1/2 8-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 8-1/2R 11 17 OK OK OK OK NG NG 11 8-1/2 5-1/2
8-1/2 11 8-1/2 14 8-1/2 11R 5-1/2 8-1/2 5-1/2 8-1/2R OK OK OK OK NG NG OK OK OK NG OK OK OK NG OK OK OK NG OK
OK NG -
Mixed Original Feed available (Tilted with in 1.5% or less) NO. Mixed Original Feed Can not Set Original
1-2
Mixed original feed
2.2
Paper feed prohibited originals
If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.

Type of Original Sheets stapled or clipped together Sheets glued together Sheets of 211g/m2 (56-1/4 lb) or more Sheets of Mode 110g/m2 (29-1/4 lb) or more in 2-Sided Possible Trouble Take-up failure, damaged sheet, defective drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips
Take-up failure Take-up failure Take-up failure, damaged sheet Sheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in askew Take-up failure Take-up failure Take-up failure Damaged sheet Patched part folded or torn sheet
Sheets folded, torn or wrinkled Sheets severely curled OHP Film (Transparency Film) Label Paper Offset Master Paper Sheets clipped or notched Sheets patched
2.3
Paper feed not guaranteed originals
If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of Original Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 - 15 mm) Heat Sensitive Paper Ink Jet Paper Sheets with smooth surface (Coated Paper) Intermediate paper Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Possible Trouble Dog-eared, exit failure Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes to vertical feeding Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Sheets two-folded or Z-folded (A3 or 11 17) Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead) Sheets penciled Sheets folded Sheets other than detectable-size sheets Transport failure Transport failure, image deformation Take-up failure Contamination Image deformation, multi-page feed, take-up failure Image deficit
1-3
I Outline
Take-up failure, damaged sheet
Mixed original feed
I Outline
Blank page
1-4
Overall composition
1.
[1]
Overall composition
[2] [3] [4]
[6]
[5] [7] [8]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Hookup Cord Take-Up Cover Document Feed Tray Exit Cover
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Turnover Cover Document Guide Transport Belt Magnet
2-1
Drive system
2.
Drive system
Turnover/Exit Drive Mechanism
Document Transport Drive Mechanism
Document Take-Up/Feeding Drive Mechanism
2-2
Paper path
3.
Paper path
Single-sided Document Mode
Double-sided Document Mode
2-3
Mechanical operations
4.
4.1
Document pick-up mechanism
The Document Pick-Up Section consists of the Document Stoppers, Pick-Up Rollers, Take-Up Roller and Separation Roller, and this section is driven by the Take-Up Motor. The Pick-Up Rollers stay at their upper position during the standby state and are lowered when taking-up an original. The Document Stoppers stay at their lower position during the standby state and retract to their upper position when taking-up an original. The originals are separated and only one sheet is taken-up by the Take-Up and Separation Rollers. A torque limiter is installed to the Separation Roller to provide the separating operation.
Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Document Stopper
Pick-Up Rollers
Document Stopper
Take-Up Motor (M1-DF) Take-Up Roller Separation Roller
2-4
4.2
Document take-up/transport mechanism
The Pick-Up and Take-Up Rollers are rotated by the Take-Up Motor and an original is taken-up and transported to the Registration Roller. Then, the original is transported onto the Original Glass by the Registration Roller driven by the Take-Up Motor, and the Transport Belt driven by the Transport Motor.
Transport Motor (M2-DF)
Take-Up Motor (M1-DF)
Document Stoppers
Transport Belt
Take-Up Roller Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Pick-Up Sensor (PC2-DF) Registration Roller Registration Clutch (CL1-DF)
2-5
Pick-Up Rollers
A. Document take-up operation flow

Registration Clutch: ON Take-Up Motor: Forward Rotation Pick-Up Rollers go down and rotated via timing belt & gears At the same time, Document Stoppers go up An original is taken-up and transported. A loop is formed to correct the skew feeding after Registration Sensor is activated. Take-Up Motor: OFF Registration Clutch: OFF (release of Registration Roller) Take-Up Motor: Backward Rotation The original is transported. Pick-Up Sensor: ON Start of the original size detection in the feeding direction Take-Up Motor: OFF
B. Document transport operation flow

Transport Motor: Forward Rotation Take-Up Motor: Backward Rotation The original is transported onto the Original Glass. The original size is determined when Registration Sensor: OFF Take-Up Motor: OFF when Pick-Up Sensor: OFF Transport Motor: OFF when the original is reached to its reference position Registration Clutch: ON
2-6
4.3
4.3.1
Document exit mechanism

Single-sided document mode
The original transported by the Transport Belt is sent to the switchback section and then ejected onto the Exit Tray with its face-down in order to keep the original pages in proper order.
Exit Motor (M3-DF)
Turnover Gate
4.3.2
Double-sided document mode
In the Double-Sided Mode, an original which has had its 2nd side scanned is ejected onto the Exit Tray without the turn-over motion. (Face-down Ejection)
Exit Motor (M3-DF) Exit Gate
2-7
Mechanical operations 4.3.3
Exit operation flow
A. Document exit motion in single-sided mode

Exit Motor: Forward Rotation Transport Motor: Forward Rotation The original is transported to the switchback section. Transport Motor: OFF after the original leaves from the Transport Belt Exit Motor: OFF after passing a specified time from Turnover Sensor: OFF Exit Motor: Backward Rotation The original is transported to the Exit Roller. The rotation speed of the Exit Motor is reduced before the Exit Sensor goes OFF. The original is ejected on the Exit Tray with lower speed. Exit Motor: OFF
B. Document exit motion in double-sided mode

Exit Solenoid: ON Exit Motor: Forward Rotation Transport Motor: Forward Rotation The original is transported to the exit section. Transport Motor: OFF after the original leaves from the Transport Belt Turnover Sensor: OFF Exit Solenoid: OFF after passing a specified time The rotation speed of the Exit Motor is reduced before the Exit Sensor goes OFF. The original is ejected on the Exit Tray with lower speed. Exit Motor: OFF
2-8
4.4
Turnover mechanism (two-sided mode)
In the Double-Sided Mode, an original which has its 1st side scanned is turned-over and then transported to the scan position again for the 2nd side scanning.
Exit Motor (M3-DF)
Turnover Gate
A. Turnover operation flow

Exit Motor: Forward Rotation Transport Motor: Forward Rotation Turnover Solenoid: ON (Switching of paper path in turnover section) Turnover Sensor: ON Transport Motor: OFF Exit Motor: OFF Transport Motor: Backward Rotation Exit Motor: Forward Rotation Starts the original transportation to its scan position Turnover Sensor: OFF Turnover Solenoid: OFF Exit Motor: OFF Transport Motor: OFF
2-9
4.5
4.5.1
Raised/lowered position detecting mechanism

Document size detection
The 15 degree Open Detection Mechanism enables the main unit to detect the document size when the RADF is used as the Original Cover of the main unit, there is the Lever Actuator provided in the RADF body that blocks or unblocks a sensor to initiate a reconfirmation of the original size as read by the original size detection sensors. 4.5.2 Raised/lowered position detection
The Raised/Lowered Position Detection Mechanism uses a magnet installed in the RADF body to allow the main unit to know that the RADF is raised or lowered. This magnet actuates the Size Reset Switch on the main unit to perform this operation.
Magnet
Lever Actuator
Original Cover Detecting Lever
Original Cover Detecting Lever
2-10
9991
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9991 Duplex
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Outline
Product specifications .......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I Outline II Composition/Operation Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1
II
1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Center cross section ............................................................................................ 2-2 Drive system ........................................................................................................ 2-3 Mechanical operations ......................................................................................... 2-4 Switchback mechanism ..................................................................................... 2-4 Switchback operation.................................................................................... 2-4 Paper exit roller drive coupling mechanism .................................................. 2-4 Switchback Motor Control............................................................................. 2-4 Transport and duplex paper take-up operation ............................................. 2-5 Duplex Unit Transport Motor Control ............................................................ 2-5 Operations in 2-sided printing with a single sheet of paper resident in the system ................................................................................................ 2-6 Operations in 2-sided printing with two sheets of paper resident in the system ................................................................................................ 2-8 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2
Transport and duplex paper take-up mechanism............................................... 2-5
2-sided printing method ..................................................................................... 2-6
I Outline
ii
I Outline
1.
1.1
Type
I Outline
Duplex Unit Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Mounted on the right side door of main unit Center
1.2
Paper type
Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
Paper Type Paper Size
A5R to A3 Wide, 5-1/2 8-1/2R to 12-1/4 18
1.3
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V 5 % (supplied from the main unit)
Power Requirements
Max. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight
17 W or less 109 mm (W) 440 mm (D) 344 mm (H) 4-1/4 inch (W) 17-1/4 inch (D) 13-1/2 inch (H) 2.9 kg (6-1/2 lb)
1.4
1-1
I Outline
Blank page
1-2
Overall composition
1. Overall composition
[1]
[1]
Duplex Unit Door
2-1
Center cross section
2.
[6] [1] [5]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1] [2] [3]
Duplex Unit Transport Roll 2 Duplex Unit Transport Roller 2 Duplex Unit Transport Roll 3
[4] [5] [6]
Duplex Unit Transport Roller 3 Duplex Unit Transport Roll 1 Duplex Unit Transport Roller 1
2-2
Drive system
3.
Drive system
Switchback Drive Mechanism
Duplex Unit Transport Drive Mechanism
2-3
4.
4.1
4.1.1
Switchback mechanism
Switchback operation
The Paper Exit Roller of the main unit is used to subject the 1-sided print to a switchback sequence so that the 1-sided print is to be transported through the Duplex Unit.
Feeding the Paper into Duplex Unit
Paper Exit Roller
Exit Sensor (PC30)
4.1.2
Paper exit roller drive coupling mechanism
When the Duplex Unit is mounted, the tip of the Duplex Unit Lever raises the Idle Lever to cut off the drive from the main unit (Fusing Rollers) and the Paper Exit Roller is driven by the Switchback Motor.
Switchback Motor (M1-DU)
Idle Lever Duplex Unit Lever
Paper Exit Roller
4.1.3
Switchback Motor Control
Rotation of the Switchback Motor is controlled by the signals output from the Duplex Control Board. 2-4
4.2
4.2.1
Transport and duplex paper take-up mechanism

Transport and duplex paper take-up operation
Drive for the Duplex Unit is provided by the Duplex Unit Transport Motor.
Duplex Unit Transport Roller 1
Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU)
4.2.2
Duplex Unit Transport Motor Control
Rotation of the Duplex Unit Transport Motor is controlled by the signals output from the Duplex Control Board.
2-5
4.3
2-sided printing method
The following two types of 2-sided printing methods are available.

2-sided printing with a single sheet of paper resident in the system 2-Sided Printing Methods 2-sided printing with two sheets of paper resident in the system (FD length 215.9 mm or less)
4.3.1
Operations in 2-sided printing with a single sheet of paper resident in the system
Operation 1 Paper Exit Roller The first sheet of paper is taken up and fed in from the main unit drawer and the main unit starts the first print cycle to produce the print image of the second page of the original.
Operation 2 Immediately before the 1-sided print leaves the Paper Exit Roller, the direction of rotation of the Paper Exit Roller is reversed and the 1-sided print is transported toward and into the Duplex Unit.
Operation 3 The 1-sided print moves through the Duplex Unit and is directly subject to the second print cycle without being stopped.
2
Operation 4 The main unit carries out the second print cycle to produce the print image of the first page of the original on the other side of the 1-sided print.
2-6
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9991 Duplex Operation 5 While feeding the first 2-sided print out of itself, the main unit carries out the first print cycle for the second sheet of paper to produce the print image of the fourth page of the original.
2 1 4
Steps 2 through 5 are repeated. A4, 2 originals, 1 to 2 print mode

Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Exit Sensor (PC10) Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Forward Backward Rotation Rotation Forward Rotation
2-7
Operations in 2-sided printing with two sheets of paper resident in the system
Operation 1 Paper Exit Roller The first sheet of paper is taken up and fed in from the main unit drawer and the main unit starts the first print cycle to produce the print image of the second page of the original.
Operation 2 Immediately before the first 1-sided print leaves the Paper Exit Roller, the direction of rotation of the Paper Exit Roller is reversed and the first 1-sided print is transported toward and into the Duplex Unit. At the same time, the second sheet of paper is taken up and fed into the main unit.
Operation 3 The main unit carries out the first print cycle for the second sheet of paper to produce the print image of the fourth page of the original. At the same time, the first 1-sided print is transported through the Duplex Unit.
4 2
Operation 4 The main unit produces the print image of the first page of the original on the first 1-sided print that has been fed through the Duplex Unit. At the same time, the second sheet of paper is subjected to a switchback sequence at the exit section and fed into the Duplex Unit. At the same time, the third sheet of paper is taken up and fed into the main unit.
2-8
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9991 Duplex Operation 5 While feeding the first 2-sided print out, main unit produces the print image of the 6th page of the original on the third sheet of paper. The second sheet of paper will wait in front of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller 3 until the third sheet of paper has been operated switch back sequence.
2 1 6 4
1 4
Operation 7 The main unit carries out the first print cycle for the second sheet of paper to produce the print image of the third page of the original. At the same time, the first 1-sided print for the third is transported through the Duplex Unit. At the same time, the forth sheet of paper is taken up and fed into the main unit. Operation 8 While feeding the second 2-sided print out, main unit produces the print image of the 8th page of the original on the fourth sheet of paper. The third sheet of paper will wait in front of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller 3 until the fourth sheet of paper has been operated switch back sequence.
2 1
4 3 2 1 8 6
Steps 6 through 8 are repeated.
2-9
Operation 6 Immediately before the first 1-sided print leaves the Paper Exit Roller, the direction of rotation of the Paper Exit Roller is reversed and the first 1-sided print for the third sheet is transported toward and into the Duplex Unit. At the same time, the second sheet of paper is fed into the main unit again.
6 2
A4, 2 originals, 2 to 2 print mode

Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Exit Sensor (PC30) OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
Forward Rotation Backward Rotation Forward Backward Rotation Rotation Forward Rotation
Switchback Motor (M1-DU)
Duplex Unit Transport ON Motor (M2-DU) OFF Duplex Unit Transport ON Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) OFF
2-10
9992
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9992 Paper Feed
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Outline
Product specification ............................................................................................ 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I Outline II Composition/Operation Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1
II
1. 2. 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Drive system ........................................................................................................ 2-2 Mechanical operations ......................................................................................... 2-3 Vertical transport drive mechanism ................................................................... 2-3 Elevator tray mechanism ................................................................................... 2-4 Shift gate/shifter drive mechanism..................................................................... 2-5 Paper empty detection....................................................................................... 2-6
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9992 Paper Feed
I Outline
ii
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9992 LCC
I Outline
1.
1.1
Type
I Outline
Large Capacity (Cassette) Tray Front loading type LCT Desk type Center
1.2
Paper type
Paper Type Recycled paper Paper Size Capacity A4, 8-1/2 11
2500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb)
1.3
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V 5 % 45 W or less 570 mm (W) 263 mm (H) 548 mm (D) 22-1/2 inch (W) 10-1/4 inch (H) 21-1/2 inch (D) 25.9 kg (57 lb)
1.4
1-1
I Outline
Blank page
1-2
Overall composition
[2] [3]
[1]
[6]
[4] [5]
[1] [2] [3]
Sub Tray Main Tray Vertical Transport Rollers
[4] [5] [6]
Right Door Vertical Transport Rolls Front Cover
2-1
Drive system
2.
Drive system
Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism
Main Tray Lift-Up Drive Mechanism
Shifter Gate Drive Mechanism Shifter Drive Mechanism
2-2
3.
3.1
Vertical transport drive mechanism
The Paper Feed Motor drives the Pick-up Roller and Paper Take-up Roller to take up and feed a sheet of paper into the main unit. Then, the Transport Roller Motor transports the paper through the vertical transport section. The Pick-up Roller takes up sheets of paper and the Paper Take-up and Separation Rollers ensure that only one sheet of paper is separated and fed into the main unit. When the drawer is slid in, the lever is pushed to lower the Pick-up Roller. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor then detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised. The Upper Paper Empty Sensor detects when paper in the drawer runs out.
Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF, M123-PF) Transport Roller Motor (M120-PF, M121-PF)
Lever
Pick-up Roller
Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF, PC123-PF)
Feed Roller
Separation Roller
Upper Paper Empty Sensor (PC115-PF, PC124-PF) Actuator
Pick-up Roller Home Position
Pick-up Roller Feed Position
2-3
3.2
Elevator tray mechanism
The Main Tray is suspended by the cables at the front and rear. As the Elevator Motor turns forward or backward, the cables are wound to raise or lower the tray. The Tray Lower Position Sensor detects the tray at its lower limit position.
Cables
Sub Tray
Main Tray Elevator Motor (M5-LCT)
Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT)
2-4
3.3
Shift gate/shifter drive mechanism
If the Main Tray runs out of paper, while the Sub Tray is loaded with paper, the paper stack on the Sub Tray is moved to the Main Tray. At this time, the Shift Gate Motor is energized to retract the front and rear Shift Gates. Then, the Shift Motor is energized to move the Shifter so that the paper stack on the Sub Tray is moved onto the Main Tray. The Shifter continues moving and stops when the Shifter Return Position Sensor is activated. When the Drawer Release button is thereafter pressed, the Shifter starts moving and stops as soon as the Shifter Home Position Sensor is activated.
Shift Gate Motor Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT)
Shift Motor (M4-LCT) Shift Gate
Shifter
Sub Tray
Main Tray
2-5
Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT)
3.4
Paper empty detection
Paper empty detection of Main Tray is performed by Paper Empty Board. Paper empty detection of Sub Tray is performed by Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor.
Transport Roller Motor (M2-LCT) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT)
Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC9-LCT)
Paper Empty Board (PWB-E LCT)
2-6
9993/9994
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9993/9994 Paper Feed
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Outline
Product specifications .......................................................................................... 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I Outline II Composition/Operation Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1
II
1. 2. 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Drive system ........................................................................................................ 2-2 Mechanical operations ......................................................................................... 2-3 Vertical transport drive mechanism ................................................................... 2-3 Paper lifting motion ............................................................................................ 2-4 Paper size detection .......................................................................................... 2-5 Paper level indicator mechanism ....................................................................... 2-6
I Outline
ii
I Outline
1.
1.1
Type
I Outline
2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device Desk type Center
1.2
Paper type
Paper Type Recycled paper Paper Size Capacity
A5R to A3, 5-1/2 8-1/2R to 11 17 3rd Drawer 4th Drawer 500 sheets 500 sheets
1.3
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V 5 % 15 W or less 570 mm (W) 263 mm (H) 548 mm (D) 22-1/2 inch (W) 10-1/4 inch (H) 21-1/2 inch (D) 9993: 22.0 kg (48-1/2 lb) 9994: 25.9 kg (57 lb)
1.4
1-1
I Outline
Blank page
1-2
Overall composition
<9993>
[2] [1] [1]
<9994>
[2]
[3] [4] [4]
[3]
[1] [2]
Lifting Plate Trailing Edge Stop
[3] [4]
Right Door Edge Guides
2-1
Drive system
2.
Drive system
<9993>
<9994>
2-2
3.
3.1
Vertical transport drive mechanism
Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF, M123-PF)
Transport Roller Motor (M120-PF, M121-PF)
Lever
Pick-up Roller
Lift-up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF, PC123-PF)
Polyethylene Sheet
Feed Roller
Separation Roller
Paper Empty Sensor (PC115-PF, PC124-PF) Actuator
Pick-up Roller Home Position
Pick-up Roller Feed Position
2-3
The Paper Feed Motor drives the Pick-up Roller and Paper Take-up Roller to take up and feed a sheet of paper into the main unit. Then, the Transport Roller Motor transports the paper through the vertical transport section. The Pick-up Roller takes up sheets of paper and the Paper Take-up and Separation Rollers ensure that only one sheet of paper is separated and fed into the main unit. When the drawer is slid in, the lever is pushed to lower the Pick-up Roller. The Lift-up Upper Limit Sensor then detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised. The Paper Empty Sensor detects when paper in the drawer runs out. The polyethylene sheet reduces resistance between a curled sheet of paper and guide, thereby preventing skewed feeding.
3.2
Paper lifting motion
When the drawer is slid into the main unit and the Set Sensor is activated, the Lift-up Motor starts rotating to raise the Paper Lifting Plate. The paper stack of the drawer pushes up the Pick-up Roller. When the upper limit position is detected through the action of the actuator, it stops raising the paper lifting plate. As paper is consumed during the print cycle and the Pick-up Roller is lowered, the Lift-up Motor is energized until the Lift-up Upper Limit Sensor is blocked again. A. When the drawer is slid in 1. The paper lifting plate goes up and the top surface of the paper stack pushes up the roller. 2. The lifting motion stops as soon as the sensor detects the upper limit position.
Lift-up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF, PC-123-PF)
B. During a print cycle 1. As the paper is consumed, the sensor is unblocked. 2. The paper lifting plate goes up.
Lift-up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF, PC-123-PF)
2-4
3.3
Paper size detection
When the Trailing Edge Stop of the drawer is moved, the circular plate located on the bottom of the drawer turns, allowing the four FD Paper Size Sensors on the FD Paper Size Detection Board. Moving the Edge Guide activates or deactivates the two CD Paper Size Sensors through the cutout in the lever. The combination of the four FD Paper Size Sensors and two CD Paper Size Sensors that are either activated or deactivated determines the size of the paper loaded in the drawer. The Tray Set Sensor detects that the drawer is slid into position as it is slid in. Length Detection
Circular Plate
FD Paper Size Detection Board (PWB-I3 PF, PWB-I4 PF)
FD Paper Size Sensors
Width Detection
Tray Set Sensor (PC122-PF, PC-121-PF)
Lift-up Motor CD Paper Size Sensor 2 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC114-PF, PC123-PF) (PC119-PF, PC128-PF) (PC118-PF, PC127-PF)
2-5
3.4
Paper level indicator mechanism
All drawers now use the universal paper size tray for greater functionality. There is a window in the front cover of the drawer that serves as the Paper Level Indicator showing the amount of paper that is still available for use. A red lever is attached to the paper lifting plate of the drawer and as the paper lifting plate raises, the red lever becomes visible in the window. The more the red lever is visible, the lesser the amount of paper will be available for use.
Lever
Paper Level Indicator on the front cover of the drawer
Operated by the paper lifting plate of the drawer
2-6
9996
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
Outline
Product specification ............................................................................................ 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Non-Sort ....................................................................................................... 1-1 Sort ............................................................................................................... 1-1 Sort staple .................................................................................................... 1-2 II Composition/Operation Saddle staple................................................................................................ 1-2 I Outline Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
Stapling.............................................................................................................. 1-2 No. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple) ............................................................ 1-3 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-3 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-3
II
1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Drive system ........................................................................................................ 2-2 Paper path............................................................................................................ 2-3 Mechanical operations ......................................................................................... 2-4 Horizontal transport mechanism........................................................................ 2-4 Paper path switching mechanism ................................................................. 2-4 Finisher paper transport mechanism ............................................................ 2-5 Non-sort mode.............................................................................................. 2-6 Sort mode..................................................................................................... 2-7 Staple Mode ................................................................................................. 2-7 Center staple booklet mode.......................................................................... 2-8 Paper stacking with finishing tray.................................................................. 2-9 Aligning mechanism ................................................................................... 2-10 Offsetting operation .................................................................................... 2-11 Exiting operation......................................................................................... 2-12 Types and positions of staples.................................................................... 2-13 Stapling unit moving mechanism ................................................................ 2-14 Staple operation ......................................................................................... 2-15 Stapling unit................................................................................................ 2-16 i 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4
Finishing tray mechanism .................................................................................. 2-6
Stapling unit ..................................................................................................... 2-13
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 I Outline 4.4.3 4.4.4 Stapling unit moving control ....................................................................... 2-17 Elevator tray mechanism ............................................................................ 2-18 Overall composition .................................................................................... 2-19 Transport operation in saddle section......................................................... 2-20 Folding mechanism .................................................................................... 2-24 Paper folding start position......................................................................... 2-25
Booklet tray...................................................................................................... 2-19
ii
I Outline
1.
1.1
Type Installation Document Alignment Supplies
Type
I Outline
Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled Elevator Tray Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled Elevator Tray Multi Staple Finisher with Saddle (Booklet) Freestanding Center Staple Cartridge
1.2
Functions
No. of Holes (optional) Metric: 4holes, Inch: 2holes / 3holes Non-Sort Modes Normal Sort Sort Staple Saddle Staple
1.3
1.3.1
Paper type
Non-Sort
Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
A4R / 8B4/ 1/211R 8-1/214 or smaller or larger
Paper Type
Plain Paper
A6R to A3 Wide 5-1/2 8-1/2R/ 5-1/2 8-1/2 to 12-1/4 18
60 to 256 g/m2 16 to 68 lb
No. of Sheets Height
1000 150 mm
500 75 mm
Max. Min. Envelop OHP Film CD311.15 86 mm Label Paper mm Thick Paper FD457.2 139.7 mm mm
20 sheets
1.3.2
Sort
Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity
A4R / 8B4/ 1/211R 8-1/214 or smaller or larger No. of Sheets Height 1000 150 mm 500 75 mm
Paper Type
Plain Paper
B5R/B5 to A3 8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11 to 11 17
60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
1-1
Product specification 1.3.3 Sort staple

Paper Size
Paper Type
Weight Normal Mode 60 to 90
Tray Capacity
A4R / 8B4/ 1/211R 8-1/214 or smaller or larger No. of Sheets Height No. of Sets 1000 150 mm 30 500 75 mm 30
Exit Tray

Normal Mode *1
Plain Paper Cardboard
B5R/B5 to A3 8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11 to 1117
I Outline
g/m2 16 to 24 lb Cover Mode 60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55-1/2 lb
A4R/8- B4/81/2 1/214 11R or or larger Elevator Tray smaller 2 to 50 2 to 25
* The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high-density images. (Color Wise: 3 to 20 sheets) 1.3.4 Saddle staple
Paper Size A4R, B4, A3 8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11, 8-1/2 14 11 17 Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled
Paper Type
60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
Plain Paper
10 sets (No. of Sheets to be 2 to 10 sheets Stapled: 6 to 10 sheets) Booklet Tray (Max. 40 20 sets pages) (No. of Sheets to be Stapled: 2 to 5 sheets)
1.4
Stapling
Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (5000 staples) Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples) Rear: Parallel 1 point
Staple Filling Mode Staple Detection
Stapling Position
Front: Parallel 1 point Center: Parallel 2 points
Stapled Paper Size Manual Staple Folding Mode Folding Position
B5R/B5 to A3, 8-1/2 11R / 8-1/2 11 to 11 17 None Roller Pressure Folding Center of Paper
1-2
1.5
No. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple)
A. A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller

No. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 30 31 to 50 No. of Sets Rear: Parallel 100 80 60 30 30 Center: Parallel 40 40 40 30 30 30 sets or 1000 sheets Front: Parallel
40 40 30 30
B. B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger

No. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 25 No. of Sets Rear: Parallel 100 80 40 Center: Parallel 50 40 40 30 sets or 1000 sheets Front: Parallel 50 40 40
1.6
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V (generated by Finisher)
Power Requirements
Max. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight
65 W or less 601 mm (W) 933 mm (H) 603 mm (D) 23-3/4 inch (W) 36-3/4 inch (H) 23-3/4 inch (D) 41.6 kg (91-3/4 lb)
1.7
1-3
I Outline
40
I Outline
Blank page
1-4
Overall composition
[1] [2] [3]
[5] [6]
[7]
[4] [1] [2] [3] [4] Elevator Tray Upper Door Front Door Booklet Tray [5] [6] [7] Paper Guide Rear Door Hookup Cord
2-1
Drive system
2.
Drive system
Stapling Drive Mechanism
Entrance Drive Mechanism
Tray Drive Mechanism Saddle Drive Mechanism
Aligning Drive Mechanism
2-2
Paper path
3.
Paper path
2-3
4.
4.1
4.1.1
Horizontal transport mechanism
Paper path switching mechanism
The path along which the paper is transported is selected with the Entrance Switching Solenoid. During a 2-sided print mode, the solenoid is energized to feed the paper into the lower path and then feed it back to the main unit. In a 1-sided print mode, and when a 2-sided printed page is fed in the 2-sided print mode, the Entrance Switching Solenoid is deenergized so that the paper can be transported to the Finisher.
Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-HO) Solenoid: Energized
Solenoid: Deenergized
2-4
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.1.2 Finisher paper transport mechanism
Drive from the Transport Motor turns the Transport Roller to transport paper fed from the main unit onto the Finisher. The Transport Roller on the Finisher side is driven by the Transport Motor to feed the paper through the Finisher.
Horizontal Unit side

Transport Roller
Finisher side
Transport Motor (M1-FN) Transport Roller
2-5
4.2
4.2.1
Finishing tray mechanism

Non-sort mode
In the Non Sort Mode, Paper is taken back onto the Finishing Tray and then fed out onto the Elevator Tray.
Elevator Tray Paper
Paper Transport
Finishing Tray Elevator Tray
2-6
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.2.2 Sort mode
In the Sort Mode, Paper is taken back onto the Finishing Tray and shifted to the front or rear side with the Aligning Plate. Then, a stack of paper per set is fed out onto the Elevator Tray. However, even if printing has not been completed for all sets of prints, when 10 sheets for the large size whose length is longer than 300mm or 30 sheets for the small size whose length is shorter than 299mm are stacked, a set of sheets is fed out onto the Elevator Tray.
Paper Stacking for 4 sets in Sort Mode

4th set 3rd set 1st set 2nd set
Paper Transport
Finishing Tray Shifted with the Aligning Plate for each job Elevator Tray
4.2.3
Staple Mode
In the Staple Mode, when one complete set of prints is fed out onto the Finishing Tray, stapling is performed. A stack of stapled paper is then fed out onto the Elevator Tray.
Paper Transport
Finishing Tray Stapling for one set of prints Elevator Tray
2-7
Center staple booklet mode
In Center Staple Booklet Mode, A stack of paper fed onto the Finishing Tray is stapled (at two places) and then transported to the Saddle Section. The paper transported to the saddle section is folded, and then fed out onto the Booklet Tray. The maximum number of the Center Staple Booklet is ten sheets.
Paper Transport
Finishing Tray 2-Point center stapling Saddle Section Folding Booklet Tray
2-8
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.2.5 Paper stacking with finishing tray
After the paper has been fed through the Exit Roller, the paper drops onto the Finishing Tray. Then, the Paddle taps the top of the paper twice (once for the additional sheets) so that the trailing edge of the paper reaches the Finishing Tray Stopper. After Paddle operation is finished, Swing Guide will be lowered to prevent curling of paper. The Paddle Motor provides the drive for the Paddle and Its home position is detected with the Paddle Home Position Sensor.
Paper Aligning Plate Exit Roller Paddle Upper Exit Roller
Swing Guide
Finishing Tray Stopper Paper Exit Belt Lower Exit Roller
2-9
Aligning mechanism
Two Aligning Plates are moved by drive of the Front, or Rear Aligning Motor in the forward or reverse direction. The Aligning Plates home position is detected with the Front, or Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor. With reference to this home position, the amount of movement of the Aligning Plate is determined.
Rear Aligning Plate
Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN)
Shield Plate
Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN) Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Front Aligning Plate Paper Shield Plate Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN)
(Front Side)
2-10
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.2.7 Offsetting operation
Whenever the paper is stacked, it is moved toward the front or rear side by the Front or Rear Aligning Plate. Accordingly, the offsetting operation is made whenever the paper is fed onto the Finishing Tray. Offset to Front Side
Rear Aligning Plate
Offset to Rear Side

Rear Aligning Plate
Paper
Paper
Elevator Tray
Front Aligning Plate
Elevator Tray
Front Aligning Plate
2-11
Exiting operation
The Paddle, driven by the Paddle Motor, makes the Swing Guide move down and then the paper is taken up with the Upper, and Lower Exit Rollers. Next, the Exit Motor rotates in the forward direction to transport the paper taken up with the Exit Rollers toward the Exit Section by the Exit Rollers and the Exit Belt. The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor turns OFF and then the Swing Guide moves up after the Motor has been driven for a given number of pulses. The Exit Motor is driven to transport a stack of paper with the Separators, of the Exit Belt, rotating in synchronization with the Lower Exit Roller onto the Elevator Tray.
Paddle
Elevator Tray Exit Belt
Swing Guide Upper Exit Roller
Stopper Lower Exit Roller Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) Separator
2-12
4.3
4.3.1
Stapling unit
Types and positions of staples
Shown here are the different stapling positions used with the 9996 Finisher.
Type Corner stapling (Rear) Corner stapling (Front) 2-Point stapling 2-Point center stapling 8.511, 8.514, 1117 A4, A3 Paper Size (Inch area) 8.511, 8.511R, 8.514, 1117 Paper Size (Metric area) A4R, A4, A3
Corner stapling (Rear)
Corner stapling (Front)
1 2 3
2-Point stapling
2-Point center stapling

3 6 4 5 1 2 5 6 7 8 4 5
1 2 3
3 4
7 8
2-13
Stapling unit moving mechanism
When the Power Switch is turned ON, or the Front Door is opened and closed, the Stapling Unit is moved to the front side with the forward rotation of the Slide Motor and stopped at the position where the Slide Home Position Sensor located at the bottom of the Staple Unit is blocked by the Light Shield Plate. The Stapling Unit is moved to the rear side with the backward rotation of the Slide Motor and stopped at its standby position. This standby position is determined by the number of pulses input to the Slide Motor since it is a stepping type motor.
Stapling Unit
Shield Plate Slide Motor (M8-FN) Slide Home Position Sensor (FI18-FN)
Rear Side
2-14
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.3.3 Staple operation
After the paper stacking and alignment operation on the Finishing Tray have been completed, a stack of paper is taken up with the Upper, and Lower Exit Rollers by moving the Swing Guide down with the Paddle Motor rotating in the reverse direction. Stapling is performed by moving the Stapling Unit according to the specified stapling position. However, if stapling is made at one place at the rear side, it is made at the stand-by position without movement of the Stapler Unit. If the Stapling Unit is moved toward the front side, the Finishing Tray Stopper is lowered.
Paper Swing Guide Upper Exit Roller
Finishing Tray Stopper Elevator Tray
Lower Exit Roller
Stapling Unit
2-15
Mechanical operations 4.3.4 Stapling unit
The Stapling operation is accomplished by a Cam rotated once with the Staple/Folding Motor. The Home position of this Cam is detected with the Staple Drive Home Position Sensor. If the Staple Drive Home Position Sensor is OFF, the Staple/Folding Motor rotates in the forward direction until the Sensor is blocked or the signal is ON, which designates that the position of the Cam is ready for the next stapling operation. The Staple Detecting Sensor detects if the Staple Cartridge is in the Unit and if the staples are in the Staple Cartridge. A Self-Priming Sensor detects if the staples are positioned at the end of the Staple Cartridge. This Finisher is equipped with the safety protection mechanism. The Staple/Folding Motor will not be turned ON without an ON condition (with Swing Guide closed) of the Front and Rear Staple Safety Switches.
Cam
2-16
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.3.5 Stapling unit moving control
The Stapling Unit is moved with the Slide Motor and its home position is detected with the Slide Home Position Sensor. Regardless of the staple mode or paper size, the stapling unit always returns to the stand by position on the rear side. <For the Corner stapling Front Position> The Stapling Unit stands by on the rear side, and then move to the staple position corresponding to the paper size at each stapling operation. <When the Corner stapling Rear Position is used> The Stapling Unit is at the home position on the rear side. The staple position is the same as standby home position. The staple position of 2-point stapling at the rear side is used only for B5. Corner Stapling (Front)
Stapling Unit Standby Point Entrance Stopper Stapling Point Entrance Stopper
Corner Stapling (Rear)

Stapling Unit Standby Point Stapling Point
<For 2 Point Stapling Operation> The Stapling Unit stays at the home or the rear side, and then moves to the stapling position at each of stapling operation. The order of stapling is first the rear side, and then the front side. 2-Point Stapling
Stapling Unit Standby Position Stapling Position Entrance Stapling Position
Stopper
<For 2-point center stapling operation> The 2-point center stapling operation is the same as 2-point stapling.
2-17
Elevator tray mechanism
The Elevator Tray is moved up or down by drive from the Shift Motor and the Exit Tray Sensor detects if the paper is stacked on the Elevator Tray. The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor detects if the Elevator Tray is at its home position. If the paper is stacked on the Elevator Tray, home position is at the top side of paper and if not, the home position is at the edge of the Elevator Tray. When the main power is turned ON, the Elevator Tray is returned to its home position by drive of the Shift Motor. After the paper has exited from the Finishing Tray and has been stacked onto the Elevator Tray, the Elevator Tray is moved down by the Shift Motor driven for a given number of clock pulses. The Clock pulse detection is generated with the Shift Motor Clock Sensor and the Elevator Tray is returned to its home position for the next stacking operation. The Upper limit position of the Elevator Tray is detected with the Shift Upper Limit Sensor. When the Shift Upper Limit Sensor is turned ON, (upward movement) drive from the Shift Motor is stopped. The Lower limit position of the Elevator Tray is detected with the Shift Lower Limit Sensor. When the Shift Lower Limit Sensor is turned ON, (downward movement) drive from the Shift Motor is stopped. The Stack Full Sensor detects if an excessive amount of stacking is made due to the height of the stacked paper of large sizes or of mixed sizes.
Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN)
Exit Tray Sensor (PI8-FN) Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN)
Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16-FN)
Edge Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN) Elevator Tray
Stack Full Sensor (PI24-FN) Shift Motor (M6-FN)
2-18
4.4
4.4.1
Booklet tray
Overall composition
The Booklet Tray is fixed and all the paper stacked as a booklet is exited onto this Tray. The Saddle Tray Sensor detects if the paper is stacked on the Booklet Tray, but does not detect a paper jam.
Booklet Tray
Saddle Tray Sensor (PI13-FN)
Paper Stopper
Paper Hold Plate
2-19
Transport operation in saddle section
A. Paper transport After a stack of paper has been aligned on the Finishing Tray, it is taken up with the Upper and Lower Exit Rollers. With the rotation of the Upper and Lower Exit Rollers, a stack of paper is transported into the Stapling Section.
Bundle of paper
Upper Exit Roller
Lower Exit Roller
2-20
B. Stapling The stack of paper is further transported and temporarily stopped when the center area of the paper (the area where stapling will be made) has reached the position of the staples in the Stapling Unit. Then, a stapling operation is cycled at the center area with the Stapling Unit.
Staples Stapling Unit (Upper)
Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN)
Stapling Unit (Lower)
2-21
C. Booklet Transport Next, the stack of paper that was stapled is transported to the paper folding / exit position with the Transport Rollers. The Paper folding /exit position is the position where the center of the paper (where stapled) is of the same height as that of the Paper Pressure Plate and nip area of the Folding Rollers.
Upper Transport Roller Paper Pressure Plate
Lower Transport Roller
Folding Roller
2-22
D. Folding/exit The Paper Pressure Plate presses the center of the paper to transport the paper toward the Paper Folding Rollers. Then the Paper Folding Rollers take up and fold the paper and feed the stack of paper onto the Booklet Tray through the Folding, and the Booklet Exit Rollers.
Paper Pressure Plate
Booklet Exit Roller
Folding Roller
2-23
Folding mechanism
The Paper Folding Mechanism consists of the Folding Rollers and Paper Pressure Plate. They are driven by the Staple/ Folding Motor respectively through the combination of the Gears and Cams etc. This Motor drive is monitored with the Staple/ Folding Motor Clock Pulse Sensor. The Folding Position Sensor is mounted to detect the position of the Folding Rollers and the Pressure Plate. The stack of folded paper is transported with the Folding Rollers and then exits via the Booklet Exit Rollers.
Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) Bundle of Paper Paper Pressure Plate
Upper Folding Roller Lower Folding Roller
2-24
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9996 Finisher 4.4.4 Paper folding start position
Paper folding is created by the Paper Folding Plate and the Paper Pressure Plate. At the same time when the Folding Rollers start to rotate, the Paper Pressure Plate starts pressing the stack of paper to the contact area of the Paper Folding Rollers. For half of the Folding Rollers, no rubber material is used except at the center and both ends of the Folding Rollers. This half of the Upper and the Lower Folding Rollers, contacts each other at the center and both ends, and is only used to transport the paper, thus preventing wrinkles. The other half of the Upper and the Lower Folding Rollers, contacts each other completely, thereby folding and then transporting the paper.
Upper Folding Roller Bundle of Paper
Take-up Entrance
Paper Pressure Plate
Paper Exit
Paper Folding /Transport Paper Transport
Lower Folding Roller
Paper Pressure Plate Home Position
Paper Pressure Plate Start Position
Upper Folding Roller
Lower Folding Roller
2-25
Blank page
2-26
9997
Blank page
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
Outline
Product specification ............................................................................................ 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Non-Sort ....................................................................................................... 1-1 Sort/Group.................................................................................................... 1-1 Sort staple/Group staple............................................................................... 1-2 II Composition/Operation I Outline Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4 1.5
Stapling.............................................................................................................. 1-2 Sort and staple capacity .................................................................................... 1-2 Stacking with no stapling, with the same size paper (80g/m2) ..................... 1-2 Stacking with stapling ................................................................................... 1-3
1.5.1 1.5.2 1.6 1.7
Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-3 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-3
II
1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Center cross section ............................................................................................ 2-2 Drive system ........................................................................................................ 2-3 Mechanical operations ......................................................................................... 2-4 Paper transport .................................................................................................. 2-4 Paper transport mechanism ......................................................................... 2-4 Paper switchback mechanism ...................................................................... 2-8 Roller/rolls spacing mechanism.................................................................... 2-9 Paper aligning mechanism ......................................................................... 2-11 Stapling mechanism ................................................................................... 2-13 Stapling unit moving mechanism ................................................................ 2-14 Staple sheet empty detection ..................................................................... 2-15 Elevator tray ascent/descent mechanism ................................................... 2-16 Elevator tray shifting mechanism ................................................................ 2-17 Paper transport mechanism ....................................................................... 2-19 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.3 4.2.1 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.5 4.5.1
Finisher tray ..................................................................................................... 2-10 Stapling............................................................................................................ 2-13
Elevator tray ..................................................................................................... 2-16
Horizontal transport unit .................................................................................. 2-18
I Outline
ii
I Outline
1.
1.1
Type Installation Document Alignment Supplies Option
Type
I Outline
Tray Capacity 250 sheets Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled 20 sheets 1st Tray Tray Capacity 1,000 sheets (A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller); 500 sheets (B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger) Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled Elevator Tray Single Staple Finisher Freestanding Center Staple Cartridge Job separator (CM3500010)
1.2
Modes
Functions
Non-Sort/ Sort/ Group/Sort Staple/ Group Staple
1.3
1.3.1
Paper type
Non-Sort
Paper Size Weight
Paper Type Plain paper Thick paper OHP Film Translucent paper Envelope Label paper Letterhead
A6R to A3 Wide 5-1/2 8-1/2R/ 5-1/2 8-1/2 to 12-1/4 18
60 to 256 g/m2 16 to 68 lb
1.3.2
Sort/Group
Paper Size Weight
Paper Type Plain paper
Thick paper
B5R/B5 to A3 Wide 7-1/4 10-1/2R/ 7-1/4 10-1/2 to 12-1/4 18
60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55-1/2 lb
1-1
Product specification 1.3.3
Sort staple/Group staple

Paper Size Weight 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb Tray Capacity Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled
Paper Type
I Outline
Plain paper
B5R/B5 to A3 7-1/4 10-1/2R/ 7-1/4 10-1/2 to 11 17
1,000 sheets (A4R, 8-1/2 11R or Cover Mode smaller); 91 to 209 500 sheets g/m2 (B4, 8-1/2 14 24-1/4 to or larger) 55-1/2 lb
30 sheets Elevator Tray (60 to 80 g/m2, 16 to 21-1/4 lb)
*: 20 sheets if originals of high ID (Color Wise 3) is used. *: 15 sheets when using Color Copy 90 paper. *: 20 sheets when using Hammermill Laser Print90 paper.
1.4
Stapling
Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (3000 staples) Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples) Diagonal back side (45 C) 1 point Rear Parallel 1 point B5R/B5 to A3 8-1/2 11R / 8-1/2 11 to 11 17 None
Staple Filling Mode Staple Detection Stapling Position Stapled Paper Size Manual Staple
1.5
1.5.1
Sort and staple capacity

Stacking with no stapling, with the same size paper (80g/m2)
Determined by the item whose value is reached first among number of stacked paper, stacked height or mass of stack. Determined by the stacked height when stacking with stapling and no stapling mixed. A. Number of stacked paper
FD A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger No. of Sheets 1000 sheets 500 sheets
B. Stacked height
FD A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger Height 150 mm 75 mm
C. Mass of stack
FD A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger Mass correspond to 1000 sheets correspond to 500 sheets
1-2
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9997 Finisher 1.5.2 Stacking with stapling
(Reference: Actual value) Determined by number of Sets or number of Sheets based on number of bindings. A. Number of stacked paper
No. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 pages 3 to 5 pages 6 to 10 pages 11 to 20 pages 21 to 30 pages No. of Sets 100 sets 80 sets 60 sets 40 sets 33 sets No. of Sheets 200 Sheets 400 Sheets 600 Sheets 800 Sheets 1000 Sheets
1.6
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V (generated by Finisher) 63 W or less 538 mm (W) 978 mm (H) 637 mm (D) 21-1/4 inch (W) 38-1/2 inch (H) 25 inch (D) 38.1 kg (84 lb)
1.7
1-3
I Outline
I Outline
Blank page
1-4
Overall composition
[2] [1]
[6]
[3] [5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3]
1st Tray Upper Cover Upper Front Cover
[4] [5] [6]
Lower Front Cover Elevator Tray Rear Cover
2-1
2.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[13]
[14]
[11]
[9] [10] [8]
[7]
II Composition/Operation\
[12]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
1st Tray Exit Roll 1st Tray Exit Roller
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
Entrance Roll Lower Path Transport Roll Lower Path Transport Roller Storage Roller Storage Roll Exit Roller Exit Roll
Upper Path Transport Roller Upper Path Transport Roll Entrance Roller Transport Rolls Transport Rollers
2-2
Drive system
3.
Drive system
Lower Paddle Motor (M9-FN)
Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN)
Shift Motor (M8-FN)
Elevator Motor (M7-FN)
Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN)
Entrance Motor (M1-FN)
Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN)
Upper Paddle Motor (M15-FN)
Exit Motor (M3-FN)
2-3
CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN)
4.
4.1
4.1.1
Paper transport
Paper transport mechanism
A. Entrance section paper transport mechanism The Entrance Roller is turned to transport the paper into the Finisher as the Entrance Motor is energized.
Entrance Motor (M1-FN)
Entrance Roller
Paper
2-4
B. 1st tray paper transport mechanism Paper transport to the 1st Tray takes place when the Finisher is in the Non-Sort mode. The Upper Path Transport Roller and 1st Tray Exit Roller turn to transport the paper into the 1st Tray as the motor is energized. The 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid and Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid are energized to select the paper path into the 1st Tray.
Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN)
Upper Path Transport Roller
1st Tray Exit Roller
Paper SL2
SL1
Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN)
2-5
C. Finisher tray paper transport mechanism Paper transport to the Finisher Tray takes place when the Finisher is in the Staple mode. As the Lower Entrance Motor is energized, the Storage Roller turns to transport the paper toward the exit direction. By turning the Exit Motor backward, paper is transported onto the Finisher Tray. Either the upper paper path or lower paper path is used to transport paper onto the Finisher Tray. The upper paper path is selected when the Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid is energized, while the 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid is deenergized. The lower paper path is selected when the Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid is deenergized.
Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN)
Finisher Tray Storage Roller
Lower Path Transport Roller Paper
Exit Motor (M3-FN)
1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN) Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
2-6
D. Elevator tray paper transport mechanism Paper transport to the Elevator Tray takes place when the Finisher is in the Sort or Group mode. As the motor is energized, the Exit Roller turns to transport the paper into the Elevator Tray. Either the upper paper path or lower paper path is used to transport paper onto the Elevator Tray. The upper paper path is selected when the Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid is energized, while the 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid is deenergized. The lower paper path is selected when the Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid is deenergized.
Exit Motor (M3-FN) Finisher Tray Exit Roller
Paper
Elevator Tray
1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN)
Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
2-7
Paper switchback mechanism
When the last paper of the first print set is transported onto the Finisher Tray during a multi-print cycle in the Sort Staple mode, the first paper of the subsequent print set, which is to be next transported, undergoes a switchback sequence. The paper for the switchback is transported via the lower paper path. The second paper of the second print set is placed over the paper which has undergone the switchback sequence. After the first print set has been fed into the Elevator Tray, the first and second sheets of paper of the second print set are together transported onto the Finisher Tray. The switchback sequence of the paper is performed by turning the motor backward, which turns the Lower Path Transport Roller and Storage Roller backward. The sheet of paper to be transported next to the one subjected to the switchback sequence is transported via the upper paper path. No switchback sequence is carried out if the interval between sheets of paper is wide as when using paper of a large size.
<Three A4 originals for two print sets>
, , : Sheets of paper for the first print set , , : Sheets of paper for the second
print set
The sheets of paper for the first print are transported via the upper paper path onto the Finisher Tray.
The first and second sheets of paper of the second print set are transported together, one on top of the other.
The first sheet of paper of the second print set is transported via the lower paper path.
The Exit Rolls are pressed against the Exit Roller to feed the sheets of paper of the first print set out. At the same time, the first and second sheets of paper of the second print set are transported toward the exit.
The first sheet of paper of the second print set undergoes the switchback sequence and stops. The second sheet of paper stops as soon as its trailing edge leaves the Entrance Roller.
When the first print set is fed out, the Exit Roller starts turning backward to transport the first and second sheets of paper of the second print set to the Finisher Tray. The Exit Rolls leave the Exit Roller.
2-8
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9997 Finisher 4.1.3 Roller/rolls spacing mechanism
A. Storage roller/rolls spacing mechanism The Storage Roller briefly stops when the first sheet of paper completes a switchback sequence during a multi-print cycle in the Sort Staple mode. If, however, paper measures 217 mm or more in the FD direction, the leading edge of the second sheet of paper reaches the Storage Roller before the roller stops turning. The Storage Roller is therefore raised up to allow a given clearance from the Storage Rolls. The Storage Roller is spaced from the Storage Rolls as a cam is turned by the corresponding motor. B. Exit roller/rolls spacing mechanism Paper needs to be temporarily transported to the Finisher Tray in the Staple mode, which makes it necessary to raise the Exit Rolls to provide a given clearance from the Exit Roller. After the stapling sequence has been completed, the Exit Rolls are lowered and pressed against the Exit Roller so that the paper can be fed out. The Exit Rolls are spaced from the Exit Roller as a lever is moved to the right and left by the cam which is rotated by the motor.
Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN)
Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN)
Lever Cam Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN)
Storage Roller
Exit Rolls
2-9
4.2
Finisher tray
Sheets of paper are properly aligned and stapled together on the Finisher Tray before being fed out into the Elevator Tray.
Finisher Tray
Elevator Tray
2-10
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9997 Finisher 4.2.1 Paper aligning mechanism
The Aligning Plate is moved and the Paddles are turned to align paper correctly for stapling. A. Aligning plate The Aligning Plate is moved to align the paper in the crosswise direction with reference to the center position of the Finisher Tray. The Aligning Plate is moved as the CD Aligning Motor turns forward or backward. The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor detects the Aligning Plate at its home position. The movement of the Aligning Plate is determined with this home position used as the reference. The movement of the plate is varied depending on the width of the paper.
Aligning Plate
CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN)
CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Finisher Tray
2-11
B. Paddles The Upper and Lower Paddles are turned to align the paper in the feeding direction. The Upper Paddles are turned by the Upper Paddle Motor and Upper Paddle Solenoid. The Lower Paddles are turned by the Lower Paddle Motor.
Upper Paddle Solenoid (SL3-FN)
Upper Paddle Motor (M15-FN)
Lower Paddle
Lower Paddle Motor (M9)
Upper Paddle
Finisher Tray
2-12
4.3
4.3.1
Stapling
Stapling mechanism
The Stapling Unit performs the stapling action. When the Stapling Motor turns, the Clinch Arm lowers. Then the Stapler moves up to drive a staple into paper and the staple is formed. Staple position is the rear corner (stapling) at a point.
Clinch Arm
Stapler
Stapling Motor 1
2-13
Stapling unit moving mechanism
Stapling Unit is moved by the Stapling Unit Moving Motor. The Staple Home Position Sensor detects Stapling Unit at respective home positions. The Stapling Unit is moved with reference to this home position.
Stapling Unit 1 Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN)
2-14
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9997 Finisher 4.3.3 Staple sheet empty detection
The Staple Empty Detecting Sensor is used to detect whether there is a staple sheet or not in the Staple Cartridge. When there are about 20 staples left in the Staple Cartridge, a staple sheet empty condition results and a staple-empty display is given on the control panel of the main unit. If a staple sheet empty condition is detected during a stapling sequence, that particular sequence is continued until it is completed. A staple empty display is then given. After a new Staple Cartridge has been loaded, the Stapling Motor is energized until the Self-Priming Sensor detects loaded staples (L), thereby feeding the staple sheet to the stapling position.
Self-Priming Sensor 1
Staple Empty Detecting Sensor 1
2-15
4.4
4.4.1
Elevator tray
Elevator tray ascent/descent mechanism
The Elevator Tray moves up or down according to certain conditions.
The Elevator Tray is moved up or down by the Elevator Motor that turns forward or backward.
Condition Standby Elevator Tray Control
The position at which the Elevator Tray Upper Stationary at the upper limit posiLimit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) detects the Elevation. tor Tray. Lowers to the lower limit position depending on the number of sheets of paper to be fed into the tray. If the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is activated while paper is being fed into the tray, the tray is lowered until the sensor is deactivated.
Paper fed into tray
Paper removed from tray
If the Elevator Tray Paper Sensor (PC8-FN) is Moves up to the upper limit posiunblocked when paper is removed from the tray, tion. the tray is raised until the sensor is blocked. Moves down and then up after paper has been fed into tray. Lowers the tray for a given period of time, then raises it to the upper limit position. An overcurrent is detected in the Elevator Motor during this period.
Overload detected
Elevator Tray Paper Sensor (PC8-FN) Elevator Tray Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN)
Elevator Motor (M7-FN)
2-16
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9997 Finisher 4.4.2 Elevator tray shifting mechanism
When in the Sort mode, the Elevator Tray is moved to the front and rear by a motor to stack print sets in a sawtooth manner so that each print set is offset with respect to the others. The Shift Home Position Sensor detects the Elevator Tray at its home position.
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN) Elevator Tray
Shift Motor (M8-FN)
Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN)
2-17
4.5
Horizontal transport unit

Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-FN)
Horizontal Unit Door Sensor (PC4-FN)
Paper Sensor (PC1-FN)
2-18
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - 9997 Finisher 4.5.1 Paper transport mechanism
A. Paper path switching mechanism The paper fed from the main unit moves through either one of the two different paper paths. A solenoid is used to select the paper path. For switchback sequence during 2-sided printing: Solenoid energized For transport onto the Finisher: Solenoid deenergized
Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-FN) Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
SL1: Deenergized
B. Finisher paper transport mechanism A motor is employed to transport paper onto the Finisher. The Paper Sensor functions to detect a sheet of paper present in the Horizontal Transport Unit.
Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Entrance Motor (M1-FN)
Paper
2-19
SL1: Energized
Blank page
2-20
CM3100010
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - CM3100010 Punch Unit
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Outline
Product specification ............................................................................................ 1-1 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I Outline II Composition/Operation Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1
II
1. 2. 2.1 2.2
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Mechanical operations ......................................................................................... 2-2 Punching operation............................................................................................ 2-2 Side registration operation................................................................................. 2-3
I Outline
ii
I Outline
1.
1.1
Functions
I Outline
Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled Elevator Tray -
No. of Holes (optional) Metric: 4holes, Inch: 2holes / 3holes
1.2
Paper type
Paper Size 4 holes A4, A3 Weight 60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55-1/2 lb Tray Capacity
Paper Type
Plain Paper 2 holes Thick Paper 3 holes
8-1/2 11R/ 8-1/2 11, 8-1/2 14, 11 17 8-1/2 11, 11 17
1.3
Supplied from 9996 Finisher 90 mm (W) 170 mm (H) 530 mm (D) 3-3/4 inch (W) 6-3/4 inch (H) 20-3/4 inch (D) 2.6 kg (5-3/4 lb)
1.4
1-1
I Outline
Blank page
1-2
Overall composition
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[1] [2]
Punch Axis Off-center Cam
[3] [4]
Punch Motor (M1P-PK) Hole-Punch Waste Container
2-1
2.
2.1
Punching operation
The Punch Section consists of the Dyes Section and the Punch Blade Section The Punch, which is attached to the Off-Center Cam of the Punch Axis, is driven by the Punch Motor and creates the punching operation with a reciprocating movement converted from the rotation movement of the Punch Axis. The Punching operation for the first sheet of paper completes when the Punch Home Position Sensor is switched ON from OFF after the Punch Axis turns 180 deg. in the forward direction. The Punching operation for the second sheet of paper is made when the Punch Axis turns 180 deg. in the reverse direction. II Composition/Operation 1. Punch Axis Stops at Home Position. 2. Punch Axis rotates by 90 deg. in forward direction and punch holes are made. 3. Punch Axis rotates by another 90 deg. in forward direction and punch operation is completed.
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK) Detection gap
Off-Center Cam
Punch Axis
Punch
Dyes Paper Dyes
2-2
2.2
Side registration operation
The Side registration drive for the Punch Slide Unit is made by the Side Registration Motor. The Home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected with the Side Registration Home Position Sensor. The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of the paper with the Trailing Edge Detection and the Side Registration Sensors and then moves to the position of the trailing edge according to the size of the paper. And paper edge is detected by means the LED light emitted from LED Board and received by the Photo Sensor Board. Combine this and the next two slides into one transitional slide. A. 1. 2. 3. Operation 1 Trailing Edge Detection Sensor detects paper leading edge. Side Registration Motor rotates. Punch Slide Unit moves toward front side.
Side Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P-PK)
Side Registration Motor (M2P-PK) Punch Slide Unit Photo Sensor Board (PWB-C PK) LED Board (PWB-D PK)
Trailing Edge Detection Sensor
Paper Exit
Paper
Side Registration Sensor 3 Side Registration Sensor 4 Trailing Edge Detection Sensor
Side Registration Sensor 2 Side Registration Sensor 1
Photo Sensor Board
Paper
LED Board
2-3
B. 1. 2. 3.
Operation 2 Side Registration Sensor detects paper edge at rear side. Side Registration Motor moves Punch Slide Unit at the specified position. Punch Slide Unit stops.
Side Registration Sensor 1 Rear side Side Registration Sensor 2 Side Registration Sensor 3
Side Registration Sensor 4
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Name Side Registration Sensor 1 Side Registration Sensor 2 Side Registration Sensor 3 Side Registration Sensor 4
Function Detects paper edge (A3, A4, 8.511, 1117) Detects paper edge (B4, B5) Detects paper edge (A4R, 8.511R, 1114) Detects paper edge (B5R)
2-4
C. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Operation 3 Paper Trailing Edge Sensor detects paper trailing edge. Transport Motor is stopped. Paper transport is stopped. Punch Motor is driven to punch holes. Transport Motor is driven, at the same time, Side Registration Motor is driven in reverse direction. 6. Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position.
Trailing Edge Detection Sensor
Punch Holes
2-5
Blank page
2-6
CM3500010
Blank page
cm3520 Service Manual - Theory of Operation - CM3500010 Tray
CONTENTS I
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Outline
Product specification ............................................................................................ 1-1 Type ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Paper type ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine specifications....................................................................................... 1-1 Operating environment ...................................................................................... 1-1 I Outline II Composition/Operation Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1
II
1. 2. 3. 3.1
Overall composition.............................................................................................. 2-1 Center cross section ............................................................................................ 2-2 Mechanical operation ........................................................................................... 2-3 Job tray paper transport mechanism ................................................................. 2-3
I Outline
ii
I Outline
1.
1.1
Name Installation Document Alignment
Type
I Outline
Weight 100 sheets: A4, 8-1/2 11 Tray Capacity (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) 50 sheets: except A4, 8-1/2 11 (80 g/m2, 21-1/4 lb) (Height: up to 28 mm, 1 lb) Job separator tray Fixed to Finisher Center
1.2
Modes
Functions
Non-Sort (in the fax or printer output mode)
1.3
Paper type
Paper Size
Paper Type
Plain paper
A5R to A3 5-1/2 8-1/2R to 11 17
60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb
1.4
DC 5 V, DC 24 V (supplied from Finisher) 341 mm (W) 149 mm (H) 527 mm (D) 13-1/2 inch (W) 5-3/4 inch (H) 20-3/4 inch (D) 1.75 kg (3-3/4 lb)
1.5
1-1
I Outline
Blank page
1-2
Overall composition
[1] [2]
[1]
Job Tray
[2]
Job Separator Cover
2-1
2.

[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] [2]
Job Separator Exit Roller Job Separator Exit Roll
[3] [4]
Job Separator Transport Roller Job Separator Transport Roll
2-2
Mechanical operation
3.
3.1
Mechanical operation
Job tray paper transport mechanism
The Job Separator Transport Roller and Job Separator Exit Roller turn to transport the paper into the Job Tray as the motor is energized. The 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid, Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid, and 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid are energized to select the paper path into the Job Tray.
Job Separator Exit Roller Job Separator Transport Roller
Paper
Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN)
SL-4
3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL4)
2-3
TM
www.imagistics.com
Imagistics International Inc.
100 Oakview Drive Trumbull, CT 06611
Imagistics International Inc. 2004 Printed in USA
Part Number: CM3500170

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice to incorporate improvements made to the products listed in this manual.

CM 3520 Copier SVC Manuals

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CM 3520 Copier SVC Manuals

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.imagistics.

cm3520 Service Manual

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

General precaution General prohibition General instruction

Electric hazard High temperature

Do not touch with wet hand Unplug

Do not disassemble Ground/Earth

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

cm3520 Service Manual

DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

cm3520 Service Manual

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

WARNING: Wall Outlet

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

cm3520 Service Manual

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

cm3520 Service Manual

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING: Ground connection

WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

WARNING: When not using product for a long time

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

cm3520 Service Manual

CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

cm3520 Service Manual

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING: Work Performed with the product Powered

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

cm3520 Service Manual

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

cm3520 Service Manual

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING: HANDLING OF CONSUMABLES

CAUTION: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

cm3520 Service Manual

[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

[6] LED Radiation Safety

cm3520 Service Manual

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

High voltage High temperature

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

cm3520 Service Manual

Do not throw into a fire

cm3520 Field Service Manual

1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.3 1.4 1.5

1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.5.8 1.5.9

2.2.3 2.2.4 3. 3.1

Firmware Rewriting ......................................................................................... 2-35

3.2.1 3.2.2 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3

4.3.1 V Appendix 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5

Settings in the Store .......................................................................................... 3-8

3.6.1 3.6.2 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.8 3.9

Users Choice: 2 .............................................................................................. 3-10

4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9

4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4

4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 4.8.9